Release History V15-2 - V10.1

Please note

The new features have been grouped into sub-categories.
New features for which we have a highlight film have a <Highlight Film ...> link at the end. Just click this link with your mouse and the film will be started.

Release History V15-2 Build 7800

General Points

In the drawing manager it is possible to delete ground plans, storeys, images etc. via the “del” key. In a similar fashion they can now be opened with “Enter” after having been selected – thus making the drawing manager more user-friendly.
To show created building projects in an even better light, the so-called “presentation mode” has been developed. In this mode, the building is visually optimally prepared for a presentation just by clicking a button. This new form of representation can be called up in the 3D floating menu (3D view) via the icon on the right of the textured representation icon. In addition, this option can also be found under the display setting (F7) -> Images + 3D -> Visualization -> Presentation mode.
In this special 3D view, the jamb surfaces around windows and doors are displayed. Here the program automatically uses the texture of the innermost and outermost layer of the wall and draws it accordingly as jamb surface up to the window or the door. Additionally, the program tries to combine the wall shapes so that a closed building envelope is created and the floor/ceiling shapes are no longer visible. Similarly, wall corners which have to be open on the building site for assembly are closed in this mode. Furthermore, for increased performance for the presentation, coverings and members of walls are not displayed which leads, depending on the size, to a reduction of the calculation time for a project of up to 50% in the photorealistic representation. This mode is also ideal for the creation of application plans because the buildings are presented in a visually enhanced way.
With all these new details projects created with the SEMA program can now be presented more smoothly and more attractively.
New buttons have been integrated into the F7 icon bar: wall layers visible/invisible; wall shape visible/invisible, floor layers visible/invisible; floors visible/invisible. The new wall shape visible/invisible switch replaces the existing wall outline visible/invisible button in the F7 icon bar. The buttons can be moved from the “Customized” menu (“Command” tab under “View”) to the existing F7 icon bar or to any other place. (Strüby and others) <Highlight Film - Presenting Projects Perfectly>
For the “Place purlin freely“ command the translation of some input elements has been missing – this has been corrected. (France, Italy)

Printing & Plotting

Creating an application plan with all four elevations of the building turns into child’s play with the new SEMA version: The user only has to open the 3D view of the building and with a simple click the program does the rest. For this purpose the new function “Automatic creation of a 4-elevations view of the building” has been integrated into the floating menu of the 3D view. When selected, the program fully-automatically generates images for the north, south, east and west elevation of the building in the drawing manager. Afterwards the “Standard building view” with the corresponding frame borders opens and is filled with the created elevations. The images created in the drawing manager are automatically optimized by the program so that all lines are displayed in black and the number of lines is reduced. Needless to say, these automatically created images can be dimensioned afterwards and CAD objects can be added. That gives the user all the options to create a perfect plan. One special highlight, however, is that these images can be updated. Assuming a customer decides quite late in the project for a dormer, it can be integrated in all elevations again with just a click. There are two ways of doing this: The user can either switch to 3D view and again select the “Automatic creation of a 4-elevations view of the building” function, select the corresponding images in the drawing manager and then update them via “Calculate”. Or he can open all images individually and then select the editing command “Calculate” (F5). All previous editings such as dimensioning, hatches etc. are kept and only the specific modification such as the dormer in our example is updated. Even lines that have previously been deleted are recognised by the program and are not created again when updated.
Updateable images can also been created manually: Here the user has to go to 3D view and select for example the north elevation. Now he can select the function “Save current representation as image” (icon: floppy disk with camera) in the floating menu. In the window opening now, he can decide if he wants to create an image as a “Building elevation”. If selected and confirmed, the program creates the corresponding image in the drawing manager under the 3D tab -> “Images”. For easy identification, images that can be updated have a symbol in front of their name.
Updating is possible for all open-GL representations, for hidden edge views and in the wire-frame model. For views with hidden edges or wire-frames, the user can additionally decide if the lines created in the images are to be in color or black/white. And again, also for these images, an automatic line reduction is applied. Vertical sections can also be defined in the same way. The best results for application plans are achieved with hidden edge views. <Highlight Film - Fully Automatic Application Plan>
Also along the same lines, building elevation images can be generated out of 3D views. For that purpose, the function “Save 3D view” has to be selected from the floating menu. These images or 3D views need the “building elevation” status so that the frame border is automatically assigned to the right elevation in the layout. The status can be defined in the properties of the frame border: north, east, south and west as well as section A-A and section B-B. The program detects here if images or sections have been created as building views and then fills them accordingly. If no images have yet been created but 3D views, the 3D views are used in the frame border.
With all these new features the creation of elevations becomes much faster and a lot easier. <Highlight Film - Updating Plans with One Click>

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

The gross and net surface areas of ground plans and CAD polygons can now be evaluated via the corresponding placeholder. (Böni)
The option “Only current layer markable” did not work anymore for self-created layers – this has been corrected. (Bien-Zenker)
A special error that occurred while converting linked texts has been corrected. (Zehrer)

Wall Floor

3D objects inscribed in a macro under the Look/Optics tab are now also visible in all open GL representations.
As of now, macros create openings in walls, elements and layers when the option “Create” in the layer projection table has been set to “yes”.
For windows with horizontal and vertical glazing bars, the horizontal glazing bars are not drawn as continuous lines anymore but abutted with the vertical bars. This leads to better results particularly for hidden edge representations and no touching up is necessary. (Hauser)
The look of wall and floor shapes has been changed in 3D to the so-called “constructive solid geometry” (CSG) technology. Thus it is now possible for example to display corner windows correctly and in all detail in 3D. Since with this technology, wall and floor shape edges can no longer be displayed individually, the layer has to be dissolved to shift layer edges in 3D or for sections in 2D: Here the corresponding layer has to be marked and the command “Mark object details” has to be selected. Now the surface areas are dissolved into individual edges and can be shifted as required.
The export of walls in the 3D DXF format has also been greatly enhanced with this new technology. Furthermore, the technology change holds enormous potential for future developments.

Rafter System

To optimize component labelling inscribed by woodworking machines on timber members for the assembly of the components according to the plans, the setting “Write text on components” in the “General Pre-Settings” (Alt+F7) -> “Evaluations” -> “Others” has been extended.
With this extension greater flexibility for the component labelling of different types of components has been achieved. Via the “more” button of the “Member/Coverings” option, the new menu “Write text on component” is called up. Here individual types of elements can be selected: “Planks”, “Rafters”, “Trimmers”, “Cleats”, “Purlins”, “Posts/Angle braces”, “Ties”, “Closing boards”, “Wall members”, “Floor members” and “3CAD members” – and thus determined which elements receive a labelling for assembly and which ones not.
To place the labelling ideally on these components, it is now furthermore possible to individually define the distance from the reference point and the reference side for the text. These options are also separately available for coverings.
As usually, the labelling (e.g. the SM number) can be set via pre-defined placeholders.
Thus, unwanted labelling such as for closing boards can be avoided. And for wall members for example the labelling can be placed on another reference side to avoid additional turning of the element on the machine. The possibility to define a distance from the reference point for the labelling might be useful for example for rafters with eaves boarding cutouts.
By saving the “General Pre-Settings” (Alt+F7) as start settings, the different options can be permanently remembered of saved as a separate Alt+F7 setting. (Röhrig, Pfletschinger) <Highlight Film - More Flexible Component Labelling>
All markings transferred from rafters onto wall members can now be switched of via the “General Pre-Settings” (Alt+F7) -> “Evaluations” -> “Wall” -> “Transfer markings onto members”. (Faeton, Strüby, Boraschi)
The „Cut, multiple times“ command has been improved for some special cases. (Rosenberger)
In one special situation the angle of longitudinal cuts (-> 3CAD cuts) has not been calculated properly – this has been corrected. (Moobie)
The profiling of element sections has been improved for certain cases. (Theurl)
The processing of closing boards on elements and rafters has been revised in some details. (Röhrig)
Through the creation of a mono-pitched dormer the main-roof rafters in a project were incorrectly re-calculated – this has been fixed. (Rat und Tat)
Extensive improvements and corrections regarding the bird’s mouth and component intersections have been carried out. (Schwörer, Dufour, Rat und Tat, Daprada, Haudenschild, Charles, Pfletschinger, Edili, Antoni, Prutscher, Faeton, Zini and others)
Under the hidden edge view, bird’s mouths in the north, east, south and west elevations are now drawn correctly. Thus the post-editing of these details is no longer necessary and saves time when creating application plans. (Hauser)

Sheet Metal Work

With the new module “Roof coverings and sheet metal Work“ SEMA is about to establish a new software product line apart from timber and stairs construction for 3D construction programs. However, this new module is not only intended for tinsmiths, metal roofers, etc. but also to help carpenters and prefabricated home builders with their calculations, visualization as well as production. In the first step, we have integrated metal coverings with sheet metal folding profiles and sheet metal panels.
Every roof, no matter whether it is covered with roofing tiles or sheet metal needs folding profiles for drainage, for example valley or eaves flashings. These can now be easily created and spaced along the respective roof edges and adapt automatically to the existing angles.
And surface areas can quickly and comfortably covered with sheet metal panels. Here it does not play a role if the surface area has been created in a construction plane or in a roof, wall or floor layer. Similarly, dormers and chimneys of the house can also easily be flashed. That also means that the carpenter or planer does not need to send the tinsmith or metal roofer to the building site to take measures but can send them their calculations directly. <Highlight Film - Sheet Metal Work>
This also means that a building or house can be displayed and visualized including all sheet metal and flashing work and thus customers get a perfect impression of the new building. For the calculation and the ordering process, sheet metal elements are optimally evaluated in the material list and for the production of the panels and folding profiles production drawings with developed view are available. <Highlight Film - Added Value with Sheet Metal>
For the different constructions with sheet metal, the SEMA master data have been extended:
To the master data of the roof structure (partial roof) the layer “Sheet metal (folding profile)” has been added. This layer is between the battens and the roofing tiles and is used e.g. for valley flashing, eaves flashings and connecting plates for chimneys/dormers. Thus roofs with roofing tiles can be completed with the necessary sheet metal elements.
In the main group “Roof design/Roof structure” the group “Partial roof” has been extended with the “Sheet metal roof” sub-group. Here the options for the roof structure “single-layer, without ventilation” and “double-layer, with ventilation” are available. These roof structures serve as templates for the construction of roofs with sheet metal coverings. The group “Roof layers” has accordingly been extended by the “Sheet metal” sub-group. Here the following layers are available: “Folding profiles”, “Panels 25 mm”, “Panels 32 mm” and “Panels 38 mm”. The roof structures “Roof insulation”, “Lap-jointed purlin roof”, “Boarding” and “Watertight foil” has also been given a “Folding profile” roof layer.
In the main group “Walls/Floors/RC elements” -> under “Walls”, the sub-group “Timber-framed construction” and the master data “Exterior wall 160 ventilated, flashed” and “Exterior wall 160 flashed” have been added. These walls serve as templates for a covering with sheet metal folding profiles and sheet metal panels. The group “Layer structure” has accordingly been extended under “Timber-framed construction” by the structures “Flashed” and “Flashed, ventilated”. Thus two wall types with sheet metal panels and sheet metal folding profiles are available for facade design.
In the main group “Coverings” -> under “Materials”, the sub-group “Sheet metal” has been added. Under this group the textured layer materials “Folding profiles”, “Panels 25 mm”, “Panels 32 mm” and “Panels 38 mm” are available. They can be assigned as layers to the roof, wall and floor structure.
The new sheet metal elements have also been integrated in the main group “Coverings” where they are differentiated between sheet metals for surface areas (“Sheet metal panels”, “Sheet metal seams”, “Sheet metal panels – type of covering”) and sheet metals for edges (“Sheet metal folding profiles” and “Sheet metal folding profiles – type of covering”).
Under “Sheet metal panels” the following options are available:
Double standing seam 25 (coil width 300, 400, 500, 600, 700 mm)
Double standing seam 25 Clip Relief (coil width 300, 400, 500, 600, 700 mm)
Double standing seam 32 (coil width 300, 400, 500, 600, 700 mm)
Double standing seam 38 (coil width 300, 400, 500, 600, 700 mm)
Snap profile 25 (coil width 300, 400, 500, 600, 700 mm)
Snap profile 38 (coil width 300, 400, 500, 600, 700 mm)
All panels are available with different textures as double female (F – F), double male (M – M), left covering (F – M) and right covering (M – F) in every covering width. Thus surface areas can be easily covered or spaced from left to right or from right to left.
Under the “Parameter” tab of the master data of the panels there are a number of possible settings: “Sheet metal thickness” (standard 0.7 mm), “Covering width”, display of the “Overall folding loss” (folding loss left + folding loss right), display of the “Required strip width” (covering width + folding loss) and the coil width. These parameters are calculated taking their interdependencies into account thus making sure that the panels can be produced with the set coil width. If the number do not add up, the displayed “Required strip width” is highlighted in red and thus clearly indicating the discrepancy.
Under “Seam design” the references for the seam designs “left”, “right”, “start” and “end” are available. Thus the different seam designs can be easily and quickly assigned to the required panel side. Under the “L/O” (look/optics) tab the normal settings for texture, outline, line colour, line thickness and line style can be found.
Under the “ML” (material list) tab, entries for the evaluation in the material list can be made.
Similar to the sheet metal panels there are also the corresponding “Sheet metal seams”. The sheet metal seams are no independent master data but components of the sheet metal panels. They are allocated under the “Seam design” of the panels and adopt certain parameters, e.g. the thickness and texture of the sheet metal panels. Therefore, they follow the same order as the panels:
Sheet metal seams (seam designs for sheet metal panels: left, right, start, end)
Double standing seam 25
Double standing seam 25 Clip Relief
Double standing seam 32
Double standing seam 38
Seams start - end
Snap profile 25
Snap profile 38
Each of these groups contains the seams „female“ and „male“. The “others” group contains seams for the panel beginnings and panel ends. Here options such as “Lengthening”, “Folds” (with 90°), “Foldovers” and “Folding” in different dimensions are available. These seams/types of folds can also be used on the sides of the panels if no “normal” seam/fold design is required there.
In the master data of the seam design, the “Seam type” can be set – which influences also the symbols used in view and top view of the panels as well as the automatic name assignment of the master data of the panels. With the option “female” the suffix F is added to the master data name, for “male” the suffix M, for “free” the suffix FR and for “-“ the suffix X.
Every seam has a profile definition. We recommend only opening and editing them with detailed knowledge in syntax or XML. The profiles generally consist of arcs, hems and lines which are defined by drawing order, angle and length and radiuses. Here the field “Folding loss” is inactive but the calculated folding loss from the profile is displayed for information and cannot be changed directly.
Another main group for coverings with sheet metals is the so-called „Sheet metal panel – type of covering”. With this master data any surface area can be comfortably and effectively spaced. To avoid detailed settings, users are offered a wide variety of different types of spacings/divisions.
First of all the reference fields of the „Sheet metal panel – type of covering” master data are set (panels at the “beginning”, “middle” or at the “end”). The covering direction runs from left (beginning) to right (end). Thus it is possible to use special panels at the beginning of end of the area. <Highlight Film - Importing Sheet Metal Profiles>
Under the “Covering” settings, the available types of division for the area covering of sheet metal panels are “fixed” and “variable”:
With “fixed” the panels defined with “Beginning”, “Middle” and “End” with their set widths are placed next to each other. Via the “Offset component” the position of the panels whose dimensions can be changed if necessary is determined. Here the following options are available:
Beginning: offset component at the beginning of the spacing area
End: offset component at the end of the spacing area
Beginning & end: offset component at the beginning and the end of the spacing area
Center left: offset component in the middle (with even component number left from the center)
Center right: offset component in the middle (with even component number right from the center)
Center: offset component in the middle (with uneven component number in the middle, with even component number two components of the same width are created in the middle)
In addition, with the option “Edge components” it can be determined if the dimension of the component, specified in the panel definition at the “Beginning” and “End”, can be changed or if only the following sheet metal panel is adapted. Here the following options are available:
do not offset: keeps the dimensions for the first and the last component
offset both: adapts the dimensions for the first and the last component
offset beginning: the dimensions of the first component can be adapted
offset end: the dimensions of the last component can be adapted
With the “variable” type of spacing all sheet metal panels are adapted and with the same covering width applied to the surface area. Here the defined widths of the sheet metal panels are used to the maximum but not exceeded.
For the “Edge components” the same options are available for the variable type as for the fixed type.
With the distance definition a distance (play) or a projection for the sheet metal panels can be specified at the beginning and the end of the spacing for both types of spacing (fixed and variable). For panels in the middle, a distance (play) or an overlapping can be defined. To prepare the distance, projection and overlapping ideally for the spacing master data, minimum, optimal and maximum values can be assigned.
The sheet metal folding profiles are split into the groups “Connecting plates”, “Roof edges”, “Corner angles”, “Profiles” and “Others”. Under every group the respective sheet metal folding profiles can be found. To be able to offer a broad selection here, cooperation with Schechtl (a German manufacturer of bending machines and shears for the processing of thin metal sheets) has been initiated which allows us to incorporate large part of Schechtl’s S-Touch program’s library of folding profiles.
For the import from the S-Touch program the icon “Import sheet metal folding profiles (Schechtl)” has been integrated into the master data manager. Via a file import the data from the Schechtl S-Touch program can be directly imported into the master data. The imported 2D line profiles by Schechtl are automatically converted into 3D folding profiles and given a sheet metal thickness (standard 0.7 mm) in the SEMA program. Since these profiles are not yet aligned, the profile definition has been integrated under the “Parameter” tab where the “Sheet metal thickness” and the “maximum length” can be defined. Every sheet metal folding profile can similarly to the sheet metal seams be defined via arcs, hems and lines. And also here, any modifications should only be made with detailed knowledge in syntax or XML.
To place a folding profile comfortably in a project, the reference point and reference angle can be defined under the “Input reference” field. Clicking onto “Input reference” opens a dialogue with drawing, reference point (red cross) and reference angle (red line) and the reference point can be defined in three different ways:
“Absolute”: The reference point can be placed freely in the drawing or can be defined by angle and length or via its XY-values.
“Element reference”: The folding profile consists of individual elements (lines, hems and arcs) which are indicated in different colours (blue = start element, green/purple = further elements). These elements can be selected via the pull-down menu. In the next field it is determined whether the reference point of the selected element is at the beginning, in the middle or at the end. The last field defines on which side of the sheet metal the reference point is.
“Element intersection”: With this option the point of intersection of two elements can be defined as reference point.
The reference angle is defined via the area to which the folding profile applies and it can be defined in two different ways:
“Absolute”: The angle can be entered manually or be taken directly from the drawing.
“Element reference”: The angle can be aligned with an element (line, hem, arc) from the profile. In addition, the direction from either “Beginning > end” or from “End > beginning” can be selected.
Reference point and reference angle are always positive (right-handed coordinate system). The reference point defines the X-axis (red X) and the reference angle the Y-axis (green line). The Z-axis is indicated by the blue line which is always at right angles to the Y-axis.
Once the input reference has been defined, the folding profile can be easily positioned on the required location.
A great help in this context are sheet metal folding profiles with automatic angle adaption, particularly for roofs. The roof profiles with automatic angle adaption recognize e.g. the roof pitch or the angle between two surface areas and automatically adapts to that geometric situation. Folding profiles with automatic angle adaption have a grey gear wheel in the screen image of the master data. Depending on which angle needs to be adapted, there are different input fields in the input box. Thus it is possible to place e.g. valley flashing, eaves flashings or ridge covers with just a few clicks.
Under the “L”/”O” (look/optics) tab the normal settings for texture, outline, line colour, line thickness and line style as well as the filling for the sectional view can be found.
Under the “ML” (material list) tab, entries for the evaluation in the material list can be made.
As for sheet metal panels there are also “types of covering” for sheet metal folding profiles. In the group “Sheet metal profile – type of covering” there are two sub-groups: “Roof edges” and “Wall edges”. Here, different forms of spacing for folding roof profiles such as e.g. valley flashings and for wall folding profiles such as e.g. drip plates are available.
In the reference fields of the „Sheet metal folding profile – type of covering” master data it has to be determined which folding profiles are to be created at the “beginning”, in the “middle” or at the “end”. Thus it is possible to use special folding profiles at the beginning and the end of an area. <Highlight Film - Software for Metal Roofers and Tinsmiths>
Under the “Spacing settings” the available types of spacing for sheet metal folding profiles are “fixed”, “variable” and “Number”:
With “fixed” the folding profiles defined under the “Folding profile definition” with “Beginning”, “Middle” and “End” are placed next to each other with their set “maximum length”. Via the “Offset component” the position of the profiles whose dimensions can be shortened if necessary is determined. Here the following options are available:
Beginning: offset component at the beginning of the spacing area
End: offset component at the end of the spacing area
Beginning & end: offset component at the beginning and the end of the spacing area
Center left: offset component in the middle (with even component number left from the center)
Center right: offset component in the middle (with even component number right from the center)
Center: offset component in the middle (with uneven component number in the middle, with even component number two components of the same width are created in the middle)
In addition, with the option “Edge components” it can be determined if the dimension of the component, specified in the profile definition at the “Beginning” and “End”, can be changed or if only the following sheet metal folding profile is adapted. Here, the following options are available:
do not offset: keeps the dimensions for the first and the last component
offset both: adapts the dimensions of the first and the last component
offset beginning: the dimensions of the first component can be adapted
offset end: the dimensions of the last component can be adapted
With the “variable” type of spacing all sheet metal profiles are adapted and applied with the same covering width to the surface area. Here, the defined “maximum length” of the sheet metal profiles is used to the maximum but not exceeded.
For the “Edge components” the same options are available for the variable type as for the fixed type.
With the third type of spacing “Number”, the folding profiles are created with the set “Number of components” over a certain length. The maximum length of the folding profiles is not exceeded.
With the distance definition a distance (play) or a projection for the sheet metal folding profiles can be specified at the beginning and the end of the spacing for all types of spacing. For profiles in the middle, a distance (play) or an overlapping can be defined. To define the distance, projection and overlapping ideally for the spacing master data, minimum, optimal and maximum values can be assigned.
For sheet metal components the textures under „Metal“ have been extended. Here the new textures “Titanium zinc 01”, “Titanium zinc”, anthracite grey”, “Titanium zinc, light grey”, “Titanium zinc, moss green”, “Titanium zinc, oxide red”, “Titanium zinc, zinc grey” and “Sheet metal panels” are available.
All listed master data is automatically installed in the working master data with a new installation. For an installation with file transfer only a small part of the above mentioned master data is installed. Users who would like to have a broader range in the master folder can pick the required data from the SEMA Original Master Data and copy it into their own folder.
Sheet metal panels and sheet metal folding profiles are coverings and thus have to be created in a roof, wall or floor layer or in a construction plane. In the construction plane view for example, a gable wall or a dormer side wall can be drawn with CAD or directly with the “Wall outline” command. To cover the resulting surface area with panels, the creation commands “Sheet metal covering” and “Sheet metal profiles” have been added to the module “Wall Coverings”.
The “Sheet metal covering” command has three creation options in its sub-menu which opens when the command is executed:
“Create sheet metal”: Opens the master data of the sheet metal panels and the required master data can be selected and with the available input options created.
“Cover area”: Opens the master data of the “Sheet metal panel – type of covering”. Here, the required type of covering of the panels is selected and can then be created with the available line input options. It is absolutely necessary that an area outline or a layer has been defined in which the panels can be created.
“Cover partial areas”: Opens the master data of the “Sheet metal panel – type of covering”. As with the area covering, the required type of covering is selected. However, here, area input options are available and with the respective input option, an area in the wall outline can be defined.
For the “Create sheet metal“ and “Cover partial areas“ input options, the additional options “Covering admissible only within the limits of the layer (Alt+1)” and “Mirroring of the sheet metal covering along the longitudinal axis (Alt+2)” are available. With these additional options it is determined if components can be calculated beyond layer limits or can be applied mirrored. If, for example, a sheet metal penal F – M (fold design left as female, right as male) is mirrored, it turns into a M – F panel (fold design left as male, right as female) because of the automatic name assignment. The option “Covering admissible only within the limits of the layer (Alt+1)” is active by default and all components are cut at the area outline.
The creation command “Sheet metal folding profile” contains two creation options in its sub-menu which open when the command is executed:
“Create sheet metal folding profile”: Opens the master data of the sheet metal folding profiles and the required master data can be selected and with the available input options created.
“Space sheet metal folding profile”: Opens the master data of the folding profile type of covering. Here, an allocated profile can be divided along an edge according to its maximum length and the settings under the type of covering.
Also here, on the right side of the input line, the additional option “Covering admissible only within the limits of the layer (Alt+1)” is available. However, the option is not active by default since folding profiles often have to be extended beyond the outline areas.
All this means that panels and folding profiles can be assigned with just a few clicks perfectly to surface areas and edges. For roof, wall and floor layers it works in the same way as in construction planes. In the master data of the roof, wall and floor structures sheet metal layers can be defined, which then can be covered with sheet metal panels and sheet metal folding profiles in the program parts “Roof Covering”, “Floor Covering” and “Wall Covering”.
For sheet metals panels and folding profiles the creation commands “Punch, “Copy”, “Position”, “Modify” and “Delete” have been made available in 2D so far.
With the “Copy” command, a sheet metal component is copied into the layer. The copy can positioned via the normal input options with distance, angle and length.
With the “Position” command, a sheet metal component can be shifted in the layer, again through the normal input options distance, angle and length.
With the “Punch” command, cutouts in components can be created. Depending on the additional option, a box, a free form or “at an object” can be punched out. The different additional options offer different input options. If a component is punched, it receives a processing with this punching. Such processings can be made visible and markable in 2D and 3D via the “Mark object details” option. Thus processings can be e.g. deleted.
Every sheet metal component can be displayed via the “Single component view” icon in the production drawing. For that purpose, the new standard plan “Standard sheet metal component” has been integrated for sheet metal components. Just by clicking a button, a “Top view (side 3)”, a “Developed view”, a “3D view” and a side view “From left (beginning of component)” of the component can be created in the component view. By going now to the layout view, the pre-defined plan will open. It contains four frame borders with the above mentioned drawings and a legend. In the frame borders of “Top view (side 3)”, “Developed view” and “From left (beginning of component)” all functions of CAD and dimensioning are freely available. Thus the component can be individually dimensioned or added to via CAD. In addition, the plan can be changed and adapted as needed. However, the following rule should be followed: The standard plan for sheet metal components needs to have the name “Standard sheet metal component” because only then does the program recognise the plan automatically. The contents of the plan can, of course, be adapted to the specific needs; only the name has to remain the same.
The display settings (F7) have also been extended and contain now sheet metal coverings and sheet metal folding profiles. “Walls”, “Construction plane”, “Roof” and “Floor” the “Coverings” have two new areas. Under “Sheet metal coverings” different display settings can be activated or de-activated: for the layer switch, for the component values (evaluation number, abbreviation, designation, width, length, gross area, net area and free component labelling), for the representation (covering direction, symbol for seam design, gripper for spacing and a data block), and for the automatically created dimension lines of the spacing (auxiliary lines, relative dimensioning, absolute dimensioning, position of the markings and representation of the markings). Depending on whether the option has been activated/de-activated, the respective value is displayed in the drawing or not.
For the “Sheet metal folding profiles” generally the same display settings as for the “Sheet metal coverings” are available. Thus also for sheet metal profiles the different settings can be activated or de-activated: for the layer switch, for the component values (evaluation number, abbreviation, designation, length and free component labelling), for the representation (gripper for spacing and a data block), and for the automatically created dimension lines of the spacing (auxiliary lines, relative dimensioning, absolute dimensioning, position of the markings and representation of the markings). Depending on whether the option has been activated/de-activated, the respective value is displayed in the drawing or not.
If the option “Drawing update” has been activated, i.e. ticked, the drawing automatically follows the changes in the background.
For a comfortable evaluation in the material list, the tab “Material list, cladding” has been added to the SEMA standard list (standard catalogue). In this evaluation list not only the sheet metal components but also the surface areas and the material is evaluated.
The list is sub-divided in the SEMA typical “Roof”, “Floor” and “Wall”. All surface areas, coverings and materials end up in these three lists of the respective system. Depending under which system the components have been created, they are allocated to the lists. In the respective systems (roof, floor, wall) the components are sorted according to “Area”, “Covering” and “Material”. In the “Area” list the roof areas, cutouts and line lengths that might be important to the calculation are for example to be found.
Under the “Coverings, roof” (floor, wall) all sheet metal components (sheet metal coverings/claddings and sheet metal panels) are listed. To create a perfect input screen for sheet metal components, the fields “Thickness” and “Gross width” have been added. Thus the following input options for the evaluation for sheet metal components have been put together:
Number: number of equal components
Designation: master data name / ML field “Designation”
Comment: ML field “Comment”
Material: ML field “Material”
Thickness: sheet metal thickness in millimeter
GrossW: width of the developed component in centimeter
Length: length in build-in state in meter
GrossL: length of the developed component in meter
TotalL: length multiplied with number in meter
Weight: weight multiplied with number
The fields “Designation“, “Comment“ and “Material“ can be user-defined in the ML tab of the master data. “Number”, “Thickness”, “GrossW”, “Length”, “GrossL” and “TotalL” result from the geometry of the component and the construction. The “Weight” can also be defined in the ML tab of the master data (e.g. with the option kg/m³). The master data provided by SEMA already come with a weight definition (titanium zinc 7.2 g/cm³, copper 8.96 g/cm³). Since sheet metal components are coverings, they automatically appear in the “Material list and Stairs” list in the respective system under the coverings.
The “Material list, cladding” list is stored as a template and can anytime be loaded into a material list via “Format” -> “Create new tab/list”. All functions such as the right-click function for example are also available here and are very helpful for working between material list and drawing.

Stairs

With version 15-2 it becomes possible to construct stairs with steel cut strings.
These new constructions with steel cut strings can either be created with the Stairs Assistant or via the “Contour” command -> “Flight element” -> “Stairs on CAD”. And, of course, these new constructions are also available in the stairs container, from where they can be allocated to any shape of stair.
Under “Stairs” -> “Construction” in the master data the new group “Steel cut string stairs” has been created with the following options: “Steel cut string stairs, type A left”, “Steel cut string stairs, type A right”, “Steel cut string stairs, type B left” and “Steel cut string stairs, type B right”. The various options differ regarding the position of the balustrading and the type of balustrading. For the cut strings the new group “Steel cut string” has been created. Here users find “Steel cut string 40 x 60 mm, type mitre” and “Steel cut string, 80 mm type continuous”. The balustrading for steel cut string stairs can be found under the “Balustrading group -> sub-group “BALU 40 mm steel” with the name “Type A, stainless steel”, “Type B, stainless steel” and “Type B, stainless steel, straight”.
In the component data of the cut strings there is now also the additional “Stepped cut string form, bottom” available. If this new functionality is selected, the input options “String margin stepped” and “Corners” become available. With a click on the “+”, the settings for these options open. The “String margin, bottom” and the “String margin, back” can be defined here. With the other settings, the “Corners, top, front”, “Corners, bottom, front” and “Corners, bottom, back” can be defined with the further settings “Square”, “Radius” and “Chamfer”.
Steel cut strings are usually a combination of several individual parts. How they are to be separated can be decided with the following setting: “Separation of the steel cut string with mitre cut”, “Separation of the steel cut string, long-long”, “Separation of the steel cut string, long-short”, “Separation of the steel cut string, short-long” and “Separation of the steel cut string, short-short”. If it is not required to separate the steel cut string, the option “The steel cut string is not split into individual parts” needs to be selected.
If the steel cut string is taken into component view, the cut string is displayed completely in its original state. When switched to turned view, the individual parts of the cut string are displayed optimised and dimensioned. The settings for the optimisation of the cut strings are made in the display setting (F7), under the “Developed” tab -> “Display” -> “Template”. A click on “>>more>>” opens the menu of the “Member optimisation, cut string”. Here, the maximum “Member length (length x)” and the “Distance of the individual parts” is defined. Under “Type of optimisation” three different types of optimisation are available: With the “Standard optimisation” all individual parts with the same cross-section are optimised in the pre-defined member. With “Optimise treads and risers separately” the vertical and horizontal elements are optimised separately. With the “Optimisation for length stop”, elements with the same length are optimised one after the other so that the length stop on the machine has to be changed as little as possible. For each of the three types of optimisation, the respective cut string is optimised. If an optimisation across several cut strings is required, this can be done via the auto stairs output. Here it is necessary to set the “Steel cut string member optimisation” under the plan output menu of the drawing, to set a plan template, the display settings and a scale. In the parameters the optimisation across all cut strings can be achieved by de-activating the “Optimise cut strings separately” option. All other settings in the parameters are the same as in the “Member optimisation cut string” menu.
If a list in which the individual parts are allocated to the respective member is necessary, this can be activated in the auto stairs output under “Drawing” -> “List member optimisation CS”. With this setting, an overview list is generated. And, of course, the respective optimisations are available for the “Machine export stairs, individual output” as well as for the machine export via the auto stairs output. Here, the optimisation for the machine export works the same way as the optimisation for print output. <Highlight Film - Steel Cut String Stairs>
In this way, any form of stairs can be produced with steel cut strings in a very simple and comfortable way.
The display of the stride in the data block has been corrected. (Kaufmann Oberholzer)

Release History V15-1 Build 7600

General Points

Modern screen interface elements enable comfortable use of several open windows.
Users immediately realise in which drawing they presently are due to the new, modern appearance with tabs. Individual windows can be closed quickly and easily via the “x” symbol, to be found behind the title of the drawing. Furthermore, the order of the window tabs can be changed quickly with held-down mouse button.
With several windows open, the required drawing can now be easily selected via the new pull-down menu “Overview open windows”. As accustomed, familiar icons such as “Close all inactive” and “Tile vertically“ are also available in the toolbar.
All further options for windows management can be found under the menu item “Windows” in the top toolbar.
If there is not sufficient space available in the toolbar because of too many windows opened, the two icons “Previous tab” and “Next tab” can be used to click through open window tabs in the toolbar.
As of now, window tabs are also displayed in full screen mode. Thus, also here, switching between the drawings has been made easy.
If a specific colour has been set for the drawing area, the tabs automatically adapt to this setting.
With this new feature, working with the SEMA Program becomes more intuitive and efficient.
As of now, it is possible to blank out all details in the Control Center so that working with it becomes even clearer (see settings of the Control Center). With “All details”, the storey and the component containing the corresponding conflict or user note are not displayed. Thus, the Control Center offers a much clearer structure particularly in case many conflicts and user notes exist. Needless to say, all information on the component concerned can still be displayed under additional information. The function “Only warnings” can also be found among these settings. By means of this function it is possible to blank out user notes so that only warnings will be displayed.
One further new feature of the Control Center relates to user notes. It is possible to assign up to 10 file attachments to each user note under the “Misc” tab in the master data. One tab per attachment is then displayed under “additional information”. The names of these tabs result from the designation as allocated under the “Misc” tab in the first column of the user note. The component note on the respective tab indicates the storage location of the file. Thus, it is for example possible to connect user notes to a fastener and to view the assembly instructions attached within the Control Center without having to additionally open the file. The complete contents of this file are displayed under “additional information” and are ready to be viewed there. What’s more, any type of image format, audio file, video, web page and the so-called Microsoft “Rich Text Format“ (*.rtf) are supported and displayed or played in the Control Center. All non-supported formats or links are displayed with an icon and can be opened by right-click. The files/links are then opened via the default program previously determined. In addition to this, all files can be opened via double- clicking the respective tab. Hence, the viewing of different file attachments has become more straight-forward and comfortable. <Highlight Film Modern Screen Interface Elements>
As of now, user notes are positioned at the correct height in 3D if they are connected to a component in top view.
As of now, it is possible to create several building project previews for each project. They can be displayed one after the other when loading the project. As accustomed, the BP preview is called up via the option “Create BP preview”, to be found under “Edit” in the top toolbar. As before, a preview is created from the current drawing plane when the “Create BP preview” option is opened. This now also automatically activates the “Display preview when loading BP” option. This option can be found in the BP properties under “Settings”. If the user wants to create another preview, he has to close the BP properties and to bring the project into the required position and then call up the “Create BP preview” command again. Now, another tab with another preview is automatically created. This procedure can be repeated as many times as desired. Furthermore, via the icon “Create preview image”, it is also possible to select an image file from the “Explorer” and use it as a preview image. The option “Delete preview image” is for deleting the BP previews previously created.
Naturally, all created preview images can be displayed in the building project manager. As before, the option “List with preview image” has to be selected. Thus, it has been made possible to define an even greater number of helpful images for projects.
A slide show feature designed in an appealing look has been incorporated into the SEMA Program. After a set time, the images of the BP preview, the attached images of user notes (highlights), the images of example projects and the images of all projects in the directory are shown in the drawing window one after the other. The slide show can be initiated in the top toolbar under “Extras” -> “Options” -> “Activate/deactivate notes” -> “Activate auto slide show”. This is also where the start time of the slide show can be determined. The slide show will only start if no mouse activities in the SEMA Program are detected. The slide show disappears as soon as the mouse is used again and users can go on working as before. <Highlight Film New Control Center Features>
The display settings (F7) have been given a more modern look, the structure has been revised and the functions have been considerably enhanced.
If a component is marked in top view, view or 3D view and the user then switches to the display settings (F7), only the concerned part of the marked component is expanded, giving a much better overview.
The structure of the display settings have been optimised in such a way that all settings are now to be found under the corresponding main group. For example, all settings for coverings and wall members are now listed under the “Wall” group. The options for “Roof design”, “Layers”, “Rafter system” and “Coverings” are all under the “Roof” group. This new structure has been consistently applied to and optimised for all components of the program. This makes it for example possible to make all components of a wall inactive by one tick only – and this applied to top view, view and 3D view. In addition, the visibility of the components in top view, view and 3D view can be influenced directly with the “Visibility in various views” option. Under the main group “Wall” for example, the users can decide in which view to display the component and in which not, via a tick on the right side. This option is also available in a main group if a component is selected within this group. This makes it possible to switch a window inactive in 3D view but keep it visible in top view and view. That also means that roof layers can be switched inactive in top view for better overview but at the same time have them active in 3D view for better visual design. The details and settings for the respective components can be switched on the tabs “Top view” and “View”.
It is therefore possible to treat the members of walls, roof and ceiling elements, trusses and construction planes in a separate way. Hence, it is for example possible turn the members in the construction plane invisible whereas they remain visible in the walls. It is therefore also possible to define different component values for the members. And, as of now, coverings of walls and roof and ceiling elements can also be treated separately and thus different component values for coverings can be defined as well.
Needless to say, also the layer feature of the respective components has been revised and enhanced. Now, the layers for roof and ceiling elements can be switched on or off independently from the wall layers.
Another new option in terms of the layers is that they can be switched on/off independent from each other in top view, view and 3D view. Thus, layers can for example be deactivated in view and nevertheless remain visible in top view and 3D view.
For the 3D view and the layer outline view of wall, roof and ceiling elements, a new function has been added that makes editing and displaying of layers and coverings in 3D and the views easier. This new function is available under the layer feature under the tabs “View” and “3D” of the respective component. The options “Auto”, “Never”, “Only layer”, and “Always” are provided.
Setting “Auto”: The layer of a wall will only be displayed as long as no covering has been applied to this layer. So far, this has been the default behaviour which could not be influenced.
Setting “Never”: With this setting a layer is never displayed. The program will thus no longer take into account whether or not a covering already exists in the layer. This new type of display makes it easy for users to check quickly which boards/panels have already been applied in the project. <Highlight Film Perfect Project Presentation>
Setting “Only layer”: Even if a covering has been applied to a layer, only the layer will be drawn. It is therefore possible to alter layer projections in 3D in a comfortable way, even if a covering already exists.
Setting: “Always“: The layer is displayed even if a covering has been applied to the layer. Hence, both covering and layer are active at the same time. This setting is only available in view mode.
For construction planes, trusses and roof/ceiling elements it is now possible to define individual layers
independent from the wall. Of course, these components are also listed in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under “General Points” -> “Misc.” tab in order to pre-define 15 free layers. At the same time, a more modern look has been given to the pre-settings menu.
Another highlight of the SEMA program is the auto updating of drawings after having changed a setting. Thus, if a component in the display settings (F7) becomes inactive or a component value is switched to active, the drawing will be immediately updated. This means the closing of the window in order to update and check the drawing is a thing of the past. All changes made can be seen at once. This option can be deactivated under “Redraw” in the bottom part of the display settings. Furthermore, the window of the display settings permanently remembers its position and size. Hence, it is for example possible to position the window on a second monitor so that the changes made can be instantly checked in the drawing window.
Due to these new features, the settings can be made in an even quicker, clearer and more exact manner. <Highlight Film Improved Display Options (F7)>
Saving building projects in BP mode 3 has been improved. Problems with saving the projects with a slow network connection should now be a thing of the past with the integrated 10-second saving loop. (Dubach and others)
The Anglo-American system of measurements in the SEMA program has been expanded: For the calculation and evaluation of volumes, the unit “board foot” which is often used in North America has been integrated. (Sauter)
The BTL import of components with contour editings has been improved. (Henz)
Components with rounded tenons are now read-in correctly during BTL import. (Klingler)
During 3D DXF export, component names are turned into so-called DXF block names. In these block names, no commas are possible. In case of component names with comma, the comma is now automatically replaced by an underscore during export. (Riedlsperger)

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

The group “Look” has been enabled in the master data container in order to make changing the appearance of ground plan, CAD and MCAD objects even quicker and more intuitive. The master data container is called up via the “Show/hide master data container” icon which can be found in the standard menu bar. The container can be docked onto the four sides of the screen and it can also be floated on the screen. A docked container can either be “docked, open” or “docked, automatically hidden”. The latter option provides a tab which opens when touched by the mouse and makes the palette drive onto the screen.
In the container, users only have to select the fitting pen in the “Look” group and mark the required objects. Another new option added is the possibility to previously mark the components and to select a pen with the “CTRL” key pressed down. The changes to the objects previously marked become visible directly on releasing the key. This has the benefit that it is possible to quickly mark identical components by means of the space bar and change them together. Of course, this function has also been enabled for the other master data in the container so that the colour, the line thickness and the line style can be changed extremely quickly.
With linked MCAD text editings, placeholders are now evaluated correctly. (Landmark)
MCAD macros filed under the “Layer inverse (Alt+1)“ option are now placed correctly. (Strüby)

Rafter System

Extensive enhancements and corrections of bird’s mouth and component intersection have been made. (Bach& Perreten, Röhrig, Landmark, Batut, Sebalex, Schuhmann, Thurner and Haberl amongst others)
The display of the timber texture has been revised in one specific case.(Strüby)
Fasteners have so far not been automatically taken into account during the replacement of the tie system - this has been corrected.(Kiefer)
The editing of nodes in wall view has been optimised. (Boraschi)
A problem occurring when placing dormers on clipped rafters has been resolved.(Achter)
3D objects were abandoned after component calculation in a specific case - this has been corrected.(Wiedmer)
The behaviour of drillings in components with external contour has been improved.(Strüby)
The display of the component hint in deactivated nodes has been revised.(Lottermoser)
Placing of posts underneath components has been optimised. Additionally, it is now also possible to place posts on or underneath 3CAD timber components.(Abbund Adelberg)
The commands "Cut, several times" and "Cut, corner joint" have been enhanced for specific cases.(Strüby, Kerschensteinerschule)
The auto update of turned rafters with external contours has been enhanced.(Hilzinger)
Even with set ridge shortening, rafters, hips and valleys can be cut manually (e.g. mitre cut). To achieve the desired result, the additional field „fixed“ has been introduced for these elements. (Skaletzka)
A special error of the “Cut, several times” function has been corrected. (Edili)
The calculation of a special processing caused an error in the program – this has been corrected. (Habicher)

Wall Ceiling/Floor

The layer function in the program parts "Roof covering", "Roof outline", "Floor covering", "Wall outline" and "Wall covering" has been revised and its function and look has been enhanced. A section through the component is displayed under the layer function in walls and floors. Thus, the materials applied can be instantly seen. To switch the layer, either the numbering or the layer itself can be clicked. Here, the heading always displays the contents of the layer so that it can be immediately seen which material (covering) is applied to the layer.
In addition to this, the layer function can also be displayed in an extra large window via the button next to the “Editing layers” option from the right program area. It is possible to adjust the size of this window and to change its position. It can, for example, be position on a second screen. Needless to say, the position and the size of the window will be permanently saved. This extra large window makes it easy for users to track of the situation particularly in components with a large number of layers. <Highlight Film New Layer-Switch Design>
The number of materials used in walls and ceilings/floors is constantly increasing. That’s why the maximum number of layers in walls, ceilings/floors and roof and ceiling elements per side has been increased from 5 to 12. In order to enable this increase, the layer projection table, the display settings (F7) and all relevant positions have been expanded.
Moreover, an option has been integrated into the layer projection table making it possible to reset all values to “0.00”. <Highlight Film More Layers in Walls and Floors>
The spacing of filling studs has been improved in a specific case. (Landmark)
A specific problem during the spacing of members with the auto wall feature has been resolved. (Vonlanthen)

Coverings Wall Ceiling/Floor

A special problem in coverings thinner than the layer has been corrected. (Schneider)

Wall and Floor Members

In version 15-1 the functionality of the “Reference line with area“ command for wall and floor members has been optimised. This means that the allocated edge elements for the type of spacing “fixed” are now also taken into account, making it very easy to create spacings without play/a distance between the individual components.

Stairs

The so-called ‘additional detail’ has been added to the machine export of mortised treads. Three new export variants have been provided for the clearing of cutter-related roundings in order to make any manual refinishing work of tread inner angles unnecessary.
The first option is to create the additional detail by means of a drilling. To enable this, “1” has to be set in the Inifile under "TR_CONCAVE". The drills available for the manufacturing have to be entered in millimetre under "TR_DRILL ". A drilling is created in each inner angle of the mortised area. If the size of the rounding at the corner is so large that it cannot be cleared with the largest drill, the drilling at this corner cannot be exported. When using the additional detail through drilling users have to take into account that the CAM system will execute these drillings first. Otherwise, the drilling might not be produced exactly.
There are two more options to create the additional detail through changing the milling contour. To enable these options, “2” (integrated milling long) or “3” (integrated milling corner) has to be set in the Inifile under "TR_CONCAVE". The diameter of the milling cutter has to be entered in millimetre under " TR_MILLING CUTTER ". The milling contour of the component’s outline has to be changed in such a way that the inner angles are cleared. The intention in all three versions is to process the respective tread in such a way that no manual refinishing work required to insert the tread into the post or the string. The additional detail in the tread is hidden by the string or the post and is thus not visible. If a “0” (no processing) has been entered under "TR_CONCAVE" the tread contour is exported unchanged.
This new feature helps stairs builders to save a lot of time because manual tread refinishing is no longer required. <Highlight Film Additional Details for Mortised Treads>
In version 15-1 special constructional details for stairs adaption have been implemented in reaction to international requirements of the stairs market. The major difference in comparison to stairs in the German-speaking areas is the fact that there are minimum and maximum dimensions for the going, the rise and the stride. In addition, turned/spiral treads always need to have a larger going than straight or normal treads. Adapted treads from different turns can have different goings and all straight treads, except the last step, need to have the same going.
To activate the new calculation criteria the option “Winder” has to be set under “Auto adaption” (Stairs -> “STR” tap). Thus the setting “Going/rise standard” becomes inactive and the option “Going/rise winder” becomes active - and the going and rise can be defined with a minimum and maximum dimension. With the setting of the “Auto adaption” to “Winder” also the “Adaption rules standard” under the “Adp” tab become inactive and the new “Adaption rules winder” active. Here the minimum and maximum stride can be defined.
Also new is the menu “Walking line on turn” under the “Adp” tab. Under this menu the minimum distance of the straight treads from the stairs inner corner at the turn can be defined. The straight treads are then calculated in such a way that they come as close as possible to the minimum distance. A distance for the beginning and the end of the turn can be assigned. If any dimensions/values are changed here, this will also lead to changes in the adaption and thus the overall stairs.
With the “minimum going” the minimum going of the tread at the connection with the string board or post is defined. Normally the minimum going is measured from tread front edge to tread front edge, only for corner steps that e.g. connect on two sides to a post, lines are drawn from the post corner at right angles to every tread front edge and then lengthened to the next tread front edge. If one of those lines keeps the minimum distance, the minimum going is ensured. In case the minimum distance allows for it, the risers of the adapted treads are integrated into the post. This offers the advantage that mostly straight sting boards can be used.
Needless to say that the number of steps can be changed any time with the adaption following automatically. If stairs cannot be calculated with the set parameters, a warning will appear: “Because of the geometric conditions, an automatic winder adaption was not possible.” <Highlight Film International Stairs>
With version 15-1 it becomes possible to determine the stairwell opening already when entering the stair via a polygon or a line. If the stair layout and the stairwell opening have been created with a polygon or a line, the stairwell opening outlines can be adopted either with “Stairs on polygon” or with “Stairs on line”.
With the “Stairs on polygon” command, first the required “Bottom step” and “Last step” can be determined in the input line. Afterwards the automatically created walking line and the stairwell opening outline can be adopted – and the stair will be calculated fully-automatically to fit the existing geometry. If the walking line and the stairwell opening outline are not to be adopted, the command can be confirmed with “OK” without these entries.
With “Stairs on line” it is also possible to adopt the created walking line and the stairwell opening outline from the drawing. Also existing stairs can now be subsequently adapted to the stairwell opening. For that purpose, the “Stairwell opening on line” command has been programmed; to be found under Stairs -> “Stairs on CAD”. Under “Stairwell opening on line” the input line with the “Stairwell opening” query opens – which can be adopted with a click and then the stairs automatically adapt to the new stairwell opening.
With this new feature, the stairs input becomes even more flexible and many existing values/parameters can be simply adopted by mouse click. <Highlight Film International Stairs>
With the new setting “Lengthening arc/curve” a more comfortable curve creation at the beginning and end of the stairs turn becomes possible. In the data record of the stairs there is now under the “Adp” tab -> menu “Walking line on turn” the setting “Lengthening arc/curve” available. Thus, the curve of a walking line at the turn can be lengthened by the indicated value. This means that the “curving” of the treads begins already before and then ends after the turn. With this new option, the stair shape can be designed more harmoniously and walking the stair becomes more comfortable.

Structural Analysis

The transfer of timber supports from the SEMA Program into the "HO1" structural analysis program of Friedrich & Lochner with the Italian calculation norm "NTC EN 1995:2008" has been revised. (Blass)

Energy Performance

The export to the building physics/energy performance program of Ecotech, version 3.x, has been re-enabled. The export format “Ecotech 3.x” has to be selected in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) -> “Walls/contour” under the “Room” tab. As accustomed, the export is initiated via “File” -> ”Export” -> ”Energy Performance”.

Master Data Macros, Program

From version 15-1 on, the SEMA master data will be provided in several languages. This new multi-language master data folder contains all SEMA program languages so that it is not necessary to provide a separate master data folder for every language. The data volume on the SEMA DVD can thus be significantly reduced.
Currently, the SEMA working master data comprise the languages German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Japanese and Chinese.
During the installation of the SEMA Program, the respective master data belonging to the language selected are automatically selected and installed. Additionally, when transferring data from a previous version, the existing master-data folders are prepared and upgraded for the multi-language technology of version 15-1.
The multi-language master-data folder (working master data) is accordingly made available in a separate folder (“SEMA_STM” or “SEMA_MDA) on the SEMA DVD and the different program languages can thus be installed any time. <Highlight Film New Steel Element Features>
As of now, when picking original master data or when picking from any master folder, generally master data of the group with the same name will be offered first. To make this selection even clearer, not all branches of the master data are opened, just the ones of the selected group. <Highlight Film New Steel Element Features>

Material List

For some time now, it has been possible to position the material list on a second screen. Thus, it is possible to check the drawing through going over of the material list at the same time. In order to perfect this check function, the visual interaction of list and drawing has been implemented.
In Version 15-1, the function “Highlight components in drawing” has been added to the material list. The component(s) of the line(s) currently marked is (are) colour highlighted in the drawing. This new feature work in 2D and in 3D mode as well as for components of inactive storeys. The highlighting of components only works if the focus is on the material list, as soon as the work in the drawing is continued, components are no longer highlighted. For activating or deactivating the function, the icon “Highlights all components of line currently marked in drawing” has been integrated into the toolbar of the material list. By default, the functionality is active. The colour for highlighting can be determined under “View” -> “Colour settings” -> “General points” -> “Flash colour”. <Highlight Film Material List Enhancement>
Furthermore, the right-click function has been added to the material list. The following options are available after right-clicking an item:
"Mark component(s) in project": marks the components in the drawing.
"Component(s) in project visible": only the components of the current line are switched to visible in the drawing.
"Mark all components/lines": all components/lines of the current partial list are marked.
"Delete component(s)/line(s)": all components/lines of the current partial list are deleted.
The selection options "Turn component(s)" and "Overturn component(s)" is only active in single member lists.
In the partial list tree, a right-click with the mouse provides the selection of the partial list properties (general points, selection, grouping, sorting, mask, values, numbering and printing) as well as the functions “Edit mask” and “Edit partial list/list”.
These new features considerably facilitate working with the material list and create the perfect interaction between project and material list. <Highlight Film Material List Enhancement>
The option “Use rounded values when grouping” has been integrated in the “Values” tab under “Partial list properties”. This option enables the grouping of components with the same length after allowance and rounding have been added. The same functionality has also been enabled for the cross-section of components. (Tschurtschenthaler)
The option “Storeys selected” has been added to the transfer menu. A list displaying all storeys of a project is opened by clicking the “Selection” button under this new setting. Thus it becomes possible to specifically transfer freely selectable storeys to the material list. (Strüby) <Highlight Film Material List Enhancement>
Furthermore, the material list has been given a window of its own on the Windows taskbar attached to the SEMA program. Clicking onto the window minimises material list and also opens it again.
The "Search and replace" function (Strg+F) of the material list has been revised and enhanced.
The minimum value allowed for components to be transferred has been reduced from 1mm to 1/10mm. (EBH)
The transfer via selected components has been revised in some detail. (Büdenbender)

3D Objects

Flat steel connectors, standard beams, square and round profiles can now be notched out, drilled and cut with 3D processings.
Flat steel, I-beams, angle steel, square profiles, round profiles, T sections, channel steel, Z steel and extrusion objects can now not only create processings in timber elements but can be processed themselves with 3CAD drillings or cuts as well as with round and square profiles. With this new functionality, it is for example possible to create a drilling hole with a 3CAD drilling, a cut with angle and inclination with a 3CAD cut or a notch with a 3CAD scarf on an I-beam.
For that purpose, the “EDI” tab under the master data has been extended by the field “processable”. If the option is set on “yes”, processings on standard objects can be created with 3CAD processings or the above mentioned 3D objects. For better overview under the “EDI” tab, all setting options for “Processings horizontal” and “Processings rising” are hidden in the detail settings. By clicking onto the “+” these detail settings open and can be set as necessary. The detail settings become only active if the processing is set on “Detail”.
To be able to select the components to be processed better, also the effect tab has been extended. Under “Selected components” it can be determined for the effect settings “All”, “Target component” and “All others” if they take effect on “Timber components”, “Stairs components”, “3D objects” or a combination of them. If, for example, a steel element requires a larger drilling diameter than the timber component, one drilling can have the drilling diameter for the timber component and the second drilling the diameter for the steel element.
The corresponding working master data of version 15-1 is set so that all steel components (flat steel, I-beam, angle steel, square profiles, round profiles, T sections, channel steel, Z steel) are processable. 3CAD processing as well as the master data groups “Drilling templates”, “Timber construction” and “Steel construction” (-> under the “Screwed connections”) now also create by default a processing on 3D objects. With an installation of version 15-1 with data transfer from the previous 14-2 version, the corresponding master data can be “picked” as usually. The data in a company-specific master folder can be quickly and comfortable rearranged with the “Multi edit” option. “Multi edit” means that several master data records from one group can be marked and changed together.
In 3D it is now also possible to snap the center of drill holes with the mouse which makes the placing of objects in 3D much easier. A steel dowel, for example, can now be placed centered in drill hole with just one click.
Another advantage is that now, for example, processed I-beams can be grouped together with other steel elements and their production drawing can also be created as a multiview orthographic projection. This often requested new feature makes the design process with steel elements much easier and enables completely new design options in the SEMA program. <Highlight Film New Steel Element Features>
For the import of a special DWG file, the data was read-in to the SEMA program back-to-front – this has been corrected. (Akost)
The weight determination of extrusion objects has been revised. (Skaletzka)

Single Member

The machine export of hip and valley rafters has been optimised. The option to summarize individual bird’s mouths to a hip notch, especially for long/short or short/long cut purlins, has been revised and thus the machine export of bird’s mouths has been further improved.
The display of the dovetail tenon and dovetail mortise can now be synchronised with the tool available (dovetail tenon moulder) on the machine. The flank angle for dovetail tenons and their respective mortises can be defined by means of the new setting “Display of dovetail tenons/mortises” which can be found in the general program options (Alt+F7) -> “Lists/ single member” under the “Single member” tab -> “Special processings”. An angle of 15° is pre-defined. If the tool on the machine has a different flank angle, this flank angle can be set. Flank angles can be set within a range from 10° (minimum) up to 25° (maximum). Thus, the dovetail tenon displayed and the dovetail tenon produced correspond. If the flank angle is changed subsequently, the components have to be re-calculated via the “Calculate processings” command. Only then will the new setting of the flank angle be displayed on the components.
As of now, the material list number will also be transferred during the K2 export from the application.(Strüby)
In Version 15-1, BVX2 export has been enhanced. Now, it is possible to impact bird’s mouths for the export in the “General settings”. The new option “Delete purlin width” with three different modes has been integrated for this purpose:
Mode 1: The purlin width is only deleted if the component is not changed by this. A bird’s mouth affected by a ridge purlin is a typical example for this. Here, the purlin width is outside of the component. The system automatically detects this and the parameter P15 (width counter-component) is set to the value “Zero” during the export.
Mode 2: The purlin width is only deleted if the vertical and horizontal areas of the bird’s mouth are maintained. Under this mode, the additional option to enter a maximum length has been provided. The maximum length determines the maximum value up to which the purlin width is deleted.
Mode 3: The purlin width is deleted in all bird’s mouths. Caution: In some types of bird’s mouths (e.g. on eaves purlins) this may cause the bird’s mouth losing its hold because only the horizontal bird’s mouth area will be left then.
The BTL export of cuts and scarf joints that are integrated into the outside contour has been revised. (Essepi)
In one special case the outside contour of the K2 export has not been converted into cuts – this has been corrected. (Schubauer)
Hip and valley cuts with a distance to the component beginning are now treated correctly for the BVX2 export.
The P10 export of bird’s mouths with a low inclination has been revised. (Wiehag)
The BVX2 export of rising scarf joints at the component beginning was not correct in one special case – this has been corrected. (GR)
The BVX2 export of hip rafters – hip notches has been improved for one special case. (Sterk)
Components for which a fluting is created by a front-side punch are now also sent with the fluting to the machine if only one point of the punched contour is on the component cross-section. (Strüby)

Release History V14-2 Build 7400

General Points

The module lock of version 14-2 applies with this update.
Changes to the master data under the creation command can now be abandoned with a right-click and the corresponding command, even if the master data are in read-only status. (Strüby)
Data transfer has been revised and improved.
The “Comfort” layout is now loaded by default also for the English version.
By means of the newly developed quick selection feature, the references in the master data can be allocated or changed more quickly. The quick selection opens by a mouse click onto the new double arrow right next to the reference field. Then, without any further “intermediate windows”, the master data manager opens directly. Here, the required component can be selected via clear and detailed screen images - you really can’t be any quicker. It is for example possible to change the new CAD pens or fillings in next to no time. The same applies to reference of timber members or layer structures in a wall, components in roof areas or dormers, roof area references in the building assistant, stairs components in the construction data record and so forth. Basically, the quick selection feature is available for all components and settings with reference fields.
Normal access to the master data manager works as accustomed via a click onto the reference field.
Instead of clicking onto the new double arrow, it is also possible to call up the quick selection feature via a right click. Under the master data manager it is possible to determine the quick access for references with a right click under “Status - standard click behaviour”. Needless to say, the same applies to the “Status - question mark system“.
Thus, references can now be allocated in an even quicker and more comfortable way.
The process for importing building projects is no longer displayed in a dialogue window, but in the bottom tool bar. Needless to say, also the bottom tool bar will clearly display the progress of the import. In addition to this, the option “Display preview when loading building project” has been added to the “Settings” tab of the building project properties. By activating this new option, the project preview will be shown while the building project is being loaded. With this, the user can see at once which project is being loaded. As before, the project preview can be created in the top tool bar via “Edit” -> “Create BP preview”.
As of now, the Check Center detects faulty elements which are indicated with the corresponding symbol (warning triangle) in 2D mode as well as in 3D mode. Whenever a faulty element appears in the program, it will be automatically listed in the Check Center. When faulty elements are deleted or corrected, they are automatically removed from the Check Center. What’s more, it is possible to “click” the check symbols (warning triangle) in 2D or 3D and to display them in the Check Center with the respective symbols. Thus, problems in 3D can be quickly checked and then solved in the Check Center. <Highlight Film Improved Check Center>
Under “Additional information, more detailed information about the problem is provided. After checking the construction, the number of conflicts in the project is immediately clear. The number of faulty elements, of collisions and of missing counter processings is listed.
Furthermore, user information can be copied and then saved together with any type of component as a macro. Thus, it is for example possible to save window macros with user information. The user info can provide information about the order processing of the window (order form, address, costs….). For that purpose, the new subgroup “User information macros” has been created under the “Check Center” group.
In addition, user information elements now also come with a “Link” tab which makes it possible to subsequently link it with further components. All components linked to user information are displayed in a special colour. Thus, a visual check for components “belonging” to a user info element is possible.
In the last tab of the user information names for file attachments can now be assigned, enabling a better “description” of the attachments.
So far, users had to click into the Check Center to scroll up and down with the mouse; now it is sufficient to move the mouse pointer over the Check Center. As soon as the mouse is back in the drawing area, users can zoom in or zoom out the construction, just as accustomed.
As of now, it is possible to access user-created roof profiles (BP profiles) in the building assistant. As accustomed, these profiles can be found in the “BP own master data” folder (-> “Change master folder” – the blue folder).
The setting "Classic interface" (Extras -> “Options...”.) has been removed from the SEMA program. Only if Windows is used with the "Windows classic” design, the SEMA Program will follow it. SEMA, however, does not recommend this setting since the program maintenance does not follow up this design. <Highlight Film Using Master Data Made Easy>
The 3D import of all components from CMP files has been enabled in Version 14-2. It is possible to import any CMP files via "File” -> "Import" -> "CMP import". Optionally, it is also possible to drag a CMP file from a folder or for example from the e-mail program to the SEMA interface via "Drag & Drop". A log file documenting the import process opens after the import. All components and storeys which have been imported will be listed. Likewise, all components and processing which could not be imported will also be listed. At the end of the log file, the number of processings, of components, of storeys and of other components will be displayed again in a clear and concise way.
By means of the CMP import, an entire project ready for joining, as available right after the import, can be read into the SEMA program. All timber components are read in together with the end types and processings as defined in the CMP file.
Read-in storeys are automatically added to the storey administration, and the components are allocated to the respective storey. The components imported are created as 3CAD timber components with their processings. The processings can be checked in the node mode ("Mark nodes" in the entry line). Processings imported are indicated in capital letters. Imported processings are also displayed in capital letters in single member view and during transfers to the single member in the “Drop-down list of processings”. Thus, it is possible to differentiate between imported processings and processings created in the SEMA program.
Needless to say, these components can be edited like any other SEMA component (“Modify”, “Position”, “Cut” etc.). So, it is for example possible to allocate a new end type and thus replacing the imported end type. If a component is edited with the “Cut” command, the imported editing will remain in the system for the time being. The editing will not be deleted until an end type has been finally allocated. Thus, refinishing imported constructions is possible any time.
If an editing plane has been defined in the CMP file, this plane will be turned into a SEMA wall without layers with the import. Thus, wall shapes come with all their functions included after the import.
“CMP Import" – a new data import with a high degree of detailing. <Highlight Film BTL Import>

Printing & Plotting

In layout view it is possible with one click to display the contents of an arrangement border rotated counter-clockwise by 90°, 180° or 270°. For this purpose, a new icon has been added to the “Arrangement border” toolbar which opens in layout view. By default the drawing will be displayed rotated by 90° when clicking onto the icon. Clicking it a second time will have the drawing jump back to the initial orientation. Via the selection menu of the icon it is possible to select 180° or 270°. Depending on the degree of rotation, the icon symbol changes. Thus, it is possible to see at once whether the current drawing is displayed with rotation and if so, to see the degree of the rotation. CAD, dimensioning, MCAD and F7 labelling automatically follow the rotation. On exiting the layout view with rotated contents, the initial orientation will automatically be restored. The arrangement border maintains its orientation and when switching back to layout view again, the contents will be displayed in rotated form. It is no problem to edit drawings in rotated layout view. This new feature, long-awaited by our users, now enables for example to perfectly integrate profiles, cuts, single member views, developed views of strings etc. to ground plans. <Highlight Film Flexible Drawings>
The default plan templates for production drawings have been revised. Now, every detail drawing has its own legend. The legend refers to the component and may contain additional information via placeholders.
The option to integrate material list references to a plan has been expanded to include all text fields of the material list tab.
The multiview projection of steel components has been enhanced in detail. (Skaletzka)
The marking mode in the layout view has been corrected. (Dittus)
As of now, it is possible to save the orientation of the 3D oblique view in layout view. (Dittus)

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

Dimensioning and CAD texts have been enhanced visually and many new useful options have been added. Thus, it is now possible to create even more detailed and appealing drawings.
The dimensioning values have been positioned closer to the dimension line. Particularly for detail dimension, this improves clarity and overview
At the same time, the area covered by the dimension point has been reduced.
Dimension markings can be selected via a clearly arranged screen selection, so that the different types of dimension markings are clearly displayed. Furthermore, four new types of dimension markings have been integrated: a filled arrow, a small circle, a filled circle and an open arrow with adapted angle. The existing dimension markings have been improved in detail regarding size and appearance. Thus, the dimension value and dimension marking ratio works even better. By means of the new option “Marking size” the size of the markings can be set from 1 to 9 – thus they can be individually adjusted to the respective object.
Should arrow-shaped markings overlap at a dimension line, the arrows will be drawn on the outside at the beginning and the end. Should arrow-shaped markings overlap within a dimension line, they will not be drawn. As a result, overlapping markings are a thing of the past and the dimensioning becomes significantly clearer.
To make cross-section dimensions also much clearer, the distance of the dimension values from each other has been significantly reduced. The distance has been accordingly adjusted when the diameter is displayed as a symbol.
When dimensioning circles with radius, diameter or radian measure, it is possible to select the different forms of boundaries, i.e. “single line”, “filled double arrow”, “open double arrow”, “filled single arrow” and “open single arrow”, via images. Of course, the size of these boundaries can be modified as well (from 1 to 9).
The boundaries "single line", "filled double arrow" and "open double arrow" are now also provided for angle measurement. Also under this function, arrow-shaped markings will be applied on the outside in case of overlapping. For angle dimensions, the dimension text can be additionally positioned at right angles to leg 1 and 2 (L1 vertically and L2 vertically) as well as at right angles in the center.
In CAD texts the guidelines are now also selected through the screen selection instead of texts. In addition, the size of the guideline symbol can be set individually from 1 to 9.
Dimension lines can be turned via the “Position” editing command (fourth additional option).
Owing to these new features, all drawings can now be created with more detail and look better. <Highlight Film Optimised Dimensioning>
Want to pre-allocate a red line with a line thickness of 0.10mm and line type ISO 03" Or individually prepare a polygon with all outline settings and filling" Child’s play with the new SEMA Version 14-2. As of now, it is possible to predefine pens and fillings for linear and filled objects. Consequently, the suitable pen or required filling is available any time. And if not, it is possible to change pens and fillings rapidly and individually. Thus, e.g. permission plans can be created even more quickly and efficiently.
Two new types of master data have been provided to enable this new feature: The new drawing “Pens“ and “Combination pens“ can be found in the master data under the group “Look” (previously called “Filling/filling pattern”). Pens can be defined with a line colour, a line thickness and a type of line. Thus, a line can be defined with the colour blue, a line thickness of 0.18mm and ISO 01. This pen is then be available in all non-filled CAD, MCAD and ground plan objects (point, line, rectangle, circle and ellipse). The new “Combination pens“ are a combination of filling and pen. The combination pen is basically a link to a pen and to a filling. With this combination it is for example possible to define a hatched polygon with the outline colour black. If polygons without filling but only an outline are required, the link for the filling can be left blank.
Furthermore, it is now possible to create filled polygons without an outline. For that purpose, a combination pen has to be defined with the required filling but without a pen. Likewise, when changing the pen, the colour option “no colour” can be selected. Although the outline edges of the polygon will not be drawn, the outline edges can nevertheless be snapped and edited.
If pens and combination pens were created in the master data and then adapted to one’s own needs, these pens can be selected under the creation command. By selecting the creation command "CAD line", the predefined master data of the pens will open. Now, a black or a red line can be selected.
When creating a polygon, the master data of the predefined combination pens open. Not only the two links, but also the contents of the links become available, so that it is very easy to modify the line thickness or the line style during the creation of a polygon. If, however, the user wants to change the entire combination of line colour, line thickness and line style, it is possible to exchange the entire pen via the quick link. Needless to say, the same applies to the filling of the polygon. Also here it is possible to quickly modify individual parameters such as hatch style or size or to exchange the entire combination pen. If a new combination consisting of a pen and a combination pen has been created, it is of course possible to save this combination in the master data. An auto function then makes sure that already existing pens or fillings are detected, thus making sure that no double, identical master data is created by the (re-)saving process. If neither an identical pen nor filling are found, the program will automatically create the new group “Generated” which is also the place where the master data will be stored. Again, this ensures that no master data with identical name but different parameters is created.
Needless to say, the colour settings of all components can be adopted via the value snap (dropper), so that for example the values of a wall can be captured to create a polygon with exactly the same parameters.
Along the same lines, for filled or non-filled objects either individual parameters or the entire combination can be exchanged. One click onto “Selection >>“ will open the master data and an complete pen or filling can be exchanged. Any changes are immediately displayed in the drawing.
The option to create one’s own range of colours via the “Own commands” feature has been provided, enabling the selection of a pen or combination pen with just one click.
In addition, the “Look” tab of texts is available already during the creation process. Thus, texts with different colour, line thickness and line style can be pre-defined..
With these pre-defined pens and combination pens, CAD drawings can now be designed more intuitively and also more efficiently. <Highlight Film CAD - Intuitive, Intelligent and Innovative>

Rafter System

As of Version 14-2, the automatic shortening of hip rafters, valley rafters, broken hips, barge rafters and turned rafters at the ridge has been enabled. This is a useful new feature for example for hip rafters at a hip roof ridge or for valley rafters at the ridge of a transverse building. Shortening of a ridge becomes necessary, for example, if the width of the ridge purlin falls below the planned value due to shrinkage.
Therefore, new options have been added to the “General pre-settings“ (ALT+F7) under “Evaluations“ -> “Roof“ ->“Eaves boarding, ridge shortening” -> “Shorten vertical section at ridge“. Here the two new options “Elements” and “Rafters + elements” have been added to the already existing “Rafters” option. The basic measurement of the ridge shortening can be determined in the entry field following.
For the setting “Rafters“, rafters and turned rafters abutting to a ridge line are shortened by the defined value. For the option “Elements“, hip rafters, valley rafters, broken hips and barge rafters are shortened. The option “Rafters + elements“ combines these two elements.
The program distinguishes between the types of roof edge the various components abut with and automatically shortens these components at the ridge lines by the measurement set.
By saving the “General presettings“ (ALT+F7) as start setting, it is possible to permanently store the different options. Needless to say, it is also possible to save the automatic ridge shortening option in a separate setting.
With this new feature, manual post-editing of ridge sections in the program is no longer required and unpleasant surprises on the building site become a thing of the past.
Significant improvements and corrections in terms of bird’s mouths and component intersection have been made. (Schweinberger, Romelli, CBTP, Abundzentrum Bodenseekreis, Boraschi, Camathias, Abbund-Adelberg, Srutek, Gröber, Trussardi, Tauber, Lignum, Strüby, Ciara.....)
The command "multiple cuts" has been enhanced for specific cases. (SEMA France)
The command "double cut" has been corrected in one special case. (Tauber)
After modifications made at trimmers, in particular after pitch adaptions of the roof surface, mortises or markings on affected rafters were partly drawn incorrectly. This problem has been fixed. (Oppold)
Profilings of element sections have been enhanced for specific cases. (Zini)

Carpenter’s Dimensioning

The setting "Carpenter’s dimensioning, classic" (Extras -> “Options”...) has been removed from the SEMA Program.

Wall Ceiling

The end types for the creation of multiple walls are now adopted correctly in a specific case. (Lehner)
When selecting a polygon with a punch out under the “Ceiling on polygon” command, a stairwell opening will be automatically created at this point in the ceiling.
As of now, it is possible to create area outlines with recesses/cutouts in construction planes. Thus, it becomes possible to quickly space components into a previously defined section. Subsequently, the components automatically abut to the predefined section. Consequently, the creation of auxiliary elements as a calculation limit for the members becomes unnecessary. For example, posts under ceiling beams can be spaced in a quick and uncomplicated way. After the construction plane has been created and set up, the new commands “Area outline” and “Recess” will be available under “Wall outline”. Area outlines can be freely positioned in the form of a rectangle, in freefrom or on a polygon/closed polyline. Similar to walls and the respective option to create or space individual components, this is now also possible for area outlines. As accustomed, all variants for creation are provided when switching to "Wall members". What’s new is that it is now possible to create components without having to create a reference line first. Thus, on selecting the command “Space between 2 points”, the user only has to select one outline edge and the program will automatically recognize the area to be spaced. By means of the “Recess” command it is possible to create holes and openings within the area outline; among other things these holes impact the area evaluation. Naturally, components also intersect to the respective recess/cutout. In order to enable this, the option “Intersect elements with cutout” – to be found under the presettings (Alt+F7) -> “Members/Joist system” – must be ticked. The gross area, the net area and the edge measurements of the area outline can be switched to visible in the display settings (F7) under “Wall outline” -> “Construction plane”. This new feature significantly facilitates and enhances working within construction planes. <Highlight Film Area Outlines on the Construction Plane>

Stairs

Stairs constructions with steel stringers – from design to manufacturing.
The new constructions can be allocated to the stairs assistant or it is possible to create stairs with steel stringers via “Contour” -> “Flight element” and “Stairs on CAD”. Needless to say, the new constructions are also available in the stairs container and can be allocated to any stair form.
The new group “Steel stringer stairs” has been added to the master data under “Stairs” -> “Construction”. Here, the options "Type A, left", "Type A, right", "Type B, left" and "Type B, right" are available. The types differ regarding the position of the railing and the string form. The group “Flat steel strings” has been created for the strings. This group offers 2 kinds of strings: “15 mm stepped on both sides” and “15 mm stepped on top”. The railing of the steel stringer stairs is a new option under the group “Railing”, in the subgroup “RAL 40 mm steel”, under the name “Type A”.
As of now, the string forms “Stepped string, bottom”, “Stepped string, top” and “Stepped string, bottom and top” are additional options in the component data of the string. By selecting one of these string forms from the image selection, the entries “Horse-string measure stepped” and “Corners” become available. On clicking the "+" symbol, the respective settings will open. Here, it is possible to define a horse-string “bottom measure”, “top measure” as well as a “Horse-string measure, front” and “Horse-string measure, back”. Depending on the string form, only the required horse-string measure will be active. By means of the other settings it is possible to define the “Top corners, front”, the “Top corners, back”, the “Bottom corners, front” and the “Bottom corners, back”. The options available here are “Square”, “Radius" and "Chamfer".
New settings have been provided for the machine export for the production of the strings. Optionally, it is either possible to export the complete tread outline of the string in the INI-file or just the bottom edge, front edge, top edge or back edge of the tread outline. Additionally, the export of the tread number of the respective tread outline is possible.
With steel stringers manufacturing stairs in any form becomes a very easy and straight-forward job.
The data block of the stairs now displays different strides and stair treads. If different strides or treads are used within one stair, they are immediately listed in the data block. The data block can be switched visible in the display settings (F7) -> “Stairs” -> “Construction” -> “Top view” tab. Thus, the data block matches the tread list. <Highlight Film Landings in the Stairs Assistant>
The component data of stair boards (strings, handrails, booms and horses) have been reorganised and have thus become better structured. Settings depending on each other have been grouped in a meaningful way.
Reorganisation of the string master data: As accustomed, under the first tab “Dat” it is possible to determine the thickness, the depth of tread and riser cutouts and the height of landings. The new option “string form” determines whether the string boards are in standard form or whether they are stepped at the bottom, at the top or at both sides.
The course of the curve setting has been removed from the “Des” tab and has been added to the “Dat” tab. By clicking the "+" in front of "Curve calculation”, the settings required will open. The first field contains the familiar options for the curve calculation such as “Continuous curve”, “Interrupted curve”, “Straight”, “Part of the string, one-sided”, “Part of the string, two-sided” and “Part of the string, levelled”.
The height adjustment of corner joints can be defined directly below this field. By clicking "overall", the height difference at the corner joint will be adjusted over the entire component. Selecting "L" or "Factor" enables the user to enter a value determining how far the height adjustment over the component, starting from the corner joint, is to be performed. By means of the "Adopt curve" option, the behaviour of the spline of the string’s top and bottom edge can be defined. A separate spline per edge will be determined by means of the “Standard” setting with the set horse-string measure taken into account. The spline calculated by the top edge will be transferred to the bottom edge under the "TO >>BO" setting; the horse-string measure will be taken into account. In the same way, the spline calculated by the bottom edge under the "BO>>TO" setting will be transferred to the top edge, again by taking the horse-string measure into account. The "CE>>BT" setting results in the spline calculated in the string centre to be transferred to the bottom and top edge with the horse-string measure taken into account. With a click on the "+" or the "-" symbol for the curve calculation it is possible to switch the respective settings to visible or invisible. Under the "Curve calculation" option there are settings for the horse-string measure (horse-string measure standard) which are only active if the string form “Standard string form” has been set. Just like described before the respective settings can be opened by a click on the "+" symbol. Here, the entries made for the bottom and top horse-string measures can be found. In addition to this, it is possible to define parallel strings here. In order to make the entry active, “Curve interrupted” has to be set under curve calculation. Then, the additional entries “Width from top”, “Width from bottom” and “Width average” are possible under “Horse-string measure”. Depending on the setting, the fields required, i.e. the fields “Width”, “Horse-string measure, bottom” and “Horse-string measure, top” are active or inactive. <Highlight Film Connecting Railings on Line>
The string forms "Stepped string form at the top" or "Stepped string form at the bottom" or "Stepped string form at both sides" will have the settings “Horse-string measure stepped” and “Corners” opened. The “Stepped horse-string measure” option defines the horse-string measure of a stepped string. Here, the entries for the bottom, top, front and back horse-string measure are available. Depending on the string form set, the required fields become active.
Then, the behaviour of the corners of a stepped string is defined. The entries “Square”, “Radius” and “Chamfer” are available.
The distance between string and flight element can be determined under “Position in top view”. Additionally, the reference side can be set to “Outside”, “Axis” or “Inside”.
The “Des” tab provides the familiar entries in terms of corner connections, string bottom step, string last step and wedge milling. According to one’s requirements, it is possible to open or to hide these entries as well.
The entries of the curve calculation for other board components such as handrails, booms and horses have been moved from the “Des” tab to the “Dat” tab. All remaining entries have not changed their location, but are also supported by the new technology.
This new menu design helps users to better understand the connections between the individual entries and to make the necessary settings.
Easy definition of landings or steps in designated areas for all kind of stair forms. By means of the new entry form “Area adaption” – to be found in the adaption options – it is possible to define an area by determining the number of steps or by inserting a landing with different calculation criteria. “Area adaption” can be used in 2D and in 3D. The command is opened via program selection: "Stairs" -> "Adaption" -> "Landing" or by marking a step and then opening the eighth entry form “Area adaption” after a right click and the “Position” command. If no component of the designated stairs has been marked yet, the entry line will follow the “Stairs” query. The area will be determined by the "From" -> "To" options. Improved mouse pointers facilitate the entry in the 2D as well as in the 3D mode. Furthermore, the option "Point snap on leg line/ Point snap on side line” is available; this option is to be found at the bottom right in the entry line. The construction is defined by selecting “Landing ideal", "Landing fixed", "2 Steps", "3 Steps”, "4 Steps", "5 Steps" and "Rise". Adequate previews support the entry. With "Landing fixed" a landing is created exactly at the edges determined. This results in different stride values before and after the landing. With "Landing ideal" the defined area is used as a proposal. Subsequently, the stride of the stair is taken into account and the landing positioned in such a way that the same stride values apply before and after the landing. By selecting the number of steps, the steps are then spaced in a mirror-reversed manner in the area determined.
What is more, it is now possible to delete treads from a stair. If a tread positioned in a modified area is deleted, the options of the area adaption are carried out in reversed order. This means that if an area has been divided into two steps and one of these two steps is deleted later on, first of all a fixed landing is calculated. By deleting this new fixed landing, a “landing ideal” will be created. By deleting this “Landing ideal", the rise will be calculated.
This new tool enables quick and individual stairs adaption.
In the stairs assistant, too, entries of landings as well as a freely-definable number of steps have been enabled. The number of steps or a landing can be defined for each turn. The “Area” is now available under the “Geo” tab in the stairs assistant. The select menu provides the settings "Landing ideal", "Landing fixed", "2 Steps", "3 Steps", "4 Steps", "5 Steps" and "Rise". By selecting one of these functions it will immediately be displayed in 3D top view and in sectional view. The "Landing fixed" function creates a landing directly in the turn. This results in different stride values before and after the landing. The "Landing ideal" option uses the turn as a proposal. Subsequently, the stride of the stair is taken into account and the landing positioned in such a way that the same stride values apply before and after the landing. By selecting the number of steps, the steps are then spaced in a mirror-reversed manner in the turn.
With this new function, the stair components of the stairs assistant become even more flexible. <Highlight Film Landings in the Stairs Assistant>
Comfortable entry of a connecting railing from a polyline. If the required polyline exists in the building project, it is very easy to quickly create a connecting railing by means of the new “Connecting railing on polyline” command, to be found in the program selection under “Stairs” -> “Railing”.
On activating the command it is possible to select the connecting railing and to modify it if necessary. Then, the existing polyline can be selected. If only one CAD line exists, one click will suffice to adopt this line. In case of several lines, the “CTRL” key has to be held down when clicking the lines until all lines of the polyline have been marked. The next step is the distance query where it is possible to define the distance to the reference line by entering a value or to adopt the distance by a mouse click. The axis of the connecting railing will be created on the reference line. The existing components of the connecting railing, together with their parameters, follow the axis of the railing.
This new function enables the rapid and very easy construction of connecting railings on any polyline. <Highlight Film Stairs with Steel Stringers>

3D Objects

In Version 14-2 some of the functions for single and node connectors have been expanded and optimized.
The options button “Mirror” (Alt+1) has been added to the creation command of the single connector. By means of this new option, flat-steel elements, drilling patterns and scarf joint/slot processings of the single connector can be mirrored. The position of the flat-steel elements and the arrangement of the connectors/fasteners are correctly displayed already during selection of the target component area .
Inside single connectors which are cut at the component’s end, now intersect with the actual cut area of the component. <Highlight Film New Previews and Screen Images>
The master data of the single connector has been enhanced. The newly-incorporated “Lengthening” option becomes active in single connectors intended to be cut at the component end. By means of the lengthening option it is possible to lengthen or shorten flat-steel elements at the component end by a specific value.
Editings and fasteners of single connectors cut at the component end will now take into account the exact geometry of the flat-steel element and are automatically deleted where required.
The position of the flat steel, the corresponding scarf joint/slot processing as well as the orientation of the drilling pattern have been revised for the inclined components of node connectors.
The position of the scarf joint/slot processing with a different play at the bottom/top for inner single connectors has been corrected.
The option “File attachments/hyperlinks” has been added to the 3D objects in the “Misc” tab. Up to 10 file attachments or hyperlinks can be assigned under this option. After selecting a reference field, a file explorer for selecting the file to be attached will open. In addition to this, it is possible to drop files onto a reference field via “Drag & Drop“. It has to be made sure that all file attachments are saved in the building project or the master data. In order to avoid building projects becoming too large, a message will appear for file attachments exceeding 10 MB. However, it is also possible to create links to files. Right clicking onto the reference field opens the “Create link to file and attach” command and the file selection. The file selected, however, will not be attached to the building project in this case. This also means that building projects sent to another user do not include the links. Furthermore it is possible to link a directory by a right click onto the reference field and by selecting “Create link to directory and attach”. Finally, the option “Create and attach hyperlink (Internet)“ has been provided in the context menu. After selecting this option, a web browser, linking to the web page in question, will open. As accustomed, a web address (e.g. www.sema-soft.com) has to be entered and the respective web page will be adopted after confirming the “Adopt web link” command (green tick next to the address bar). In order to be able to label or describe the various attachments in a clear manner, any label/description can be added for the file attachment in the first column.
When ungrouping a group with accompanying production drawing, the following message will appear:
When resolving/removing a group, the accompanying production drawing is also removed. Please note: To address individual elements of a group, you can switch to marking mode. (When switching to the marking mode of a group, the group structure is not changed.)

Master Data Macros Program

The screen image and the preview window for walls, windows, doors, wall macros, ceilings/floors, layer structures and room layers have been enhanced. For new installations, the clearly arranged 3D preview window (screen image 2) is displayed for the listed elements by default. Thus, e.g. the pre-set layer structure of a wall can be seen at a glance. In order to enable check components in detail in the preview window, the exploded drawing has been added to the 3D screen image. This exploded drawing is directly be adopted by the preview. This can be set individually for all master data mentioned above. The preview with exploded or non-exploded drawing is accordingly displayed when using creation commands, thus enabling a simple visual selection of the required master data. <Highlight Film New Previews and Screen Images>
In the master data it is possible to define a preview wall for windows, doors and wall macros. In the 2D mode the studs of the preview wall are displayed in light colours and in 3D mode the studs are transparent so that it is easy to check whether e.g. a window component of a wall behaves correctly. After either a window, a door or a macro has been inserted, the preview wall option will disappear because in case of modifications the actual wall becomes available in the preview window. <Highlight Film New Previews and Screen Images>
For the first time, ceilings/floors, layer structures and room structures have been provided with a 3D view in the screen image and accordingly also in the preview window. Ceilings/floors and layer structures can also be displayed in exploded view. Likewise, the exploded view option has been enabled for roof details and tile layers. <Highlight Film New Previews and Screen Images>
After a data transfer, the settings used so far will be adopted. It is possible to subsequently activate or deactivate the 3D preview window via a right click onto one or several master data. In order to enable this, it is required to switch from “Screen image 1” (2D) to “Screen image 2” (3D) under “Symbols”. This visual representation significantly facilitates the selecting of required components for both SEMA beginners and SEMA experts.

Material List

As of now, the material list transfer also functions with option “Current storey” in 3D view. (Haberl)
The export of the material list to Microsoft Excel has been enhanced in detail.
When calling up the option "Mask editing", the program goes directly to the first position and no longer to the sorting field as had been the case before. Thus, direct search via initial letters is now possible.
It is now also possible to select specific line areas in a Windows manner, i.e. with the shift key.

DXF Interface

Extensive enhancements and corrections for the import of DXF files have been implemented. (Frautschi, Heinzl, Söllradl, Krebs, Leduc, HMS, Cenomane, Fahrenberger, Dankl, Strüby, Regnauer, Schwarz, Ganter, Zimmermann, Ener, Stadelmann&Stutz, Bach&Perreten, Alpiger, Santini, Proegger, Arealegno, Wölfe&Glöckler, Larese)

Release History V14-1 Build 7200

General Points

The drawing buffer for the 2D screen refresh function and for snapping has been enhanced. The buffer will no longer be managed as a large storage block but rather as a list of small objects, thus preventing the occurrence of temporary extreme peaks in storage space.
The F7 setting "Profile name" (Roof design -> “Surface areas”) is now available as a placeholder. Roof areas and rafters are evaluated. If, for instance, this new placeholder is integrated into the component hint settings of rafters and roof areas, the component hint for each rafter and roof area will display the respective profile name.
The Project Manager has been given a new look. If a building project is opened in the Explorer with a double-click, the SEMA Project Manager will open up. The “Building Project Preview” is then displayed in the top section of the window. The entered building project’s properties are listed below this preview. In the pull-down menu it is possible to set the version in which you want to work on the project. The “Options” button gives access to the SEMA Project Manager options. Depending on the version which has been set in the pull-down menu, the corresponding version icon will be displayed in the bottom of the window. A click onto this icon opens the building project in the version set. If a building project with a previously allocated Presenter status is opened, it will additionally be possible to open the project in the Presenter.
To make the use of the SEMA programs on tablet computers easier, a new keyboard palette has been added. You can activate the keyboard via a right-click into the icon bar area. In this palette you will find the most important keys to use SEMA on a tablet, e.g. the number block, enter, escape etc. Of course you can add further keys to the palette: Go to the customized menu -> “Command” tab -> “Keyboard” and activate further elements.
In addition, a new touchscreen gesture control for certain actions with your fingers has been integrated. If you swipe in 2D or 3D mode with one finger from left to right or from top to bottom, the project will be shifted. If you swipe in 3D with two fingers, you can turn the project. And for zooming in 2D or 3D mode, you either spread two fingers apart (zoom in) or pinch them together (zoom out).
These gestures are, of course, also supported by the SEMA Presenter so that you can present your projects perfectly on a tablet.
Did you forget important tasks or dates in a project, or even overlook constructive details during production" With the newly developed “User information” in the Check Center this will no longer happen. The user information can be easily included in 2D as well as 3D mode and is displayed in all views – so you can never miss them.
You can access the Check Center via a right-click in the top icon bar or via “Extras” -> “Check Center”. In addition, a special icon (warning triangle) has been integrated into the top icon bar. Then, in the upper part of the Check Center, the new function “User information” (grey pin) has been integrated. After selecting this function, a new master data record will open (a new “Check Center” group with the same has, of course, also been integrated in the master data).
Under the first tab of the user information master data record, you can select the type of event: “Task”, “Highlight”, “Warning” and “Info”. With the event status you determine the current status of the event. These two settings also determine what the user information looks like. If you for example select the type of event “Task” and the status “open”, the user information is displayed as a calendar. When the status is switched to “done”, a green tick is added to the calendar. Thus you can immediately see and check the status of the different user information events. In addition, you can assign a name to the user information which is accordingly displayed in the Check Center. If no name is assigned, the user information is listed in the Check Center with the type of event, e.g. task. After a user information event has been created, also an information text can be added under the first tab which will be displayed in the Check Center under “Additional information”.
Under the “History” tab, changes of the user information can be documented. Via an integrated button, the date and time of the day can be added by mouse click. Thus you can quickly and easily document all changes to a user information element.
Under the „Others“ tab, you can assign up to ten file attachments or hyperlinks. After selecting one of these reference fields, a dialogue box to select the file will open. In addition, files can be added to an event with “drag&drop”. To make sure building project do not become too large, a warning message will appear if file attachments exceed 10 MB. There is also the option to link files: With a right-click on the reference field and “Create file link and attach” again a dialogue box to select the file opens up. However, the selected file is not attached to the building project and not included when the building project is sent to another user. Furthermore, with a right-click on the reference field and “Create link to directory and attach” a directory can be linked. Finally, there is also the “Create hyperlink (internet) and attach” option available. Here, a web browser window will open up to link to a website. You just need to enter the web address (e.g. www.sema-soft.com) and then confirm with “Adopt web link” (green tick next to the address line).
Once a user information element has been created, it can be used in 2D as well as 3D mode.
In the bottom input line you can select, if the user information is to be connected with a component or not. If the user information is connected with a component, it will be indicated in the Check Center right after the user information.
Once a user information element has been created, it automatically appears in the Check Center. For that purpose, the new group “User Information” has been integrated in the Check Center. Under this group all user information elements for a building project are listed. Under the first branch the type of event (i.e. task, highlight, warning, info) is listed. Then the storey (and the storey abbreviation) under which the event has been placed is displayed. Then it branches out into the component for which the event has been created (e.g. wall shape). To guarantee maximum overview, the user information is always displayed with the type of event and status. User information elements with a file attachment/hyperlink get a little red triangle to indicate the attachment/hyperlink. Via a right click on such a user information element the file attachment/hyperlink can be opened directly. In addition, via a right-click, the user information element can be deleted or marked in the drawing. What’s new here is the option to make “involved components visible” which is also available for collisions, auto corner and editings. With this option, involved components are marked and subsequently only these marked components can be displayed.
In the upper part of the Check Center, user information and check symbols can be switched visible or invisible via the “Display symbols and user information” (eye) icon.
The user information in the Check Center gives fast access to important tasks, warnings, highlights and info directly in the building project.
The newly developed SEMA Online Program Update will always keep the program up-to-date. With obvious benefits: The program will automatically and always be in the latest version on your PC, without the need of looking for updates, all installed SEMA programs will always use the latest and the same version. At the bottom right of the program a traffic light has been integrated which directly displays whether or not the program is up-to-date. Red indicates that program is out-of-date; yellow indicates that it has not been updated and green that program is up-to-date. In addition, text information on the current status is provided by moving the mouse over the traffic light. By clicking onto the traffic light the newly developed SEMA Online Program Update will open up. What’s more, the update can be opened via the question mark -> “SEMA Online Program Update” in the top toolbar. By means of a coloured sign (red, yellow or green) in this window, the current status of the program can immediately be seen. Likewise, text information will be displayed when the mouse is moved over the sign. Furthermore, at the right side there is information on the installed and current version as well as on the date of the last search for an update and the last update installation. In addition to this, it is possible to access the latest enhancements and new features via “Display release history”. With the “Settings” button you get to the SEMA Online Program Update settings. The following update options are available:
“Download and install updates automatically (recommended)“
When this type of update is selected, the program will automatically look for an update version of the program and – if available – will download the latest update in the background. The download progress will be displayed in the component hint. The downloaded update will be automatically installed when exiting the program. Please make sure that all other SEMA programs are closed at that time. If not, a message will remind you to do so.
“Look for updates automatically, but download manually“
Whenever you start the program, it will automatically check for new updates and indicate it via the traffic lights that popup (“A new update is ready for download, Build XXXX”). Additionally, the traffic light will turn red. In contrast to type 1, however, it is now required to manually download the update. This has to be done in the window of the Program Update -> “Download current version now”. This will start the download of the update which will then be installed when exiting the program, just like before.
In both update types it is possible to activate the option to open the respective release history automatically after a program update.
“Never look for updates (not recommended)“.
This update type neither automatically looks for updates nor does it install anything automatically. Thus, important enhancements of the program can be missed and the program is not up-to-date. Nevertheless, as accustomed, it is possible to install the latest update via the Start Center or directly from the SEMA website. <Highlight Film SEMA Online Program Update>
Designing a complete building on any ground plan with a few clicks only" Child’s play with the new “Freeform” option in the building Assistant. By just a single mouse click, the ground plan polygon is adopted by the assistant directly from the drawing. You can then already see the building in the screen image as well as in the 3D view of the assistant. Just one click onto "Finish" will close the assistant and tranfer the complete building into the drawing.
The new freeforms are available in the building assistant under “Log construction”, “Timber-framed construction”, “Masonry”, “Hole log” and “Templates”, always in the new “Other roof shapes“ folder. To keep the use of these freeforms as simple as possible, they are managed almost exactly the same as the previous dynamic building macros; however, one detail is different: Unlike the old macros, in which the ground plan form has been determined a priori by selecting e.g. L-shaped, T-shaped building etc., the ground plan form is now adopted directly from the project.
As accustomed, the number of storeys, the height and the insertion mode is defined under the first tab. Under the “Geometry” tap of the freeform it is only necessary to select the previously defined ground plan (polygon) in the project and the program will calculate a corresponding building. By selecting the polygon under the “Roof” tab, the corresponding number of roof references will automatically be created. As always, the walls, windows and doors for the individual storeys are managed under the “Walls” tab. The references for the ceiling plates are available under the “Ceiling” tab. Under the last tab it is possible to allocate additional data. By clicking “Finish” at the end, the program will automatically create a building on the ground plan. It is thus possible to define any imaginable ground plan shape via a polygon and the building will then be created with just a few clicks on it. For the polygon it is important that there are no lengths shorter than 25 cm and no roundings.
The creation of even complicated and extraordinary building shapes becomes child’s play with this new tool. <Highlight Film Complex Buildings – Fast and Easy>
A double T-shaped building has been added to the dynamic building macros. This pre-defined macro is available under the folders “Log construction”, “Timber-framed construction”, “Whole log” and “Templates” under “Other roof shapes”. Thus, by means of the assistant, it is possible to design buildings with two transverse buildings by simple geometry inputs with the assistant. <Highlight Film Complex Buildings – Fast and Easy>
What’s more, it is now possible to create pitched roofs on L-shaped buildings (either with ridge or with valley) or rectangular buildings. For that purpose, the folder “Pitched roofs” has been integrated under each trade. Creating such dynamic ground plans with pitched roofs is not different from the way it has been before. After the ground plan has been selected it is possible to adapt the storeys, the geometry, the roof with overhang beginning and end, the walls, the windows, the door and the ceilings. After clicking “Finish”, the whole building is attached to the mouse and can be positioned any place. Even buildings with pitched roofs can now be created quickly and comfortably by means of the assistant. <Highlight Film Complex Buildings – Fast and Easy>
Under Extras -> “Options” -> “Activate/deactivate alerts” it is possible to activate the prompt “Delete empty storeys”. If this prompt is active, on the insertion of a dynamic building or stair macro, a message will appear, asking whether or not the existing empty storeys are to be deleted. (Weiss)
As of now, all timber components, stair components and boards can be displayed and auto dimensioned in the top toolbar via the “View single component” function. With a simple click an auto dimensioned front view (side 4), a side view from the left side (beginning of component), a side view from the right side (end of component), a top view (side 3), a back view (side 2), a bottom view (side 1) and a texturised 3D oblique view of the component will be created. By switching to the layout view, a pre-defined plan will open up; in this plan the dimensioned views as well as the 3D oblique view are accordingly arranged.
In order to enable this, the function “View single component” has been divided into "Carpenter’s dimensioning" and "Production drawing". Depending on the option chosen, the component will be displayed in the classic carpenter’s dimensioning view or in the new production drawing view. The last-set option will always be the one used in the next call up.
Simultaneously, the machine export of stairs single components has been given a new, own icon (machine export, stairs, single components) so that stairs components, too, can be included in the production drawing.
The production drawing shows a timber component, a stair component or a board in the 6 side views of the outline rectangle. The program automatically dimensions the outline of the component as well as the editings of the respective view side. Editings not located on the view side and oblique surfaces will be displayed in shaded colour and will not be dimensioned automatically.
Those auto dimensions of the components which are displayed in the production drawing can be set via a reference in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under "General points" -> “Dimensioning”. The “Component production drawing” and the “Stairs component production drawing”, each, have a reference field for dimensioning. Thus, it is possible to create detailed auto dimensionings for components (timbers and boards) and stairs components.
A floating menu with the following options is available for the component view drawing: All dimensioned side views as well as the 3D oblique view can be flipped through with the arrow keys. By means of the arrows, which are arranged side by side, it is possible to indepently turn the component views vertically, horizontically and counter-clockwise.
With the next three options, the 3D oblique view is either drawn in the wire-frame model, in the surface view with edges or in the textured view. Finally, the component drawing can be saved in the drawing administration under the “Components” tab and is thus saved under the building project.
If a PDF is directly created in layout view, the system automatically saves the component and the corresponding plan.
All possible settings within the component view can be activated in the view settings (F7) under “Images+3D” -> “Component drawing”. Font and font sizes of the component views are defined in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under the "Look" tab, “>>more…>>" -> "Component view".
In addition to that, the auto placing of the different views has been made available for the arrangement borders (properties of the arrangement border). A landscape-format standard plan for all timber and stairs components has already been pre-defined; needless to say, these plans can be adjusted under observing the following rule for standard plans: The standard plan for the component production drawing must be given the name “Standard production drawing_6“. Only then the program will be able to automatically recognize this plan. <Highlight Film Production Drawings for Timber and Stairs Components>
To make the use of the SEMA program even easier, double-clicking has been incorporated. By double-clicking onto a component, the “Modify” command of the component opens up. This is possible for all components with “Modify” command. The speed of the double-click can be set in the Windows Control Panel. If several or different components are marked, as always a prompt will double check which components are to be modified or whether components are to be modified together or separately. <Highlight Film Program Usability>
Marked components can be unmarked with the "Esc" button. <Highlight Film Program Usability>
The “Settings” option has been added to the right-click menu. Via this menu the “View options (F7)”, the “Colour settings” and the “Component hint settings” can be opened. If a component has been marked, the program automatically goes to the respective settings for this component. <Highlight Film Program Usability>
In order to give users a better overview when working with several open windows, it is possible to replace the current numbering of the window bar by the drawing title/name. Thus, for example the window “Attic storey” will not just be indicated with “1”, but rather with “Attic storey”. Depending on how many windows are open, the names will be displayed with the first 5 characters. Walls and cuts are exceptions to this; here, the relevant information is to be found at the end and therefore the last 5 characters will be displayed. This new feature has been integrated into the “Options” tab in the “Customized menu” (right-click onto top toolbar) where the feature can be activated or deactivated under the “Show drawing title in window manager” option.
With this new feature, SEMA can be individualsed even more and working with the SEMA system becomes easier and more efficient.

Toolbars/Palettes

The windows administration will now be arranged horizontally below the standard toolbar. For better orientation the name of the window instead of a number will be provided. <Highlight Film Program Usability>
At the left border of the drawing, the master data container is pinned on by default. <Highlight Film Program Usability>
In Version 14-1 a quick and direct access to the component properties has been enabled. A user-defined command opens up any field in the master data of components. It is possible, for example, to access the width of rafters by just one click. Another example is the direct access to the structural material of ceiling beams in the material list tab. In order to make this access possible, the following steps have to be carried out: pick a ceiling beam, mark it and then go via the editing command “Modify” to the “ML” tab; here click the line “Structural analysis material” (field has to be active). Now select the “Define command” option via a right-click in the top toolbar. In the menu that opens you can enter a name, a description and a symbol for the new command. After clicking the “OK“ button, the new command will be created automatically.
If one or several ceiling beams are marked now, and this newly-created command is selected, the component’s master data will open automatically and the cursor will be positioned directly on “Structural material”. Another example is modifying of layer projections of walls, with exactly the same procedure: You switch to the wall’s master data, select the projections and the “Define command” option via a right-click (in the top toolbar). In this menu it is now possible to tick the “Open input directly” box. This opens the menu of the layer projections directly when clicking the newly-created command. The same procedure applies to open a reference directly in a master data. The newly-created commands are stored in the “User-defined commands” toolbar, which is to be found in the customized menu (right-click onto toolbar -> “Customize”) under the “Commands” tab in the “User-defined commands” category. Modifying important component data is made considerably faster with these specific user buttons. <Highlight Film Fast and Straight-Forward Changing of Important Data>

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

Marking out of measuring points with subsequent calculation of the dimension line has been revised in some detail. (Fuchs)

Coverings Roof

Specific requirements of roofers and sheet metal workers have been added to the evaluations in the material list. As of now it is possible to separately transfer all roof edges individually to the material list. The roof edges will be given their own number and thus an allocation on the plan. Moreover, for each roof edge the so-called “Bending angle” can be displayed. Thus, for example, the exact evaluation of a valley through length and bending angle for a valley flashing is possible.
The transfer of the roof edges is defined in the general pre-settings (Alt F7) under "Evaluations" under the “Roof” tab. The standard transfer mode of the roof edges is "Edges summarized by type". By means of this mode, all edges are transferred to the material list in a compiled manner according to type (eaves, ridge, valley, etc.). The new “each edge individually” mode will automatically allocate a number to each edge and transfer them separately to the material list.
Numbers and lengths of the edges can be activated in the display settings (F7) -> “Roof design” -> “Surfaces” in the field “Component values” in top view.
With these new evaluations of roof edges it is possible to quickly and easily create precise evaluations for roofers and sheet metal workers.

Rafter System

The “Penetration” end type has been revised and enhanced. This end type, chiefly designed for closing boards, can now be used for all components and combinations of components. Thus, the “Penetration” end type has become independent from the component type, the alignment and the reference sides. (Isoplan, Flasche, Ingerl, amongst others.)
Vast enhancements and corrections of bird’s mouth and component intersections have been made. (Sebalex, Schwarzwald Abbund, Vaiana, Haas, Nüssli, Hätscher, ABZ Ulm, Blaas, Gentner, Oberlander, Emig, Thorwart, BBS Ahaus, Stiegeler, Bianchiferraro, Azzolini, Edili, Hobelsberger, Skaletzka, Theurl)
The function "automatic abandoning of unnecessary processings”, to be found in the BP properties, has been revised and improved. (Burn, Hoprog, Flück, Leduc, Italy)
As of Version 14.1 the command “Cut several times” has been programmed. Cuttings of timber members can be bevelled against up to 8 planes.
By marking any timber component and selecting the edit command “Cut” in 3D mode, the “Cut several times” option will be available in addition to the accustomed cut commands. At first, the required target areas have to be determined by mouse. For better overview, areas which have been clicked maintain their preview. Thus, the user is able to see at any time the areas he already has chosen. For example, if you have selected three cutting areas and clicked onto the adjacent icon “Adopt selected areas”, you get to the selection of the available cutting types. Instead of clicking the icon, it is also possible to finish the area selection by ENTER. As accustomed, the execution of the multiple cut can be flipped through with the space bar. In order to facilitate the selection of the cutting types it is possible to switch the timber members to transparent (icon "Members transparent” in the 3D floating menu). After the cutting type has been selected, the command can be closed either by mouse-click or ENTER.
If an area has been clicked accidentally during areas capturing, the entry can be made undone by means of the option button “Delete the last selected cutting plane (Alt+F1)" (entry line, button on the bottom right). During area capturing it is also possible to define a distance to the area captured with the space bar. As an alternative to area capturing, the entry option "Determine area through 3 points (Ctrl+8)" is provided.
Examples of use with three cutting planes are sophisticated tail intersections of ridges and valleys on purlin corners. In cuttings directed outwards, components can be bevelled against up to eight planes. One example is posts which are to be cut under the ridges of tent or turret roofs. It is also possible, however, to cut truss posts under the valley points of hip areas very quickly and easily. <Highlight Film New 3D Command: Cut Several times>

Wall Ceiling

The gross volume and net volume of ceiling shapes is evaluated in the material list. What’s more, a CAD text with placeholders for gross volume and net volume can be linked to a ceiling.

Coverings Wall Ceiling

The display of shifted layers has been enhanced in a specific case. (Büdenbender)

Wall and Ceiling Members

The “limited” setting has been added to the tenon hole for the “Dovetail” end type. The tenon hole thus ends at the top tenon surface and will not be extended into adjacent components. The limited tenon hole particularly useful in log constructions, especially for the connection of interior walls with exterior walls. Due to the staggered alignment of the planks/logs, the dovetail tenon has effect on 2 members of the exterior wall. The setting “limited” makes sure that the mortise is not unnecessarily extended to the second member. (Bachmann)

Stairs

Creating stairs on a polygon made-easy. If the designated ground plan in the building project exists as a polygon, it is possible to comfortably create stairs with just a few clicks with the new command "Stairs on polygon" command. This new command is under Stairs -> “Stairs in CAD” in the program selection. By activating the command, the required stairs construction can be selected and adapted, if necessary. All possible types of stairs, such as for example stringer stairs, bracketed stairs, concrete stairs, bolt stairs or self-supporting stairs are available. Then the bottom step edge can be selected on the existing ground plan. When approaching the edge (with the mouse), a bottom step symbol will be displayed. With a click on the edge, the bottom step is adopted and a query for the last step will appear. When approaching the last step edge, a last step symbol is displayed. With a click on the edge, the last step is adopted and a query for the walking line will appear. One of the following walking line references can be selected: In stairs direction, the left or the right edge of the ground plan or a user-drawn line.
If the left or the right edge is selected as reference edge, an entry field opens up additionally; here, the distance to the reference edge has to be entered. However, the distance to the reference edge can also be determined by the mouse. If a CAD line is selected as reference edge, the stairs will be created at once. By means of this new function, stairs can be designed/constructed on any ground plan in a very quick and easy manner. <Highlight Film Stairs on Polygon>
Comfortable stairs creation from a polyline. If the ground plan exists in the building project, it is possible to create stairs very quickly and easily with the new “Stairs on line” command (program selection -> “Stairs” -> “Stairs in CAD”).
By activating the command, the required stairs construction can be selected and adapted, if necessary. All possible types of stairs, such as for example stringer stairs, bracketed stairs, concrete stairs, bolt stairs or self-supporting stairs are available. Subsequently, the “Left Side”, the “Right Side” and the “Walking Line” can be determined in the existing ground plan. If there is only one CAD line available for one side, the line can be adopted with just one click. If several lines belong to one side, the “CTRL” key has to be used when clicking the lines. Then the query for the walking line reference will appear. One of the following walking line references can be selected: In stairs direction, the left or the right edge of the ground plan or a user-drawn line. If the left or the right edge is selected as reference edge, an entry field opens up additionally; here, the distance to the reference edge has to be entered.
However, the distance to the reference edge can also be determined by the mouse. If a CAD line is selected as reference edge, the stairs will be created at once. This entry can be used if no polygon exists or, for example, if the bottom step and the last step of stairs overlap and it is not possible to create a polygon.
By means of this new function, stairs can be designed/constructed on any ground plan in a very quick and easy manner. <Highlight Film Stairs on Line>
If stairs have already been created and need to be modified subsequently, e.g. the reference side of a walking line or a manually-drawn walking line – this is now possible with the new “Walking line on (poly)line” command. When selecting the command, which can be found in the program selection under “Stairs” -> “Stairs in CAD”, the entry line opens for the stairs and walking line input. Now one click onto a component of the stairs in question and on the manually-drawn walking line or reference side is enough. If a reference side is selected, an additionally query for the distance to the reference side will come up. This distance can also be determined by the mouse. If a manually-drawn walking line is selected, this walking line is adopted and the stairs calculation is carried out immediately.
With this function, the walking line can be determined or modified in a very easy and flexible manner.
Bottom step, last step, finish. Stairs designing on any ground plan with just three clicks. It’s that easy with the new “Freeform” option in the stairs assistant:
If the designated ground plan exists as a polygon in the building project, open the stairs assistant and select the new category “Freeform” where the components “All components railing left”, “All components railing right” and “Only treads” are available. After entering the storey data, the “Geometry” tab provides the queries on bottom step edge and last step edge, which can be directly taken from the drawing and transferred to the assistant via mouse click. In the screen and 3D image of the assistant the stairs are already displayed. Clicking the “Finish” button will close the assistant and transfer the completely finished stairs to the drawing.
If you want to create stairs with a user-defined walking line, this walking line must first be drawn in the ground plan by CAD. Then, just as the bottom step edge and the last step edge before, the walking line can be taken directly from the drawing to the assistant via mouse click. The walking line, too, will immediately be visible in the screen image.
As an alternative to the drawn walking line, it is possible to select and adopt either the right or the left side (of the stairs) as reference for a walking line by moving the mouse. The walking line will then be created with a distance of 45 cm from the reference edge.
Even complex and unusual forms of stairs can be created most easily by means of this new tool. <Highlight Film Simple Stairs Construction on Complicated Ground Plans>
The stairs auto output has been revised for components of the connecting railing. (Gemmeke)
The spacing of palings/balusters of a connecting railing with “rounded edges” has been improved. (Aimer)

Energy Performance

In Version 14.1 an assessment of the moisture protection of walls according to the Glaser method according to DIN 4108 has been enabled. At the push of a button it is possible to calculate the U-value, the temperature profile, the condensation period and the evaporation within a wall. Needless to say, all evaluated tables and results can be saved or printed and thus be passed on by just one click. In order to make these calculations possible, all components relevant for the energery performance/building physics have been given the new “Misc” tab where, under “Building physics”, the thermal conductivity λ and the diffusion parameter μ or Sd [m] minimal and maximal are assigned. For walls, in the “Misc” tab under “Building physics”, it is possible to indicate the U value [W/m²+K] and the surface timber/space proportion in percentages. By indicating the surface proportion it is also possible to calculate non-homogeneous walls. The timber frames and space inbetween can either be calculated automatically or entered manually. “Automatically” means that the program automatically calculates the timber-space ratio according to auto settings and correspondingly includes it into the calculation of the U-value. The data relevant in terms of building physics and engery performance for the space and the timber frames are calculated by the program from the materials which are allocated under the “Layers” tab in “Timber Spacing”, “Insulating material” and “Fixing studs”. In whole-log walls the component which is entered in the “Wall” tab under “Bottom boom” is used for the calculation. As accustomed, the additional tab of the wall must provide the entry “WHOLE-LOG WALL OUTLINE END” so that a whole-log wall can be identified.
If no U value is defined in the “Misc” tab of a wall, then the calculation of the U value of each wall will automatically be carried out during the transfer to the material list and can thus be displayed. If a U value has already been allocated, this value will remain unchanged during transfer to the material list. Of course also the materials’ energy performance values (Sd value, μ value and λ) are transferred to the material list.
Under “Extras”, the new option “Energy performance Glaser....” has been incorporated for the calculation of the walls. After having opened this function, a wall has to be selected and the new energy performance window opens up.
The first tab “Temperature profile” automatically displays a diagram showing the cross-section of the selected wall. The graph indicates the condensation period with a blue line and the evaporation period with a green line. In addition to that, the wall structure from the inside to the outside is textually described next to the diagram. The inside of a wall is always the left side. Moreover, in the bottom part of the window it is possible to switch between the display or calculation of the spaces and the timber frames.
The diagram of the next tab - “Condesation period” – displays the saturated vapour pressure with a black line and the partial vapour pressure with a red line. The point of intersection of the red and black line is where condensation water will develop.
Likewise, the “Evaporation” tab shows the saturated vapour pressure (black line) and the partial vapour pressure (red line).
Via a right-click on the respective diagram, the diagrams of the first three tabs can be copied into the clipboard. Thus, these charts can be pasted into a word document (or other documents) in the drawing administration under “Drawings”,
The “Special conditions” tab is for the administration of the climate data for the calculation of the building physics/energy performance. The duration (h), the condensation and the evaporation period, the temperature and the air humidity can be modified and saved via the “Save” buttons. Via the “DIN 4108“ button, all climate data will be reset to the data stipulated according to DIN 4108. In addition to that, general data such as component type, thermal flow and surface proportion space/timber can be found at the right side to provide better overview.
The “Temperature table” tab displays the calculated temperature profile. It is thus possible to exactly examine how the temperature of a wall varies within the individual layers.
The “Pressure table” tab displays the calculated vapour pressure profile in order to be able to track the pressure within the individual layers of the wall.
The final tab “Evaluation” provides a summary of all the values previously calculated. At a glance the user is provided with information such as U values, condensation water analysis including the amount of condensation water and the evaporation amount and he also gets information on whether or not construction/building complies with the regulations according to DIN 4108. Visual means (green check symbols, red and black exclamation marks) support the wall structure’s energy performance evaluation.
In the bottom part of the energy performance window it is possible to switch the layer structure with a button.
Moreover, it is now possible to transfer the calculated “situation” of the wall into the drawing administration by means of the “Transfer into BP” function. For that purpose, the new “Energy performance” tab has been added to the drawing administration. This means, the energy performance calculation is saved together with the project and can be called up again any time.
In addition to that, via the “Preview” option a multiple page document, including all diagrams and tables from the calculation, can be automatically created with a simple click. Needless to say, the template can be customized according to one’s own needs. <Highlight Film Energy Performance in the SEMA Program>

Master Data Macros Program

During the installation of Version 14.1 all master data folders can be adopted in case of a data transfer from Version 12.2. The active folder of Version 12.2 will be transferred to Version 14.1 where it will be the active master folder there, too. The name of the active folder (Version 12.2) will remain unchanged. If the properties of the master folder allow for it, it will be updated with the latest master data of Version 14.1.
As of Version 12.2 it is possible to access several master folders under the creation commands and master-date containers at the same time by ticking the folders in question. This status, too, is transferred to Version 14.1.
The name allocation of master folders has been enhanced. Accordingly, the SEMA standard master data are transferred to the administration with an acronym for the version. In the current version the master folder is consequently called “Work master data 14.1”. The numbering names the version and the date of issue which is “First half of 2014”.
Also the name allocation when creating a master folder has been expanded accordingly. The input of the compound name is done in preset fields. In the first field any name at all can be entered. In the second and third field it is possible to assign a number or the version of the folder, a date or something similar. Specific special characters cannot be entered (e.g. :/*"). In case of such input the user will be informed by an explanatory note and it will not be possible to use the name. The intended name of the master folder will be displayed in the preview directly below the entry fields.
The “Rename” command has been integrated under the menu item "Master folder".
In specific cases, in connection with script-reference entries under the material list tab, subordinate master data were unnecessarily saved under when saving walls. This has been fixed. (Renggli)

Master Data Macros Contents & Revisions

Fasteners of SIHGA have been added to the working and original master data of Version 14-1. Hobafix fasteners are available in all existing sizes.
The column bases "SF IS Maxi" and "SF ISB Maxi" of Simpson have been updated. The drilling patterns and the height of the column bases have been modified accordingly. They can be picked out of the original master data of Version 14-1. (Schwarz)
The BSH texture has been improved. Now, the texture of the face and side match exactly.
“Structured 01”, the standard plaster texture for walls, has been replaced by texture "Structured 02". Effects such as, for instance, the flickering when turning buildings in textured view will thus no longer occur.
All materials and components relevant for the energy performance have been added to with the respective energy-performance values in the working and original master data of Version 14-1. <Highlight Film Energy Performance in the SEMA Program>
A suitable template for the printing of the energy-performance calculation has been provided. <Highlight Film Energy Performance in the SEMA Program>
The group “User information” has been added to the Check Center. Corresponding examples for tasks, information, highlights and warnings have been made available. <Highlight Film Task Administration in the Check Center>
The folders “Images” and “Diagrams” for the Building and Stairs Assistants have been redesigned.
The folder structure for dynamic building macros has been changed. The subgroups “Pitched roofs” and “Other roof types” can be found under the group of the intended construction type (log construction, timber-framed construction etc.). <Highlight Film Complex Buildings – Fast and Easy>
Under the “Pitched roofs” feature, each construction type will be provided with a rectangular pitched roof, as well as an L-shaped building with valley or ridge. <Highlight Film Simple Stairs Construction on Complicated Ground Plans>
Version 14-1 provides further new features: a double t-shaped building and a free form – both to be found under “Other roof types”.
The new group “Free form” can be found under the dynamic stairs macros. This group contains examples for any forms of ground plans: either complete with all components or with treads only. <Highlight Film Production Drawings for Timber and Stairs Components>
A plan template has been made available for the new production drawing for timber and stairs components.
A new legend macro has been created for the production drawing. <Highlight Film Production Drawings for Timber and Stairs Components>
What’s more, there is a new auto dimensioning feature for the production drawing: “Component production drawing”. This dimensioning has been correspondingly integrated under Alt+F7. <Highlight Film Production Drawings for Timber and Stairs Components>
As of now, the reduced lengths of dowel pins and fitting bolts will correctly be transferred to the material list. The revised dowel pins and fitting bolts can be picked out of the original master data of Version 14-1. (Haberl)

Single Member

From now on, in BPX2 Export, members carrying tongue and groove information will be exported as log plank. For that purpose, the tongue/groove of the log plank has to be defined under the component’s tab “Ad” (additional data) as follows:
BPX2BlockPlank
GrooveCount = 3
GrooveSide = 4
GrooveDistance = 20
GrooveHeight = 10
GrooveWidth = 15
If the component is now exported via BPX2, this component will appear as a log plank in the Cambium (as of Version 1.10) and will be displayed with the pre-defined tongues and grooves.
Processings are now calculated even more exactly in the application and are thus available in Single Member in an even more accurate way. The calculation accuracy of the processings has been enhanced from a tenth of a millimetre to a hundredth of a millimetre. This accuracy will also be adopted for the transfer to Single Member. As before, Single Member displays millimetres, however, as of now, two decimal points after the comma are displayed. The export accuracy can be set in the general settings -> “CMP export” -> ”Project” -> ”Round”. The available settings are “millimetre”, “a tenth of a millimetre”, “a hundredth of a millimetre” and “a thousandth of a millimetre”. The standard setting is “a tenth of a millimetre”. The BVX2 export is performed with a thousandth of a millimetre. As accustomed, the export to the K2 and to the P10 machine is carried out with an accuracy of a tenth of a millimetre. Thus, processings are transferred precisely – from the application to the machine.
The export of contours in the BVX2 and BTL format has been upgraded and enhanced. If a component with extrusion object is processed, it will be possible as of now to define an “M contour co” at the extrusion object under the “Edi” (Editing) tab. Hence, milling and cleaning out will take place within the contour.
Summarizing contours during the K2 Export has been enhanced in detail. (Haudenschild)
As of Version 10.6 new material information has been made available for the CMP export in order to optimize the manufacturing on the machine. Depending on the material properties, specific tools, engine speeds or feed rates will be used on the machine. In order to perfectly transfer the material information from the SEMA application to the machine, the settings under the “Material details” of the “Misc” tab are available for the relevant components and materials.
The material information can be determined in the “Material group”. The material groups available are: "BA" for battens, "BO" for boarding, "MT" for massive timber, "ME" for membranes (films, paper), "PB" for plasterboard, "GW" for gypsum wallboard, "IN" for insulation, "BM" for board-based materials (OSB, plywood), "FB" for facing boards/cladding panels, "PB" for profiled boards and "PL" for plaster or glue.
If different material types exist within one material group, it is possible to individually define the material by allocating a three-digit identification number or an identification text via the “Material type” option.

DXF Interface

DXF import and export has been enhanced further.

Release History V12.2 Build 7000

General Points

The performance of the program has been enhanced in particular for building projects with many 3D objects or inscriptions. One main concern was to ensure that also large building projects can be edited smoothly right at the time when the computer is calculating the components in the background.
Perfect and easy calculation of your projects with SEMA and WGsystem.
Two new functions - “Calculation WGsystem” and “Project settings WGsystem” – have been incorporated for an even faster calculation of projects. Via “Calculation WGsystem”, an exact calculation, including all performance parameters, will be automatically created for all components from the active ground plan. It is possible to immediately print out a quotation, including all trade works, from the automatically generated calculation. By means of the “Project settings WGsystem” function, it is possible to make project-specific presetting for the calculation. These settings will be saved for the respective project and will be taken into account when the calculation is called up again.
As of Version 12. 2 the functionality of the Check Center has been enhanced. With immediate effect, the Check Center will automatically identify missing counter-processings.
Members with end types do not create counter-processings after constructional changes and then cannot be assembled at the building site" This will not happen any longer with the enhanced SEMA Check Center.
The following end types are taken into account:
Dovetail connections, dovetail scarf joints, cut-outs, end type extensions and penetrations, skew notches and tenon connections.
In the following example, the component will show the usual warning triangle if the end type does not create a counter-processing:
A post with a tenon was positioned under a purlin. Due to structural reasons, the cross-sectional dimension of the purlin has to be increased by 2 cm. Now, the tenon does not create a mortise in the purlin any longer. After the calculation by the Check Center, this will be indicated with a warning triangle. As the result of re-intersecting, the tenon connection will be corrected and unpleasant surprises on the building site will be avoided.
The new group “Processings” has been incorporated in order to maintain the clear structure within the Check Center. This group lists components with the end types mentioned above, which do not create a counter-processing. If the member is intersected correctly, then the end type will create the correct counter-processing and the component will disappear from the list after the re-calculation by the Check Center. Needless to say, also here, all usual, functions such as “Mark involved components”, “Ignore conflicts” or “Delete check nodes” are available.
With the new ability to automatically identify missing counter-processings, the Check Center has been logically improved and enhanced. <Highlight Film Processings in the Check Center>
As of now, all flat steel connectors (new in 12.2), steel components (I-beams, rectangular profiles etc.), self-created 3D objects or predefined fasteners can be displayed in the top toolbar via the “View individual component“ function and can automatically be dimensioned. At just one push of a button a front view, a side view, a top view, a 3D oblique view and an automatically dimensioned detail view of the component will be created in component view. When switching to layout view then, a predefined drawing opens. On the left side of this drawing a multi-view orthographic projection (front view, side view and top view) and on the right side the dimensioned detail view will be created automatically. If the component consists of several individual and grouped components, the corresponding number of arrangement borders for the details will automatically be created. With just two “clicks" to a plan perfectly dimensioned down to the last detail.
Auto dimensioning of those components which are displayed in component view can be set via a reference in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under "General points" -> “Dimensioning“ tab.
In the component view drawing a floating menu with the following options is available: front view, side view, top view, 3D oblique view and detail view which can be navigated by the arrow keys. The arrows, which are arranged side by side, enable vertical, horizontal and counter-clockwise rotation of the component views. If either the front view, the side view or the top view is rotated into a different direction, then, as a matter of course, both of the other views automatically adjust. Thus, the user always automatically gets a perfect multi-view orthographic projection of the component. Needless to say, it is also possible to rotate the detail views of the component independently of one another.
With the next three options the 3D oblique view is either drawn in the wire-frame model, in the area view with edges or in textured view. Finally, the component drawing can be saved. As accustomed, it is saved under the drawing administration -> “Components“ tab and is thus saved together with the building project.
All possible settings within the component view can be set in the display settings (F7) under "Images+3D" -> "Component drawing”. Font and font size for the component views are defined in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under the “Optics" tab and ”>>more…>>" -> "Component view". In addition to this, a new option for the automatic placing of the different views within the arrangement borders has been made available.
The contents of the arrangement border can be determined in the “Properties of the arrangement border” option. Here, top view, front view, side view, 3D oblique view and detail view are available. Thus, the arrangement borders will be automatically filled with the pre-set view. Standard plans for components consisting of 8 individual components as a maximum have already been pre-defined. The program automatically detects the number of components the object consists of, and correspondingly selects the correct plan for this object. If a grouped component consists of more than 8 components, the respective number of arrangement borders will be arranged one after the other automatically in detail view. Of course, it is possible to create additional plans for more than 8 components. The following rule has to be observed: A standard plan for 9 components would have to be given the name “Standard component_9“ as only then the program will be able to automatically identify this plan. The same applies to modifying already existing standard plans. Needless to say, the contents of the plan can be customized for one’s own needs; the name of the plan, however, must always remain the same. <Highlight Film Steel Elements: Single Connector> <Highlight Film Steel Elements: Node Connector> <Highlight Film Steel Elements: Grouped Steel Elements>

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

As of now, it is possible to determine under the “Scale” editing command whether the scaled object are to be abandoned or kept.
The new functions “Unit for length dimensions” and “Decimal places” have been added to the master data of the dimensioning on the “O” (optics) tab. For the “Unit for length dimensions” the settings “from Alt+F7”, “Meter”, “Centimeter” and “Millimeter” are available. Thus, the unit of length can be selected independent from the pre-settings (Alt+F7). In addition to this, under “Decimal places”, it is possible to define the number of places to be displayed after the decimal point. These new features make it possible to dimension walls in top view in meter and steel parts in millimeter, for example.
As of now, it is possible to automatically dimension terrains, polygons, extrusion objects, rotation objects, node connectors and single connectors with the newly developed “Component” auto dimensioning feature. After this new dimensioning command has been selected, the required component simply has to be marked and the “Create auto dimensioning” button be clicked. Here, holes/cut-outs within the component will be dimensioned on the first dimension line and object edges will be dimensioned on the second dimension line. On the third dimension line, the center of the component will be dimensioned and finally also the total length of the component. Furthermore, round holes are dimensioned with their diameter. Here, the program automatically detects whether several holes of the same size exist and the program will, of course, only dimension one of these holes. In the master data of auto dimensioning, under the “Auto” tab, it is possible to allocate the dimensioning links for drillings, roundings and for CAD macros. The CAD macro, which can be user-defined, is automatically referenced to the dimensioned component and can thus automatically evaluate e.g. the surface area or the weight via variables. What is more, under this tab it can be determined whether or not the center of the component is to be dimensioned. As accustomed, it is possible to determine the dimensioning for horizontal, vertical lines or angles under the “Dim” tab. Angles will only be indicated if greater or less than 90°. <Highlight Film New CAD and Dimensioning Features>
Inserting and modifying of texts has been made considerably easier and enhanced. As of now, the text which is entered in the entry line will become immediately visible in the drawing, making it possible to enter text in a much clearer and better structured way, e.g. by using paragraphs.
When a text is modified, the program now automatically switches to the new “Txt“ tab, where the actual text is displayed and can be changed. As soon as text is edited under this tab, it will always be simultaneously updated in the drawing. Needless to say, it is still possible to insert placeholders and data from a file into the text. In addition to this, the text content will now be transferred when the text is re-saved. Thus, it is possible to create pre-defined texts in the master data.
When filing the test, a placeholder can be defined with the “Name allocation with data parameter” function and “Insert”. This placeholder makes sure that the text content (up to 40 characters) is adopted and automatically updated in case of changes. For best possible overview of the texts, the current text will be displayed onto the screen image using the pre-set font parameters. If the master data does not contain any pre-defined text, the word “Text” will appear on the screen image, also with the pre-set font parameters. Thus, the pre-defined font type or font style for the text is always visible. <Highlight Film New CAD and Dimensioning Features>
With the new auto dimensioning feature “Component” it is possible to dimension closed polylines. The lines have to be marked before or after the auto dimensioning feature is/has been selected. After confirming the “Create auto dimensioning” command, the lines are dimensioned accordingly. Thus it is possible to dimension e.g. imported DXF files automatically with just a few mouse clicks. <Highlight Film New CAD and Dimensioning Features>

Rafter System

As of Version 12.2 it is possible to export processings which have been punched out of the component front face to universal wood-working machines. In order to create such processings, it is essential to create the processings at right angles to the component plane. For example, in order to edit a ceiling joist at the front face (punch, attach or curve mode), it is necessary to create a vertical section on the component plane (at the front face). Editing members works exactly the same as in polygons. The component is marked, and it can then be easily and comfortably edited via the “Punch – box”, “Punch -freeform” and “Punch - object” editing commands. Under the “Punch - object“ command it is even possible to select other timber components which create the respective processing on the component.
However, currently the members can neither be enlarged (width and height) by the “Attach” editing command nor be cut by the “Punch” command. Likewise, punching within a component is not possible. However, the members can be further edited via 3D cuts, MCAD processings or scarf joints. If a component has already been punched, it is possible to alter its shape within the punched area via the “Attach” command. Switch into curve mode (mark object details), the component will obtain base points and control points for editing, just like polygons. Of course, component edges can also be abutted or connected in order to get further base points. It is also possible to delete control points which already exist. Also here, it has to be considered that the component cannot be enlarged by shifting the base and control points. As soon as a timber component has been edited by the options mentioned above, it will obtain an outer contour for the processing on a universal wood-working machine.
All edited components obtain the new tab “E” (contour editing) in the master data. Under this tab it can be determined whether the editing which has been performed at the component is to be produced or whether it is just to be displayed. Moreover, also the “invalid” option is available. By means of the “produce” option the component, including its outer contour, is exported to the universal wood-working machine. By clicking the “display” option, the editing will only be displayed in the SEMA program, however, it will not be exported to the universal wood-working machine. After clicking “invalid”, the component will be restored into its initial state and all contour editings will be eliminated. Such editings can also be switched off via points of intersection (bottom entry line, mark points of intersection). For this purpose, a point of intersection is created axially on the timber component (external contour) which then undoes all contour editings.
When a box is punched out of a component, it is automatically transformed into a groove, a notch or a rebate by the machine. A punching in the shape of a triangle (3 points) is exported to the machine as clipping or fluting. Likewise, a clipping is exported if a bevelling is created on the component. In order to display the types of processing in top view, it is possible to select the option “3D End type+processing” in the display settings (F7) under “End types and processings” -> “Wall Members/Elements” -> “Rafter System – general” -> “3CAD/Timber Component” -> “Joist system/Elements”. <Highlight Film Timber Members with Contours, Part 2>
The calculation of components in the background has been made much faster and, at the same time, working during the background calculation has been improved.
Extensive enhancements and revisions have been implemented for bird’s mouth and component intersections. (Gumpp & Maier, Poirot, Alptoit, Bräuer, Theurl, Geißelbacher, Reining, Pflugfelder, Flütsch, Hilzinger, G.R, Mooser, Meyer , Kübler)

Wall Ceiling

For windows, doors and macros it is possible to define a “fitting play” in the layer projection table. The menu can be found in the third tab of the respective component. Here, a play can be determined at the “Beginning, end, bottom and top” for “Walls/Members” or “Mineral wool”. These values resort to the link of the component, which can be defined in the second tab (window, door and macro elements). Thus it is now, for example, possible to define the macro around a window with play without additionally having to prepare the respective macro for it. <Highlight Film New Wall Features>
The calculation of macros has been revised in a specific case. (Friedl)
In Version 12.2 transferring components into or creating combination modules has been made considerably easier. In wall view, roof or ceiling elements view, the new commands “Create new (combination) module”, “Separate from module” and “Transfer to module” have been incorporated under the editing command “Misc.”. Combination modules can be created from any number of components by the “Create new module” function. After the components have been selected and this function has been called up, a text field appears in the entry line. In this text field the formula for creating the combination module can be defined. To make the entry easier, placeholders (Alt+1) and the editor (Alt+2) can be used. One possible formula for creating a combination module could be the following:
WEINMANN
MODULE = @C-PHP-MODULENAME@
MODULENAME = @C-RO-WA-CE-NO@_@C-PHP-MODULENO@
NAME = @C-PHP-MODULENAME@
END
After clicking the “OK“ button, the data will be adopted by the additional tab of the marked components. Needless to say, already existing entries of the components will remain untouched and will not be overwritten. Of course, the module number (C-PHP-MODULENO) will automatically be re-numbered. The defined values in the text field will be saved permanently; thus, it is not necessary to enter the formula again when the function is called-up again.
By means of the “Separate from module” function, it is possible to separate components which have already been defined into a combination module. At first, the respective member has to be marked. Only then it is possible to click the “Separate from module” function. After clicking “OK“, the component will no longer be part of the combination module.
Adopting components into an existing combination module is enabled by the “Transfer to module” function. The respective component is marked and a query in the entry line will ask into which module the component is to be transferred. Here, only one component from the module has to be selected. Now, the component is allocated to the combination module and all corresponding data will be transferred into the additional tab. <Highlight Film New Wall Features>

Placing of Elements

The weights of timber components (e.g. rafters or ceiling joists) which are adopted into a roof or a ceiling element are included when calculating the weight of the element. Additionally, timber components which are subsequently entered in the element will also be taken into account. Of course, the members also take part in the center-of-gravity calculation. Thus, the weight of elements can be determined even more accurately. <Highlight Film New Wall Features>

PHP Auto

In a PHP export (F12), the complete header of the building project will be exported to the following machines, if the required fields have been filled correspondingly: “CMS Panel Processing“, “Weinmann Production Lines“, ”BOSMOB/MACH“, “MHW Machine Control“ and
“Randek BauTech (cdt)“. Thus, it is possible to automatically deliver even more data and information to the exported file.

Stairs

As of Version 12.2 the construction of stairs with stairs spacers becomes child’s play. By means of the new feature “Stairs spacers”, it is possible to comfortably place stair bolts between the treads.
The settings for the placing of the spacers can be found in the tread under the “On” tab. Here, the “Spacer, left” and the “Spacer, right” are available. For example, by clicking the "Plus" symbol in left of "Stairs spacer left", the required settings will open.
By means of the “Distance, side” setting, the stairs bolt can be placed with the required distance from the side edge of the tread. The “Distance, front edge” setting defines the distance of the stairs bolt from the front edge of the tread. The direction of the distance is determined by the “Direction FE distance” setting: with "parallel", the entered value is marked out parallel to the front edge of the tread. With the "S direction" setting, the value is marked out in the direction of the stairs. As a matter of course, any difference between these settings can only be seen in case of adapted treads. For the reference fields "Step spacer" and "Bottom step spacer" the designated stairs bolts are allocated. <Highlight Film Self-Supporting Stairs>
Several stair bolts are available in the master data under "Visualisation/ 3D objects" -> "Other 3D objects" -> "Stair bolts" and then group “Thumm&Co”. For each type there is a normal bolt and a bolt for the bottom step. These special 3D objects have been created by three "Base objects". The middle base object always adapts to the rise and follows the height between the tread top edge and the tread bottom edge of the next tread. The bottom and the top base object always adapt to the tread thickness. For that purpose, an entry in the “ML” tab under “Type 1” has to be made in the bottom and the top base object. If the bottom base object is to adapt to the thickness of the bottom tread, the value “000” has to be entered in the field “Type1”. For the adoption of the thickness of the top tread it is required to enter the value “001” in the field “Type1” of the top base object. It is possible to place further 3D objects in the individual base objects. According to the settings, these 3D objects either adapt to the base object regarding the length or – in case of fixed length - they maintain their shape. Thus, it is possible to create any desired number of stair bolts which produce processing on the treads or simply serve visual presentation.
When a tread is combined with a “Stair bolt” and is saved in the master data, this combination can be allocated to the construction by means of the Stairs Container and “one-click solution”. In order to enable this, the new group “Stairs with stair bolt” which contains several combinations, has been filed in the master data under the group “Stairs” -> “Tread”.
Precise placing combined with flexibility to bring the construction of self-supporting stairs to perfection. <Highlight Film Self-Supporting Stairs>
In Version 12.2 the automatic plan output of all stairs components to a plotter or a printer in one step has been enabled. With this auto features it is also possible to print out all plans together.
Via "Extras" -> "Stairs auto output", the menu of the automatic plan output opens. In this menu, predefined output options can be activated. The print job is started by the “Output” command.
By a right-click on the toolbars (Customize, Commands, Extras), the “Stairs auto output” command can be placed in a toolbar – and can thus be accessed both more quickly and more comfortably.
Several options are available in the menu of the automatic plan output feature under the stairs heading: With “all stairs” all existing stairs of the BP will be printed/plotted out. Only the stairs of the active storey will be printed with the "all stairs of the active storey” setting. In case of "marked stairs" only those stairs whose “stair grippers” have been marked will be printed. If you are in an elevation drawing or in a developed view drawing, it is possible to output the components of these stairs by the “active stairs” option.
Under “Output” -> “Print plans immediately” option, it is possible to send the drawings to those drivers (and thus to the printers/plotters) that have been preset in the plan template. By clicking “Save plans as PDF” the plans will be saved as PDF file and can be called up again later via the drawing administration -> “Plans”. Here, it is additionally possible to determine via the "pull down” button whether one PDF file per plan is to be created (by clicking “One-page PDF files”) or whether all plans are combined in one PDF file (by clicking “Multi-page PDF files”). If several stairs are printed, then it is possible to create one extra PDF file for each stair by selecting “One PDF file per stair”. With “Display plans in window” the plans will be displayed in layout view, in individual windows.
If several stairs are output at the same time, it is possible to determine with “Optimise across stairs” whether for glueing or board optimisation” all stairs are optimised together.
On the right side of the menu the commands "Output", "Load", "Save", "Delete line", "Delete all" and "Close" are available. "Output” starts the printing job. With "Load" a plan output setting which has previously been saved is opened. When clicking the "Save" option, a modified plan output setting can be saved under a designated name. "Delete line" deletes individual lines of the plan output. It is possible to create a completely new plan output and to delete all pre-set output parameters by selecting the “Delete all” option. The menu of the plan output is closed with the "Close" option.
Another menu impacts size and selection of the menu. The following settings are available: "Reduced view", "Normal view" and "With selection". When "Reduced view" is selected, only the field “designation” is visible. "Normal view" additionally displays the fields "Drawing", "P" (Parameter), "Plan template", "Plan-No." (Plan number), "Index" (Revision number), "Display settings" (F7) and "Scale". The "With selection" setting will additionally display the fields "Field", "X" and "Contents".
A name for the output version can be given in the field "Designation". A left-mouse-click into this field and the entry becomes active. In the menu, the drawing can be selected in the "Drawing" field. A “P” becomes active in the field "P" (Parameter) for drawings that can be optimised. By clicking the “P”, the settings for the optimisation can be determined. Always only the meaningful fields are active. Either the settings for board optimisation, for glueing optimisation or for the margins are available. In addition, it is possible to “Combine identical components". A previously created plan template can be allocated in the "Plan template" field. The required F7 setting is selected in the field “Display settings (F7)". Under “Scale”, the scale for the output version is determined.
If you want to print components from one component group (e.g. treads) on different plans, an entry has to be made in the ML tab of the components (e.g. “Plan1” in the annotation field). Then, “Annotation” can be selected in the “Field” column of the auto plan output and subsequently the entry “Plan 1” can be made in the “Contents” field.
Field "X" defines selections. The settings "=" (equal to), ">" (greater), "<" (less than), "<>" (unequal to), "C" (contains) and "C" (does not contain) are provided.
A plan number is automatically created in the plan administration when a plan is output. This number is displayed in the field “Plan no.” If the revision for a plan is created in the plan administration, then the evaluation (e.g. revision numbers) will be displayed in the “Index” field.
After having defined and saved the various output versions according to one’s own needs, it is possible to call these versions up and to print them as often as needed. The new auto stairs output is very fast and pretty flexible. <Highlight Film Fully-Automatic Transfer of Complete Stairs to CNC Machines>
In Version 12.2 the automatic transfer of all stair components to CAM systems of CNC machines has been enabled. With this stairs auto output it is possible to export all stair components together.
Via "Extras" -> "Stairs auto output", the menu of auto plan output opens. In this menu, under the “Machine export” tab, pre-defined output version can be activated. Machine export is started by the “Output” command.
By a right-click on the toolbars (Customize, Commands, Extras), the “Stairs auto output” command can be placed in a toolbar – and can thus be accessed both more quickly and more comfortably.
Several options are available under “Stairs” in the auto plan output (tab “Machine export”). If the option “All stairs” is activated, all existing stairs of the building project take part in the machine export. Only the stairs of the active storey will take part in the export with the "all stairs of the active storey” setting. In case of "marked stairs" only those stairs whose “stair grippers” have been marked will be included in the export. When you are in an elevation drawing or in a developed view drawing, it is possible to output the components of these stairs by the “active stairs” option.
Option "Export main path" defines where the components are exported to. Under "Default-INI" the inifile used for the transfer is selected.
If several stairs are output at the same time, it is possible to determine with “Optimise across stairs” whether for glueing or board optimisation all stairs are optimised together.
On the right side of the menu the commands "Output", "Load", "Save", "Delete line", "Delete all" and "Close" are available. "Output” starts the machine export. With "Load" a machine export setting which has previously been saved is opened. When clicking the "Save" option, a modified machine export setting can be saved under a designated name. "Delete line" deletes individual lines of the plan output. It is possible to create a completely new machine export and to delete all pre-set output parameters by selecting the “Delete all” option. The menu of the plan output is closed with the "Close" option.
Another menu impacts size and selection of the menu. The following settings are available: "Reduced view", "Normal view" and "With selection". When "Reduced view" is selected, only the field “designation” is visible. "Normal view" additionally displays the fields "Component", "P" (Parameter), "Str INI file" (stairs INI file) and "Sub-directory". The "With selection" setting will additionally display the fields "Field", "X" and "Contents".
A name for the machine export can be assigned under the “Designation” field. A left-mouse-click into the field activates the entry.
The component can be selected in the “Component” field. In the "P" field a “P” becomes active (Parameter) for components that can be optimised. By clicking on the P, a menu opens where the parameters for the optimisation can be set. Only meaningful fields will become active. Either the settings for board optimisation, for glueing optimisation or for the margins are available. In addition, it is possible to “Combine identical components". A specific inifilecan be allocated to the component in the "Str INI file" field. In the "Subdirectory" field, a name for a folder can be assigned which will then be created after the export in the directory of the “Export main path”. In this folder, the exported components will be saved.
If you want to output components from one component group (e.g. treads) on different plans, an entry has to be made in the ML tab of the components (e.g. “Export1” in the annotation field). Then, “Annotation” can be selected in the “Field” column of the auto plan output and subsequently the entry “Export 1” can be made in the “Contents” field.
Field "X" defines selections. The settings "=" (equal to), ">" (greater), "<" (less than), "<>" (unequal to), "C" (contains) and "C" (does not contain) are provided.
After having defined and saved the various machine export versions according to one’s own needs, it is possible to call these versions up and output them as often as needed. The new auto stairs output is very fast and pretty flexible.
Elegant stairs with continuously parallel strings - child’s play with the new Version 12.2.
A new option for the definition of strings has been enabled in the master data. If – under the “Des” tab - “Curve interrupted” is set under course of the curve, it is possible to set “Width from top”, “Width from bottom” or “Average width” under the “Dat” -> “Horse-string measure”. Depending on the setting, the fields “Width”, “Horse-string measure from top” or “Horse-string measure from bottom” will become active. Under the “Width from top” setting, the string “holds” the top horse-string measure; the edge of the string below is created automatically as a result of the set width.
When “Width from below” is selected, the string “holds” the bottom horse-string measure; the top string edge is created automatically as a result of the set width.
“Average width” means that a centered string curve is calculated. Taking this curve as a basis, half of the set width is projected to the bottom and to the top. Here, the horse-string measure will not be taken into account any more. With this new feature, slim and elegant strings can be created. <Highlight Film Elegant Stairs>
In Version 12.2 it is possible to automatically write even more information on a plan. A lot of new placeholders have been made available for the stairs. Thus, information on components or constructions data can be even better evaluated.
The new placeholder are to be found under "CAD" -> "Text", "Enter placeholder" -> heading: "Stair". The placeholders “Bottom step”, “Last step”, “Stairwell opening length”, “Headroom” and “Head angle” have been added for the evaluation of the stairs data record.
For a top view plan, for example, the options "Handrail thickness left/right", "Handrail height left/right", "Parapet height railing left/right", "String thickness left/right", "Boom thickness left/right", "Horse thickness left/right", "Post thickness left/right" and "Paling thickness left/right" are available. If it is not intended to distinguish between “left” and “right”, the placeholder “String thickness”, “Handrail thickness”, "Horse thickness", "Boom thickness", "Post thickness" and "Paling thickness" are available. Furthermore the material of the components “Treads”, “Strings”, “Horses”, “Booms”, “Handrails”, “Posts” and “Paling” can be allocated. The following applies to all placeholders: If different values exist in a component group, they will be evaluated one after another.

3D Objects

The new master data “Drilling template” has been added to the 3D editings. By means of this new master data it is possible to easily and quickly predefine as many drillings as wanted on a specific area in the form of a drilling template. The drilling templates have been integrated into the master data in a sub-group of the “3D editings” -> “Drillings”.
Length and width of the area are defined under the “CMP” tab of the drilling template. As accustomed, it is possible to select between “Fix” and “Variable” setting for width and length. The "Internal angle" option determines the angle between X- and Y-direction. Under the second tab ">>" it is possible to allocate a 3D object which is to be included. By clicking into the reference field, the master data open and it is possible, for example, to allocate a drilling or a fitting bolt. Here it is important that correctly aligned fasteners and 3D editings are available for the drilling template in Version 12.2. These fasteners and 3D editings can be found under "Fasteners", "Screwed connections" in the "Drilling templates" group. If fasteners or 3D editings are selected in this group, they are automatically created at every spacing point of the drilling template.
Several setting options, in both the X-direction (in direction of the component) and the Y-direction (diagonally to the direction of the component), for the spacing of the area are provided:
- X direction: setting options for the longitudinal direction of the component
- Number: number of spacing points in direction of the component
- Distance (fix): fixed distance of the spacing points in direction of the component
- Distance (max): maximum distance of the spacing points in direction of the component
- Initial distance (auto): automatic initial distance
- Initial distance (fix): fixed initial distance
- Initial distance (min): minimum initial distance
- Distance: fixed distance between spacing points
- End distance (auto): automatic end distance
- End distance (fix): fixed end distance
- End distance (min): minimum end distance
- Distance: fixed distance between spacing points
- Y-direction: setting options diagonally to the direction of the component
- Number: number of spacing points diagonally to the direction of the component
- Distance (fix): fixed distance of spacing points diagonally to component direction
- Distance (max): maximum distance of the spacing points diagonally to direction of component
- Initial distance (auto): automatic initial distance
- Initial distance (fix): fixed initial distance
- Initial distance (min): minimum initial distance
- Distance: fixed distance between spacing points
- End distance (auto): automatic end distance
- End distance (fix): fixed end distance
- End distance (min): minimum end distance
- Distance: fixed distance between spacing points
Under “Positioning” it is possible to define additional settings for the exact positioning of the spacing:
- Type of positioning (maximum): spacing for the maximum reference area
- Type of positioning (minimum): spacing the largest possible rectangular reference area
Moreover, under this option, the reference point of the drilling template can be modified from “Bottom start” via “Top end”, “Bottom end” to “Top start”.
Under the option "Skew notch" the spacing points can be additionally shifted by half the distance with the “Half skew notch” option. Under the "Diagonal" setting, the spacing points are spaced diagonally to the surface area.
With these setting options it is, for example, possible to define drilling templates for tie-rafter connections, drilling lines for purlin anchors, drilling templates for node points in truss constructions or different drilling templates for steel components. <Highlight Film Drilling Templates>
The new group “Flat steel” has been added to the master data for steel constructions. This new master data enables the production of simple straps with drillings but also the production of complex fitting and of custom-made steel components. The flat steel master data is a 3D component and can be used via the “Steel constructions” command. As accustomed, it is possible to determine a “Thickness”, a “Width” and a “Length”. Also the 3D envelope data as well as the anchor points can be pre-set under the “3D” and “Anch” tabs, just like for other 3D components.
Flat steel is different from other steel components with respect to its “Edi” tab. Here, several options and settings for the editing of flat steel elements are available. If option "Slot/scarf joint" is set to "no", the flat steel will not create processing in a timber member. All other settings become inactive, too. With “Always” the flat steel produces a slot/scarf joint processing at one or several members, depending on the selection made. When selecting “Inside”, the flat steel will only create a processing if the flat steel lies within a timber member. By means of the familiar setting options under “Effect” it can be defined on which component the processing of the flat steel shall have effect. A ‘processing play’ around the flat can be determined under the “Play settings” (play at top, play at bottom, play left, play right, lateral play).
Via the reference fields of the “Drilling templates” it is possible to allocate up to two drilling templates to each flat steel. Depending on the setting of the “Drilling diameter”, these drilling templates create the processings on the flat steel in the respective size. At present, flat steel is the only master-data set to which drilling templates can be allocated. Thus it is now possible to create drillings in flat-steel elements.
Under the new "Misc" (miscellaneous) tab it can be defined whether the component is to be drawn in the “production drawing”.
As of now, all flat-steel connectors can be displayed and automatically dimensioned via the “Single component view” function in the top toolbar. By just clicking a button, a front view, a side view, a top view, a 3D oblique view and an automatically dimensioned detailed view of the component will be created. When switching to layout view then, a predefined drawing opens. On the left side of this drawing a multi-view orthographic projection (front view, side view and top view) and on the right side the dimensioned detail view will be created automatically. If the component consists of several individual and grouped components, the corresponding number of arrangement borders for the details will automatically be created. With just two “clicks" to a plan perfectly dimensioned down to the last detail (for more details on auto dimensioning and plan output, please see General Points).
In order to be able to group components more easily, the edit command “Group macro” has been enhanced. Now, it is possible to group anchored components or components from different views/drawings. What’s more, the group is given a name (designation) at creation. It is possible to define the orientation (definition of length, width, height) of the group with the new option “Freely definable orientation”. The orientation of an object impacts the default views of the production drawing (for more details on auto dimensioning and plan output, please see General Points).
On the creation of flat steel, in particular under the option “Anchor to component surface area”, the new option “Anchor within enveloping rectangular prism” is available. By means of this option a 3D object is automatically anchored within a component. The anchored object can adapt to all three dimensions of the enveloping rectangular prism, if needed.
Furthermore, under “Component statuses” a flat-steel element can be transferred to Single Member. From Single Member, the flat steel can be exported in the CMP format. Outer contour and drillings that have been created via a drilling template are currently exported.
By default, the anchoring of the flat steel is aligned “centered”. By means of this setting, a flat-steel element is perfectly suited for single connectors and node connectors and can be allocated to these, including drilling template and fasteners.
This new master data enables the production of many different types of steel components such as e.g. simple joist hangers as well as more complicated node connections. <Highlight Film Steel Elements: Grouped Steel Elements>
For easy and quick construction of steel components, the new creation command “Flat steel connector” has been incorporated into the SEMA program. This command enables the creation of single and node connectors on timber members with just a few clicks.
A single connector is a simple flat steel which is automatically anchored to a component by using the respective pre-settings.
The “Single connector” creation command is the first option under the “Flat steel connector” command in the 3CAD program part. A single connector is created on the timber with just one mouse click. A single connector can also be inserted directly via a master-data container, just like a fastener, for example. Furthermore, two additional options are available for placing a single connector.
With these options, the single connector either can be anchored to the enveloping prism of a component (Alt+1) or it can be placed at right-angles to the component cut (Alt+2).
The following settings can be pre-defined in the master data of the single connector:
First, the “Thickness” of the flat steel is defined. Under "Positioning", the position of the connector on the timber is set through several setting options. By means of the “Outside” option, the flat steel will anchor to the side which is selected with the mouse. Under the “Outside, double” option, a second flat-steel elements is automatically created at the opposite side. “Inside” will have the flat steel created centered on the timber; the “Inside, double” option automatically creates a second strap on the timber. This option will have the timber cross-section divided into three equal parts.
A flat-steel element is allocated to the single connector via the connecting strap reference. As already described in the flat-steel section, this flat steel can carry a drilling template and a fastener.
Via "Type" it is additionally possible to define whether the flat steel is calculated on the target component or whether the flat steel intersects with the end of the target component.
As already described in the flat-steel section, under the “Misc” tab is possible to determine whether or not the connector as a whole is to be included in a production drawing. Here, it has to be taken into account that this setting is independent from the settings made for the individual components of the connector (flat steel, fastener).
As of now, single connectors can be displayed via the “Single component view“ function in the top toolbar and can automatically be dimensioned. By just clicking a button, a front view, a side view, a top view, a 3D oblique view and an automatically dimensioned detailed view of the component will be created. When switching to layout view then, a predefined drawing opens. On the left side of this drawing a multi-view orthographic projection (front view, side view and top view) and on the right side the dimensioned detail view will be created automatically. If the component consists of several individual and grouped components, the corresponding number of arrangement borders for the details will automatically be created. With just two clicks to a plan perfectly dimensioned down to the last detail (for more details on auto dimensioning and plan output, please see General Points).
Single connectors can be grouped with other components without any problems and are perfectly suited for any kind of abutting and/or connections. <Highlight Film Steel Elements: Single Connector>
A node connector consists of several flat-steel elements which can be automatically created at any component node, based on the respective presetting (e.g. framework nodes, truss node etc.)
The “Node connector” creation command is the second option of the “Flat steel connector” command in the 3CAD program part. All required timber members must be marked when a node connector is created. It does not matter at which end the components are marked. After all timbers have been marked, the node connector will automatically be created at the respective node. Also the node connector can be directly placed via a master-data container.
The following setting options are provided in the master data of the node connector:
First, the “Thickness” of the flat steel is defined. Under "Positioning", the position of the connector on the timber is set through several setting options. By means of the “Outside” option, the flat steel will anchor to the side which is selected with the mouse. Under the “Outside, double” option, a second flat-steel elements is automatically created at the opposite side. “Inside” will have the flat steel created centered on the timber; the “Inside, double” option automatically creates a second strap on the timber. This option will have the timber cross-section divided into three equal parts.
One or several different flat-steel elements are allocated to the node connector via the connecting strap reference. Under "Connecting strap" it is possible to allocate an individual flat-steel element to the “Main component” (continuous component), to the “Cross component” (at right angles to the main component) and to the “Inclined component” (all components that are not at right angles to the main component). As already described in the flat-steel section, this flat steel can carry a drilling template and a fastener.
Via "Type" it is additionally possible to define whether the node connector is to be created in exact form, in the form of a rectangular plate or in the form of a convex plate (smallest possible form without inner angles).
As already described in the flat-steel section, under the “Misc” tab is possible to determine whether or not the connector as a whole is to be included in a production drawing. Here, it has to be taken into account that this setting is independent from the settings made for the individual components of the connector (flat steel, fastener).
As of now, node connectors can be displayed via the “Single component view“ function in the top toolbar and can automatically be dimensioned. By just clicking a button, a front view, a side view, a top view, a 3D oblique view and an automatically dimensioned detailed view of the component will be created. When switching to layout view then, a predefined drawing opens. On the left side of this drawing a multi-view orthographic projection (front view, side view and top view) and on the right side the dimensioned detail view will be created automatically. If the component consists of several single components that have been grouped, the corresponding number of arrangement borders for the details will automatically be created. With just two clicks to a plan perfectly dimensioned down to the last detail (for more details on auto dimensioning and plan output, please see General Points).
Node connectors can be grouped with other components without any problems and are perfectly suited for any kind of truss connections, as nailing plate or e.g. for framework nodes. <Highlight Film Steel Elements: Node Connector>

Master Data Macros, Program

As of now, it is possible to simultaneously work with several master data folders in the SEMA program. So far, only the data of one folder has been available, but now it is possible to display and select the data of any number of master data folders.
Several folders can become active when the folders are selected under “Folder overview” (under creation commands and master data containers). Thus it is possible to create and display master data folders of different topics. One example would be a fastener folder which exclusively contains timber fasteners and brackets. When this fastener folder is made available as well, the contents of this folder are additionally available when creating fasteners. As a matter of course, the data will then not be displayed during the creation of a wall. The program checks whether identical master data are available twice, and only one of these master data sets remains active. Thus, it is made sure that no identical data are available. Here, the program at first checks the name of the master data. If two or more master data sets with identical names are detected, it further checks whether the contents are identical as well. Only one master data set will be displayed in case of identical names and contents. Needless to say, in case of identical names but different contents, both master data sets will be displayed. However, the overall structure and naming of master data has to be considered when using thematic folders. When a folder name identical to the folder name is chosen from another pool, the additional data will be added to the same folder. If a different name is given to the folder, several folders are available in tree structure. The name of the master-data pool will be displayed in the top bar of the master data for better overview and to show from which master-data pool the data have been taken from. Of course, the program saves which pools have been used so that they will be displayed again when the program is restarted. Here, active pools under the “Creation commands” are independent from active pools in master data containers. Thus, it is possible that different pools are active in the master data containers than in the “Creation commands”. Here, it is even possible to have different folders for each container active. When saving back components, as usually, only one pool. This master-data pool is the same as the one active in the master data administration. Only the data of a single pool are displayed in the master data administration.
This powerful new feature enables the creation of small master data folders, specifically for one specific topic, in a clear and structured way without getting lost in a huge master data folder. <Highlight Film Easy Working with Master Folders>

Single Member

The export of rising valley notches has been enhanced in detail for the BVX2 export. (G.R Sistemi)
Components with the setting: “ML transfer” -> "No" can now also be exported from the program (application) or CMP to the K2 Robot.
The export of user-created designs in connection with the “Turn before transfer” setting has been corrected. (Hoffstedde & Hüntemann)
The processing on a rafter via contours has been improved in one specific case. (Haudenschild)
A processing via contours on the eves has been revised. (Burn)

Release History V12.1 Build 6800

General Points

The pick list of the last four used building projects in the Start Center has been improved. When moving the mouse pointer over a project, the complete header information of the building project is displayed in the component hint. Thus, the projects in the pick list can be identified much faster.
The use of an own address database in the building project administration is now possible with the “Ground Plan Pro” module. (Zimmermann)
The evaluation of scripts has been improved in some details. (Renggli)
As of Version 12.1 the newly developed SEMA Check Center will be available. With the Check Center it is possible to easily and quickly check an entire building project and to fix faults in the design. Collisions and conflicts will be displayed textually in the Check Center and visually – in 2D and in 3D - in the drawing through a warning triangle. All components of the rafter system, of the timber framing system and all 3CAD timber components are included in the check.
The Check Center can be called up via a right click in the top toolbar or via ”Extras” -> “Check Center”. In addition to that a corresponding icon (warning triangle) has been included in the top toolbar. Basically, the Check Center behaves like a master data container. It can be docked onto one of the four sides of the screen or be floating on the screen. A docked Check Center can either be “docked - open“ or “docked - automatically hidden”. In case of “docked - automatically hidden“, a tab can be seen which will open when the mouse is moved over it and will open the palette on the screen. <Highlight Film SEMA Check Center>
The Check Center is divided into two areas: In the upper area collisions and conflicts are displayed and can be managed and edited there as well. At the bottom, additional information on the collisions and conflicts are displayed. In order to check a building project for collisions, the “Check construction“ command in the upper area of the Check Center has to be selected. Consequently, a menu will open, providing the following options: collision check for active wall, marked walls, all timber components in the storey and all timber components in the ground plan. Here, all existing timber components in the building project will be checked. Collisions between two timber components in longitudinal direction are listed in the upper area of the Check Center in the form of a tree structure. The progress of the construction check will be displayed in the bottom (additional information). By clicking the “Cancel” button, it is possible to end the check. After all components have been calculated, it will be displayed whether or not collisions have been detected.
What’s more, in auto corner feature (via “Auto wall feature” (F10) or via “Walls” -> “Insert corner” -> “Auto corners“) it is automatically detected if corners are not inserted due to missing links or other reasons. Missing, not inserted corners are then automatically displayed in the Check Center and in the drawing.
The tree structure in the Check Center has been structured as follows:
First a difference is made between collisions and auto corners.
The next branch lists the storeys which have been checked. The storey’s abbreviation is displayed behind the respective storey.
Next the tree branches into the component levels where collisions and conflicts have been detected. These component levels are subdivided into walls, ceilings, construction planes and roofs. The wall names are additionally written on the right side of the tree for walls and in construction planes.
In the last branch (at the very bottom) the components that cause a collision are displayed. Here, the component number is displayed as well. A detailed description of the collision (component name, position on Z axis and so on) can be found in the info section of the Check Center.
However, not only collisions within one wall will be detected, but also between different component planes such as e.g. wall and roof. One example for this could be the collision between the top boom of a wall and the purlin of a roof. In the case of colliding components from different component planes, the wall name of a component will be provided as well.
If a collision is detected, the corresponding components will be marked with a yellow warning triangle, both in the Check Center and visually in the drawing in 2D and in 3D. Thus, it is possible to immediately identify collisions in the drawing as well as in the Check Center. <Highlight Film SEMA Check Center>
Needless to say, also component planes which don’t show any collisions or conflicts after the check will be listed in the Check Center. They will be marked with a blue speech bubble with exclamation mark.
Via the second function in the top toolbar of the Check Center it is possible to switch to the respective component plane after having selected a collision in the tree by mouse. Thus, for example by selecting a wall shape in the tree, the program will automatically switch to wall view after the function has been clicked. This functionality can also be executed via a double click on the component plane in the Check Center. For example, if you are in the respective wall view where a collision has been detected, it is possible to directly switch to collision/conflict in the Check Center via the third function “Search for events in active drawing”.
With the next three options it is possible to open or hide the complete tree structure or to hide inactive branches only.
With the “Display special events” option, only those branches which contain collisions will be displayed. Thus, the tree becomes a very clear structure which will be helpful particular in large projects.
With the “Display check symbols in drawing” button it is possible to switch the symbols in the drawing visible or invisible. This option can also be found in the top toolbar in the SEMA Program.
Editing of collisions and conflicts is done via the last button of the toolbar:”Commands for selected entries of Check Center “. The following options are available in the menu:
The “Mark involved components” command marks the components in the drawing. Thus, in case of problems in the automatic corner feature, the respective walls will be marked. With the visible/invisible switch it is then possible to exclusively display these components or walls in the drawing. Besides, components will be highlighted in colour by moving the mouse over a collision in the Check Center. This lets users quickly find the place which causes the conflict in the building project.
If the Check Center has detected a collision which, however, had intentionally been created by the user, the collision can be marked as “corrected” via the “Correct conflicts” function. These components will then be displayed in the tree in the form of a warning triangle with green checkmark. The check symbol in the drawing will disappear.
Via the “Reactivate conflict” function it is possible to restore the conflict. Then, the check symbol will accordingly be displayed again in the drawing.
With the last function it is possible to delete a check symbol (node) in the tree and simultaneously in the drawing. It is not possible to reactivate the control symbol.
The functions just mentioned can also be activated via a right click on the respective component in the Check Center. In addition to that, collisions will be automatically removed from the Check Center if one of the respective components in the building project is deleted. As a matter of course, collisions can also be deleted via different other editing commands such as “Position”, for example. However, in order to delete the check symbol or rather the collision, the calculation in the Check Center has to be started again. Of course, the conflicts corrected so far will remain corrected after the new calculation and will not have to be checked again.
By means of this powerful tool it is possible to quickly and comfortably check building projects for design faults.
In Version 12.1 the new “Combination number” (@B-KOMBI-NR@) placeholder has been incorporated under the “Component” feature. This placeholder is a combination of the ”Roof-Wall-Ceiling number (RWC)“ and the ”Roof-Ceiling-Element number (EL)“ placeholders. If the new placeholder is linked to a component from a roof or ceiling element, the placeholder will automatically evaluate the roof-ceiling-element number (EL). If the same placeholder is linked to a component from a ceiling, wall or roof, the roof-wall-ceiling number (RWC) will be automatically evaluated. For example, if this new placeholder is used in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under “Evaluation/Misc” -> ”Labelling“, all members will be automatically labelled either with the roof-wall-ceiling number (RWC) or the roof-ceiling-element number (EL) during the automatic machine processing.
Creating an entire building absolutely dynamically and help-guided by just a few mouse clicks" No problem with the completely new Building Assistant of Version 12.1.
For the assistant, the menu for creating building projects (building projects properties) has been revised and enhanced. The upper part of the menu now displays the “Project thumbnail”, which can be created under “Edit” -> “Create BP thumbnail“ (upper toolbar in the program). Besides, previous functions such as “Template“ (for the selection of a template building project) “Options“ (for the headers of the building project) etc. have been integrated under ”more…“. These additional functions can be hidden or displayed as desired via “more...”.
Three new buttons have been incorporated into the bottom part of the menu:
“Blank project“: A building project without contents will be created (this used to be the “OK” button in previous versions). After selecting a template building project, this button will open it. Of course, the button will then be automatically renamed from “Blank project” to “Project with template”.
“Project with stairs assistant“: This new functionality is described in the “Stairs” section of the new features list.
“Project with building assistant“: By means of this new functionality, a complete building can be created with a few mouse clicks. In the following an example of how quickly and easily a rectangular building with transverse building in timber-framed construction can be created:
First, the SEMA program with the new building assistant is opened. After selecting "Timber-framed construction" (double click) you select the designated "T-shaped building". After adjusting the storey heights you get via the “next” button to the “Geometry” tab, where the lengths of the building can be defined. The entries will be visually highlighted on the screen image. The roof, the walls and the ceilings have been predefined already so that – after clicking the “finish” button - the complete building can be placed in the drawing area by a mouse click. The members are now created by the auto roof and wall features. And a timber-framed multi-storey house with transverse building is finished. <Highlight Film SEMA Building Assistant>
Following, a detailed description of the functionalities of the new Building Assistant. Basically, the Building Assistant behaves like a master data container. It can be docked to the four sides of the screen or it can also be arranged on the screen in floating position. A docked building assistant either can be “docked-open” or “docked-automatically hidden”. In case of “docked-automatically hidden” a tab can be seen, which opens when touched by the mouse and which makes the palette drive into the screen.
Folders with clearly-arranged help images have been made available for even better overview and usability of the building assistant. By double-clicking these folders you can navigate through the assistant. By clicking the “back” button, it is possible to jump back to the higher hierarchy level within the assistant any time. Thus, using the assistant is quite similar to using the Windows Explorer.
The following folders are also available: “Log construction“, “Timber-framed construction“ and “Whole log“ - which are opened by a double click. For example, when selecting folder “Timber-framed construction”, you will find three pre-defined buildings with different ground plans. The following ground plans can be selected: “L-shaped building“, “Rectangular building“ and “T-shaped building“. If you select “Rectangular building”, for example, the screen image and the input fields of the macro will open in the Assistant.
The first tab “Storey” displays the storeys of the macro (attic storey, ground floor, basement and ground plate). It is possible to subsequently modify these storey names in the Assistant. In the second column of the tab the height of the ground floor and of the basement can be altered. The height of the attic storey results from the roof, which can be determined later on. If, for example, the height of the basement is selected, so the basement becomes active in the sectional view on the screen image and all other storeys become inactive. Moreover, the height which is to be modified is visually displayed by a red dimension line with arrow (context sensitive help) in the screen image. The height is always measured from "Top level floor" to "Top level ceiling". Thus, by modifying the height of the basement, all upper storeys will automatically recalculate themselves. Therefore it is not necessary to adapt the heights of the other storeys yourself. What’s more, it is possible to add or delete storeys in the second column. Thus, if for example, the basement storey is deleted, again all storeys recalculate themselves and you will get a finished building without basement. Besides, the insert mode when inserting a building macro can be defined in the “Storey” tab. The following options are available:
If the “Assimilate” setting is used, the storeys of the macro and of the building project are matched. Storeys with the same use (roof, ceiling) and the same storey height will be “assimilated”. The storey of the building project keeps its name. The “Add” setting means that the storeys of the macro are additionally included in the storey administration of the project. The “Assimilate+name” setting behaves like the “Assimilate” setting, however, in this option the use, the storey height, and the name must be the same.
With “Next“ or respectively ”Back“ it is possible to switch to the next or to the previous tab. All lines within the assistant can be confirmed by “Enter”. Under the “Geometry” tab it is possible to enter lengths for the definition of the ground plan depending on the shape of the ground plan. In addition to that, under “Geometry”, the screen image will no longer display a section of the building, but automatically top view. Needless to say, the building can also be displayed three-dimensionally in the screen image. Like in the modification of the storey heights, red dimension lines with arrows display which length is modified. Here, the direction of the arrow shows the direction in which the dimension is lengthened or shortened. Thus, it is for example possible to alter a rectangular building with the external dimensions10m x10m to 9mx8m. In the next tab “Roof” the type or the shape of the roof can be determined. For this, there are four roof references available under “Rectangular building” for example. Via the reference fields the master data of the rood design can be accessed. Thus it is possible to create a hip roof out of a saddle roof with just a few mouse clicks. Of course, also under the “Roof” tab you can through the marked dimension lines in the screen image which roof reference is being modified.
Under the “Walls” tab, walls for the attic storey, the ground floor and the basement can be assigned via reference fields. Moreover, windows for the attic storey and windows or a door for the ground floor can be defined. The screen image will always show the storey in which you currently work as the active storey. All other storeys are indicated as inactive.
Under the “Ceiling” tab, ceilings for the joist system, the basement ceiling and the ground plate can be determined.
Under the last tab “Txt“, free comments for the macro can be entered.
After all data has been modified as desired, the macro can be inserted via “Finish”. Now, the macro is attached to the mouse and can be placed accordingly via the input options. Additionally, further options such as e.g. “Set reference points anew” (Alt+3) and “Turn macro” can be found on the right side of the entry line.
After inserting, the Building Assistant will close automatically. It can subsequently be activated via “File” -> “Building Assistant” or via the new icon in the top entry line. The building can, of course, now be further edited or modified.
As of Version 12.1 modifications of the end type are displayed already during the input in the drawing. By marking a component and selecting the “End type” command, all changes are visualised in the program in real time. In particular in 3D mode, modifications at end type can thus be very well seen. If new end types are selected from the master data and assigned to the component, this modification is displayed before the command is confirmed. When adopting values from the drawing with the dropper or complete end types with the copy function, they will also be displayed immediately.
So it is for example possible to check and - if necessary – to correct during input the side of the marking-out of a tenon (which depends on the direction of the component). Also the results of complicated inputs and parameters in profilings or profile heads can permanently be checked and step by step adapted.
Percentage inputs in wedged scarf joints or in dovetail joints as well as e.g. the joist system are applied at the actual member and can be seen immediately.
Drilling images like in the stairs end type, for example, are applied and visualised directly after the input.
This new feature will save a lot of time for power users, and for SEMA beginners this intuitive approach will make it a lot easier to become familiar with the program and use it successfully. <Highlight Film End Types – always up-to-date>
In Version 12.1, a new dynamic standard layout behaviour for master data windows has been implemented. Thus, there is more space for data and texts on large and high-resolution display devices. With this new feature, the master data windows for creation and editing commands as well as in the master data administration are displayed in enlarged windows. Thus, it is for example possible to line up two medium-sized master data symbols next to each other under the creation command.
Generally there are now two different standard layouts:
They can be activated in the “Customized” menu (right-click on top toolbar) under the “Options” tab. By clicking the newly-integrated “Set standard layout for windows with master data...”, you can choose between “Standard layout “Classic” (small windows)” and "Standard layout “Comfort” (big windows)”. The “Comfort” setting provides more space for the texts in the master data and they can be displayed fully-written out. For example, “CType” and “Fct” will be displayed as “Type of cut” and “Function” in a timber framing master data.
The “Classic” layout restores the small master data windows with abbreviated texts as accustomed.
In the enlarged master data window it is possible to individually set the column width by means of the so-called “Splitter”. Depending on the position of the splitter, the text will be written out or abbreviated. With this new feature, SEMA can be optimally adapted to the respective display device (screen/projector) used. <Highlight Film Reading Master Data in Comfort>
For initial installations and by clicking the “Standard” button (-> “Customized” menu), the “Comfort” layout is automatically used as standard for high-resolution display devices. In case of low resolution devices, the “Classic” layout will be used automatically. This makes working with high-resolution screens a lot more comfortable and also a lot easier, particularly for beginners.
If the master data is changed during the creation of components, the master data will be marked with an asterisk (*) in order to highlight this. The “Abandon changes” option has been incorporated in order to reset all changes made. The “Abandon changes” option can be selected by a right click on the master data. Afterwards, all settings in the master data will be set back to the original state. <Highlight Film Reading Master Data in Comfort>
The texts for the new master data setting “Comfort” have been integrated into the following language versions: French, Italian and English.

Presenter

In the download section of the SEMA website there will always be an independent update for the presenter available.

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

The shifting of linked CAD texts via the editing command “Position” has been enhanced in one detail. (Zehrer)
Auto dimensioning in wall view has been revised in detail. (Skaletzka)

Profile

The values of the "Eaves height" and "Overhang" selection fields, in particular in the "Adjust overhang length to fixed battens” setting, can now be copied into the clipboard (Ctrl +C) and can then be inserted when creating further profiles. Thus, the user can transfer the exact value into another field.

Terrain

The “Terrain from object” command in the program selection under “Terrain” can now also be used in ground plan lines. Additionally, a distance is available in the “Terrain from object” command in the bottom entry line.

Roof Design

The “Partial roof on polygon“ creation command has been enhanced further. Thus, it is now also possible to create roof designs on CAD or ground plan lines which form a closed polyline. Besides, it is possible to define a distance in the entry line. <Highlight Film Roof, Ceiling & Wall on Polygon>

Rafter System

Processing nodes of contours with scribe markings have been improved. (Coray)
In Version 12.1 it is also possible to intersect components in 3D mode via the “Cut corner joint” editing command. End types such as scarf joints or tenons can already be assigned during the command. Furthermore, it is now possible to intersect different components of different systems to a corner joint. <Highlight Film Intersecting Corner Connections in 3D>
The "Cut corner joint" command has been fundamentally revised and enhanced. After the required components have been marked and the command has been called up, the “Cut” or “Scarf joint” design is selected in the entry line. The type of cut respectively the scarf joint position will be determined in the following selection field. The distinction of the components is supported through labels (CMP1, CMP2 etc.). So, corner connections such as mitre cuts or simple scarf joints can be created quickly and easily.
More complex corner connections such as wedged scarf joints, dovetail connections or connections with tenons is enabled through the “extended end type definition” (Alt+1) option. Assigned end types and their respective settings are immediately displayed on the screen and each modification will be updated “online”. This provides the user with the best possible control and overview already during creation.
Another option has been added in case components of different thicknesses are to be intersected with a mitre cut: “Bisectric corner connections in components of different thicknesses (Alt+2)”. If this option is activated, the mitre cut will be carried out in a bisectric way. A complete overlapping of the cut surfaces will not be the case. If the option is not active (standard), the mitre cut will be executed in such a way that no cut surface of the corner connection will be visible. The mitre angle is not bisectric, the mitre surfaces completely overlap each other.
The “Cut corner joint” command has been enabled for 3D oblique views and all other views such as vertical sections, horizontal sections, textured north/south elevation and so on. This is the prerequisite that different components of different systems can be intersected to a corner connection. For example, members from different walls or construction planes can be intersected. Likewise, a corner connection can be created from different components, e.g. tie and rafter. In principle, the command has been enabled for all members and thus also for 3CAD members, rafters or also for steel components.
Even components which are not located on the same plane or which are tilted or in opposite direction can be cut to a mitre joint.
Substantial enhancements and corrections have been made regarding bird’s mouth and component intersections. (Moobie, Kirsten, Huber, Hansmann, Reining, Hammer, Proegger, Coray, Buder, ABZ Bodenseekreis, Weihmann, Röhrig, Betchalet, Sense, Schwarz, Pretot, ABZ Landau, Hilzinger, Schnitzler, France, Italy....)
Now, the “centred” position is available under the “Roof window" creation command as long as the roof window is positioned independently from the tile grid (deactivation of "Position roof window in grid” option). (France)
Pitched-roof dormers, triangle dormers and hip-roof dormers can now be created with a ridge purlin which is bevelled at the top edge. The settings of the purlin (purlin-rafter: "Bevel top edge” -> “Bevel top and bottom edge”) take effect as soon as such a purlin is embedded into the field of the ridge purlin of the dormer master data.
In specific cases the set rounding of DT scarf joints has not been displayed in textured view. This has been corrected. (Pflugfelder)
Now, it is possible to define two different depths in the "Double heel skew notch”. The entry options “Depth, heel front” and “Depth heel back” are available. (Huber)
In Version 12.1 purlins can already be preset in the master data with end types. The auto roof feature thus becomes even better.
Already in the master data, the end type tab of the purlin master data now comes with the reference fields for end types at the beginning and at the end of the component. Thus, for example, purlins with profile heads can be pre-allocated in the master data and can be used when creating a profile. After creating the roof design and the subsequent auto roof (F9) or all other auto purlins, the free-standing purlin ends will be automatically drawn with the profile head. Thus, a subsequent re-allocating of purlin end types is no longer required. Here, the program automatically detects whether the purlin ends at a barge and thus the profile head will be created, or whether an automatic halving of the purlin corner has to be carried out in the hip area and the profile head will be ignored. As before, the automatic halving of the purlins is done according to the settings in Alt+F7 (-> “Rafter system” -> “Purlins” -> “Auto settings”).
This new feature makes it also possible that purlins in the project can be completely re-saved into the master data. Now, the existing end types will also be saved. <Highlight Film Pre-set Purlin End Types>
For modifying purlins, the icon "Save as new master data (F2)" in the command bar of the master data of the purlin is used.
New buttons for “fetching” other purlins from the working master data or from the SEMA original master data have been added. Via this functionality, purlins in the project can easily and comfortably be exchanged with pre-allocated purlins from the master data. In particular, if many entries exist in the material list tab of the purlins, exchanging the purlins saves a lot of time compared with creating them anew.
The manual processing of planing areas works once again independent of module combination. (Baumgartner)

Wall Ceiling

The new option “Elements at openings” has been incorporated under the second tab “Wall” or under the first tab “Cmp” in the master data of walls/ceilings. This option makes it possible to determine in each wall/ceiling whether elements will be cut at openings (e.g. windows). So far, it has only been possible to globally activate this option in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under “Members/Joist system" -> "Elements“. The following setting options are available in the master data of wall/ceiling:
“From Alt F7“: Elements at openings behave as set in the pre-settings (Alt+F7).
“Yes“: All elements will be cut at openings.
”No“: Elements will not be cut at openings.
The auto corner feature has been expanded and enhanced in Version 12.1. Now, when inserting the corner macros, the thickness of the wall (wooden wall) as well as the visible side and the counter side are taken into account. What’s more, external corners can be used automatically alternating.
For this, the “Main direction” in the “EW” (exterior wall) has been extended by the “clockwise” and “counter-clockwise” options. Additionally, a so-called “Insertion type” has been integrated in the dialog box of the angle area for exterior and interior walls. This new feature provides the following options:
Free: with the type of insertion “Free”, always the first found link in the master data will be used and inserted in all corners (same logic as until Version 12.0).
Fix: corner macros will only be inserted if the main direction (order when creating the macro 1-2) and wall thicknesses of the macro comply with the construction into which the macro is intended to be inserted. <Highlight Film Roof, Ceiling & Wall on Polygon>
Variable: with this type of insertion, the main direction is no longer taken into account and the filed macro determines the insertion order.
The “Insertion type” has also been integrated in the dialog box of the angle area of “T connections" of interior and exterior walls. However, only the types of insertion “free” and “fix” are available here. Generally, “fix” behaves like in exterior and interior walls. When inserting, the wall thicknesses of the continuous and of the abutting wall must be identical to the filed wall thicknesses. But it is also possible to take the view side of the continuous wall into account by means of the “View side, fix” (yes or no) function. When selecting “fix” for insertion type and the view side, the T connection will only be inserted if both criteria are met in the wall construction. Needless to say, it is also possible to create macros out of combinations of the two functions.
Through this new feature it is possible to fully-automatically create wall intersections with corner macros in an even more differentiated and individual way.
Furthermore, corners can be automatically placed in walls which are not logically connected with one another. For this, the timber/brick layer of the abutting wall just has to touch a layer of the continuous wall.
The master data of walls has been expanded by two new options in the first tab “Cmp”. In the settings “Substructure timber” and “Substructure layers”, the option “auto 0.000“ has been incorporated. If the option “Substructure timber – auto” is selected in a wall, the timber wall layer (T0) of the wall will automatically be cut below the eaves purlin, which has been pre-defined in the roof profile. If such a wall does not hit an eaves purlin, the timber wall layer (T0) will be automatically cut to the bottom level rafters, which have been pre-defined in the roof profile. Via the value to be set, both a positive and a negative distance can be assigned in a right angle to the rafter or the eaves purlin. If the “Automatically cut wall below eaves purlin” option is activated in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under “Walls/Outline” -> "Misc“ this option will prevail.
In the “Substructure layer – auto” option, the left and the right layers in a jamb wall are cut against the bottom level of the rafter or the eaves purlin. Here, the program will detect fully-automatically whether a layer is below the eaves purlin and will then cut this layer below the purlin. If there is a layer next to the eaves purlin, this layer will automatically be cut against the bottom level rafter. Also under “Substructure layer – auto” it is possible to assign a positive or a negative distance in a right angle to the rafter. Of course, in both options all values which have been allocated in the layer projection table will continue to take effect. <Highlight Film Perfect Automatic Corners>
From now on wall and ceiling shapes can be created via a click on CAD/ground plan polygons, CAD/ground plan lines, terrain and floor areas. For this, under “Walls” in the program selection, the new “Walls on polygon” command and, under “Ceiling outline” -> “Ceiling”, the “Ceiling on polygon” command has been incorporated. If the “Walls on polygon” command is called up, the master data of the walls will open. In the next step the polygon or a closed polyline on which the walls are to be created, is marked. This will open a preview window of the wall shapes on the polygon. As accustomed, it is possible to modify the height level (Alt+1), the layer reference (Alt+2), the wall position (Alt+3) and the layers (Alt+4) in the entry line (additional options). Furthermore, it is possible to assign a positive or negative distance. The layer reference and the wall position allow the modifying of the wall shape’s position on the polygon as required. The reference layer can be defined in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under “Walls/Outline” -> “Wall input layer”. By clicking the “OK” button, the walls will be created. The direction of creation is always counter-clockwise, i.e. from left to right. If a continuous polygon edge is abutted, two walls will be created on this line.
The procedure when creating ceiling shapes on polygons is identical to the wall input.
Likewise, this functionality has been made available in the creation of stairwell openings on polygons. Under “Ceiling outline” -> “Stairwell opening” the new “Stairwell opening on polygon” command is available.
By means of these new commands it is for example possible to quickly and comfortably create walls, ceiling shapes and stairwell openings from stored DXF files.
The mouse-pointer help when inserting macros has been corrected. (Landmark)

Coverings – Wall Ceiling

Punching of boards has been improved in some detail. (Renggli)

Stairs

In one specific case, the string was not created correctly at the landing. This has been fixed. (Ambauen)
The machine export of separating cuts under the optimised output for treads has been enhanced. (EBS)
Creating complete stairs dynamically and help-guided by just a few mouse clicks" No problem with the completely new Stairs Assistant of Version 12.1.
For the Assistant, the menu for creating building projects (building projects properties) has been revised and enhanced. The upper part of the menu displays the “Project thumbnail”, which can be created under “Edit” -> “Create BP thumbnail“ (upper toolbar in the program). Besides, previous functions such as “Template“ (for the selection of a template building project) “Options“ (for the headers of the building project) etc. have been integrated under ”more…“. These additional functions can be hidden or displayed as desired via “more...”. Three new buttons have been incorporated into the bottom part of the menu:
“Blank project“: A building project without contents will be created (this used to be the “OK” button in previous versions). After selecting a template building project, this button will open it. Of course, the button will then be automatically renamed from “Blank project” to “Project with template”.
“Project with Building Assistant“: This new functionality is described in the “General Points” section of the new features list.
“Project with Stairs Assistant“: With this new feature, complete stairs can be created with a few mouse clicks. In the following an example of how quickly and easily half turn spiral stairs can be created:
First, the SEMA program with the new Stairs Assistant is opened. After selecting "Stairs with all components” (double click) you select the type of stairs “half turn”. After adjusting the storey height you get via the “next” button to the “Geometry” tab, where the lengths of the stairs can be defined. The entries will be visually highlighted on the screen image. The walls, the ceilings and the stairs have been predefined already, so that – after clicking the “finish” button - the complete stairs can be placed in the drawing area by a mouse click. And a half turn spiral stairs is finished. <Highlight Film SEMA Stairs Assistant>
Following, a detailed description of the functionalities of the new Stairs Assistant. Basically, the Stairs Assistant behaves like a master data container. It can be docked to the four sides of the screen or it can also be arranged on the screen in floating position. A docked Stairs Assistant either can be “docked-open” or “docked-automatically hidden”. In case of “docked-automatically hidden” a tab can be seen, which opens when touched by the mouse and which makes the palette drive into the screen.
Folders with clearly-arranged help images have been made available for even better overview and usability of the Stairs Assistant. By double-clicking these folders you can navigate through the Assistant. By clicking the “back” button, it is possible to jump back to the higher hierarchy level within the Assistant any time. Thus, using the Assistant is quite similar to using the Windows Explorer.
The following folders are available: “Three-quarter turn”, “Straight”, “Half turn”, “Spiral stairs”, “Quarter turn”, “Newel stairs” and “Stairs with all components” which are opened by a double click. For example, when selecting “half turn”, the folders “left spiral” or “right spiral” become available. Seven predefined stairs with different ground plans are available under the “left spiral” folder. The following stairs can be selected: “With landing”, “With landing and corner radius, type 1”, “With landing and corner radius, type 2”, “With landings”, “With landings and corner radius”, "Standard" and "Standard with corner radius". For example, by selecting "Standard with corner radius", the screen image and the input fields of the components will open in the Assistant.
The first tab “Storey” displays the storeys of the macro (joist system, ground floor and basement ceiling). It is possible to subsequently modify these storey names in the Assistant. The height of the ground storey can be altered in the second column of the tab. If this height is selected, the height to be bridged (top level uncovered floor to top level uncovered floor) becomes active in the sectional view on the screen image. Moreover, the height which is to be modified is visually displayed by a red dimension line with arrow (context sensitive help). The height is always measured from "Top level uncovered floor" to "Top level uncovered floor". Thus, by modifying the height of the ground storey, the upper storeys will automatically recalculate themselves. Besides, the insert mode when inserting a stairs macro can be defined in the “Storey” tab. The following options are available:
If the “Assimilate” setting is used, the storeys of the macro and of the building project are matched. Storeys with the same use (roof, ceiling) and the same storey height will be “assimilated”. The storey of the building project keeps its name. The “Add” setting means that the storeys of the macro are additionally included in the storey administration of the project. The “Assimilate+name” setting behaves like the “Assimilate” setting, however, in this option the use, the storey height, and the name must be the same.
With “Next“ or respectively ”Back“ it is possible to switch to the next or to the previous tab. All lines within the Assistant can be confirmed by “Enter”. <Highlight Film Modifying Stairs – fast and visual>
Under the “Geometry” tab it is possible to enter lengths for the definition of the ground plan depending on the shape of the stairs. In addition to that, when switching to the “Geometry” tab, the screen image will no longer display a section of the building, but automatically top view. Needless to say, the stairs can also be displayed three-dimensionally in the screen image. Like in the modification of the storey heights, a red dimension line with arrow displays which length is modified. Here, the direction of the arrow shows the direction in which the dimension is lengthened or shortened. Thus the stairs dimensions can be entered easily and comfortably.
Under the “Walls” tab, a wall for the ground storey can be assigned via a reference field.
Under the “Ceiling“ tab, a ceiling can be assigned. If a ceiling with layers (floor structure) is assigned, the stairs will take these settings into account and are calculated from finished floor to finished floor.
The type of construction of the stairs is determined under the “Stairs” tab. By clicking on the link, the currently assigned construction opens. If you want the stairs to refer to the height preset under the “Storey” tab, the auto option under “Height” has to be activated. If a ceiling without floor structure has been used under the “Ceiling” tab, the height of the floor structure can be set under the “Surfacing, top” and/or “Surfacing, bottom” option.
Under the last tab “Txt“, free comments for the stairs can be entered.
After all data has been modified as desired, the stairs can be inserted via “Finish”. Now, the macro is attached to the mouse and can be placed accordingly via the input options. Additionally, further options such as e.g. “Set reference points anew” (Alt+3) and “Turn macro” (Alt+5) can be found on the right side of the entry line.
After inserting, the Stairs Assistant will close automatically. It can subsequently be activated via “File” -> “Stairs Assistant” or via the new icon in the top toolbar. The stairs can, of course, now be further edited or modified.
In Version 12.1 changing the stairwell opening in 3D has been enabled. For this, the position command for the edges of the stairwell opening has been activated in 3D and of course also in 2D mode. The stairwell opening can be switched visible under F7 -> "Stairs" -> "Construction".
If you mark the stairwell opening in 2D or 3D mode and select the “Position” command, the entry line with the length input will open. The length can be entered from the end of flight or relative to the current position of the stairwell opening. The stairs automatically adapt to the new situation. Additionally, the command enables the modification of the headroom.
The stairwell opening is now also available under “View” -> “Colour settings” ->“Stairs” and can be assigned its individual line colour, line width, line style and hatch style.
This new feature enables the easy and comfortable modification of the stairwell opening with the stairs construction being fully-automatic adapted.
As of Version 12.1 stairs can be modified quickly and visually. By means of master data containers all stairs components and even entire stair constructions can be easily allocated by a single mouse-click.
The new “Show/hide master data container” button is available in the standard toolbar (next to master data administration). With this button it is possible to comfortably show/hide the stairs container. If the stairs container is activated for the first time, it will open at the left side of the screen and can be found under “Stairs”-> “Construction” -> “String stairs”. Via the “Open/close overview” button it is possible to access the remaining categories, such as e.g. “treads” and their individual components.
For example, by selecting the required tread in the stairs container and by marking a tread in the drawing, the treads of the entire stairs will be replaced. If you only want to replace individual or selected components, so the “Ctrl” key must additionally be pressed when clicking on the designated components. <Highlight Film Modifying Stairs – fast and visual>
By selecting components such as strings, horses, handrail, booms, palings division or posts when allocating the components in the drawing, one or several red auxiliary lines will appear. These lines query the side of the stairs at which the component will be created. By moving the mouse into the centre of the stairs, two red auxiliary lines will appear in the drawing. The component will be created at both sides of the stairs after confirming with the left mouse button. By moving the mouse to one side of the stairs, a red auxiliary line will be displayed on this side only. After the mouse click, the component will only be created on the selected side of the stairs. If components exist on the sides of the stairs, a single-click onto the component is enough to replace it on the entire side. In this case no auxiliary lines appear. If just one component is to be replaced, also here, the “Ctrl” key has to be pressed when clicking.
If a railing is allocated, and no railing exists yet, the side is queried by an auxiliary line. If a railing already exists, a single-click on the existing railing is enough to create the new railing with all its components.
By selecting a construction and clicking onto the existing stairs in the drawing, the construction with all its components will be created.
With this new function it becomes very easy to present special stairs in different versions to customers. It can also be used to better understand specific differences in the data records of the components.
The “Create new master data container” function is available under the “Show/hide master data container”. By selecting this function, the “Add palette” menu, asking for the “Name of palette”, opens. By entering the name and confirming with "OK", a new palette opens at the top left of the screen. Now, it is possible to access the master data structure via the “Open/close overview” command and to select the required folder. Then, the master data structure can be closed again via the “Open/close overview” command. Now, the palette only has to be placed on the screen at the required position. Thus, it is possible to quickly and comfortably access specific folders and frequently-used master data. <Highlight Film Modifying Stairs – fast and visual>
In one special case, the string name/information was displayed outside the component – this has been corrected. (Fischer)
The calculation of strings around landings has been improved in some details. (Scholz)
In one special case, the riser shortening has been corrected. (Schachreiter)

Master Data Macros - Program

The new “Show/hide master data container” button is available in the standard toolbar (next to the master data administration). With this button it is possible to comfortably show or hide master data containers. SEMA supplies a global master data container and a stairs container. However, users can create as many containers as desired themselves.
Under the “Show/hide master data container” the new “Create new master data container” function is available. By selecting this function, the “Add palette” menu, asking for the “Name of palette”, opens. By entering the name and confirming with "OK", a new palette opens at the top left of the screen. Now, it is possible to access the master data structure via the “Open/close overview” command and to select the required folder. Then, the master data structure can be closed again via the “Open/close overview” command. Now, the palette only has to be placed on the screen at the required position. Thus, it is possible to quickly and comfortably access specific folders and frequently-used master data. <Highlight Film Modifying Stairs – fast and visual>

Master Data Macros, Contents & Revisions

The following three purlins with pre-set end types are provided in the “Standard” group of the purlins: purlins “16-16 with profile head", "16-20 with profile head" and "16-22 with profile head". Consequently, when using these purlins in profile, the free-standing purlin ends will automatically be drawn with a profile head under auto purlin mode. <Highlight Film End Types – always up-to-date>
Under "Buildings" the group of dynamic building macros has been made available. These macros are used in the new Building Assistant. The groups "Log construction", "Timber-framed construction", "Masonry" and "Whole log" have been filled with various buildings. The group "Templates" offers several ground plans such as L-shaped building, T-shaped building or rectangular building. The blank references for roof areas, walls, ceilings etc. can be filled with own data as required. <Highlight Film SEMA Building Assistant>
Under "Stairs" the group of dynamic stairs macros has been developed. These macros are used in the new Stairs Assistant. The examples in the different groups cover the range of all current types of stairs. <Highlight Film SEMA Stairs Assistant>

Material List

Deleting individual items of a group has been improved. (S&G)
The technical principles of the material list have been revised completely. In the course of these fundamental modifications, we have been able to significantly optimize and enhance several sections of the material list. Thus, for example, the speed of the data transfer to the material list becomes much faster as well as the speed when working in and with the list.
Now, it is also possible to open the material list under every additional option.
The material list is now a so-called “non-modal window”. Consequently, it is possible to continue to work in the building project even if the material list is opened. If something is modified in the building project and a new transfer is initiated, the list will close as long as the transfer lasts and will automatically open again. This way of working is an excellent option in a two screen system for example. When switching to another building project while the list is opened, the standard list (if available) which belongs to the project will open automatically. If, so far, no data transfer to the material list has been carried out there, an empty material list window will be displayed.
Now, changed window sizes in the material list will no longer be abandoned after opening them again.
Another new feature is the option to switch all selection dialogs to alphabetic sorting. This option can be found e.g. in the material list under the setting options of the template ("Format" -> "Edit template"). The new option “Sorting” has been added to this. Here, the following options are available:
"Standard": sorting as before
"Name A-Z": alphabetic sorting of the names starting with A
"Name Z-A": alphabetic sorting of the names starting with Z
"Abbreviation A-Z": alphabetic sorting of the abbreviations starting with A
"Abbreviation Z-A": alphabetic sorting of the abbreviations starting with Z
For better overview, the selection dialog for partial lists is now displayed in a separate window. Also in this window, just like for the templates, it is possible to switch to alphabetical sorting. Sorting will always have effect on all selection dialogs.
Another new feature in the material list is the overview over all columns of the material list for the selected component. With a double-click on a component a new window will open, listing all columns of the material list with the values of the current component. Thus, it can be checked very easily and quickly which values the respective component has in the material list. When another component is selected while the window is open, the data will automatically follow and display the values of the new component.
What’s more, language independence of the material list has been achieved. Thus, the exchange of building projects between different language versions of the SEMA software has been significantly improved. <Highlight Film Material List – more efficient>
In building projects which are swapped in from previous versions it is required to convert the material list into the new format. When opening the list or when carrying out the data transfer, the query on whether the list shall be deleted or converted will appear once per building project. Here we recommended to delete the old list as far as possible and to carry out a new data transfer to the material list. Conversion of the list is a bit more time-consuming and is best done locally on the computer. If the required components are not found, the material list will be transferred to a SEMA server and converted there. For this, internet access is required.
Through these new features working in and with the material list has been made a lot easier and better.
Now it is possible to transfer timber cross-sections with exchanged width/height to the material list. This new features makes it for example possible to combine a 8x16 timber and a 16x8 timber in the material list, and thus list them under one item. This option has been integrated in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) -> “Evaluations” under the corresponding tab "Roof", "Ceiling" or "Wall" under "Component position". Here, the option "Swap timber cross-section (change width/height)" can be activated. Additionally, it has to be set whether the components are transferred in “upright” (8 x 16) or in "lying” (16 x 8) position. With the “upright” setting, all components of the respective tab will be turned during the data transfer in such a way that the width is smaller than the height of the component. With the “lying” setting, all components of the respective tab will be turned during the data transfer in such a way that the width is larger than the height of the component. Components which already meet the specification will not be turned. In turned members, simple cuts will be automatically recalculated in a way that combining these components in the single member list will also be possible in most cases.
Thus, members with reversed cross-sections can be combined in the material list. <Highlight Film Material List – more efficient>
The partial list auto feature has been corrected, in particular with regard to the values “width”, “height” and “length”. (Zobl)
A conversion error has been fixed. (Lottermoser)
The transfer to the material list in the BP mode 1 with path to a network drive has been corrected. (Gruber)
In the material list, when saving lists or when starting the numbering, now all material lists on the plan are also automatically updated. (Dittus)
Some data has not been displayed in the material list – therefore certain template files have been revised. (ABZ-Schönbuch, Hobelsberger)

Single Member

In Version 12.1 the CMP export has been enhanced. In the “General settings” it is now possible to influence the bird’s mouths export. The new “Delete purlin width” option with three different modes is available:
Mode 1: The purlin width will only be deleted if the component will not be changed by this. One typical example for this is a bird’s mouth through a ridge purlin. Here, the purlin width is outside of the component. This will be detected automatically and the parameter P15 (width counter component) will be set to the value “Zero” in the export.
Mode 2: The purlin width will only be deleted if the vertical and horizontal area of the bird’s mouth will not change. Here, it is also possible to enter a maximum length. This will determine the maximum value up to which the purlin width will be deleted.
Mode 3: The purlin width will be deleted in all bird’s mouths. Caution: In some types of bird’s mouth (e.g. at the eaves purlin) this can result in the bird’s mouth not having any support any more as only the horizontal area of the bird’s mouth will remain.
Furthermore, the new “Combine hip rafter bird’s mouths” option is available. In a corner connection of purlins (scarf joint or intersection) mostly two bird’s mouths are created in the hip rafter. By means of this setting, these bird’s mouths can now be combined to a hip notch, provided the purlin width is “Zero” or the purlin width has been deleted.

DXF Interface

The import of DXF and DWG files has been improved. (Lederbauer)
The 3D DXF export has been expanded and enhanced in Version 12.1. From now on every component will be exported as an independent DXF block. With every DXF block having a unique name. The composition of this name can be configured in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under "DXF Import/Export" -> “3D block names“.
Here, the data of each component will be assigned to three different DXF layers. There is a "SURFACE" layer, an "OUTLINE" layer and an "APERTURE" layer.
The “SURFACE“ layer contains the data of the object geometry. These data represent the component as such.
The “OUTLINE“ layer additionally contains a run-around line which indicates the silhouette of the component. This line can be used for production control, for example.
The ”APERTURE“ layer contains the run-around lines for possible cutouts in the component. Also these lines can be used for production control.
For the data in the “SURFACE“ layer it is also possible to set whether the geometry of the components is exported as line model ( 3D lines) or as shape models (3D faces ). When exporting the shape model into the target program, a surface-filled display of the components is possible as well. This setting can also be defined in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under "DXF Import/Export" -> “3D export of objects”.

SCI-XML Import

In Version 12.1 the export of walls, windows, doors and macros in the SCI-XML format has been enabled. In the program under “File” -> “Export“, the new “SCI-XML Export….“ has been made available. By selecting this new export option, an export menu will open. Here it is possible to define which of the components/walls shall be exported. It can be selected between “Active ground plan“, “Active storey“, “Active wall“ and “Marked components“. After the export has been started, the different actions are displayed in the status bar. Then, the export path which has been preset in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) will open. The export path is determined under “FHP Import/Export“ in the “ImpExp“ tab -> “SCI/XML Export“. Additionally, a definite export file name can be entered here. Moreover, in the export menu the “check” option lets you double check the stored data.

Quantity System

The new function “Measuring in demonstration mode” simulates the transfer of the measuring points of a tachymeter into the SEMA program.
For this, the SEMA program has to be opened twice. In the first SEMA program you open the components or the building/construction from which the coordinates are to be taken. In the second SEMA program, a blank project is opened. This is where the transferred measuring points end up or where the various input fields are filled with coordinate values.
The laser simulation can be started via “Extras” -> “Options” -> “SEMA Intern” in the 3D view of the respective project. A view displaying the tachymeter simulation will open. By means of the mouse pointer, a laser beam is simulated. Now, the required input (e.g. entering measuring points, laser measurement of stairs, wall “from” “to”, 3D timber component “from” “to” etc.) has to be activated in the second opened SEMA program. If the required command is active, it is necessary to switch back to the SEMA program displaying the “tachymeter simulation”. Now the coordinates can be send to the input fields or the required measuring points to the still blank SEMA program.
Even without using a tachymeter, this tool enables you to describe and communicate the capabilities of the “SEMA Quantity System”.

Release History V12.0 Build 6600

General Points

As of version 12.0, the SEMA Program can be opened as often as you like. If required, it is thus possible to quickly and comfortably check values which are needed in a second project without having to close the current project. Besides, all components, objects etc. can be copied (Ctrl+C) and pasted in the second, open SEMA Program (Ctrl+V). Settings, such as the display settings (F7) or the pre-settings (Alt+F7), can be separately defined and set for each open program. However, the same master data stock will be used in all open programs. Thus, if a component is saved in the first program, it will also be possible to use this component in the second program. It is also possible to open two different versions of the program. In case of a SEMA version older than 12.0, the older version (e.g. 11.5) has to be started first and then version 12.0 can be started. However, copying of components, objects etc. will only work with the same program versions. Furthermore, it is not possible to work on the same project in two open programs. Needless to say, also the Presenter can be opened parallel to the main program. Currently, the material list can only be called up in one opened program. <Highlight Film Opening the SEMA Program Multiple Times>
In version 12.0 staggered, i.e. offset vertical sections can be created. In order to create these sections, abutting of vertical sections has been made possible. As a result of this, a vertical section can be subdivided in as many sub-areas as desired. Then, the individual partial sections can be shifted parallel to the vertical section to their desired position via the edit command “Position“. Here, the special feature is that in view mode the individual partial sections will only display the area where they have been positioned. Thus, if a partial section is displayed in view mode, all existing partial sections of the vertical section will be put “upright” and the area of the individual section will be displayed in total.
The section thickness of each individual partial section can be set in different ways. The required partial section is marked and the thickness of the section can be defined via the “Modify“ command. In the view of the section it is possible to modify the section thickness of each individual partial section via the “3D section parameter” in the “Section” tool bar. According to the number of partial sections, a corresponding number of parts for the modification of the section thickness will be made available in the open master data. Here, the order of the section thickness is from left to right. Of course, it is also possible to subsequently modify the length of the partial sections after abutting via the “Cut” edit command. If a partial section is deleted in top view, all corresponding sections will be deleted as well. <Highlight Film Staggered Vertical Sections>
In order to correct the overlapping of the options buttons by the master data of a create command, the following new button has been programmed in the “Customized” menu of the tool bar under the “Options” tab: "Adapt width of right program area".
This command sets the width of the right program area to the standard master data width incl. the frame width as currently set in Windows. In standardised layout it is thus possible to prevent the covering of command buttons.
One new feature of Version 12.0 is the so-called “external data integration”. The SEMA program now generally provides the possibility to access external databases via an online connection. In future it could be possible to connect with many different types of databases, for example with calculation data, fasteners, all kinds of master data or all different kinds of material data.
In order to show the future possibilities of this data integration, the transfer of customer data from an external address database to SEMA building project headers has been realised. For this purpose, the options “Data connection”, “Data table” and “Data query” have been added to the master data under “Free Placeholders/Variables”. <Highlight Film External Data Integration>
With “Data connection” a connection between SEMA and the database is established. At first, the database is defined in the connection’s master data. The following options are available: Access, SQLite, Firebird, Interbase, MySQL, MS SQL, PostgreSQL, Sybase SQL Anywhere, IBM DB2, Oracle and others. Generally it is possible to connect to all databases that are based on ODBC. If a type of database has been selected, the path of the database as well as other required entries, such as “Server”, “User Name” and “Password” will be entered. Several types of databases require additional parameters, which can be entered in the respective entry field. Via the “Test connection” button it can be tested if the entries of the connection have been correct. If the connection is correct with regard to initialization, connection and disconnection, the found tables will be directly displayed in the “Connection” tab.
Thus, it is now very easy to request a table from the database via “Data table” or to request a specific value from the database via “Data query”.
For address management for example, a query about an address table is made. The previously established connection is allocated to the database in the master data of the “Data table” in the first field under connection. For the query it has to be entered what exactly is required from one of the existing tables. This will be done by means of the "Select (column1, column2, column3,...) from (name of table)" formula. The entire table is displayed when the value "*" is entered. Values containing special characters have to be put in square brackets, so that they will be evaluated. If the query string is correct, the table with the requested columns will be immediately displayed in the screens image in the “Table” tab. The table will be synchronized with the database via “Update”. No master data from the “Data query” group is required for the example of the address database.
Once a functioning table has been set up, it is possible to access to the database when creating a new building project. Under "Options", in the reference of the “Database table”, the required address table is allocated from the master data. The fitting data are selected in the fields of the “Database column”. Here, all requested columns of the table are available in the pull down menu. These can now be allocated according to the designation. All allocated fields are highlighted in the building project header. These fields now also act as “Search fields”. For example, if a customer’s family name is entered in the name field and then “Update” is clicked, so this name will be searched for in the database. All other fields which have been defined will be automatically filled with all the data connected to the name. If a selected search criterion exists several times, a selection box with the corresponding entries will open. Here, it is now possible to select and allocate the appropriate entry.
This example of external data integration shows clearly how values can be easily and comfortably transferred from a database into the SEMA program. <Highlight Film SEMA Start and Information Centre>
The case sensitivity of the search function (binoculars) for component values in the ML tab has been revised. (Frankenhauser)
The module lock of version 12.0 applies with this update.
The possibilities to change scripts in template building projects have been improved. (Landmark)

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

All entry forms have been enabled in the “Copy” command of dimension lines. Thus, dimension lines can be copied into any position. A new option has been incorporated on the right side of the entry line. This option determines whether or not dimension points and areas will also be copied when copying dimension lines. <Highlight Film Dimensioning>
Area dimensioning for dimension lines has been incorporated in wall view, for roof and ceiling elements, in construction planes, in truss view and for the joist system. Thus, members, CAD objects etc. can be marked on a selected dimension line via the “Area dimensioning” command. <Highlight Film Dimensioning>
As of version 12.0 it is possible to define “User variables” which are related to the building project. By means of this function, it is possible to quickly and comfortably modify self-defined values which are assigned to MCAD objects. Thus, it is for example possible, to change the drilling diameter of several MCAD drillings from 10 mm to 12 mm in one step. In order to enable this, the new group “Variables” has been included in the master data under “CAD/MCAD” -> “MCAD macros”. In this group you can find two pre-defined drillings and nailing lines to which variables have already been allocated. If a MCAD drilling from this group is used in the building project, the pre-defined variable will be automatically adopted in the editor of the user variable. This variable could look as follows:
[USERVAR.drilling diameter]
COMMENT= Drilling diameter, rafter nail drilling
VAL=10
DEFVAL=10
In this editor it is possible to change the value (behind “VAL“) from 10 to 12, the processing or rather the drilling diameter will adapt accordingly and will then create a drilling hole with 12 instead of 10 mm.
Needless to say, variables can be user-defined. You find the editor under “Extras" -> "BP User variables“. When opened, a clearly structured editor to create variables becomes available. For convenience a button has been incorporated in the top left-hand corner of the editor by which pre-defined syntactical elements that are required for the definition of the variables are inserted.
The following values can be defined. Under ”USERVAR“, the name of the variable is assigned, under “COMMENT“, a comment or a description of the variable, under “VAL“, a numerical value or a designation and under “DEFVAL“, the original value of “VAL“, for example. However, only “USERVAR” and “VAL” have to be filled in to create a variable; all other fields are additional fields and are for better overview.
As soon as the user variable has been defined as required, it has to be saved via the save button (top left). In order to insert the variable, placeholders can be assigned in the definition of MCADs. The placeholders can be called up via the newly incorporated placeholder button or via a right-click. On the left side of the placeholder selection the new “Topic” -> “User variables” has been incorporated. Here, you can find all the variables including designation which have been created in the building project and which have been defined under “USERVAR”. The placeholder @USERVAR. Bohrungsdurchmesser @ would be available for the example mentioned above. This placeholder can subsequently be used as the diameter in a drilling. A MCAD formula could look as follows:
3DBEARB 4 40 3
WENN BTL = HOELZER WENNENDE
BEZUG = OBEN
WINKEL = RECHTW
P01 = PX1
P02 = PY1
P06 = 0
P07 = PN1
P11 = 20
P12 = @USERVAR.Bohrungsdurchmesser@
As a result, the drilling diameter of this MCAD macro would be 10 mm as a value of “10” has been entered under “VAL”. The benefit of this variable is the fact that all MCAD drillings which have this variable in their formula can be modified in one step. Besides, after inserting a variable under “USED”, the editor lists how often the variable is used in the building project. Of course, MCAD objects with variables can also be filed under the master data and can be used again at any time. As soon as a MCAD with a variable is inserted into a BP, the variable will appear in the editor of the user variable. In addition to this it is possible to list and modify all variables which have been saved in the working master data under “Master folder/user variables”. <Highlight Film User-definable Variables>
If a building project which contains variables is passed on by e-Mail, for example, the variables for the building project are saved and can be modified at any other workstation.
The “Height dimension” command has been made inactive in views or parts of the program where it is not needed and/or does not make any sense. (Italy)
From now on it is possible to transform ground plan lines into ground plan polygons via the “Misc” editing command.
Grouped ground plan components (lines, polygons etc.) can be anchored via the “Misc” editing command.
Auto dimensioning for ceiling shapes has been incorporated in version 12.0. For this purpose, “Ceiling” has been added to the master data of the auto dimensioning. If auto dimensioning is carried out in a ceiling, the lengths, the widths, the pockets and the stairwells are dimensioned by default. Here, area dimensionings will be automatically created at the created dimension lines. The width of the area dimensioning of each dimension line will be exactly one-third of the maximum expansion of the ceiling shape. Additionally, in the first tab of the master data it can be defined whether or not members and elements will also be dimensioned. Thus, also the spacing of the joist system can be dimensioned automatically in an easy and comfortable way. Members, elements and stairwells will be each created on a separate dimension line. If a reference line is used in order to create a joist system, the dimension lines will always be created next to a reference line. By this, an overlapping of reference and dimension lines will be avoided. The set distance of the first horizontal dimension line in the third tab “DIM” in the master data of the dimension line will then refer to the reference line and not to the ceiling shape any longer. Besides, the component selection menu in the master data of the dimension line has been expanded by ceiling lengths, stairwells and roof and ceiling elements. A pre-set auto dimensioning for ceiling shapes (ceiling) has been integrated in the master data under "CAD/MCAD" -> "Auto dimensioning". <Highlight Film Dimensioning>
In version 12.0 the displaying of the centre point of circles and ellipses is possible. To enable this, the “Centre of circle visible” function has been made available under the third tab - “Commands” - under “View” in the customized menu. This function can be incorporated into any tool bar. On activating this function, the centre point of all circles and ellipses will be displayed with an “X” in the centre and can, of course, also be snapped with the mouse. The customized menu can be opened via a right-click on the tool bar and selecting the “Customize” option.
All fields of the material list tab have been enabled for MCAD definition. Thus, even more data can be transferred to the material list via a MCAD which has been defined as material.
From now on dimension points (dimension figures) can be positioned centered to dimension lines. In order to enable this, the option “Rel. centered” (relative dimension text centered to dimension line) has been made available under the second tab “Dimension line” in the master data of the dimension line. <Highlight Film Dimensioning>
In Version 12.0 the dimensioning and the automatic labelling can be displayed more clearly. CAD texts, dimension figures and all automatic component values such as dimension figures, lengths, cross-sections, component numbers etc. can be shown in many different ways.
The setting options for the component values can be found in the display settings (F7) of the respective components. Advanced settings are provided for all members, walls, ceilings, roof designs and so on, and also for all stairs components.
The following options are available in the selection field:
Under "Standard " the values are displayed as accustomed.
Under “Opaque” the values will have an opaque white background which covers the component.
With the “Frame” option, a frame will be drawn around the component.
With “Frame opaque”, the value will have a frame and an opaque white background.
For stairs components the function is also available in the view mode and in the developed view of the components.
For CAD texts these setting options are available in the same way and function under the "Txt" (Text) tab in the “Backgr.” (Background) field.
For dimension lines, dimension points, cross-sections, angle and height dimensions, the new setting options can be found under the “O” tab. Here, it is now possible to display the dimensions “opaque”, “with frame” or “opaque with frame”; also found under the “Backgr.” (Background) field. <Highlight Film Better Dimensioning and Labelling>
Drawings and plans become thus even more individual and clearer.
CAD/MCAD texts can be linked to all 3D objects. (France)

Roof Design

The “Partial roof” command in the “Roof Design” part of the program has been revised and enhanced in version 12.0.
Using the “Partial roof free” mode is the same as in the previous versions. However, completely new calculation routines run in the background which allows a roof design with any kind of profiles on complex ground plans in one flow. Also theoretical roof designs which are used by vocational schools or schools for master craftspeople can be created quickly and easily.
Another new feature is the “Undo entry of roof side” (Alt+1) button at the bottom-right in the entry line. With this option it is possible to undo the last entries during roof design without having to cancel the command. And it goes without saying that the “z” hotkey still works as well.
One new development is the “Partial roof on polygon” mode. By means of this command it is possible to fully-automatically create a roof design on a polygon. Simply by executing the command, selecting the required profile, clicking on the polygon and confirming with “OK”. Needless to say, it is possible to subsequently modify roof areas or to assign barges. In particular polygonal towers or other designs which are made of only one profile can be created quickly and easily with this command.
Miscellaneous messages after the calculation of the design will point out possible inaccuracies in the ground plan or profile entry. For example, if the roof edges are not long enough: "Please note: short roof edge PR:1 broken hip 0.053 m".
For each roof area, a “Profile name” (name: profile-area-master data) can now be displayed (F7 -> “Roof design” -> “Areas” -> “Component values”). The profile name can already be displayed while entering a partial roof; thus, the user has better control over which profiles have been used.

Rafter System

Two additional types have been added to the “Skew notch” end type in version 12.0. In the image selection of the skew notch master data a “Double heel skew notch” and a “Free skew notch” are available. For the “Double heel skew notch”, first the “Depth” is defined. The heel is lengthened in the direction of the component until it has reached the pre-set depth, measured at right angles to the edge of the counter component, and from this point of intersection it runs at right angles to the edge of the counter component. From this point of intersection also the second heel runs at right angles to the edge of the counter component until the pre-set depth has been reached. By means of a joint it is possible to determine free play between the component cut and the edge of the counter component. So, forces are prevented from being transferred onto the component cut. Just like in other types of skew notches it is possible to exactly work or mill the counter processing. A "Double heel skew notch" is exported to the machine with two scarf joints, a “Double heel skew notch” with one double cut and one scarf joint.
For the “Free skew notch” also the depth of the skew notch is defined first. The dimension is marked out at right-angles to the edge of the counter component. With a joint it is possible to determine a play between the component cut and the edge of the counter component. In “Distance” the position of the step joint notch is defined. The distance is always measured from the front edge. Together with the depth of the skew notch, the point of intersection for the step joint notch will be produced. The angle defines how the front of the skew notch will be shaped. Here, the settings "free", "bs (bisectric) component", "bs skew notch", "ra (rectangular) component" and "ra skew notch” are available. For this end type, the “Tenon type A” with the common setting options is available under the “Tenon” tab. Under the “Dri” tab it is possible to assign drillings to the tenon. According to the respective setting, the step joint notch will be passed transferred with one or two scarf joints and one mortise. The skew notch will be exported with one or two scarf joints and one tenon. <Highlight Film New Skew Notches>
All entries regarding the end type can be checked “online” with the help of the screen image.
The respective examples are provided in the master data.
Curved angle braces" Rafters for round dormers" Arched trusses" Or a notch on the component without 3CAD object or MCAD" No problem! As of version 12.0, members can be created in any shape, no more design limitations. All rafter system, timber framing and 3CAD timber components can be processed freely.
For this, the editing commands “Punch“ and “Add“ have been enabled for the mentioned components. Additionally, the “Curve mode” in the bottom entry line has been enabled. Thus, it is possible to process and shape members in an almost identical way like polygons. All components can be processed from side 3 and 1, side 4 and 2 as well as from the front side. Important in this context is that processings can only be created at right angles to the component plane. In order to process a rafter on side 3 or side 1 (punch, add or curve mode), a vertical section has to be created on the particular component area. Needless to say, purlins, ceiling beams etc. can be processed directly in top view on side 3. Processing of the members is carried out exactly as in polygons: The component is marked and can then easily and comfortably be processed via the editing commands “Punch” –> “Box”, “Freeform”, “Object”. Under the “Punch” -> “Object” command it is even possible to select other timber components, which create the respective processing at the component.
For example, in order to create a curved angle brace, the following procedure is recommended:
First, the required form of the angle brace is drawn via a CAD polygon. Then, the timber component out of which the angle brace is to be created is placed over the polygon. Here, it has to be taken into account that the dimension of the timber component needs to be bigger than the dimension of the polygon. In the last step, the timber component is marked and the “Punch” -> “Object” editing command is selected. Via the “Cut out form (Alt+1)“ option (at the right side of the entry line) the angle brace “adopts” the form of the polygon. Of course, the angle brace could also be shaped via the curve mode (“Mark object details”).
In order to also process a post with angle brace in a comfortable way, it is now possible to exclusively process the marked component. Thus, the left and the right angle brace as well as the post can be separately marked and processed in the curve mode.
Currently it is neither possible to enlarge (width, height and length) members via the “Add” editing command nor to cut through members via the “Punch” command. Furthermore, punching within a component is also not possible. However, the members can be processed further via 3D cuts, MCAD processing or scarf joints. If a component has been punched already, it is possible to influence the shape within the punched area via the “Add” command.
By changing into the curve mode (“Mark object details”), the component gets base points and control points for processing, just the same as polygons. As a matter of course, the edges of the component can also be abutted or connected in order to get additional base points. It is also possible to delete already existing control points. And again, the component cannot be enlarged by shifting the base and control points. As soon as a timber component is processed via the options mentioned above, it will get an outer contour for the processing on a universal wood-working machine.
All components which have been processed will be given the new “P” tab (contour processing) in the master data. Under this tab it is possible to determine whether the processing, which has been carried out at the component, will be actually produced or whether it will only be displayed. In addition to this, the “invalid” option is available. These settings are available for processings on side 3/1 and side 4/2. Only the side which is affected by the contour will be switched active. By means of the “produce” option, the component with its outer contour will be exported to the universal wood-working machine. Via “display”, the processing will only be displayed in the SEMA program but not be exported to the universal wood-working machine. “Invalid” restores the component’s initial state and all contour processing will be eliminated. Any types of processing at the front side are not exported to the machine, therefore, only the “invalid” and “display” options are available, here.
Processing can also be switched off via points of intersection (bottom entry line -> “Mark points of intersection”). For that purpose, a point of intersection is created axially on a timber component (outer contour): The node can then undo all contour processings.
If a box is punched out of the component, this component will automatically be transformed into a scarf joint on the machine. A cutout in the shape of a bird’s mouth (3 points) is exported to the machine as a bird’s mouth (without rafter nail drilling). Curves/roundings or other shapes will be created as free contours.
Components which have been processed from side 3/1 or 4/2 are fixed after the processing. This means that these components will no longer automatically be lengthened or shortened in a calculation. The components can be saved in the master data via the editing command “Define component”. A warning message will appear in the “Punch”, “Cut” and “End type” editing commands if members with contours have been processed on side 3/1 and on side 4/2. Besides, this message will also appear when modifying the cross section of a member with contour processing on the front side. To display the types of processing in top view, it is possible to select the “3D End type + processing” option in the display settings (F7) under “Wall members/elements” -> “Rafter system” -> “General” -> “3CAD/timber members”, “Joist system/elements” and “End types and processing”. <Highlight Film Curved Timber Members>
The auto roof feature (Extras -> “Auto roof” (F9) is now also possible in 3D mode.

Truss

An auto truss feature has been incorporated in version 12.0 which makes it possible to automatically space trusses under roof areas. The auto truss can be found in the top tool bar under “Extras” -> “Auto Roof (F9)”. The new “Create truss” command has been integrated under the auto roof. Through a link behind the “Create truss” command it is included in the auto truss. All trusses required for the construction of the roof will be generated automatically from this “Main truss”. If a truss has already been created and saved in the “BP – own master data” via the truss assistant, so this truss will appear in the selection. Of course it is also possible to use “free” trusses which have been stored in the master data, via the folder icon in the top-left corner (switch master folder). Via “>>more…>>“ after the link in the auto roof feature you will get to the truss settings.
With the help of the “Create hip/valley truss” option it can be determined whether a truss is to be created under every hip or valley.
The “Create barge truss” option “behaves” the same as auto roof feature. It can be selected whether barge trusses will be created and whether these will additionally have a play to the barge.
In “Space areas with trusses” it can be determined whether or not trusses will be spaced along the ridge line. And also whether these will be spaced according to the pre-set offset (under the pre-settings Alt+F7 -> “Walls/outline” -> “Truss”) or in the building raster. In a hip roof a truss is always automatically created at the hip/ridge point. For this purpose another setting is available by which the “Position/distance from the hip/ridge point” can be determined. A numerical value is available which can be defined both “positive” and “negative”. Furthermore, it is possible to select the “inside” option. Under this option, the truss drops inside at the ridge/hip point.
The next two options – “Create triangular truss” and “Create jack truss” – are of importance in hip areas and hip and valley intersections.
Explanation of triangular and jack trusses using the example of a hip roof:
If none of the two options is set active, so the spacing will also be carried on in the hip area, with the trusses cut under of the hip and with an automatic horizontal top boom.
If only the “Create triangular truss” option is ticked, so the spacing in the hip area is carried on up to the set minimum length. Spacing under “Saddle roof area” is carried on until the triangular trusses have the set minimum dimension. The fully-automatically created triangular trusses will then abut at right-angles with the “last” truss.
If only the “Create jack truss” option is ticked, the “normal” truss spacing will end at the ridge/hip point. The jack trusses are spaced according to the set offset and intersected with the ridge/hip trusses.
If both options – “Create triangular truss” and “Create jack truss” are set active, so a truss roof combined of triangular and jack trusses is generated.
In a hip area, a truss will always be created centered (under triangular trusses and jack trusses). The spacing in the hip area has been implemented in such a way so that as many equal trusses as possible are generated. Thus, the time and effort to create individual trusses is reduced.
Needless to say, it is also possible to have trusses and roof timbers spaced simultaneously. Manually create trusses are taken into account in the spacing. <Highlight Film Fully Automatic Creation of Truss Roofs>

Wall and Ceiling

The numbering of walls that are allocated to a multi-wall can now no longer be changed via the “Others” -> “Manual number” command. Along the same lines, the “Others” -> “Auto number” command is blocked as soon as walls of an active storey are allocated to a multi-wall. This avoids sorting problems of multi-walls. (Landmark)

3D Wall Ceiling

Two new logical conditions - “contains (~)" and “does not contain (/~)" – have been added to the auto wall output feature. With these conditions it is possible to filter and output only walls with specific contents. And, also the other way round, to exclude walls with specific content.
Subsequently manually modified layers are now displayed correctly in the 3D mode. (Landmark)
Modifying of layer projections in ceilings has been enhanced in detail. (Kiefer)
The collective modifying of the lintel height of several windows with different parapet heights has been corrected. (Landmark)
When carrying out manual numbering of walls in existing multi-walls, the numbers of the multi-walls are now updated correctly. (Landmark)
The position query (“left”, “right” and “centered”) in the entry line when placing and shifting via the “Position” command has been disabled in macros with a width of “0.00”. Thus, macros, such as e.g. sockets, which do not require a width, can be used even more quickly and more comfortably. As soon as a width is assigned to a macro, the query will become active again.
From now on it is possible to determine the length from which on a top boom will be created via a new setting option in the pre-settings (Alt+F7). This setting can be found under “Walls/Outline” on the “Wall shape” tab. It is possible to define a value under “Create top boom from length”. (Landmark)

Coverings 3D Wall Ceiling

If left or right layers of a wall are set to “Bevel” in the layer projection table, these will now be bevelled to roof areas even if the timber layer (L0) is set to “Low” or “High”.

Placing of Elements

From version 12.0 on, so-called element abutments in roof and ceiling elements can be saved and used. The options – “Roof element on roof area” and “Automatic roof element” - have been added to the “Roof elements” command under “Roof design” in program selection. In the “Roof element on roof area” command only the required roof area on which the element is to be created has to be selected. The program will then create a roof element on the entire roof area. Roof elements can be created even more easily and more quickly by means of the “Automatic roof element” command. After having selected the appropriate master data, the command only has to be confirmed in the entry line by clicking “OK” and the roof elements will then be created on all roof areas of the active storey.
Needless to say, the option to manually create roof elements via the “Roof elements, manually” command still exists. The “Ceiling element” creation command has also been enhanced correspondingly. Here, the “Ceiling element on ceiling” option has been incorporated. After the selection of the appropriate master data, the ceiling must be marked and the ceiling element will be created over the entire area. In addition to that it can be decided in the entry line whether the ceiling element will be created vertically or horizontally.
The new “Insert element abutment” command has been incorporated under “Roof design” as well as under the “Ceiling outline” part of the program; there is no difference regarding the procedure. Subsequent to the selection of the new command, a master data will open where a previously filed element abutment is selected. For this purpose, the new “Roof element abutments” and “Ceiling element abutments” subgroups have been added under “Walls/ceilings/RC elements” in the master data. After the selection of the master data it is required to select a roof or a ceiling element, where the element abutment is to be used. In the next step, the position is determined at which the previously created element is to be abutted. In the final step, the first and the second element is determined. Now, the element abutment is inserted between these two elements. Furthermore, the additional functions – “Snap only component axis” (Alt+1) and “Insert only element abutment” (Alt+2) are available in the entry line. If the “Insert only element abutment” function is activated, the “Mark element” and “Distance” setting options are omitted and the element abutment can be directly entered. For better element abutment entering, a sectional view has been created in the screen image of the element abutment. This sectional view displays the projections and members. What’s more, via numbering this sectional view also makes it clear which one is the first and which one the second element. Thus, inserting an element abutment is pretty similar to inserting corners in walls.
The element abutment will be defined via the “File element abutment” command. Here, only the first and the second element have to be selected. Subsequently, the master data will open and the element abutment can be saved. In an element abutment all projections of the layers of the first and of the second element will also be saved. Besides, rafter and element members, CAD objects and dimensioning objects can also be saved in the element abutment. They only have to be marked before confirming the “File element abutment” command.
In addition to that it is also possible to disconnect roof and ceiling elements via the “Punch” command. The projections at the barge (left and right) as well as at the ridge and at the eaves will initially be defined in the big, full-area element and will not be influenced by an inserted element abutment. Due to this new feature, element abutments now only have to be defined once which make placing of elements a lot easier. <Highlight Film Abutting Roof and Ceiling Elements>
The “Standard roof element” and “Standard ceiling element” templates have been added to the plan templates of the standard plans in V12.0. Thus, roof or ceiling elements have their own standard plan template which can also be modified and saved as accustomed.

Auto PHP

The behaviour of MCAD markings which are created in the PHP export has been enhanced. In the pre-settings (Alt+F7) -> “PHP Import/Export” it is possible to define “Weinmann” markings for the left and right layers. As of version 12.0 also those MCAD markings which have been saved under the “Wall shape”, the “Element” or the “Zero layer” layer will be deleted after PHP export. (Landmark)

Stairs

In version 12.0 intersecting manually entered boards (handrails, booms, strings, horses) with different thicknesses is possible. By marking the manually entered components and by selecting the “Cut” command, the entry line with the cut options will open. The normal designs such as “Cut” or “Tail” are available. In the “Cut” design, the types related to “CMP 1 (component 1), namely “Mitre”, “Long”, “Short” and “S-L plat” (short long plateau) are available. At the bottom-right of the entry line the height levelling option is available. If enabled, either “Levelling length, overall” or “Levelling length, area” can be selected under “Height connection”. When selecting “Levelling length, overall” the affected components will be adapted at the corner connection so that a smooth, jointless transition is created. In both components the manipulation takes effect over the entire component. In “Levelling length, area” the corner connection will also be levelled jointlessly. However, it is still possible to determine which component’s top edge or bottom edge is to be adjusted. By means of the “Levelling factor”, the extent of the levelling is defined. The higher the factor, the higher the extent of adjustment on the component.
For “Tail” it has to be decided whether this is carried out at the bottom or at the top. For the height reference of the tail, the options - “bottom absolute”, “top absolute”, “bottom %”, “top %” and “TL tread” or “BL tread” - are available. Also here, the height levelling feature – as described above – is available. In addition to that, it is now also possible to intersect boards with boards from a different group of components. For example to intersect a horse with a string or a handrail with a boom. Needless to say, it is possible to allocate end types to the component ends. The intersection can be carried out both in 2D or 3D. <Highlight Film Corner Connections with Different Thicknesses>
In version 12.0, the adaption options have been optimised and are now also available in 3D and in component view. The two new adaption options “Tread run adoption” and “Number of steps per area” have been integrated.
When a tread is marked in 3D, in top view or component view the editing command “Position” will become available. Once selected, the adaption options “Auto adaption”, “Parallel adaption”, “Individual adaption” and “Tread run adoption”, “Number of steps per area”, “Measurements, top view” and “Measurements, view” become available in the bottom left of the input box. The adaption options listed in version 11.5 – “Auto adaption”, “Constant adaption”, “Linear adaption”, “Sinus adaption” and “Palings adaption” – have been combined and can be found under the “Auto adaptions” option.
With the “Auto adaptions” option the area to be adapted has to be entered in the input area. Once the area has been marked, the type of adaption can be selected and then confirmed. For sinus and linear adaption the options “falling/rising” or “simple” are also available.
For parallel adaption, first the required area and then the adaption step have to be marked. The front edge of the adaption step can then be moved with the mouse to the required position. In the bottom right of the entry area the options “Point snap on side line” or “Point snap on leg line” are available. With “Point snap on side line” the adaption step is adapted at right angles to the walking line; with “Point snap on leg line” the adaption step keeps its direction and is moved parallel.
For individual adaption only a step and fixed point have to be selected. After determining the adaption point the step can be newly positioned by entering a distance or by mouse. With the arrow buttons (up and down) in the input box it is possible to move from step to step very easily. Here also the above mentioned options are available. However, there are in addition “free point snap” and “snap on paling” available. Either the step is moved around freely or the selected paling is snapped. The tread is placed in such a way that the paling is centered under the projection.
With the new “Tread run adoption” the tread run can be adopted from any tread to the required area. First the area and then the reference step for the tread run have to be selected. Since now the area is changing, a “Type of calculation” also has to be selected. With “Beginning, fixed” the position of the first tread in the marked area is fixed. The end is variable and adapted in such a way that the adopted tread run can be calculated.
With “End, fixed” the position of the last tread in the marked area is fixed. The beginning is variable and is adjusted in such a way that the adopted tread run can be calculated.
With “Beginning/end adjustment” the beginning and the end of the marked area are variable. Always half of the dimension calculated for the tread adoption is adjusted at the beginning and the end. For all three types of calculation, only the tread run is changed, the rise remains unchanged.
With the new option “Number of steps per area” the number of treads in the marked area can be changed. Again, first of all the required area has to be marked, then, in the next field, the number of existing treads in the marked area is displayed. If the number is changed and confirmed, a new tread run with the new number of steps is created and the rise is re-calculated for the entire stairs.
The adaption option “Measurements, top view” is now also available in 3D and in step view. As has been the case so far, the marked tread can be changed left or right with reference “relative” or “Start of flight” or “End of flight”. With the arrow buttons (up and down) in the input box it is possible to move from step to step very easily. Also available in the input area is the “Step measurement/concrete measurement” option. It is only active if there are concrete elements in the stairs. With this option, either the steps or the concrete can be changed.
The adaption option “Measurements, view” is also available in 3D and e.g. in string view. Here, the height position of a marked tread can be changed. The height can either be from finished floor, from the uncovered floor, from the “Reference” or “relative” to the previous tread and it can be entered or snapped. With the arrow buttons (up and down) in the input box it is possible to move from step to step very easily. Also available in the bottom right of the input area is the “Step measurement/concrete measurement” option and the “Step fixed/Step not fixed” options. With “Step, not fixed” only the changed height position of the tread is adjusted. With “Step, fixed” the treads before and after the changed tread are newly calculated so that the same total rise below and above the landing is achieved.
It goes without saying that the tread list is constantly updated and lists all the necessary information about tread runs and walking line. The pink values indicate that the current dimension falls below the minimum tread dimension. Blue values mean that the “max. difference” set in the data record is exceeded. What’s new here are the green values, they identify a step as a landing.
With the new adaption options and the 3D position command stairs adaption has been improved a great deal and has also become more clearly structured and more comfortable to use. <Highlight Film 3D Stairs Adaption>
Cutouts of tread tenons and risers in strings can now be combined for machine export if they have the same mortising depth. (Dettbarn)

3D Objects

In Version 12.0 exchanging textures of external 3D objects has been enabled. For this, the look tab has been added to the master data of 3D external objects. Each 3D external object has an internal list of materials. This list now appears under the new look tab. The listing of the different materials starts with 0 in ascending order and has a reference field for textures and colours, which are needed for textured and photo-realistic representation. By clicking into a reference field the master data will open and a new texture or colour can be allocated. The image is immediately updated after the new material has been allocated. With the material "Standard" button all allocated textures will be removed and the 3D external object will obtain its initial materials again. However, it is far easier and more comfortable to directly allocate the materials via the master data container with the 1-click option. Here the required texture/colour is selected in the master data container and allocated to the 3D external object with one click. To allocate new material, just the area of the object which is to be changed has to be clicked. Additionally, the material number is displayed in the component hint. Thus selecting areas in case of materials which are close to each other, or in case of very similar textures/colours, becomes significantly easier. If a material is allocated this way, it will also appear in the look tab of the object. This new feature makes it possible to individually design 3D objects regarding texture and colour, and it makes it also possible to expand one’s own master data and to design them as needed. <Highlight Film Individual Design of 3D Objects>

Structural Analysis

The strut-and-node model has been enhanced in some detail. (Italy)
The building project templates have been enhanced by “Example projects, structural analysis”.
The calculation time for timber members with point loads in HO7, e.g. the calculation of purlins with individual loads, has been optimised. (Schöny and others)
With version 12.0 in combination with the structural analysis program of Friedrich & Lochner, the Eurocode for Germany and Italy can be used. As of July 2012 the EN5-DIN-2010 with the relevant load standard EN1-DIN-2010 becomes compulsory and is thus already available. Parallel to that, the current standards for Germany are included as well. In Italy, the no longer valid DIN-2008-Italy has been replaced by the EN5-NTC-2008.
The standards can be set as always under the “General pre-settings” (Alt+F7) -> “Structural Analysis” -> “FriLo”. As default setting the EN5-DIN-2010 is used.
Only calculating timber stanchions (HO1) is currently not possible with the Eurocode. Structural calculations around stanchions and their load distribution to other components have to be calculated with the DIN 1052: 2008 for the time being.
For ceiling analysis the HO7 beam program has been extended by the so-called vibration check. If a ceiling member is passed on to FriLo for structural calculation, it is now possible to open the vibration check in the FriLo program and check/determine the vibration. This vibration report is then taken into account for the structural report.
To structurally calculate timber members with the new Eurocode the latest FriLo version has to be installed (see DVD “V12.0 Build 6600” or SEMA website for download).

Room

As of version 12.0 it is possible to allocate MCAD objects, windows, doors and macros to a room and to evaluate them. With this, already at an early planning stage it can be considered and calculated which and how much of a material will be required in a room. For this purpose, the functionality of MCAD objects has been enhanced. In the MCAD formula definition in the first tab of a MCAD objects, it has already been possible to indicate that this MCAD is a “material” which will be evaluated in the material list. Under "CAD/MCAD", "MCAD macros" and "Material" different MCAD materials are already available. If such a MCAD is created in a room, the room number and the room name in which the MCAD lies is additionally evaluated in the material list. If the MCAD object is positioned in a way that it not only touches a room but also a wall shape, also the “DNo” number of the affected wall will be evaluated in the material list. Thus, it is possible to allocate the MCAD not only to a room, but also to a wall. Via the master data container MCAD macros can be allocated to a room by just one click. One example of use for the MCAD material is the evaluation of sockets and light switches in a room.
Likewise, doors, windows and macros in the material list are allocated to the room (room number and room name). In case of internal doors, internal windows and macros in internal walls, the fact that it is part of the room is determined by the stop or the position. In case of doors and windows in an external wall, the stop is not taken into account and is always allocated to the “internal” room. Besides, the “Material list and stairs” and “Room list” tabs in the material list have been expanded. The “Room material” partial list has been incorporated under the two tabs. This partial list is structured in a way that the individual rooms with their material contents (windows, doors, macro and MCAD) are listed via the partial list auto feature. Thus, the required material per room can be calculated and put out extremely quickly. <Highlight Film Rooms with Special Materials>
Room and system limits now also correctly intersect with the ceiling shape in storeys without contents.
(WG System)
Determining external and internal walls for structural physics has been revised. (Egger)

Master Data Macros, Program

Under the “Skew notch” group, the new end types “Free skew notch”, “Free skew notch with tenon A” and “Heel skew notch, double” are offered.
A new master data set for the auto dimensioning of ceilings has been created.
Under the new “Roof element abutments” and “Ceiling element abutments” groups, new master data for the placing of elements are offered.
For BP user variables, examples for drillings and nailings are offered under “MCAD macros” -> “Variables”.
To the “Material” group of the MCAD macros, the new sub-groups “Electro” and “Sanitary” have been added. These MCAD materials are automatically allocated to the respective room.
The colour palette for visualization has been extended.
For the so-called “External data integration” the new groups “Data connection”, “Data table” and “Data query” have been created under “Free placeholders/variables”.
Under the “Data connection” group, “demo database” master data has been integrated.
Under the “Data table” group, address master data with example addresses has been integrated.
The “Data query” group is so far still empty.
For the bearers of Rothoblaas the article numbers of the dowel pins have been adjusted. (Italy)

Material List

In version 12.0 the “Auto partial list, by storey” option has been added to the auto partial lists (-> “Partial lists properties”, tab “General”). By carrying out this option, the partial lists are created by storey. Thus, it is also possible to separate walls, which are to be divided according to the roof/wall/ceiling number (DNo), in one step, for example. <Highlight Film Material List>
Furthermore, the new “Processing” mask field is now provided. This can be switched on via “Editing of the mask”. The processing of each component that takes part in the single member transfer is displayed in this column. Currently, five different types of processing are evaluated, which will automatically be assigned during the transfer to the material list:
- "<empty>": component does not take part in single member transfer
- "Cut RA": component is cut at right-angles
- "Component number": component with marking, which shows its number (setting option in Alt+F7)
- "Planing": component with plane areas
- "Complex": component with all other processing
- Thus it is now possible to select components according to their processing. <Highlight Film Material List>
In order to facilitate the components selection from a list, the new “Value selection” field has been integrated under the “Selection” tab in the “Partial lists properties”. In the value selection menu one or several criteria can simply be ticked in case of fields which contain values defined by the program. These will then be adopted to the value field. The selection field will be active and can be opened in the following six field selections:
- Storey type
- Processing
- Creation status
- Module
- Type of component
- Single member status
Additionally, values can also be entered manually in the value field, of course.
Another new feature on the “Selection” tab of the “Partial lists properties” is the “Reverse selection” option. By activating this option, all components which fail to meet at least one given criterion for the selection will be selected into this list. Thus, it is now possible to create also a list of all components which do not meet the respective criteria for selection. <Highlight Film Material List>
To be able to filter specific timber cross-sections, each master data of a timber has internally been assigned a dimension. This takes effect as soon as the master data in the “Dimension” material list tab field is empty and refers to the width and height of the timber member. Here, the lower value will always be positioned first. This means that a timber with 16x10 will get the dimension 10x16, for example.
By means of these new features and enhancements, versatile new lists can be created. For example, a list for timber members which are defined as standard members through specific processing, dimensions and lengths. And parallel to this, a list which comprises all the members that do not meet the criteria for processing, dimensions and lengths of the standard members. <Highlight Film Material List>

Single Member

The component labelling has been improved. Text to be written onto components, e.g. single member numbers, can now be better placed already in the program. The following options are available: “to reference line”, “opposite reference edge” and “centered”. This can be set under the pre-settings (Alt-F7) -> “Evaluations” -> “Others”. The selection is done under the new “Positioning of the text to reference edge” option. The component labelling is displayed in textured representation and in 3D area representation. (Ge-Wo, Meier and others)
The “Post editing” button in the “Results export lists” menu is only active if there actually are any post-editings. The number on the button represents the number of post editings.
The BVX 2 export to the Hundegger K2-Robot, PBA and SPM machines has been extended by new processings (round arch, rabbet, new scarf joint types). In addition, the following types of processings have been optimised: “fluting”, “planning”, “valley notch”, “individual hip notch”, “valley rafter notch” and “separating scarf joints”. Also improved has been the conversion of bird’s mouths into scarf joints.

Quantity Systems

Exchanging measuring points between SEMA and the Leica Disto3D has been enabled so that the integration of the Leica Disto3D is now perfect. The interface to the necessary driver program EITheo from Elcovision has also been optimised. Measured 3D coordinates can now be adopted directly into the construction plane.
Also programmed has been the Disto as 3D mouse.
Points from the construction can be sent directly via mouse click to the Disto3D that finds them then automatically.

Release History V11.5 Build 6400

General Points

The “GetParentWallShape” function returns via scripts timber members that are allocated to a roof/ceiling elements, to this element.
Embedding graphics into a legend has been improved. (Sutter)
One new feature of Version V11.5 is the “Exploded view drawing“. This 3D form of display enables to show both component groups and entire building projects disassembled in individual components. The animated exploded view drawing displays the individual components separated as if they were drifting apart from one another after an explosion from the middle of the object.
For this new feature, the icon “Exploded View Drawing“ has been added to the "3D View" toolbar. By clicking on the arrow right next to the “Exploded View Drawing“ icon, the settings menu opens. Several modes of explosion are available here. The first setting is "Automatic", which is the default setting. In this setting, the system automatically selects the most suitable mode for the current object/project. The main parameter for that is the number of storeys. If two or several storeys are shown, the storeys will be displayed separately, i.e. tiled. If only one storey is shown, the system will look for walls. If there be two or several walls in the current object/project, the auto function will opt for “Tile walls“. If only one wall is displayed, the system selects “Tile layers”. If none of the aforementioned modes applies, the system will use the “Tile from the centre”. The mode used by “Automatic” feature is displayed in bold type.
On deactivating the checkbox for "Automatic", all selection modes will be set active. Now, a single mode can be selected as well as several modes as a combination. The mode “Tile storeys” makes the storeys “explode” horizontally from the middle of the object. By using the mode “Tile walls”, all walls will be “exploded” horizontally from the middle of the object. The mode “Tile layers” will trigger layers of wall and ceiling shapes to tile forwards and backwards or upwards and downwards. The mode “Tile from the centre” lays out all components radially from the middle of the object. If several modes are activated, they will be executed successively.
The explosion distance can also be set for the explosion modes. By means of a slider the distance by which the storeys, walls, layers and components will be tiled out can be determined. This works “live”, i.e. in the exploded mode you can immediately see the distance the individual components are drifting apart.
In the bottom part of the settings menu, the “Animation settings“ can be found. Here you can determine whether you want to use the animated display or not. The speed can be determined via a slider. By activating "Repeat animation", the animation will be repeated in an infinite loop. The button "Explosion" starts the function directly from within the settings menu. Hence, it can be seen at once which settings have been defined exactly. If required, changes can still be made, too.
With the help of exploded view drawings, it becomes very easy to check special details such as different timber intersections and wall constructions. This new feature is also perfectly suitable for the optimization of project presentations. <Highlight Film Plan Archiving and PDF Output>
Version 11.5 adds PDF output to the drawing administration. This new feature enables the easy and fast saving of plans as building project PDF files. All PDF plans are managed directly in the SEMA drawing administration.
For this purpose two buttons have been added to the feature drawing administration: "Save PDF" and "PDF archive". As soon as a self-created plan has been marked, it can be saved as a PDF file by a mouse click on “Save PDF“. On the initial execution, a PDF folder into which all further PDFs will be saved, will automatically be created under the ground plan. Clicking the button "PDF archive" opens the folder and then all the normal Windows Explorer functions are available.
Self-created plans get an automatic name composed of the plan number, the index, the plan name, an internal plan number and a consecutive PDF number. The plan number, the index and the plan name are defined by the user in the drawing administration. The internal number and the consecutive PDF number will be assigned automatically. The internal number serves as a cross reference to the drawing administration. If a plan finds its corresponding internal number in the PDF file, a PDF sign will appear in the first column of the drawing administration and - by a right mouse click on the plan - the PDF file created for it can be opened. If a plan is saved as a PDF several times, the consecutive PDF number is increased and, by a right mouse click on the plan, all plans with the same internal plan number appear.
The icon “Save plan as PDF file“ has been added to the toolbar of the layer view. This command can also be reached via “Edit“ -> “Save display as PDF“. With this function, the layer view can be saved as a PDF file. If one of the standard plans is being used here, a name needs to be assigned. The system automatically suggests the current name of the drawing. <Highlight Film Plan Archiving and PDF Output>
The PDF function has also been integrated into the automatic wall output option which has been enhanced with the option “Save plans as PDF“ under the “Output“ field. Now, also the plan number and the index will be listed in the plan view. If a plan is saved via the “Save as PDF“ command, then the plan will be created as a PDF file in the drawing administration and thus will receive the next higher plan number as well as an index number. A revision of this plan can be created in the drawing administration. Always the highest revision of the respective plan will be displayed and used.
With this new feature, it is possible to create PDF files of the plans with a mouse-click. The PDF files can easily be administered from within the SEMA software or from within the corresponding building project. <Highlight Film Plan Archiving and PDF Output>

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

In Version 11.5 the dimensioning tool has been revised and enhanced in many areas. In order to enable the substantial new features, a dimension line now has a “Beginning“ and an “End“. It is now possible to separate or connect one or several dimension lines via the editing command “Abut“. In addition, the “Cut“ editing command has been enabled. With this command, dimension lines can be cut to a target edge via the “Cut 1x” command or they can be lengthened or shortened by a specific value by using the “Lengthen/Shorten“ command. Additionally, there is the possibility to enter the overall length of a dimension line, if an area dimensioning or an intersection point dimensioning has been assigned to a dimension line, they will adjust accordingly.
All input option have been enabled under the “Position“ command of the dimension lines. Now, dimension lines can be moved to any position. A new option has been integrated on the right side of the entry line. With this option it can be determined whether dimension points and areas are shifted as well when dimension lines are shifted.
The input option “Shift zero point“ has been moved from the 6th option (Strg+6) to the 7th option. Thus, CAD objects and dimension lines can be shifted together in one step.
The 8th option (CTRL + 8) "Dimension line distance" behaves like the input option “Shift parallel“ (CTRL + 5); however, the position of the given area dimensioning remains at the original position and is not shifted when the dimension line is shifted.
The cross-section dimension has been extended by two new types. Now, it is possible to create a bent dimension at a circle. The types “plumb“ and “radial“ are available here. Thus, it can be determined whether the bent dimension line can be marked out at the circle in plumb or radially.
On creating a new cross-section dimension in the master data (CAD/MCAD -> “Dimensioning” -> “Cross-Section dimension”), it can be defined in the dimensioning master data whether it is about a cross-section, a diameter or a radian dimension.
Furthermore, dimension points and dimension lines can now be modified in one step. In order to enable this, the tab “DP (Dimension point)“ has been integrated into the master data of the dimension line. So, for example the colour of the dimension line and of the dimension point can be changed in one step.
In the master data of the dimension line a distance and the line style for auxiliary lines has been integrated under the “D” tab. All marked out dimension points/auxiliary lines will be shortened by the entered distance. By choosing the line style, it is also possible to display an auxiliary line as a continuous line.
Under the “Wall top view” auto dimensioning feature, macros for dimension lines type A, B, C and D) can be allocated under the “Det” (setting details) tab. <Highlight Film Automatic Exploded Drawings>
If the respective type is allocated in the macro, the assigned dimension line (in auto-dimensioning) will be created fully automatically in auto-dimensioning in the respective top view. If the appropriate type has been allocated, the dimension line will be created fully automatically in top view.
The different types (“All”, “Type A”, “Type B”, “Type C” and “Type D”) have additionally been integrated in the dimension line master data under the “D” tab -> “Components” -> “Macros”. This determines which macros are used for area dimensioning or point-of-intersection dimensioning. On selecting “All“, all macros, regardless of the type, will be marked out on the dimension line. The references for type A, B and C have been integrated into the master data and can be picked from the original master data if required.
Another new feature is the creation of auto-dimensioning on different layers. Now, it is possible to mark out dimension points on an unlimited number of dimension lines. Dimension lines can be marked either via right mouse button (marking bar) or by holding down the CTRL button. The dimension point will then be marked out on all marked dimension lines.
From version 11.5 on, the wall view auto-dimensioning gripper has been positioned closer to the generated dimension lines. <Highlight Film Dimensioning>
If a CAD or a MCAD text is created and the input option “Link text to component“ (CTRL+2) is selected, so it is now possible to link the texts with all CAD and MCAD objects. If a CAD/MCAD object, which has been linked to a text, is copied or shifted via the position command, then the text will also be shifted automatically.
The auto-dimensioning tool in the wall view, which is carried out for all walls of the active storey via the auto-wall feature (F10), has been revised. (Kiefer)
Deleting anchor points in one group has been revised.
The transformation of CAD polygons into ground plan polygons has been revised. (Lottermoser)
Invalid strings are captured during the import of DXF texts. (Landmark)
In version 11.5 the new option "MCAD text" has been added. This new editing feature allows the writing of texts on coverings and timber members. The formula “3DBEARB 3 61 3” must have been saved under the editing formula of the text so that MCAD texts are created on components. Via the formula “3DBEARB”, the position, the angle and are generated and evaluated automatically relative to the reference point. The MCAD text are also displayed in 3D. Likewise, the text is also exported as a processing to machines, i.e. the Hundegger SPM, the Hundegger PBA and the BTL export as of version 10.5. Text size, borders and font types are currently not evaluated by the Hundegger SPM and PBA. We recommend to use the font size 0.32 in the SEMA program. This size is similar to the pre-defined font size of the Hundegger SPM and PBA. <Highlight Film Texts as Single-Member Processings>

Terrain

The terrain module has been enhanced by two new commands. The commands “Inner point from object“ and “Inner terrain point“ have been integrated into the program selection under “Terrain“. Now, the command "Inner terrain point" also allows the generating of terrain points within a terrain. After this new command has been selected, the terrain on which the inner point is to be created has to be indicated in the entry line. Then, the position of the terrain point within the terrain has to be defined. For this 7 input options are available. The terrain point will then be automatically created at the height/altitude of the selected terrain. In addition to that, the option “With or without Z position“ (Alt+1) will be available on the right side of the entry line. Already on creation a “Height above sea level“ or a “Height at storey height“ can be assigned to the terrain point. The program will always remember the height which has been defined last. <Highlight Film Topography with Inner Points>
With the command "Inner point from object" it is possible to directly capture measuring points which have been generated by means of a theodolite. Here, the program fully automatically recognizes the height and position of these measuring points and creates terrain inner points. After the command “Inner point from object“ has been selected, the points have to be indicated. Either individual measuring points or any number of measuring points can be marked. The inner points will then be created after confirming with “OK“. Hence, the terrain around a building project can be quickly measured with a theodolite and then be read-in into the SEMA program. Likewise, terrain base points can be captured by using this command. The more measuring points are created, the more exact the terrain can be displayed.

Rafter System

In Version 11.5 the functionality of the points of intersection has been extended.
In order to make the points of intersection visible or editable, the mode “Mark points of intersection” has been added to the bottom input field of the program (under “Object” -> “Mark details”).
When switching into this mode, it is possible to make the points of intersection for the marked components visible with the adjacent “Show points of intersection” command.
After executing this command, the points of intersection will be displayed at the previously marked components. The points of intersection are shown in the form of blue balls and are visible and processible in all views. The processing of the points of intersection is especially clearly structured in the textured 3D view with transparent display of the members (button in 3D icon bar). In the point-of-intersection mode only nodes can be snapped. If components are to be faded out with the visibility button in order to achieve better clarity, so these components can be marked by “shift+ left mouse button” (for a more detailed description regarding points of intersection please also see the highlight film of Version 10.5 “Points of Intersection” on the SEMA homepage under “Highlights” -> “Complete Overview” -> “V10.5 12/2008” as well as the highlight film of Version V11.2 "Points of Intersection: Scarf Joint Position and Depth” under “Highlights” -> “Complete Overview” -> “V11.2 05/2010”).
In Version 11.5, intersections of components with the exact form of the counter component have been enabled by means of points of intersection. "Exact form” means the displayed component with all processings.
So, it is for example possible to connect rafters with a reduced purlin cross-section (e.g. notch via 3CAD scarf joint or end type) with a bird’s mouth. To enable this, the following steps are required:
The points of intersection for the marked components are switched to visible in the point of intersection mode. The hint of the point of intersection reports “no processing” for the rafter-purlin intersection because by default the rafter is intersected with the outline rectangle of the purlin. The respective point of intersection is marked and modified via the “Modify” command. For the processing of the rafter it is now possible to choose the new setting “Exact” instead of “Default” in the master data of the point of intersection. The changes to the point of intersection will immediately, i.e. upon input into the master data, updated and shown correctly on the screen. So, the user can see the result of the intersection already before the command has been confirmed. Now, the rafter is connected with a bird’s mouth to the notched purlin (exact form). The modified point of intersection is now indicated as a brown ball and an “(x)” as addition to the hint in order to mark the exact intersection.
If, for example, the hip notch of a hip rafter is to be avoided for structural reasons and the purlin is to be notched out instead, this can also done via the “Exact” setting in the point of intersection. Both points of intersection of the bird’s mouth (for each purlin there is one point of intersection) can be modified together. The intersection of the component must now be set to “No” (hip rafter will not get a bird’s mouth) and the intersection of the purlin must be set to “Exact” (purlin to be intersected with the exact form of the hip rafter).
The same steps can be taken if individual rafters don’t require a bird’s mouth and the purlin is notched out instead. Thus, the setting “Exact” replaces the applying of scarf joints or steel components as auxiliary constructions of the same size in order to get an intersection.
This new feature enables exact intersections with complex abutting component forms. <Highlight Film Node Intersection>
Another new feature in Version 11.5 is the automatic abandoning of unnecessary processings. Processings which are outside of the exact component form and which are irrelevant for the transfer to a wood-working machine will be deactivated fully-automatically. These processings will be displayed as brown balls. They become visible on entering the point-of-intersection mode without prior marking. The abbreviation “(a)*" will be set in front of the processing in the component hint. An "(a)" means that the processing is outside of the exact component form. An "*" indicates that the processing has been set to “No” and thus does not appear in Single Member. If required, the processing can be manually set to “produce: yes”. In the following some examples of automatically abandoned processings:
Tenon holes of posts under purlin halvings (if the tenon hole applies to one scarf joint only).
Cuts and other processings if the component has been cut by a 3CAD cut.
Posts under ceiling beam connections with dovetail tenons. (Röhrig)
Bird’s mouths on hips and valleys which are cut to purlins.
The abandoning of unnecessary processings saves a lot of time for the user as these processings don’t have to be manually deleted in Single Member any longer.
Inaccuracies regarding the cutting angle of a valley blank in a specific case have been revised. (Rat und Tat)
The position of outline processings through extrusion objects has been enhanced. (Nüssli)
Considerable enhancements and corrections to bird’s mouth and component intersections have been made. (Moretti, Brandl, Comaed, Schenk& Lehr, Lignum, .....)
The abutting command especially for valley and hip rafters has been revised. (Söllradl)
The hipping jack rafters of trapezoidal dormers have been corrected. (HWK Bayreuth)
The marking behaviour of rafters in a certain constellation has been corrected. (Huber)
An error in allocating a new end type under the “Modify” command in the fields “Mark” and “Opposite” has been corrected. (Haus & Holzbau Türkheim)
In a special situation, changing the width of an element led to a wrong representation in 2D top view – this has been corrected. (Sebalex)

Truss

In version 11.5 a truss assistant has been integrated. The assistant allows the quick and comfortable creating of studio trusses, triangular trusses and framework trusses. The assistant can be found in the program selection under “Profiles/Dormers”. By switching to “Truss” in the profile assistant under “Walls/Ceilings/RC-Elements, a selection window for the truss type will appear. There are three types available: studio truss, triangular truss and the new framework truss. The studio truss is the former truss type 1 and the triangular truss is the former truss type 2. After a type of truss has been selected, an automatic template with pre-allocated members etc. is created.
Via a double click or the ”Edit with assistant” option, the input assistant for the selected truss type is opened.
The truss assistant is structured the same as the assistant for the input of roof profiles, roof windows and dormers. The left hand side of the assistant displays the truss including the assigned roof profile and dimensioning in 2D. Needless to say, it is possible to switch to the 3D view of the truss in the upper tab “3D”. In the upper toolbar it is possible to show and hide the assigned roof profile and the dimensioning; all other functions are analogue to the “normal” profiles. A new auto-dimensioning feature for the truss dimensioning has been added. The auto-dimensioning can be selected in truss view and due to the new master data “Truss view”, the truss will be dimensioned fully automatically.
In the framework truss, the post axes and the length of the top and the bottom boom are dimensioned. If no posts have been assigned to the truss, then the axes of the assigned struts are dimensioned. In addition, the height of the straight top and bottom boom as well as the total height and the pitch are dimensioned.
In a triangular truss, the struts on axis, the length of the top booms and of the bottom boom, the pitch of the truss and of the struts and the total height of the truss are dimensioned. In a studio truss, the ridge struts and the base point struts are dimensioned truly axially on the top boom. Likewise, the total length and the height of the truss as well as the length of the top boom are dimensioned. Furthermore, the length of the ridge tie and the position of the ridge post are also marked out.
Studio truss: In the first tab the profile, under which the truss will be designed, is assigned. The truss shape and the timber members adapt to this profile. Under "Truss" the position of the truss can be defined with a distance.
The options "under lap-jointed purlins", "under rafters", "under purlin+bird’s mouth" (the a bird’s mouth depth can be defined here) and "under roof area". Under "Definition of truss shape" it is possible to choose whether the height of the truss is limited or not. If the height of the truss is limited, then the entry line for the height of the truss is switched to active and the desired height can be defined. In this case an additional straight top boom is created. Under "Construction type" the options ”Entire roof“, ”left side“ and ”right side“ are available. Thus, the construction of “half” trusses is enabled. The “Start” tab is identical in all three types of trusses.
Under the second tab “Booms” the inclined top boom is allocated. In addition, the width and height can be changed here. Under “Concluding cut” a type of cut (“BL fish bar” or “IE jamb wall”) for the inclined top boom can be defined. Additionally, a “Projection left” and a "Projection right” can be assigned with a positive or a negative value.
On limiting the height of the truss, the reference, previously defined under “straight top boom”, will be used. If no straight top boom has been assigned, the system will automatically use the same master data as in the inclined top boom. Additionally, a master data for the bottom boom of the truss can be assigned in the field “Bottom boom”. Under ”Type of bottom boom” it is possible to choose between “On both sides“ and “centered”. This choice defines whether two bottom booms will be created on the left and on the right side of the inclined top boom. On choosing "centered", the bottom boom is created axially below the inclined top boom. And in addition to that it is possible to determine the height of the bottom boom either via the bottom level or the top level of the boom and a shortening dimension. As in the inclined top boom, it is also possible to comfortably edit width and height in the straight top boom and in the bottom boom.
The ridge post and the struts are assigned under the next tab “Ridge”. There is the possibility to define a projection for the ridge post if the bottom boom is executed out “on both sides”. A distance of the struts from the bottom level of the ridge post and an angle, which can either be “free” or at “right angles to the top boom”, complete the setting options of the ridge design.
The fourth tab “Base point” serves to assign references for struts, sole plates, fish bars and posts. Also here, it is possible to modify width and height of all references outside of the master data. For the struts, a distance (which refers to the inner edge of the jamb wall) and an angle can be defined. An additional projection can be defined in sole plates and fish bars. This projection refers to the outer edge of the struts. With regard to the fish bars it is also possible to define a height which refers to the bottom level or the top level of the fish bars. The distance, which can be determined for posts, refers to the inner edge of the jamb wall.
In the fifth tab “Drillings”, it can be set whether drillings are created at bottom booms, fish bars and posts. However, drillings at the bottom boom will only be created if the bottom boom has been defined “on both sides”. The diameter of the drilling can also be determined.
Under the sixth tab “Material list” it is possible to assign data relevant to material lists.
Triangular truss: The first tab is identical to the studio truss.
The second tab differs only with regard to the section of the inclined top boom. Here, it is possible to choose between “Top level/bottom level bottom boom” and “Inner edge jamb wall”.
It is not possible to allocate a projection of the ridge post in the third tab; but apart from that, the same settings as in the studio truss are available.
The fourth tab “Drillings” is also analogue to the studio truss and the framework truss. If the bottom boom of a triangular truss has been defined “on both sides”, a drilling will be created at intersection point of the bottom boom/inclined top boom.
Analogue to the studio truss and to the framework truss, data relevant to material lists can be assigned in the last tab “Material list”.
Framework truss: The first tab, again, is analogue to the studio truss and the triangular truss.
The second tab is only different from the triangular truss in the way that the type of top boom can be defined “centered” and “on both sides”.
Under the third tab the spacing type of the diagonals is defined. The options “same length” and “same angle” are available. On selecting “same length” the struts are spaced in such a way that the centre distance of the diagonals or of the posts is the same on the left and on the right or in between. On selecting “same angle” the struts on the left and right side of the truss are spaced with the same angle. The number of fields is defined under the spacing options. Only an even number of fields can be defined in a “complete” truss. Exception: If a truss is defined only on the left or only on the right side or under a pitched roof profile. If the spacing type “same length” has been selected, it can be chosen between eight different designs of the diagonals. The diagonal designs are graphically displayed and online updated in the screen image. The options of the diagonal design are only active under the spacing type “same length”. Furthermore, references for struts and posts can be assigned under the third tab “Spacing”. Here, it is also possible to comfortably modify the width and the height of the references outside the master data. A so-called “Type of strut intersection” can be determined for struts. The types “On the inside”, “On the axis” and “On the outside” are available. Under the type of intersection “On the inside”, the struts will be intersected in such a way that the axis of the struts is aligned to the inner edge of the posts, namely to the inner side of the top boom. When selecting the intersection type “On the axis”, the posts and struts will be intersected in such a way that the axes of both components intersect on the axis of the inclined top boom. On selecting “On the outside”, the struts will be intersected in such a way that the axes of the struts is added to the inner edge of the posts, however, here on the outside of the top boom. Under posts it can be determined whether “none”, posts “without force effect” or “all” posts will be created. With the setting “without force effect”, no posts will be created where two struts intersect in one point and thus make one post become superfluous.
By setting the drillings to “Yes” in the fourth tab, the posts will be drilled to the top and to the bottom booms with the previously set diameter, if the booms are set on “On both sides”.
In the last tab, data relevant to material lists can be allocated.
After the completion of a truss in the assistant, the truss drawing can be printed from within the profile administration. The different views of the truss drawing can now be enhanced with CAD or manual dimensioning. For this, a separate layer is available for every view.
The placing of trusses has also been revised and enhanced. The command “Truss” can be selected under “3D Walls” in the program selection. Now the options “Place truss”, “Space area”, “Space between 2 points” and “In building grid” are available. The design options behave the same like when setting rafters.
Under the command “Place truss”, primarily those trusses will be made available which have been created previously in the assistant. Of course, it is also possible to resort to trusses which have been stored in the master data. After having selected the desired truss, a roof area or a roof edge (e.g. ridge) has to be marked. Then, a reference point of the truss is required. Another new feature is that the truss is not just displayed by a line, but rather in the thickness of the widest member of the truss. After having set the reference point, the distance and the position (left, centered and right), the line of sight must be defined with the mouse. On the right side of the entry line the additional option “Truss, continuous” or “Truss, non-continuous” (Alt+2) is available. With the “Truss, continuous” setting, a truss will no longer end at a ridge of a hip, but will go through it. Here, the program automatically determines the required height below the hip and creates a straight top boom underneath.
The roof area under which the truss is to be spaced has to be selected under the “Spacing area” option. Consequently, a number of elements will be proposed. This number of elements is calculated by the program from the “required offset” setting which can be found in the pre-settings (Alt + F7) under “Walls/Outline” -> “Truss”. If the number of elements is changed, the offset is automatically recalculated accordingly. If the proposed number of elements is confirmed, then there is also the possibility to change the offset; thus, the number of fields is adapted accordingly. If the offset is changed, one further option, which allows adjusting the offset at the “Beginning & end”, “only beginning” or “only end”, will appear in the entry line. Finally, the line of sight of the truss must be defined.
In the option “Space between 2 points”, a “from”, “to” area, into which the trusses are to be spaced, must be defined after having selected the roof area. Then, the number of elements, the offset and the line of sight will be prompted by the system.
By using the option “Space with building grid”, trusses are spaced according to the pre-set building grid. The building grid/raster is defined in the “Settings for mouse snap”, to be found under “Extras” in the upper toolbar. After the roof area and the line of sight have been selected, the trusses will exactly be spaced within the pre-defined grid.
If a truss is stored via the master data (F2), a query will appear, prompting whether the truss is to be stored locally with the building project or globally in the master data administration. The framework truss has been integrated into the “Truss” group in the master data under Walls/Ceilings/RC-Elements. Needless to say, all relevant data for framework truss, studio truss and triangular truss can be picked from the original master data. <Highlight Film Truss Assistant>

3D Wall Ceiling

The layer projection table is updated directly when layers are added or removed.
In a specific case, the collision preferences have been improved. (Platzhaus)
Walls which are shifted via the edit command “Position” are now participate in the auto corner calculations. (Landmark)
The auxiliary lines of the reference line (F7 -> “Wall members” -> “Reference line” -> “Auxiliary lines”) in wall view have been revised. (France)
In a specific case, the nailing of walls has been improved. (Bonndorf)
In version 11.5, so-called covering macros in walls, roof and ceiling elements can be created. For this, boards have to be created according to the desired “laying pattern” in the respective layers. The filing or the creation of the boards as a macro can be carried out via a timber member or an MCAD. When creating a macro via a MCAD, a MCAD point is positioned on the layer in which the boards have been created. Now, the created boards and the MCAD point have to be marked and filed with the first input option of the “Define macro” (CAD/MCAD) command. Now, it is possible to assign the filed macro in the master data of the elements or the wall in the “L” tab (layers and spacing) in the layer structure left/right, under the “MC” tab (MCAD editing) for the desired layer in the column “Bottom”. Additionally, the key „WANDART = DCKBST“ has to be entered in the additional tab of the elements or the wall. Naturally, the filed covering macro can also be defined via a timber member that refers to the macro. After the auto wall feature has been executed (F10), the boards are created according to the settings and align with the outline of the layer. It is recommended to use a relatively high and long wall when filing/creating macros. If the macro is too small, it will not be applied to a larger wall completely. In this way it becomes very easy and fast to apply coverings, e.g. rhombus shaped boarding.
So-called covering macros can be created in wall, roof and ceiling elements. Therefore, boards have to be created in the respective layer according to the desired layout pattern. Filing or creating the boards as macros can be done via a timber member of an MCAD. Via MCAD: an MCAD point is placed on the layer. Then the created boards and the MCAD point have to be marked and filed with the first input option of the editing command “Define macro” (CAD/MCAD). Now the filed macro can be allocated in the master data of the elements or walls under the “L” tab (Layer) in the layer structure left/right under the “MC” tab (MCAD processings) in the required layer under “Bottom”. In addition to that, “WALLTYPE = CLMACRO” has to be entered in the additional tab of the element or wall. However, it is also possible to define the filed ceiling macro via a timber member that refers to the macro. After the auto wall feature has been executed (F10), the boards are created as set by taking the outline of the layer into account. It is recommended to use a relatively high and long wall when creating/filing the macro. If the macro is too small it cannot be properly applied on a larger wall.
With this new way of applying coverings, is becomes very easy and fast to create e.g. a rhombus boarding. (Renggli) <Highlight Film Boards and Contours with Automatic Intersection with Wall Outline>

Wall and Ceiling Members

In version 11.5 the construction of a double cut with tenons has been enabled. It is possible to assign a tenon to the double cut component via the end type command. A tenon is positioned on each cut surface and creates a mortise on the respective counter component. One example for this would is a post in the centre of the gable which has been cut to the inclined top booms.
It is also possible to use a marked-out tenon for the double cut. The "Marking out 1" shortens the tenon on the left side of the macro, the “Marking out 2” on the right side of the macro (seen from the direction of creation).
So, it is consequently also possible to create a tenon only on one cutting area. One example would be a strut, which connects with the sole plate and a post by means of a double cut. If only the sole plate is to be mortised now, so the value of the cutting length has to be entered for “Marking out 1” dimension. If the marking out on one side has be larger than the cutting length, so the “remains” will serve for the marking out of the other tenon.(Zimmermann, Hilzinger, and others) <Highlight Film Tenon with Double Cut>

Nesting

Now it is possible to create several nesting aggregate components in the nesting administration at the same time. First the required number of nestings has to be set in the selection field “Number of nestings to be created (new)”. By clicking on the button “Create new nesting”, the master data are opened. Here, the required nesting aggregate component has to be marked and confirmed with a click on “OK”. Then the selected nesting aggregate component will be created in the set number.
If a nesting component is placed in a nesting aggregate component, it is possible to mark the nesting component and - by using the command “Place component anew” under “Others” - to place it anew with a right-click. This command is also available in the nesting manager and in the edit commands under “Others”.
The command "Mirror" has now also been enabled for nesting components. The commands “Mirror” and “Mirror on axis” are available.

PFP Machines

During a PHP export (F12) the placeholder @B-EL-NR@ is exported to a Weinmann machine if set so under the pre-settings (Alt+F7) -> “PHP Import/Export” -> “Weinmann/Export file name”. (Otto)

Stairs

A new quantity system for the creation of stairs with a theodolite has been developed in version 11.5. To enable this, the command “Laser quantities stairs” has been added to the toolbar “Quantity systems”. The toolbar can be activated via a right mouse click in the area of the toolbars.
A new group “Stairs measurements” has been added under the master data ("Visualisation/3D Objects" -> "Measuring points”). In this group, the following new measuring points have been created: "Concrete left", "Concrete right", "Concrete Step", "Flight left", "Flight right", "Tread" and "Stairs end".
The aim is to create a CAD drawing by transferring the measuring points from the theodolite to the SEMA program. With the new edit command "Stairs from CAD", the stairs as measured will be created automatically.
If the theodolite is connected to the computer and if the corresponding interface has been installed, it is then possible to send measuring points to the program.
The command "Laser quantities stairs" opens the master data. Here, it is possible to determine the type of measuring point to be generated. The measuring points “Concrete left”, “Concrete right”, “Concrete step” and “Stairs end” can be used to measure a concrete core. With “Concrete left”, the left side of the concrete is measured, with “Concrete right” the right side. Under the option "Measuring mode active", the points have to be entered in their order. Under the option "Measuring mode inactive", the measuring points can be measured without in any order. With the incorporated points CAD lines are created which automatically intersect. With the measuring point "Concrete step", the front edges of the treads are measured with two points each; the tread top edge is measured with one point. The option "Selection of measuring mode for steps" the way of measuring the concrete steps can be determined. The following options are available: only concrete front edges, only height of concrete steps or a combination of both. Measuring points can be incorporated in any way; no specific order is necessary. If the stairs to be incorporated has got a landing, the option “Create step as landing” has to be used for this concrete step. If a normal tread is measured afterwards, then the option has to be reset. Via the measuring points the exact position and the real height of the concrete step is measured. Furthermore, CAD lines are created which intersect left and right with the concrete side edges, if existing. In order to complete the ground plan of the stairs, the end of the stair has to be determined. Here, the end of the last concrete step (without last step extension) has to be measured via “Stair send”. The stairs end does not have to be the last point measured, it can be entered any time. After all points have been measured, it is possible to test whether all required edges for the creation of the stairs are available. This is done via the “Test” button. If all required edges are in the system, the message “Stair quantities complete” appears.
With the new edit command “Stair from CAD”, it is now possible to construct stairs on the basis of the read-in measuring points. As accustomed, first the required stairs data record has to be selected. Only if several ground plans have been incorporated, it is necessary to select the required stairs in the entry line. After the walking line has been determined (centered, from left, from right), the “Create” button can be clicked. Now, the concrete core with its real dimensions and all components, previously assigned in the stairs master data, is created.
If normal stairs (i.e. no concrete stairs) are to be measured, the measuring points “Flight left”, “Flight right”, “Tread” and “Stairs end” have to be used. With "Flight left" and "Flight right", the left and the right side of the existing stairs are measured. With the measuring point “Tread”, the front edge and the height of a tread are measured, the measuring point “Stairs end” defines the end of the stair. The measured stairs polygon can also be edited subsequently. Corners can be connected rounded or chamfered. So, it is possible to create winding stairs with corner radius out of an angular winding.
If points of round stairs have been measured under the “Measuring mode active”, there will be straight lines in the ground plan, first. By marking those lines resulting from a bend, it is made possible to create one or several arcs of a circle out of the individual lines via “Others” -> “Convert into an arc of a circle”. For this, either a correction factor has to be entered or the slider has to be adjusted until the desired result has been achieved. The options “Keep existing object” and ”Abandon existing object” can be found on the bottom right of the entry line; here, the option “Abandon existing object” must be set active. On confirming the command with “OK”, the marked lines will turn into arcs of a circle.
If several stairs in one storey have to be measured on the building site, it is possible to assign the “Measuring point” of a stair with the stair with the stairs selection button. Up to five stairs can be measured in one step. <Highlight Film Measuring Stairs with Theodolite>
In version 11.5 the gluing and board optimization feature for the nesting of stairs components is available. It there are stairs components in the nesting component filing system, it is possible to mark these components and to send them either to the gluing or the boards optimization feature via the “Optimization stairs components” button in the nesting component filing system. If no allocation has been generated before by means of the filter criteria “Type” and “Name”, the following message will appear: "No fitting nesting aggregate master data could be found for one or several of the selected components! You can now either select nesting aggregate master data for these components or cancel the automatic function.”
On confirming the message with “OK”, the master data are opened where the required master data can be selected. The nesting aggregate components are fully-automatically integrated into the nesting aggregate component administration.
In the master data the new group “Stairs nesting” has been created under the category “Nesting” -> “Nesting aggregate components”. In this group the nesting aggregate components “Board optimization” and “Gluing optimization” are available.
The boards optimization takes the marked nesting components and always fills up the aggregate component (full width). The lengths is optimized until the set length of the nesting aggregate component is achieved. Should any components still be left, a new nesting aggregate component will be started.
The gluing optimization takes the marked nesting components and always tries to optimize two inclined treads with each other, first. At the end the straight treads will be optimized. The nesting aggregate component will automatically be reduced in length to the width of the treads. Under the gluing optimization it is also possible to assign automatic separating lines for cutting with a saw, for example. For this, a separating macro must be assigned to the nesting aggregate component. The separating macro can be assigned under the tab "NE" (Nesting). The macros "Separating line 1098", " Separating line 1099", "Separating line 2098" and " Separating line 2099" are available. The numbers describe the ID numbers in the INI-file; where additional information can be added to the separating lines. The separating lines can also be drawn-in manually in both, gluing-optimized and board-optimized nesting aggregate components. Via CAD -> "Insert component", it is possible to select the separating lines from the “Nesting” group. It is also possible to subsequently modify the sizes of the created nesting aggregate components. For this, the nesting aggregate component has to be marked and the command “Modify” has to be selected. The master data of the nesting aggregate component is opened and the modifications can be made here. Placed nesting components can also be deleted manually, newly placed or changed regarding their position. The nesting aggregate components can be exported to the material list or to a machine directly from within the administration. <Highlight Film Auto Optimization for Stairs Nestings>
If strings have been connected to a tail, so it is now possible to assign a wall support. The setting can be found in the string data record under the tab “Des” in the field “Length. bottom” (lengthening bottom) and “Length. top” (lengthening top). Here, it is possible to define how much the wall support will project over the string connection. The height will be adopted from the tail. The wall support is lengthened horizontally.
If a lengthening is required for the string support at the bottom step (in reference to the finished floor), this can now be set this under the “Des” tab in the field “Support”. The input of positive and of negative values is possible. Correspondingly, the string will be lengthened or shortened by the entered value.
Now, the export of a post as a 3D component in four different component positions has been enabled. Four individual files, always with a different component side up, are swapped out. Here, the user can decide which file can be edited best. If two files are required in order to edit the post, it has to be made sure that all processings/editings are available all the time. So, it may occur that e.g. cut-outs which have not been deactivated in the CAD/CAM system, are processed twice. This is influenced in the INI-file by the "PO TOTAL" setting. (Dettbarn)

PFGESAMT=3	0: Post sides are exported individually (e.g. as individual blocks), all sides in one DXF file
	1: Export of the post as a 3D component
	2: Post sides are exported individually in a separate DXF file each
	3: Export of the post as a 3D component, however 4 files with always a different component side up (overturned)

The subsequent calculation of the horses, particular after manual editings have been carried out at the treads, has been revised. (Kaufmannoberholzer)
The calculation of connecting railings with a boom bundle has been improved. (Biehler)
The calculation of the position of fasteners with cup has been improved. (Schilling)
The concrete core of a stair is once again displayed correctly in section view. (Proegger)
If a post with a post notch is allocated to the data record of a stair, the notch is once again calculated correctly after creating the stairs. (AZ)
The DXF export of wedged fasteners and connectors has been improved. (Billiet)
The DXF export of processings created by 3D objects has been corrected. (Schachreiter)
The adaption of treads has been revised. (Schilling)

3D Objects

Material list numbers of fasteners and brackets are now also shown in element view (F7 settings). (Landmark)

Structural Analysis

In Version 11.5 the fully-automatic creation of a 3D strut-and-node model for structural analysis as well as its export to structural analysis programs in different file formats has been enabled.
In order to make the use of the “3D Strut-and-Node Model for Structural Analysis” from creation up to the export as easy as possible, the new toolbar “3D Strut-and-Node Model for Structural Analysis” has been created. The toolbar can be switched on via a right mouse click in the icon bar area.
The first command of the new toolbar is the "3D Strut-and-Node Model Calculation" command. On execution of this command (best in the textured 3D oblique view with “only members”) either all or only the marked members will be calculated. After the calculation the program automatically goes to the “Export model” (2nd icon of the toolbar “3D Strut-and-Node Model for Structural Analysis”). From the axes of the members structural struts with load and support nodes are created.
Additionally, the references/connections between the members (e.g. contact, bird’s mouth...) will be indicated via the display of the nodes. The exact description of the nodes can be seen in the component hint by moving the mouse over a node.
By means of pre-set auto features (Alt+F7 -> “Structural Analysis” -> “ 3D Strut-and-Node Model for Structural Analysis”) the structural references between the struts (e.g. rafter and purlin) are created. If the first option “Move strut axes for export model to roof” has been activated, the axes of rafters and purlins are automatically placed on one plane with the top level of the rafter in the “3D Strut-and-Node Model Calculation”.This can be seen particularly well when the third button of the“3D Strut-and-Node Model for Structural Analysis” icon bar is activated: "3D representation of the structural components”. The second option "Lengthen touching strut axes to partner axis” means that for example the axes of posts under purlins are automatically lengthened up to the axis of the purlin.
Structurally irrelevant projections of struts can be shortened automatically to a set value (third option under Alt+F7 -> “Structural Analysis” -> “3D Strut-and-Node Model for Structural Analysis” ). One example are projecting struts ends of a purlin head.
Furthermore, the category “Structural Analysis” has been added to the display settings (F7). In this new category three new display options are available. The first option "Export model" is activated by default. It means that not the actual axis model, but rather the export model is displayed. The second option “Summarize support and load nodes” which is also activated by default, displays support and load nodes together. With the setting "Structural components in 3D", the members of the export or axis model are made visible. This option is also available in the icon bar (3rd icon of “3D Strut-and-Node Model for Structural Analysis“) and provides good control options if the members are displayed transparently. <Highlight Film 3D Structural Analysis with Automatic Strut and Node Model>
The 3D strut-and-node model can be further edited manually in the SEMA program. For this, the editing commands “Cut” and “Position” are available for marked struts. Hence, struts can be cut, lengthened or shortened via the “Cut” command. With the “Position” command it is possible to “Shift strut ends” or to “Shift 2D/3D”.
After constructional changes to the project, the 3D strut-and-node model calculation has to be executed again in order to transfer the changes onto the structural model.
The master data of the rafter system members and of the 3D timber components has been enhanced by the “Structural analysis” tab. Here, it is defined whether or not the members will be included in the structural export.
Currently the formats "DXF" and "DSTV(STP)" are available for the 3D export. The export is triggered via the fourth icon in the icon bar or via the “Structural export, strut-and-node model”, which has been added to the “Extras” menu bar. Before starting the export, it is necessary to first select a format type. Several different formats are available in the structural analysis export menu of the format types. DXF provides a general SEMA structural analysis DXF as well as a DXF format which has been specifically adapted to Dlubal and a DXF format specifically adapted to ABIES Engineering. Under the DSTV export menu, there is also a general SEMA structural analysis DSTV and a DSTV(STP) format specifically adapted to Dlubal. <Highlight Film 3D Structural Analysis with Automatic Strut and Node Model>
After an export, a target program (e.g. Dlubal) or another suitable program, which has been defined as the standard program for the respective export format, will open automatically. If no program is found, then a save dialogue opens and the file can be saved in any location.
Version 11.5 has been enhanced in interaction with the new MDBat versions for CB71 (as of version 4.9.1.0) and EC (as of version 5.6.1.0). A standard control feature, which is integrated in the SEMA program, has now been integrated in the SEMA pre-settings (Alt+F7). The tab “MDBAT” has now been made available in the “Structural Analysis” submenu. Here, the calculation standard to be used for the transfers to the MDBat programs is set. Depending on the respective MDBat installation, the Eurocodes for France, Spain, Switzerland and Belgium as well as the CB71 standard for France and Switzerland are available.
The system now automatically chooses the MDBat program which fits the set standard best. <Highlight Film 3D Structural Analysis with Automatic Strut and Node Model>
Depending on the set standard, different load dialogues are available in the transfer menu as well as specific structural analysis materials in the material list tab of the components. Additionally, the program checks if the load definition fits with the set standard.
Furthermore, a vibration check for ceilings/ceiling beams for the use of Eurocodes has been integrated in combination with MDBat. The specific additional entries for this can be made in the transfer/export menu of the ceiling members (new dialogue). For the vibration check, the resulting structural values of the ceiling members have been enhanced by “FHz” (actual frequency), “eVD” (eta deflexion due to vibration), and “eV” (eta vibration). As accustomed, it is possible to have these written on the respective components. (STEICO) <Highlight Film 3D Structural Analysis with Automatic Strut and Node Model>

Single Member

The machine export of dovetail scarf joints has been revised. (Haveloh, Merotto)
If nested components cannot be exported, they appear in the list of refinishing work/post-processings. (Essetre)
If the wall view side is subsequently changed in the program, also the layers of the editing plane for BTL export change. (JJSmith)

DXF I3 Interface

The DXF and DWG interfaces have been revised and improved. Thus, amongst other things, also DXF and DWG files from the Autocad 2011 program can now be imported and saved.

RCE Import

The accuracy of the RCE import has been improved in some details. (Kreinbacher)

Release History V11.4 Build 6200

General Points

Different date settings on different computers caused problems when a building project was opened on these different computers – this has now been corrected. (Manufactum)
If the option “Resolve external data” has been activated or is executed manually, data such as company logos in the legend are no longer abandoned. (France)
In version 11.4 the so-called “free component labelling” has been added. With this new function, free text input and/or values can be attached via a placeholder to any position on the component. Consequently, it is now possible to write individual text combinations such as the single member number, width, height and length of a component or a free text, for example, in the middle of a component. The possible input options for this can be found in the display settings (F7) under the respective component.
Here the free component labelling can be activated and deactivated. If >>more...>> is clicked on the control panel, then the free component labelling input window is opened. This consists of two parts: the “Positioning” (above) and a “Value input” field (below). With the option “Attach values”, entered values will automatically be attached to the start of the component or to an existing automatically created label. Should this tick be removed, then the selection fields, “Text reference of value”, “Position on component”, “Offset X direction” and “Offset Y direction” will be activated. “Text reference of value” has nine different possible settings. The so-called standard positions range from “left/bottom” via “center/center” to “right/top”. The reference point of the text is defined with this option.
The possible settings of “Position on component” are the same nine as with “Text reference of value” and the reference point on the component is determined with this option. In order to define left or right, the determining factor is the direction of creation. In addition, with “Offset X direction” and “Offset Y direction” the entered text can be moved by one value from the standard position. Thus, every imaginable position for free component labelling is possible.
A free text and/or a placeholder can be entered via the placeholder selection icon in the input field. Thus, three text formatting icons can be found under the value input field; these allow the text to be aligned to the left, centred or aligned to the right. With some components it is possible to optionally set “Show values for every component”. Should several identical components be in a row, this setting allows the user to define whether the value is attached only to the first component or to every component, e.g. on rafters, ceiling beams or steps on a staircase.
The stair components string board, stringer, handrail, boom, post and baluster all have the setting “Mirror reference for right stairs side”. With this, the “Text reference of value” and the “Position on component” of the left or alternatively right-hand side are mirrored accordingly on the right or left-hand side.
As accustomed, settings and values in the free component labelling can be saved and reloaded as display settings (F7). <Highlight Film Free Component Labelling >
The new feature “component hint setting” allows the hint on the mouse pointer to be freely defined and can be found in the program under Display -> “Component hint settings...”. If this option is selected, the window “Component Hint Setting” is opened in which all components are contained. In order to maintain an overview and to enable certain components to be found quickly, the components have been arranged to the corresponding parts of the program. Roof timbers, such as rafters, can for example be found under the tab “Rafter System”. When the component is marked and the “Component hint settings” is invoked, you automatically jump to the appropriate field for the component. For each component group there are two text input fields with the option “Orig. hint” (original hint). The text input field “Component hint” stands for the standard component hint which is shown when the mouse pointer is on the component. The text input field "Component hint for component check" comes into effect with the check function of the component which can be opened via the check icon on the tool bar. In the text input fields, it is possible to enter free text and/or work with placeholders. Amongst others, the option “Insert placeholder” can be invoked with a right mouse click in a text input field. If this option is selected, then the placeholder administration is opened. A further option when using the right-mouse click is “Large text input...”. If this is selected, then the text editor is opened and this allows text to be entered simply and comfortably.
If the tick has been set on “Orig. hint”, then the original component hint is shown first in the component hint attached to the mouse. This tick can only be removed when there is a value in the corresponding text input field.
As usual, the component hint settings can be saved as and loaded by using “Save...” as “Component hint settings.hnt”. The button “Standard” allows the user to return the settings to the original SEMA settings.
A further enhancement of version 11.4 is the "self-defined placeholders ". It is now possible to create a placeholder in an uncomplicated manner in every individual field in the master data. For example, the end type of a rafter can be defined as a placeholder and inserted in the component hint. Thus, end types can be quickly checked directly in the drawing. In order to define a self-created placeholder, a right mouse click must be made in the desired master data field. The option “Define placeholder...” is now available If this is selected, then the placeholder administration is opened and the name of the placeholder can be entered here. The self-defined placeholder can now be used as CAD text or in component hints via the placeholder administration. Furthermore, in the area “Self-defined placeholders”, existing placeholders can be re-named or deleted with a right mouse click.
A further example is the layer structure of a ceiling shape. If the layer structures “top/bottom” are defined as a placeholder in the master data of the ceiling shape and then deployed in the component hint, all layers are shown when the mouse in moved over the ceiling shape. A hyphen (-) appears next to a placeholder which cannot be evaluated. This hyphen disappears in the print preview (Layout View) and will not be printed. <Highlight Film Component Hint and Placeholder>
Self-defined placeholders can be imported and exported via Extras -> “Options” -> “Swap in/out settings”
If the colour scheme “Windows Aero” is used under Windows Vista or Windows 7, this will be changed to “Windows Basis” when SEMA V11.4 is started. The use of the “Windows Aero” colour scheme can cause a loss in performance in certain parts of the program. This automatic change can be activated or deactivated by selecting “Turn off Aero effect at program start” via Extras -> “Options” -> “SEMA” from the upper toolbar. SEMA recommends, however, that this setting is not deactivated. <Highlight Film Component Hint and Placeholder>
The functionality to change several marked components individually has been improved. The changes performed are now saved correctly in all cases. When leaving the command with the ESC key, the user is now asked whether the data should be saved or not. (IKB)

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

In version 11.4 all dimensioning and CAD objects are available in the Open GL display (area displays with edges, coloured area displays and textured displays). Thus it is possible in horizontal and vertical sections, as also with 3D views (north, south, east, west and top view), to dimension all components or to draw in CAD objects. It is also possible to use CAD macros. Likewise DXF and DWG documents can be imported and displayed in the views. Thus, for instance, 3D views do not have to be copied to drawings in order to be dimensioned. This saves a considerable amount of time when creating an application plan under “Area display with edges”. The handling of dimensioning and CAD objects in the open GL display does not differentiate from that of the wire frame display. Modified views can be saved in the 3D views via the button “Save 3D View” or in sectional view via “Save section”. The views are stored under the corresponding name in the drawing administration under the tab “3D” and, as usual, can be assigned to every plan. Thus, very sophisticated views can be created within a short time. <Highlight Film CAD and Dimensioning in Visualization>

Rafter System

The representation of exact front skew-notch mortises has been revised. (France)
If you use a component with inscription in 3CAD under the “Timber component“ command, the inscription is now saved correctly. (Arba)
The automatic bevelling of a fish plate in a one-sided cutout is now determined correctly. (France)
In one special case, a 3CAD processing resulted in a scarf joint with a wrong angle – this has been corrected. (Romelli)
When spacing components with inscriptions (e.g. joists) in the building grid, the inscription is no longer lost. (Landmark)
Component numbers, e.g. SM numbers, which have been moved in 2D, now keep their original position in 3D. (Italy)
In the main, right-angled simple cut elements (hip rafters, valley rafters) now have a simple cut instead of a side cut. (Italy)
The automatic intersection of the ridge section of rafters on roof edges or on component edges, e.g. hip and valley rafters, has been improved considerably. Intermediate jack rafters now automatically have a double bevel cut on the adjoining hip rafter.
Considerable improvements and corrections have been made to the bird’s mouth and component intersection. (Lignum, Lebonplan, ABZ Schönbuch, Steyer, Keilhofer, Darms, Huber & Kroh, Hilzinger, France, Italy…)

3D Wall Ceiling

The connection of texts with components especially in C planes has been revised. (Zehrer)
From version 11.2 onwards, abutting walls can be displayed in the wall view. In order to make the display more flexibly, the display of the abutting walls and the horizontal section can be set separately. For this purpose, the option “Colour” is now available in the display settings (F7) under -> “Images+3D/Auto Section” -> “Horizontal Section”. By selecting “Sectional View” and “Original” the appearance of the abutting wall can be influenced and is consequently no longer coupled with the horizontal section. Hence the horizontal section can for instance be displayed “Original” and the abutting walls as “Sectional View”. <Highlight Film New Wall Features>
If, in the visual appearance/look tab under 3D visualisation, windows or doors are assigned, for example, a window/door with glazing bars, then these glazing bars will also be shown in the 3D display “Hidden edges”. Consequently, when copying the view, the glazing bars do not have to be drawn in a drawing again. <Highlight Film New Wall Features>
Texts, from pre-settings (Alt+F7) under “-> Evaluation/Misc”, which can be written on components (members and coverings) when transferred, now orientate on the external outline of the component.
In the 3D display, free contours are displayed on members as on boards. For this, the option “Display Contours in CSG” has been added under “Image+3D/Visualisation” in the display settings (F7). It is possible to select whether the contours should be displayed on members, coverings or on members and coverings. Hence, checking the processing has been simplified considerably. <Highlight Film New Wall Features>
Wall shapes, ceiling and roof elements in 3D can be erected with the command “Component Views” in the upper toolbar when selecting components such as layers, boards, members, windows and doors. In doing so, the program automatically switches to the corresponding view in which the selected component was entered.
The outline of windows and doors is now evaluated in the material list. <Highlight Film New Wall Features>

Coverings 3D Wall Ceiling

Covering macros which are placed via one point are no longer placed via two points in the auto wall feature but correctly via one point. (Landmark)
In a specific case, the components are no longer multiplied during board optimisation. (Regnauer)
If layers in the layer projection table of the wall shape are set to “Bevel” in the tab “On roof” then the boards fit themselves onto the appropriate layer and obtain a jack cut. Likewise, boards in wall corners get a longitudinal cut if they have been intersected on mitring. <Highlight Film New Wall Features>

Nesting

Planed areas are now taken into account for nesting.

Stairs

The functionality of the mortise depth in the string board has been enhanced. It is now possible to set the mortise depth for treads and risers separately.
Bolts can now be moved with the editing command “Position”. If a connecting object is marked, then this can now be newly positioned with the position command. The options “Shift 2D/3D” and “Position Connecting Objects” are available. The Function “Shift 2D/3D” is available in 2D, in 3D, in sectional view and in developed view. The function “Position Connecting Objects” can be carried out in 2D and in 3D. If the positioning command “Shift 2D/3D” is selected, then appropriate entry forms for the given situation are opened at the bottom left hand side of the screen. With the instance “Position Connecting Objects”, marked bolts and dowels can be moved parallel to the tread’s lateral edge and newly positioned. Thus, with corner steps it is possible to rearrange a connecting object from a step’s lateral edge via the corner to the other lateral edge. <Highlight Film General Stairs Improvements>
In Version 11.4 treads with tenons can now be produced. In the tread’s data record, a tenon can be assigned left and right by using the tab “Des” in the “String connection”. Under the tab "End" a tenon can be defined as “normal”, “marked out” or “dynamic”. With partitioning it can be set whether the tenon is divided into two (two tenons with the preset marking out), for example with a corner step, or whether a tenon is produced on the whole of the lateral edge of the tread. Depending on how the tenon is defined, on the further tabs the following can be assigned: “Length”, “Thickness”, “MO B” (marking out, bottom), "MO T" (marking out, top), “MO F” (marking out, front) and "MO Be" (marking out, behind). In addition, with “normal” and “marked out” tenons it is possible to define whether the tenon is “Centred”, “Inner” (inner flush), “Outer” (outer flush), “Dist.i” (with distance from the inner side with value entry), or “Dist.i%” (distance from the inner side with percentage value entry). In order to round off the tenon, a radius can be set. Furthermore, by using the tabs “Alloc” and “Des”, a tenon can be combined with a fastener. In the master data, under the categories “Stairs” -> “End Type” -> “Tenons” -> “Tenons, dynamic”, the tenons “Tenon 20 dyn Rdg TR” and “Tenon 20 dyn Rdg TR i10- a10” are available especially for treads. Under "Stairs" -> "Treads" the new group “Steps with tenons” has been created in which the two treads can be found as examples. Needless to say, the tenons are also available for the export to machines.
Improvements in the calculation of horse contours especially on mitred surfaces have been carried out. (Ambauen)
The creation of connecting railings has been improved. (Ambauen)
The view of a string in one particular case has been corrected. (Ambauen)
The profiling lines of the DXF export of wreaths have been improved. (Schilling)
Cut-outs on treads have been revised in one particular case. (Kaufmann, Oberholzer)
The calculation of horses with mitre areas has been revised. (EBS) <Highlight Film General Stairs Improvements>
Abutting wreaths has been devised in some details. (Schilling)
The export of lengthened wreaths has been improved. (Schilling)
The bundle input of booms has been revised. (Giraudeau) <Highlight Film General Stairs Improvements>
Wreaths (i.e. wreathed connection pieces) can now be abutted rectangularly or with a free angle. Both types of abutments can be abutted with an “Abutting angle in top view“, with a “Maximum angle in top view” or by indicating the “Number of parts”. In addition, it can be defined, whether the abutment should occur from the “TL” (top level), “BL” (bottom level) or the “Middle” of the wreath. Manually or automatically abutted components can be connected to each other. Consequently, string, handrail, boom and horse wreaths can be freely defined in their design and length. <Highlight Film Treads with Tenons>

3D Objects

The group structure of 3D objects has been improved. (Dittus)

Structural Analysis

In version 11.4 the structural calculation of hip and valley rafters has been integrated in cooperation with Friedrich & Lochner. For the structural calculation the FriLo program D9 is addressed which has therefore been included in the FriLo structural programs icon bar.
To be able to structurally calculate hip and valley rafters, it is absolutely necessary to download the latest FriLo update (in version 11.4 via “"” -> “SEMA program update” -> “Download Center”).
Before the calculation is started, the corresponding structural material, such as C40 or GL28c, has to be assigned to the hip or valley rafter. To calculate it then structurally, the rafter is marked as usually and with the “Extras” command -> “Structural Analysis” the export settings are called up. Here the calculation types “FriLo element with area loads” and “FriLo element with single loads” are available.
First a description of the area loads:
In this calculation type, the roof areas loads are spread proportionately onto the hip or valley rafter to be calculated. This means, that in the roof definition first the permanent loads, the altitude, the snow and wind loads have to be determined (under the same menu as for the rafter structural analysis). If a structural analysis has already been carried out for a rafter, these load definitions are automatically adopted for the hip and valley rafters.
The first information under the element is the diameter – structurally relevant is always the smallest diameter, independent of bevelling. This can best be seen in the hint, when you move with the mouse pointer over the info line. Then, the supports of the element are shown in the export tree. To offer optimum control, the corresponding purlins in the drawing blink when you check the supports with the cursor in the export tree. With the “+” and “-“ buttons in the bottom icon bar of the export menu, the “Explorer Tree” can be opened or closed completely. With the “Start structural program” button, the transfer to the FriLo program is triggered and the D9 program is automatically opened.
The complete geometry of the element, such as diameter, length, pitch, supports and their distances are transferred to the D9 program. The area loads are then automatically transformed into structurally relevant triangular loads and applied to the element.
The selection field (standard rafters, pitched-roof rafter, hip rafter, valley rafter, hip rafter (of pitched roof), valley rafter (of pitched roof) is automatically addressed by SEMA. Because of the special cantilever situation (top and bottom), hips and valleys are treated differently structurally. What is special for the valley rafter is the automatic inclusion of the so-called “snow accumulation” (can be set in the load menu of the D9 program) – which means, when a valley rafter is transferred from the SEMA program, the snow accumulation is automatically activated. <Highlight Film Structural Analysis of Ridge and Valley Rafters>
After the calculation of the element in the D9 program (via the “Calculate” button) the ETA values are shown. Values below “1.0” are indicated as structurally permissible.
Otherwise, the D9 program is almost identical with the D11 program: hips and valleys can be calculated with the standards also available in the D11 program (standards can be accessed from the SEMA program, setting under Alt+F7 -> “Structural Analysis” -> “FriLo”). Also available in the D9 program are the different graphics to show deformation, areas of tension etc. as well as the option to print out structural reports.
Relevant for the distribution of the loads are the triangular areas left and right of the element up to the first normal rafter length. Which values exactly are transferred here to the D9 program can be seen in the “Hip/Valley Rafter” menu. The lengths “b1” and “b2” as well the pitch of the main roof and partial roof are directly from the SEMA program. The calculation via area loads is therefore possible for all standard situations.
The calculation of hip or valley rafter with single loads is recommended when special geometrical situations have to be accommodated. If, for example, the hip height of valley jack rafters is higher than the height of the corresponding valley rafter (transverse building with lower hip than main roof), the valley jack rafters run additionally against a hip rafter or the jack rafter direction is not the same, a calculation with single loads might be used (for a more detailed description, please also see the SEMA website, “Support” -> “Questions and Answers” -> “Structural Analysis”). <Highlight Film Structural Analysis of Ridge and Valley Rafters>
To be able to calculate a hip or valley rafter with single loads, the corresponding jack rafters have to be calculated first. After marking these jack rafters, the structural analysis can be started (shift+F11). After the load definition in the export menu, all jack rafters can be calculated together in the so-called “silent mode” by clicking the “Calculate” button. Here, all components are transferred to the FriLo program one after the other, then they are calculated in this program and the results as well as the structural values for the load distribution are transferred back to the SEMA program. The progress bar in the calculation window and the demarking of the calculated jack rafters let the user follow the progress of the analysis. Subsequently, the hip or valley rafter can be marked and calculated.
For that purpose, the setting: “FriLo element with single loads” has to be selected in the first selection field. Different from the calculation with the area loads, the listed rafters (jack rafters) together with the calculated values for the load distribution appear in the export tree. The single loads comprise of permanent loads, snow and wind loads. It can also be set, if uplift loads are to be transferred. There is the option “use all uplift loads” (first setting of the load distribution) – but, uplift loads can only be taken into account if there is a force-fitted connection between jack rafter and element and the supports of the jack rafter (e.g. purlins) cannot be moved. This information is also available in the hint, when you move with the mouse over the option.
After transferring the hip or valley rafter to the FriLo D9 program, the single loads are represented in the graphics window. After the calculation of the element in the D9 program (via the “Calculate” button) the ETA values are shown. Values below “1.0” indicated that the system is structurally permissible.
Furthermore, also the calculation of inclined gable rafters has been programmed for version 11.4. By marking the component and triggering the structural calculation, the export menu will open. Here, the roof loads are applied to the gable rafter with the preset (alt+F7) rafter distance of normal rafters. The structurally relevant diameter is calculated in the same way as for hip and valley rafters. The FriLo D9 program then treats the gable rafter like a standard rafter. After the calculation of the element, the ETA values are shown. Values below “1.0” indicate it is structurally permissible.
The calculation of normal rafters has also been revised in version 11.4. Pitched-roof rafters, jack rafters and rafters that do not connect to an opposite rafter are now calculated with the FriLo D9 program. In the export menu of the rafter calculation, the preset (alt+F7) rafter distance, which is responsible for the load distribution width of the roof loads, is displayed in the hint. With the “+” and “-“ buttons in the bottom icon bar of the export menu, the “Explorer Tree” can be opened or closed completely. Furthermore, the tree can also be completely opened or closed in the result window of the structural analysis and via a right-click into the window, also here the “+” (enlarge) and “-“ (reduce) options are available.
The automatically determined concrete width (calculated load application area) is now exported correctly to Excel. (Ticomtech) <Highlight Film Structural Analysis of Ridge and Valley Rafters>

Room

Up until now, the following areas of a room have been evaluated in the material list: the gross area, the net area, the height, the perimeter and the gross volume. In addition, the system limit was evaluated.
In version 11.2 the creation command “Room” has been revised and improved greatly. The following areas and structures are now incorporated into each room: the room floor area, the room wall area, the room ceiling area and the room inclined areas. Additionally, the so-called complete system limit is evaluated.
For new room areas, the following data is now evaluated:
For the room's floor space, the gross floor space, the net floor space and the perimeter are evaluated. To calculate the room's floor space, the intersection of the area of the room's floor is used with the area of the underlying top ceiling layer. By using the intersection area, the cutouts in the top ceiling layer will be included. Subject to pre-settings (Alt+F7), cutouts such as holes in the ceiling (for stairwells) will be deducted from the net area of the room's floor space. Cutouts will not be included in the calculation of gross areas of room floor space.
For the wall areas of a room, the gross and net areas are evaluated. In order to calculate the wall areas, the intersection of the wall area of the vertical room area is used with the corresponding area of the innermost layer of the wall. By using the intersection area of the vertical room area and the innermost layer of the wall, cutouts can be incorporated. So that the wall areas are identified correctly, the distance between the room level and the innermost layer of the wall must not be greater than 5mm. Window and door cutouts are not included in the gross area. For the net area, the vertical area of the room is offset and intersected with the innermost layer of the wall. Floor and ceiling structure are taken into account when calculating the net area. Subject to pre-settings (Alt+F7), window and door cutouts will be deducted from the net area.
The gross area, net area and the perimeter of the ceiling are evaluated for the room's ceiling area.
In order to calculate the ceiling area, the intersection of the ceiling area and the overlying area of the undermost ceiling layer are used. By using the intersection area, the cutouts in the undermost ceiling layer can be incorporated. Subject to pre-settings (Alt+F7), cutouts, such as holes in the ceiling, can also be incorporated into the net area of the ceiling.
For a room's inclined area, the gross and the net areas of the roof are evaluated. In order to calculate the inclined areas, the intersection of the surface area of the inclined areas is used with the corresponding roof surface area. Subject to pre-settings (Alt+F7), cutouts in the ceiling, for example for chimneys and roof windows, will be incorporated into the inclined area of the room. Cutouts are deducted from the net area of inclined areas but for gross areas added. The areas of dormers are treated as areas of the main roof and are added to the inclined areas.
The total system limit is derived from the total of all system limits including the floor and ceiling areas. <Highlight Film Room Planner>
In order to display all of these new features visually, the tab “A” (layers and division) has been added to the master data of the rooms.
In this tab so called room layers for walls, ceilings, floors and roofs can be assigned. For this, the new group “Room Layers” has been integrated into the master data under “Walls/Ceilings/RC-Elements”. In this group, room layers can be created and then assigned to the corresponding component. Room layers themselves have a reference to all the integrated board/panel components in SEMA (Coverings, Material).
If rooms are automatically generated, then the corresponding rooms have to be selected as accustomed from the master data. A new feature when automatically creating a room, is the query of the system limits’ master data at the end of the command. The system limit is the total enclosed room of a building or of all the rooms. These can also be assigned to room layers for the walls. The system limit is a specific master data. If new master data is created in the master data under “Walls/Ceilings/RC-Elements” -> “Room”, then the query “Room type” appears. Here, it is possible to enter whether it is a “Standard room” or a “System limit”. Only master data which has been declared as the system limit can be used at the end of the automatic room sectioning for the system limit.
When all rooms have been generated, to all defined components (walls, ceilings, floors and roofs) which are in contact with the room, room layers are now applied. The room is automatically reduced by the layer thickness of the room layer which was assigned to the walls in the room. The layers are updated fully automatically if doors or windows are subsequently integrated into the building or if they have been moved via the processing command “Position”. The room layer is always created on the innermost, outermost, topmost or lowermost layer of ceiling shapes, ceiling elements, walls, roofs or roof elements. As with normal wall layers, the room layer of a wall can be processed, extended and shortened in top view under “3D Walls/Layers”. Needless to say, the room layers of walls can also be edited in the wall view. Should a wall be drawn with a room layer, then the room layer can be selected and edited under “Wall” -> “Edit Outline/Layer”. When selecting the layers, the room layers are marked with an “R“. A special feature of these layers is that they can be abutted/joined, punched or attached in any way. It is also possible to mark these layers and directly change them via the edit command “Change”. Thus the material of the layer can be changed quickly and simply. Consequently, it is quick and simple to create, for example, a tiled backsplash in a kitchen. The layer just has to be abutted and as material “Tiles” have to be assigned.
A completely new enhancement in the domain of room layers is that a wall within a level now may have two different layers. Therefore, a wall which is separated by a T-wall can have two different room layers with two different layer thicknesses. Room layers, which have been applied to floors or ceilings, may now be changed via “Ceiling Outline”-> “Edit layers”. Depending on the direction in which the door opens, the door surface area will be added to the room on the opposite side. Room layers, which are applied under the roof, can be edited by marking the respective roof area and positioned via the command “Component View” (eye symbol) in the upper toolbar. In the positioned roof area, the room layers can then be individually customised via “Wall Outline” -> “Edit layers”. If a roof area which already has a room layer, is subsequently changed (punched, attached, etc), a message will appear in which it is possible to select whether the room layer should be re-calculated or not. If the room layer is re-calculated, then the original state is restored. Cutouts such as chimneys or skylight windows automatically create a cutout in the room layer and the manual changes are not discarded. Naturally, all room layers can be viewed as 3D and can be edited here. The editing command “3D Texture” allows the texture of the layer to be amended quickly and simply. Textures can also be applied quickly and conveniently via the master data container. Furthermore, all 3D room layers can be abutted or joined with the editing command “Abut”. The visibility button in the lower toolbar has been adapted for the room. If a room is marked and the function “Only marked parts visible” is used, then only the room and its room layers are visible.
In the display settings (F7), a left or right, top or bottom room layer has been added under “Wall Layers” -> “Ceiling layers” -> “Roof layers”.
In the material list, the new room areas have been added to the partial list “Room” in the tab “Material List and Stairs”. The partial list “Room” has been divided into the following sub-groups: room areas, room areas summarised, system limits, floor space, floor space per storey, total living space, GFA gross floor area, GFA gross floor area total, NFA net floor area, NFA net floor area total, GRV gross room volume and NRV net room volume. In addition, a new list called “Room list” is now available; this explicitly allows only room areas to be evaluated.
In the partial list “Room areas”, the room areas (room ceiling area, room floor area, room wall area and room sloping area) per room are listed and sorted by storey.
The list “Room areas summarised” is constructed so that the materials of the room areas in a room are summarised. This allows, for example, the quick calculation of how many square metres of a wall area are covered with which material.
In the partial list “System limits”, the system limits per building are individually listed. In addition, the list also calculates the “System limit total”.
The partial list “Floor space” is designed so that the net area of each individual room is calculated. In the two sub-groups “Floor space per storey” and “Floor space total” the net area per storey or all net areas of the rooms for the whole of the building are listed.
The partial list “GFA gross floor area” is calculated from the gross area of the system limits. The “Gross floor area” is the total of all floor areas of all storeys of a building. For the “Gross floor area”, the area of the walls is not taken into consideration. The partial list is compiled so that the gross area per storey is calculated. In the sub-group “GFA gross floor area total”, the gross areas of all storeys are added up and calculated.
The partial list “NFA net floor area” is calculated from gross area from “Room”. The “Net floor area” is the total of the floor areas of all ground planes. Here, the areas of walls are taken into consideration. This is the main difference between “Gross floor area” and “Net floor area”. In this partial list, the gross area of “Room” is calculated per storey. In the sub-group “NFA net floor area total”, the gross areas per storey from “Room” are added up and calculated.
The partial list “GRV gross room volume” is calculated from the gross volume of the “System limits total”. The “Gross room volume” is the total of the construction's room volume over the gross floor area. It is enclosed by the outer periphery of the construction's base from the outer walls and the roof including dormers. Thus in the partial list "GRV gross room volume“, the gross volume of the whole building is calculated.
The partial list “NRV net room volume” is calculated from the gross volume from “Room”. The “Net room volume” is derived from interior room volumes of all rooms, whose floor areas belong to “Net floor area”. In this partial list, the gross volumes of all rooms in the building are evaluated.
Under “Evaluations”, the “Room Areas” tab has been added to the pre-settings (Alt+F7). The following setting can be used to evaluate room areas:
Floor space: It is possible to set whether the floor space net areas are to include cutouts or not. Furthermore, it is possible to select whether all cutouts should be deducted or only those over a certain size.
Wall areas, ceiling areas and sloping areas: here it is possible to set whether cutouts are to be deducted from the net area or not. Furthermore, it is possible to select whether cutouts should be deducted or only those which are over a certain size. <Highlight Film Room Planner>

Structural Physics

As of version 11.2 there is the possibility to have the energy performance of areas evaluated in the material list. The program automatically recognises the so called “Energy performance types”: outside windows, inside windows, outside doors, inside doors, exterior walls, interior walls, floors, ceilings, roof surface areas and collar beam systems. Each of these energy types are evaluated in the material list via the “energy performance areas”. The energy performance area of windows and doors is calculated by using the width and height of the component. The area of exterior and interior walls arises from using the length and height of the H0 layer. The calculation always uses the maximum length of a wall. Window and door cutouts are not incorporated into the energy performance area. The length and width are used when the energy performance area is calculated for floor and ceiling shapes. As before, cutouts are not incorporated. The area of a collar beam system is calculated from the intersection between the system limit and the roof. The calculation for roof surface areas uses the intersection between the system limit and the individual roof areas.
For outside windows, outside doors, exterior walls and roof areas an additional alignment is available. By selecting the command “View” -> “3D Representation” -> “Set North”, the direction can be determined. The program then automatically determines the direction in terms of north, south, east and west of the aforementioned components in the material list. In addition, each structural element can be assigned a so-called “U-value” under the material list tab. These can also be evaluated when transferred to the material lists. The data in the material list can then, for example, be transferred to Excel by selecting the command “File” -> “Export Material List” -> “Microsoft Excel”.
In version 11.4 the following energy performance types have been enhanced: room – exterior wall areas, room – interior wall areas, system wall areas, room - floor areas, room - ceiling areas and room - sloping areas. Room – exterior wall areas are calculated from the inner room layer of an exterior wall. The room - interior wall areas are derived from the room layer of the interior walls. The system wall areas are derived from the room layer of an exterior wall which is created by the system limit. With all of these three energy types, windows and doors are accounted for and deducted. The room - floor area and the room - ceiling area are calculated from the respective room layer of the floor or ceiling. Room - sloping areas are derived from the room layer of the sloping areas. The special feature of these new energy types is that they are evaluated per room. In the material list a corresponding list for the structural physics has been made available. This can be created in the upper toolbar via “Create New Format/Tab List”. Here the following groups have been predefined: structural physics individual, structural physics grouped, structural physics space-oriented individual and enclosed room.
In the group “Structural physics individual”, all energy types are listed individually. In the group “Structural physics grouped”, the energy performance analysis is based on the group evaluation. In the group called “Structural physics space-oriented individual”, the new energy types are added up individually. In all three groups, sub-groups have been created in which all energy types are once again individually listed. In the group “Enclosed room”, the “System limit total” is evaluated.

Master Data Macros, Contents & Revision

The so-called “Room Layer” has been added to the master data of the walls. In this group, several examples of layer material are offered, for example, “Tiles”, “Parquet”, “Plaster” etc. <Highlight Film Room Planner>
References to the aforementioned layer materials have been added to the effective floor space and the living space of the rooms.
The master data of the stairs has been enhanced. In the group “Tenons, dynamic” under end types, the following tenons can also be found: “Tenon 20 dyn Rdg TR” and “Tenon 20 dyn Rdg TR i10- a10” <Highlight Film Treads with Tenons>
In the new group “Steps with tenons”, the steps “42 with tenons” and “42 tenons inserted” which come with the above mentioned end types are listed.

Single Member

With PBA or SPM exports, the aggregate component can be enlarged by a desired value in the “General Settings”. The aggregate component is created as a “min-max rectangle” around the component. Consequently, the exported components for the Hundegger nesting now no longer need to be enlarged manually.
Improvements in the conversion of scarf joints into outline contours during PBA Export. (Haudenschild)
The export of non-rectangular scarf joints to the PBA has been revised. (MHP)
Improvement of the details during export of curves to the K2 has been carried out. (ABZ Schönbuch, Hilzinger, Steyer)
Enhancements of rounded contours for K2 export have been made.
New information for BTL export. If a wall with several processing planes is exported, then in the BTL data file under “Edition” “Prefabrication” is added. For components without layers, for example rafters, the field behind “Edition” remains empty.
Confined marking with type and text can now be deactivated.
“Nailing” has been added to the general settings for the Hundegger PBA/SPM Export. Consequently, nailings can be exported to the Hundegger PBA/SPM when this is activated in the general settings.

Release History V11.3 Build 6000

General

The sorting of the storeys in the drawing administration has been corrected. (Zobl and others)
Going through walls in wall view with the "Up" and "Down" keys has been revised. (Adlerhaus)
The new input option "Shift with arrow keys" (Ctrl+8) for the position command of base and control points has now a description of the function keys integrated.
Extensive optimisations for the memory capacity requirements of visualisation calculations have been carried out. After changing a building project into a Planner BP, the dimension lines are now displayed correctly.
Special script placeholders are now evaluated correctly. (Regnauer)
For reading-in plans/drawings an error correction has been implemented. (Heidelbach)
The calculation core for photorealistic representation has been updated.
The search function (Ctrl+F) has been improved. The component value screen for the filter criteria has been widened so that the text in the ML tab is more legible.
The value of the railing height in the scripts is now correctly shown when the measurements are changed. (Regnauer)
If the program unit measurement is changed to feet/inches, the sorting of the storeys now functions correctly.
The Z laser export has been corrected. (Wigo)
Some translations have been corrected. (France)
More extensive options for character set conversions of older SEMA data (before 11.2) such as building projects, master data etc. have been integrated for customers with different language versions (operating system/SEMA), e.g. English SEMA version with Greek operating system. <Highlight Film 3D Data Exchange and Import of 3D DXF Points and Lines>
The command "Change scale" in the layout view has been revised. (Schubauer)

Presenter

The "Print" button is now available in the icon bar " thus it is possible to print out plans, drawings etc. in Presenter mode.

Building Project Administration

The "Keep number" option when swapping-in building projects has been revised.

Printing & Plotting

The printing problems with the HP Designjet 500 have been solved. (Zarbl, Arnold Haus, Pret)

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

Mirrored arcs of circles are now once again divided correctly. (Proegger)
In version 11.3 the command "Reduce polygon base points" has been added to the editing commands under "Misc". This new command allows superfluous base points to be removed from CAD-polygons, MCAD-polygons and terrains. After highlighting the respective object and executing the new command, an appropriate "correction factor" can be entered as a value in the entry line. Furthermore, the correction factor can be set via a slider. The highest correction factor is "100" and the smallest "0". The higher the entered correction, the more base points are removed. During this process the program automatically tries to maintain the form of the original object. Should many base points be removed, then the newly created object may differ in form from the original object. Whether entering a correction factor manually or whether using the slider, the result of the change is shown immediately on the screen. With the additional option (Alt+1) in the entry line, you can either retain or abandon this object. <Highlight Film New CAD Features>
Special formulas of MCAD macros have been revised in some details. (Adlerhaus, Bettega)
The auto dimensioning feature for certain wall constellations has been improved. (Skaletzka)
Holes in ground-plan polygons are now displayed in 3D. <Highlight Film New CAD Features>

Terrain

The layers created under "Terrain" are displayed correctly under the display settings (F7) and can be applied appropriately here. Furthermore, a free CAD layer for the terrain can be pre-defined in the pre-settings (Alt+F7) under "General" -> "Misc". (Dittus&Lutter)

Rafter System

Front drillings with the centre directly on the clipped side of a wall post have been enabled. (Br"inghoff)
A dove-tail tenon hole that is directly at a "Penetration" end type is now possible. (Renggli)
The positioning of roof windows led in one special case to an invalid message " this has been corrected. (Adlerhaus)
he use of the end type "Profile head" particularly at the eaves cut of ridge and valley rafters has been revised. (Italy)
The flange inclination of U profiles has been corrected so that now all processings caused by U profiles in timber members can be produced with maximum accuracy. (Braun) <Highlight Film End Type "Cutout">
Several tenon holes right next to each other are now summarized with the correct width. (Zimmermann)
The functionality of 3D sections, especially for the clipping of massive-wood walls, has been improved. (HMS)
The intersection of a ceiling beam with an I profile has led to an error when transferring it to the material list " this has been corrected. (Fischer)
The processing created by the "JANE TU16" girder has been corrected. (France)
The creation of clipped rafters with very small ground angles has been improved. (Italy)
The visual representation of components and their processings has been corrected for some cases. (Merotto, Reining, ")
Extensive improvements and corrections for bird"s mouth, scarf joint and component intersections have been carried out. (Str"y, B"hi, Romelli, Renggli, Hirsch, Merkle, M.C.D., France, Italy")

3D Wall Ceiling

A special error that occurred during material list transfer has been corrected. (Skaletzka)

Wall and Ceiling Members

The collisions have been revised for one special case under "Pre-settings" (Alt+F7) -> "Members/Joist System". (Kampshoff)

Nesting

The space saving grouping of several components into a greater component is referred to as nesting. The designated components are positioned into aggregate components so that they save as much space as possible. So, for example, individual massive wood walls which are to be cut or milled from a cross-laminated timber board (CLT board) are nested. In addition to the grouping of the components, allowing for subsequent processing steps, great importance has been attached to the reduction of offcuts.
The nesting manager is a new module which can be opened under "Extras" -> "Nesting Manager". If required, the command icon can be moved from the customized menu and placed in the required position on the toolbar. The nesting manager basically behaves like a master data container. It can be docked on to all four sides of the screen or left "floating". A docked nesting manager can either be "Docked, open" or "Docked, automatically hidden". With "Docked, automatically hidden" a tab can be seen which opens when the mouse is moved over it and which opens the palettes on the screen.
The nesting manager is divided into two areas: In the top section, the nesting filing system, and below, the aggregate components administration. All components which have been added to the nesting manager (e.g. massive-wood walls, boards, rafters, etc.) can be found in the nesting filing system. The aggregate components (e.g. solid wood boards, cross-laminated timber boards, three-layer boards) are created, administered and changed in the aggregate component administration section.
A nesting tab has been added to all components, however, a nesting tab of an aggregate component may contain different information to that of the nesting tab of an individual nesting component. Basically, only components with the nesting parameter "Active, yes" can be found in the nesting filing system. Thus, components with the nesting attribute "Active, no" cannot be nested. If you wish to load components into the nesting filing system, the components must first be marked and then the button "Insert marked components into nesting filing system", which can be found in the nesting filing system, needs to be clicked. The nesting filing system will then contain all the marked components which contain the nesting attribute "Active, yes".
As there are different materials in a building, it is important that a component is assigned to the correct aggregate component. Aggregate components and nesting components can be filtered by "Type" and "Name". Also for nesting components, the settings "All components" and "Only same type" are available for the filter criteria "Include". If the aggregate component is set to "Include all components", then the filter criteria "Type" and "Name" are ignored and all nesting components can be included in the aggregate component. This setting can be used, for example, when optimizing different components for a print job. However, if the aggregate component is set to "Only same type", then the nesting component information under "Name" and "Type" must correspond to the aggregate component information under "Name" and "Type". Should this information not match, the component cannot be nested in the aggregate component. In order to make this visible, these components are marked with a red cross. As with aggregate components, there is an "Info" field for "Type" and "Name" for nesting components. Further information, which should appear in the nesting manager, can be entered here. These fields may also contain placeholders.
Further settings of the nesting tab: With the setting "Grain", the component"s grain direction can be defined. "X direction", "Y direction" und "Free" (free angle) are available. In the next field, "With grain", it is possible to determine whether or not the component"s grain direction is aligned to the grain of the aggregate component.
In the "Refpage" (reference page) it can be determined which side of the component faces upwards in the aggregate component. Another setting determines if the nesting component is allowed to be mirrored or not. It is important to note, that this information is also taken into consideration when exporting to a machine, for example to the PBA .
Settings on the aggregate component"s nesting tab: In the field "Include", it is determined which components are to be added to the aggregate component. In "All cmp.", the filter criteria ("Name" and "Info") of the nesting components and of the aggregate component can be different. In "Only same type" the filter criteria must match in order to include a nesting component in the aggregate component.
With "Expan" (expansion) it is possible to set whether and how an aggregate component can be reduced in size or not. In general, an aggregate component is created in the master data with its maximum dimensions, e.g. 2.5m x 5m (three-layer board). If the nesting components are now placed within the aggregate component, an area of the aggregate component remains empty into which no components can be set. In order to obtain the true required board size, this can be minimized by using the settings "L min." (minimize aggregate component length), "W min." (minimize aggregate component width) and "L + W min." (minimize aggregate component length and width). The command "Adapt selected nestings" required size", which can be found in the aggregate component administration section of the nesting manager, will trigger this minimization. The aggregate component cannot be minimized if the field "Expansion" is set to "fixed W/L" (the width and length of the aggregate component are fixed).
The "Grain" setting determines the grain direction of the aggregate component. Also here, "X direction", "Y direction" and "Free" are available.
Furthermore, distance inputs are also available for aggregate components. For example, if you wish to set nesting components with a given distance to the outer edge of a aggregate component, then this can be carried out by using the "Dist. B" (distance bottom), "Dist. T" (distance top), " Dist. R" (distance right) and "Dist. L" (distance left) commands to create auxiliary lines which display the entered distance.
If a space is required between the components, this can be defined in "IM dist." (intermediate distance between the nesting components). When placing a nesting component a frame is thus created around it. The distance between frame and component is half the distance which has been entered under "IM dist.". When two components with frames are attached to each other, the distance value entered in "IM dist." results.
The length, width and thickness of the aggregate component can be designated on the aggregate component tab called "Ne".
When the required nesting components have been included in the nesting filing system and when a suitable aggregate component has been created, nesting can be started. First, the required aggregate component must be activated with a double mouse click. Then, in the nesting filing system, the nesting component must be selected by a mouse click. The nesting component is now attached to the cursor and can be placed in the aggregate component. On the lower left hand side of the screen, the two input option "Component with a reference point" and "Component rotated" are available. As usual, both of these options allow further input options to be activated.
In the entry line, there are several additional option buttons which enable the simple placement of the component:
"Component to be nested with/without distance definition" (Alt+1): If a "IM dist." has been defined for the aggregate component, it is possible to execute it with or without a distance by using "Alt+1".
"Use rectangular frame" (Alt+2): A maximum rectangle is created for every nesting component. With "Alt+2" it is possible to switch between the original component and the rectangular frame.
"Change reference point" (Alt+3) and "Change reference point (reverse)" (Alt+4): With these options, the insertion points can be changed. "Alt+3" changes the insertion points in an anti-clockwise direction, "Alt+4" in a clockwise direction.
"Change edge of component reference" (Alt+5): If a nesting component is moved within a aggregate component, crosslines with an arrow will appear on the cursor. With "Alt+5" the reference edge can now be changed to the entered angle. This can be seen on the arrow of the crosslines.
"Rotate" (Alt+6): The nesting component can be rotated around its reference point. Depending on whether the nesting component is set to "Yes" or "No" under "With Grain", it can be rotated by 90" or 180".
"Turn/Overturn" (Alt+7), "Turn/Overturn" (Alt+8): This allows the nesting component to be turned around its X-axis (Alt+7) or around its Y-axis (Alt+8). If the nesting component is set to "Mirror" -> "No", then the option button is inactive as the component is not allowed to be mirrored.
"Allow for material grain direction" (Alt+9): This allows the grain direction to be activated or deactivated when positioning the nesting component. This is required when the direction of the grain is important but if you wish to slightly rotate the component away from the grain direction in order to minimize the offcut.
Should you wish to change the position of a nesting component which has already been placed, the positioning command is available.
If nesting components, which already exist in a aggregate component, are deleted, these "end up" in the nesting filing system.
The buttons and functions of the nesting manager are explained below.
On the top left edge of the menu in the nesting manager, the following commands can be found: "Close all inactive windows", "3D representation" and "Arrange windows behind each other". These commands, allow the aggregate component to be effectively displayed and sorted on the screen. In the line below, the number of nesting components in the nesting filing system is shown.
The following additional commands are found in the nesting filing system:
"Add marked components to nesting filing system": All the marked components, whose nesting attribute is set to active, are added to the nesting filing system.
"Mark all components in the nesting filing system": All the nesting components in the nesting filing system are marked.
"Go to original component": If a nesting component is marked and the "Go to original component" button is clicked, the program returns to the position in which it was originally created. In the case of a wall member, this would be the wall view, for a rafter, the rafter system, etc.
"Delete component from nesting filing system": This allows all marked nesting components in the nesting filing system to be deleted from the filing system
"Symbol display": In the nesting filing system, the components may be displayed differently: "Extra large symbols", "Medium sized symbols", "Small symbols" and "Details".
With the symbol display "Details", all components are listed in a table form with the attributes "Type", "Name" and "Info". The columns can be enlarged or minimized to a certain size.
"Show additional information as hint": If this button activated, a hint is created for the nesting component in which the component name, type and info is shown.
The size of the nesting filing system in reference to the aggregate component administration can be changed by scrolling the "separator bar".
Commands in the aggregate component administration:
"Create new nesting": This opens the master data administration. Here a new aggregate component can be created or an existing one selected. The group "nesting" has been added to the master data administration by SEMA. In this, example data for aggregate components can be found. If the master data is confirmed with "OK", then a new aggregate component is created with a new nesting number in the aggregate component table.
"Open nesting to edit in new window": This allows the marked aggregate component to be opened in its own window. Thus, it is possible to open and edit several aggregate components in different windows.
"Mark all nestings": All existing aggregate components are marked.
"Adapt selected nesting to the necessary size": This command only has an effect if the aggregate component is set to "L + W min. ", "L min." or "W min." under "Expansion". If this button is clicked, then the aggregate component is reduced to the required measurement. With the setting "L + W min." the aggregate component is reduced in both length and width, with "L min." only in length and with "W min." only in width.
"Change selected nestings": All marked nestings can be changed.
"Delete selected nestings": All marked aggregate components will be deleted.
"Export to wood-working machine": Marked aggregate components are exported with their integrated nesting components to a wood-working machine. All machines, which are listed in "Alt F7" under "Lists/Single Member"-> "Single Member" -> "Current wood-working machines", are available. If the aggregate component contains stair components, these will not be exported; they can be found in the refinishing work list.
"Machine export stairs": With this button, the required stair components are sent to the CAM system which has been pre-set under "Alt+F7". Currently, only stair components can be exported with this command.
"Data transfer to material list": This command starts the transfer of data to the material list. "Only marked nestings" or "All nestings" are available.
"Aggregate component administration": Here, the columns "No.", "Type", "Name" and "Info." can be selected. The columns can be enlarged and minimized to a certain extent. Each column has a sort function which allows it to be sorted alphabetically in ascending or descending order. Under F7 (View Settings) under "General" the new category "Nesting" is available. This is sub-divided into the categories "General", "Nesting" (aggregate components) and "Elements" (nesting components). For the general settings, the accustomed layer switches "DIM", "CAD" und "MCAD" can be found. In addition, the evaluation numbers can be activated or deactivated. The following can be activated or deactivated under the nesting settings: "Evaluation Numbers", "Type", "Name", "Info.", "Value abbreviation", "Length and width", "Height", and also the displays "Line for lateral distance", "Line for intermediate distance" and "Grain direction".
"Evaluation number", "Designation", "Value abbreviation", "Length and width", "Height" and the display "Grain direction" are available in the element settings.
Visible F7 values are now always displayed horizontally for nesting components.
For nesting components there is now under F7 an "Info" field available. (HMS)
The field "Expan." which was listed under the nesting tab of the aggregate components has been replaced by the term "Adapt".
The setting "fixed W/L" has been changed to "No", "L min" to "Length", "W min" to "Width" and "L and W min" to "L and W". With these changes it is now possible not only to minimise aggregate components but also to enlarge them. (HMS)
The finalized nestings are gathered in the drawing administration and the tab "Nestings" has been added. Here, the existing nesting drawings of the current ground plan can be found. Therefore, nesting drawings are also available for plan versions.
In the material list, the new fields "Nesting number", "Nesting type", "Nesting name" and "Nesting reference" can be selected for the settings of a mask. Under "Format" -> "Create New Tab/List" the "Single member list, timber members and coverings.doc" and "Material list and stairs.doc" templates with integrated nesting lists are available. <Highlight Film Nesting for Timber Constructions and Joining>
For nesting components there is now under F7 an "Info" field available. (HMS)

Stairs

The calculation of the curve adoption of the strings for the handrail has been improved. (Ambauen)
Vertical post notches on last-step/newel posts. In the data record of the post, the vertical post notches can be chosen under the tab "Con". A cutout with different reference points can be defined in the post notch"s menu.
Reference top and bottom: This allows the scarf joint height to be defined. The following reference points are available: "Tread TL" (tread top level), "Tread BL" (tread bottom level), "FF" (finished floor) and "TL uncovered floor" (top level uncovered floor). The distance of the scarf joint depth is defined in the Y direction. Positive values move the scarf joint upwards and negative downwards.
"Reference post, interior exterior": Here the width of the scarf joint is defined. If the value "0.00" is entered, then the maximum width of the scarf joint has been reached. With positive values, the scarf joint will be reduced in size. With "Notch depth, post", the depth of the scarf joint is defined.
A wrong string calculation for a special project has been corrected. (Hungary)
Strings that are only created for the landing area have been corrected. (Megnenet)
The new edge types "Profile form" and "Profile rectangle" are now also available for handrails. (Schilling)
The calculation of the last step lengthening has been revised. (Unterhuber)
The export of splinter-free lines has been improved. (EBS)
The export of riser cutouts after manual editing has been corrected. (EBS)
New references on tail intersections on strings. If in the string"s record, a "Tail, bottom" or "Tail, top" has been defined under the tab "Des" -> "Connection", the new references "Tread TL" and "Tread BL" are now available under "Tail". <Highlight Film New Stair Features>
For the display of inscribed handrails, in particular for wreathed handrails, the calculation of the resolution has been improved. Now the inscribed wreathed handrails always have double the resolution as is the case with board components.
Machine export stairs: For machine exports, a "legend" is now available for each component. In the inifile the legend can be activated, deactivated and, according to requirements, arranged with the placeholder technology. <Highlight Film New Stair Features>
Below is an example with a tread:
With "TR_LEGEND=" the legend can be activated or deactivated.

TR_LEGEND=1

0: Text legend is not displayed/printed-out
1: Text legend is displayed/printed-out

For the legend an extra type of edge must exist. The ID numbers, 1089 for treads, 2089 for risers, 3089 for string boards, 4089 for horses, 5089 for hand rails, 6089 for booms, 8089 for balusters, 3504 for string wreaths, 4504 for horse wreaths, 5504 for handrails wreaths and 6504 for boom wreaths are available.

ET_TREADLEGEND	Edge type, front edge step
IDNO=1089	Identifies the edge (fixed allocation)
COLOUR=1	Colour number as in ACAD 0..255
LTYPE=UNBROKEN	Type, one from the list at the beginning
LNAME=TREADLEGEND	Name of the line (any name can be entered)
LAYER= TREADLEGEND	Name of the layer (any name can be entered)
PLINE=5	0: Printout as individual line 1: Printout as polyline 3: Printout with arcs of circles or individual lines 4: Printout with arcs of circles or polylines 5: Printout as polyline with integrated arcs

By using "LPARAM_STR_*=" the order of the values or place holders are determined. All apt place holders can be used.

LPARAM_STR_0=	INI FILE PATH: @TR_INI_PFAD@
LPARAM_STR_1=	INI FILE NAME : @TR_INI_NAME@
LPARAM_STR_2=	INI FILE VERSION: @TR_INI_VERSION@
LPARAM_STR_3=	SEMA VERSION : @S-BUILD@
LPARAM_STR_4=	EXPORT DATE : @S-DATUM@ @S-ZEIT

In Version 11.3 stair components can be displayed as shaded 2-dimensional objects. The button "Display components in 2D filled" in the standard bar now functions for stair components. If this button is clicked, then all components are automatically filled with their lightened outline colour. The outline colour of the component is configured in the general colour settings and can be set individually. A reference field for shading and for section lining has been added for the colour settings of all stair components. Here, an individual filling or hatch can be defined for designated components. By default, the filling reference for stair components does not contain data; if the button "Display components in 2D filled" is pressed, the filling is automatically generated.
At first sight, the shaded display already makes the project appear to be clearer. Visually, the components can be differentiated more effectively. Finding, marking and editing of components has been simplified considerably, above all for first time users. As the shading appears lightened and transparent, the types of work ends and the processings of the stair components are still easily recognizable. Also hatched areas, such as end-grain wood, are displayed transparently. Very clear and precise detailed pictures are created when used in conjunction with the hatch style.
The button "Display components in 2D filled" appears automatically in the standard bar. Furthermore, this button can be found in the customized menu under "Commands" -> "View". In addition, this setting may be activated or deactivated by using F7 and then selecting "Picture + 3D" -> "Display".
Whether the components are shaded when a drawing is printed, is also determined by using this button. If the user never wants to print the components with a shaded surface, then the corresponding setting can be found under the general program options (Alt+F7). Under "General" -> "Look" -> "Other Options" it is possible to set whether the automatic shading is printed, as set under the F7 settings, or is not printed at all. <Highlight Film New Stair Features>
The following example with a string demonstrates the improvements of the look tab.
Under the present references for visualization and inscription, the settings for the component"s outline can be found. A global "yes" means that the appearance of the string is inherited from the values in the general colour settings. Hence, further settings for the outline are then deactivated. A global "no" means that these settings now apply to the string: the outline colour, the line width and the type of line are determined. Amongst these, the reference fields for the filling/filling pattern in top view and for sectional views can be found. If these reference fields are empty, then the values in the general colour settings prevail. In order to fill the reference fields individually, a new master data called "Filling" has been programmed and is designed as follows. Firstly, it differentiates between empty, filled or hatched areas. The setting "Empty" leaves the component without any filling. All other entries in the master data are blocked. With the setting "filled", the fields for the background definition are active. Under the transparency of the full filling (yes/no) the usual colour selection can be found. Along with the option to mix your own colours, other additional colour options are available: "No colour", there is no filling; "Colour like outline", the outline colour is used for the filling; "Lighter colour than outline", for the filling a lighter tone of the outline colour is used; "Automatic colour", automatically the lighter tone of the outline colour is used, if the "Display component in 2D filled" button has been activated. The setting "Hatched" allows for the fields of the hatch style definition to be activated. Firstly, in the field "Style", the desired type of hatch can be selected. The size of the hatch can be set to "Zoom" or "Constant". Next, the size factor as well as its angular positioning is set. Finally, the colour is determined. In addition, in version 11.3 a background colour for the hatching is available; the settings of which are explained under the settings for "full" (see above). <Highlight Film New Stair Features>
In the master data several examples of filling and hatching can be found. (filling/filling pattern, filling, standard).
New positioning commands for base and control points. In the component view and in developed view, the option "Mark object details" is available. If this modus is active, then the new form "Move with arrow keys" (Ctrl+8) can be selected in conjunction with the positioning command. If a base or control point is marked, these can now be moved via the arrow keys. With the letters "E" and "R" it is possible to move from base point to base point. "E" means, move in a clockwise direction. "R", move in an anti-clockwise direction. With the letters "D" and "F" you can move from control point to control point. "D" moves in a clockwise direction and "F" anti-clockwise. These new functions allow the very exact editing of component curves.
In version 11.3 it is now possible to optimize diverse stair components for printing or for machine export. So, for example, a handrail and string can be "consolidated" into one nested aggregate component. An exact description of how components can be optimized is available under the section nesting. <Highlight Film Nesting for Treads, Strings and Handrails>

Master Data Macros, Program

When renaming the master data, its name is now shown in full length.
Changing data macros in a reference field has been revised. (Regnauer)

Master Data Macros, Contents & Revision

In the new module "Quantity Systems", examples have been added to the section "Visualization/3D Objects" in the group called "Measuring Points".
In the master data, a new section called "Nesting" can be found. Nested aggregate components for massive-wood walls have been created.
In the massive-wood wall master data, interior and exterior walls for nesting have been created.
In the same way, the component "Massive-wood wall nesting" has been added under elements (-> "Massive-wood wall" -> "Wall").

Material List

The functionality to include a material list in a plan has been revised. (Gr"er)
The ASCII export from the material list has been improved. You can now set the type of coding, "ANSI" or "UTF-8" under the general pre-settings: Alt+F7 -> "Lists/Single Member" -> "ASCII Export". (Genb"k)
For the "Excel export with template" feature a new Excel template and a template for a material list tab have been created. These two templates perfectly complement each other and help you create perfect quotes and calculations by just clicking a button. <Highlight Film Excel Templates for Quotations and Bill of Quantities Calculations>
The auto feature for partial lists has been revised for the "Free 1" field. (France)
Inscriptions on timber members or boards now once again get the correct VNo. or element number. (Bien-Zenker)

Single Member

The visualized representation of components that have been overturned 1x or 3x has been improved. (Hilzinger)
The export of rebates has been revised. (HMS)
For BTL export it can now be set under "Free contours" in the general settings that contours are exported without the reference plane. (Weinmann, Essetre)
The following improvements have been programmed for exporting to a Hundegger PBA:
- Sections with inclinations are integrated into the outline and exported thus.
- Interior outlines, contours or scarf joints are integrated into the outline and exported thus.
- Longitudinal sections are integrated into the outline and exported thus.
- The option to determine from which side scarf joints and cutouts are produced has been optimized.
The cone of the dove-tail tenon hole has been corrected for BTL export (V 10.0 " V. 10.4). (Stampfl, France)
Texts from the fields of the member optimisation list are now, once again, transferred correctly to the K2 program. (Regnauer)
The transfer of special 3D cutouts to the K2 machine has been revised. (Baisotti)
Double markings (particularly on purlins) have been corrected for BTL export. (Riget)

3D Objects

Stiffeners and backers automatically adapt their height to the relevant ribbed beam. This applies to ribbed beams made out of solid wood as well as to ribbed beams made out of veneer glulam (different height of the booms of the beam). It does not play a role whether the backers of stiffeners have been created manually or fully-automatically. (STEICO)

RCE Import

The automatic generation of designations/names in the ML tab of imported components under RCE import has been improved. (Binderbau Ruhlsdorf)
The accuracy of timber members generated from RCE files, especially for the export to a wood-working machine, has been improved. (Binderbau Ruhlsdorf, Regnauer)

Quantity Measurement System

The new "Quantity System" module enables an exchange of data of measuring points between a theodolite with control software and the SEMA timber construction software.
This can be carried out with a saved data file or "online". The customized menu is opened by a right mouse click on the symbol bar, here the icon bar for the new "Quantity System" module can be activated. This is then automatically fixed on the edge of the left side of the screen.
3D measuring points can be generated with the "Enter measuring points" icon. If the icon is clicked upon, then the new master data for the 3D measuring points is opened. On the part of SEMA, example master data is available for this. Look and ML tabs are available for the measuring points. In the look tab it is possible to select a colour. On the ML tab the fields, "Designation", "Comment" und "Description" are available. The occupied fields on the ML tab can be used as filter criteria when exporting the measuring points. When the measuring point in the data record has been adjusted as required, you can then start setting the measuring points. In 3D, it is possible to select the input method from "Set point with reference plane" (Ctrl+1) and "On two reference areas" (Ctrl+5) (in 2D, only "Set point" (Ctrl+1) is available). The position of the measuring points can be changed at a later point by using the "Position" command. With the icon "Hide/Unhide Measuring Points", the measuring points can be made visible or hidden. By using the F7 key, under "3CAD" -> "Measuring Points" the designation is activated or deactivated. If the measuring point is active, then a flag with the appointed color and the entered text (description) is created on the measuring point.
Data exchange by means of a file:
The "Import measuring points" icon opens the menu of the same name. This menu enables the import of measuring points which have been recorded and saved by a theodolite. Currently, the following formats can be selected: "SEMA Measurement Data" (sxd), "Leica Text File" (txt), "Leica CSV" (csv), "Leica DXF" (dxf) and "FlexiJet File" (fxj).
The "Export measuring points" icon opens the "Export Measuring Points" menu. Here it is possible to select whether the measuring points of the whole ground plan, the currently active storey or the currently active wall are to be exported. With the category "Select measuring points" it is possible to select the measuring points which need to be exported. The filtering criteria, "Designation", "Comment" and "Description" are with an input field available. The export path can be entered manually or the required directory can be selected. The export is then started by clicking the "OK" button and may be stopped and the menu closed by the "Cancel" button.
Importing measuring points or coordinates online from a theodolite: <Highlight Film Quantity Survey with Theodolite>
If a quantity measurement device is connected to a PC with a cable or via a blue-tooth interface and the manufacturer"s respective control software is installed on the PC, then measuring points can be directly imported from the theodolite into a SEMA input field. This means a measuring point is measured with a theodolite, if this measuring point is confirmed on the theodolite, then the coordinates are sent to the SEMA input field. A new option, "Quantity measurement mode on/off" is now available for this field. With this option, it can be controlled whether during a "from" " "to" input you return to the "from" input field or continue from the "to" input field. Depending on which command is being used, e.g. a wall can be entered by recording two measuring points with a theodolite.
In wall view, it is possible to position doors or windows by measurements with the theodolite. Entering of a polygonal floor plan is also possible with the help of a theodolite. When entering the polygon, the new option "Close polygon" is available in the entry line. If the "Enter measuring points" function has been selected, then 3D measuring points can also be set. <Highlight Film Quantity Survey with Theodolite>

Release History V11.2 Build 5800

General Points

When using short-cuts, entries via the NUM block of the keyboard are taken into account again. (Chalets)
The sorting of storeys has been corrected. (Chalets)
The corresponding placeholder is now shown in the hint field of the material list tab, this can be linked to the drawing (e.g. @B-BEZEICHNUNG@ in CAD texts).
The active ground plan can not be deleted. If a project has several ground plans, these can only be deleted if they are not active.
When a command is called, the entry form (lower left-hand side of a command) will be suggested in the form it was ended during the last time of use.
The 3D Export/Import in the VRML 1.0/2.0 File (*.wrl) format has been improved. (Czech Republic)
Changes in the following F7 settings have been carried out so that the program does not have to be re-started when executed: overview detail; overview detail, wall; overview detail, section; master macros.
When marking/snapping components, the marking box will only be executed when it is larger than 5 pixels. With this, the individual components will also be marked when the mouse is slightly moved whilst being clicked.
In the upper tool bar, the command "Control" has been added to. If this command is carried out and in the entry field the instance "control component" (ctrl+4) is active, then the radius and the radian of the circles will be shown in the hint information.
In the upper tool bar, the command "Move Values" has been extended. Edge dimensions of wall shapes, wall coverings and rooms, which have been activated in the display setting (F7), can now be moved with this command. (France)
The display of "hidden edges" in the 3D representation has been adapted and improved considerably. Components are now shown more precisely and in more detail. Furthermore, the calculation time of the components has become much faster. Especially with larger building projects, the difference with version 11.2 is considerable. Hence, complete buildings with hidden edges can be drawn in a short period of time. <Highlight Film 3D Representation "Hidden Edges">
In the drawing administration section the plans have been extended by the following points:
General Enhancements:
- The following columns have been added to the plan administration: Plan No., Index, Designation, Annotation, Modification Comment, Draughtsman and Date.
- The width of the columns can be changed. The position of the columns may also be changed by clicking under the column title and holding down the mouse button.
- An ascending or descending sort of the column's data can be created via a mouse click on the column title.
- The width of the drawing administration window can now be changed.
- The number of plans in the ground plan is shown in brackets in the heading line.
- If nothing is entered, the new plan no. will automatically be number 1. The next new plan will be assigned the number 2. If, for example, the first plan is assigned the number 100, the following new plan will be given the number 101.
- The column "Index" will be explained later (see below).
- Plan Name, Designation, Annotation, Modification Comment and Draughtsman are all text columns. Here, any text may be entered. When creating or changing a plan using the commands "Create New" or "Change", the placeholder can still be accessed via a right- mouse-click. Thus the content of these columns can be composed at will. The "Large Text Entry" is also available via the right-click pop-up-menu.
- In the column "Date" a date can be entered.
- When saving a plan using the command "As Template", the placeholder/text, which has been used in the columns, will also be saved. Hence, a pre-defined structure can be created.
Revision Plan Enhancements
- What is a revision plan" It is a plan which replaces a preceding plan, in which the content is similar but more up-to-date.
- The administration of revised plans has been integrated into the plan administration. Via the menu item "Revision" on the right-hand side, a revised plan can be assigned to an existing plan. The identification of a revised plan occurs via an index. The first plan never has an index number and hence is shown by default with a "0". Further revisions of a plan are then numbered consecutively, 1, 2, 3 etc. Under the menu item "Options" the output of the index value can be set either numerically or alphabetically. If required, the "0" revision in the first plan may be hidden and the plan number of the revisions can also be omitted.
- The columns of the plan administration can be divided into 2 types. Columns whose contents remain the same for the plan and the plan's revisions (Plan/Drawing No., Plan/Drawing Name, Designation, Annotation) and those which may differ for each plan revision (Index, Modification Comment, Draughtsman and Date).
- A filter for the plans can be set on the right-hand side of the plan administration. This filter can be used so that only the plans with the highest revision number are shown.
- Via the usual placeholder technology, individual column contents of the plans and their revisions can be accessed from the drawing.
"Placeholder" Enhancements for the Plan Administration
- For the selection of placeholders a new item "Plan Administration" has been added, in which the following placeholders can be found:
  Plan/Drawing No.
  Index - Current Plan
  Index - Revisions
  Plan/Drawing Name
  Designation
  Annotation
  Modification Comment - Current Plan
  Modification Comment - Revision
  Draughtsman - Current Plan
  Draughtsman - Revision
  Date - Current Plan
  Date - Revision
  Format - Current Plan
  Format - Revision
  Page Size - Current Plan
  Page Size - Revision
  Printer - Current Plan
  Printer - Revision
With the "Revision Placeholder", the respective revision/index can be specified from which the values should be adopted.
Should, for example, the modification comment of index 2 (b) be required, then the placeholder must be entered thus: @PL_AENDERUNGSVERMERK$R2@.
The index of the "Plan Administration Revision" can be entered in the placeholder menu after the required placeholder has been clicked upon. <Highlight Film SEMA Drawing Administration and Layout>
For working with revised plans, two examples (Revision 1 and Revision 2) are available in the master data under the group "Legend Macros" -> "Plan". In the component legends, revision placeholders are used in an exemplary manner.
When opening example projects, you are automatically directed to the images in the drawing administration. The images have been integrated into the preview window.
With the new Building Project Administration Mode 3 it is now possible to manage SEMA projects with the Windows Explorer. Under "Extras" -> "Options" -> "Building Project Administration Mode" there is now the "SEMA Explorer Building Project Administration". If you activate this mode, you can manage SEMA building projects similar to normal Word documents. So you can, for example, create a SEMA Timber Construction Software project under any directory via a right-click and "New". If you accept the suggested name and then use it again and again, the program automatically assigns consecutive numbers (SEMA Timber Construction Software project (new) 2, SEMA Timber Construction Software project (new) 3 etc.) Of course, you can also use any other name, which can then also be changed subsequently. A double-click on the created building project opens the project manager where you can make the usual settings. By clicking onto "Create" the program starts and the building project is opened. Now you can start working in the usual way.
In the Building Project Administration Mode 3 there are, of course, also new commands and functionalities. Just like every normal Word document, you have to save the building project now manually. You can do this via the "Save" button in the icon bar or via the key combination "Ctrl" + "S". When you save a newly created project for the first time, the "BP Properties" open automatically and you can enter the building project number, the name of the draughtsman etc. When you close a building project (or when you quit the SEMA program) the query if you want to save your last changes appears. You can confirm with "Yes" and your changes are saved and the building project is closed. If you select "No" the changes are abandoned and the building project is closed. If you click "Cancel" you return to the building project. By selecting "No" you can now actually abandon the last changes of your project " which can be an advantage if you only wanted to check something in your project or changed something accidentally.
You can create a new project via the "Create new SEMA timber construction project" or via the shortcut "Ctrl" + "N". And again, when saving the building project for the first time, the BP properties open. If you confirm the properties with "OK" the preset project path is suggested ("Extras" -> "Options" -> "Building Project Administration Mode" -> "Details of SEMA Explorer Building Project Administration). If you change the path, it will be used until you restart the program. After restarting the program the set project path is again suggested.
Via "Open SEMA timber construction project" or "Ctrl" + "O" an existing project can be opened. The suggested path is the set project path. If you change the path, this changed path will be used until you restart the program. After restarting the program, the set path will be used again.
You can also find the commands "Create project", "Open project" and "Save" under "File" menu. Here you also find some more commands that are only available if the "SEMA Explorer Building Project Administration" has been activated. With the "Swap-in/Import" option, building projects from any folder can be transferred to any directory. The project is only transferred, not opened. If you want to open such a transferred project, you have to use the "Open project" command.
With the "Sample Projects" option, you can open all sample building projects filed for the current program version. With "Save as" you can then save it under any directory. And again, if you change the path here, this changed path will be used until you restart the program. You can create templates with the "Save as template" command and then use the template in the usual way via the BP properties -> "Template". <Highlight Film SEMA Explorer Building Project Administration>
The Building Project Administrations modes 1 and 2 have been extended and improved. So you can now, for example, set a project path that works across all versions. In the BP Administration you can thus display and edit all projects of all versions. You can make the required setting in the menu of the Building Project Administration Mode -> "Details" " here you can set a project path for the "SEMA Standard Building Project Administration" and for the "SEMA Network Building Project Administration" that is valid across all version. (Moser) <Highlight Film SEMA Explorer Building Project Administration>

Tool Bar/Palettes

The master data container of the palettes has been expanded and now includes: fastener end types, staircase end types, visualisation/3D object textures and the visualisation /3D objects windows/doors.
With the expansion of the master data types, a new and quick option has been created for the creation/assignment of this master data to components/objects (1-click-solution).
Thus, for example, after the selection of an end type, the component ends of the target components simply have to be marked and the component will be assigned to the selected end type.
As usual, the individual master data of the master data types can also be saved as a user button (own button). This allows the user to arrange the most frequently required master data (e.g. end types etc.) and assign them at will to a tool bar or a command palette on the screen.
Since version 10.4, it has been possible to assign certain commands to a "user button" (own button) via the menu item "View" → "Tool Bars" → "Define Commands" (the corresponding film can be found on SEMA's website under "Highlights" → "General" → "User Buttons"). From version 11.0 onwards, user buttons can be assigned to command palettes (the corresponding film can be found on SEMA's website under "Highlights" → "General" → "User-Friendly Icon Bars"). This film shows how palettes can be created and with which settings. <Highlight Film Fast and Individual End Types>

GRD, CAD, BEM, MCAD

The speed of placing dimension points has been improved. (Renggli)
For MCAD processing, for example drillings, when the entry field is used, then the depth of the drilling or the length of the diameter will be requested. Up until now, when you wanted to change this information, you had to find the corresponding parameter in the MCAD formula and then change it there. In order to facilitate this process, the so-called "MCAD Query" has been implemented in version 11.2. This makes changing parameters easier. If you want to change this parameter later, you simply need to mark the corresponding MCAD and select the "MCAD Query" option under the command "Others". Thus the required query appears in the entry field and the values such as "Drilling depth" and "Drilling diameter" can be edited. When you confirm the amended values with "OK" they will be automatically updated in the MCAD formula. <Highlight Film Various New Features for Wooden Houses>
The dimensioning of windows and doors has been expanded. Consequently, it is now possible in version 11.2 to always automatically indicate dimensions of windows and doors in the middle. As yet, the whole width was dimensioned. Now you can define whether window and door measurements are to be shown as a width or from the middle in the dimension line master data, under the first tab "Dimension Line" in the component selection menu. When a manual dimension line is created and this is assigned a corresponding "Area dimensioning", the middle of the windows and doors are always dimensioned. In addition, the auto-dimensioning in the master data is now available under the option "Wall Top View" → "Windows/Doors" underneath the first tab called "Auto". It is possible to set whether windows and doors are to be dimensioned in the middle or as a width. Thus, windows and doors can be indicated as a dimension from the middle. Furthermore, the display settings (F7) under "3D Walls", "Windows" and "Doors" has been added to. In the top view, the width and the height of windows and doors are now shown in the option "Width/Height". This option has been extended so that it is possible to select either the "Standard" width and height (which was the only possibility up until now) or "Axis", the truly axial width and height. With the setting "Axis", a truly axial line will be generated for windows and doors. On the left or above this line, the width of the respective component will be marked out. On the right or below the line, the height will be marked out. (Austria). <Highlight Film Various New Features for Wooden Houses>
CAD/MCAD circles and arcs of circles are now shown in the line style "ISO" as dashed lines and can now be printed thus. (Regnauer)
Entering several lines of text has been revised and improved considerably. In the entry line, the entry field has been enlarged so that several lines of text can be entered clearly. Should the entered text be too long, it is possible to scrolled up or down by using the scroll wheel on the mouse or by using the arrow keys. The entered text will be shown in the hint information, the size of the text is shown in the drawing with the help of a rectangle. In addition, you can also use the large editor to enter and edit text in the entry line by using the command "Start Editor" (Alt+2). In the editor you can import texts from text documents via the command "From File" and incorporate them into the new text. It is still possible to select and enter into a placeholder in the entry line by using the command "Enter Placeholder". This option is also available in the editor. Furthermore, these texts can be aligned and 3 new option buttons are available in order to do this. The text can be "aligned left" (Alt+3), "centred" (Alt+4) and "aligned right" (Alt+5). Consequently, this offers completely new creative possibilities when creating a plan. In addition, the reference points in a text of several lines can be changed by using the option "Change text reference point". When the text is entered and formatted as wished, the text is installed by confirming with "OK". With the "TAB" key you can switch directly from the entry field to "OK" and confirm with "ENTER". You can use the edit command "Position" when you wish to re-edit existing texts. In the entry line the options "Change Text Reference Point" (Alt+1) → "aligned left" (Alt+3), "centred" (Alt+4) and "aligned right" (Alt+5) are available. The option "Guideline constant for text" (Alt+2) is also available when the text is entered with a guideline. Thus, texts can be formatted and changed at a later point in time. <Highlight Film Various New Features for Wooden Houses>
The font size of text and dimension lines has been revised and the smallest font size is now 0.01mm. This has brought great advantages when labelling and dimensioning a detail in combination with the font size "zoom" and the font size "free".
The positioning command for 3D objects with reference (click) to dimension lines has been revised. (Sebalex)

Roof Design

In version 11.2 separate roof areas can be displayed with individual textures. In order to do this an "Look" tab has been added to the roof area master data. This contains a reference field for a texture which can be used in both the textured 3D representation and in the photo-realistic representation. The texture in the roof area reference field overrides thus the global texture of the roof tiles as set in the general colour settings. Roof areas without a texture reference will use the global tile texture. Also on the active roof structure, the texture of the roof area will be displayed in the topmost layer.
It is now possible to set the optical appearance of the roof area via the "Texture" command. The highlighted roof area also can be assigned any kind of texture master data by using the editing command "Texture". The entry into the master data of the roof surface area takes place automatically.
Roof constructions, such as dormers with metal plating roof, overhang glazing or conservatories, roof gardens, shingled roofs, etc. can now be visualised perfectly. (R"rig, Jobega, Staudenschreiner and many others). <Highlight Film Roof Areas with Different Textures>

Printing & Plotting

A so-called printer calibration is now available under "Extras" → "Options". This allows you to respond to differences in measurement between the print preview in the program and the actual print-out on paper. How to proceed: a square, which will fit onto the print-out, needs to be printed to the scale of 1:1. After this, the print-out is checked. Then the printer in question must be set by selecting "Printer Calibration" from the menu. Then the target measurements and the actual measurements in the X/Y direction need to be entered. The program now calculates the "correction factor" by itself. If the menu is ended with "OK", the corrections for the respective printer are saved.

Room Planner

Up until now, the following areas of a room have been evaluated in the material list: the gross area, the net area, the height, the perimeter and the gross volume. In addition, the system limit was evaluated.
In version 11.2 the creation command "Room" has been revised and improved greatly. The following areas and structures are now incorporated into each room: the room floor area, the room wall area, the room ceiling area and the room inclined areas. Additionally, the so-called complete system limit is evaluated.
For new room areas, the following data is now evaluated:
For the room's floor space, the gross floor space, the net floor space and the perimeter are evaluated. To calculate the room's floor space, the area of the room's floor is used with the area of the underlying top ceiling layer. By using the floor area, the cutouts in the top ceiling layer will be included. Subject to pre-settings (alt+7), cutouts such as holes in the ceiling (for stairwells) will be deducted from the net area of the room's floor space. Cutouts will not be included in the calculation of gross areas of room floor space.
For the wall areas of a room, the gross and net areas are evaluated. In order to calculate the wall areas, the wall area of the vertical room area is used with the corresponding area of the innermost layer of the wall. By using the area of the vertical room area and the innermost layer of the wall, cutouts can be incorporated. So that the wall areas are identified correctly, the distance between the room level and the innermost layer of the wall must not be greater than 5mm. The gross and net areas are distinguished as follows: for the gross area, the maximum height between the floor and ceiling is assumed and this area is offset and intersected with the innermost layer of the wall. Window and door cutouts are not included in the gross area. For the net area, the vertical area of the room is offset and intersected with the innermost layer of the wall. Floor and ceiling structure are taken into account when calculating the net area. Subject to pre-settings (alt+7), window and door cutouts will be deducted from the net area. Currently, the area of subtraction for the cutouts is calculated by using the zero-layer area.
The gross area, net area and the perimeter of the ceiling are evaluated for the room's ceiling area.
In order to calculate the ceiling area, the ceiling area and the overlying area of the undermost ceiling layer are used. By using the ceiling area, the cutouts in the undermost ceiling layer can be incorporated. Subject to pre-settings (alt+7), cutouts, such as holes in the ceiling, can also be incorporated into the net area of the ceiling.
For a room's inclined area, the gross and the net areas of the ceiling are evaluated. In order to calculate the inclined areas, the surface area of the inclined areas is used with the corresponding roof surface area. Subject to pre-settings (alt+7), cutouts in the ceiling, for example for chimneys and roof windows, will be incorporated into the inclined area of the room. Cutouts are deducted from the net area of inclined areas but for gross areas added. The areas of dormers are treated as areas of the main roof and are added to the inclined areas.
The total system limit is derived from the total of all system limits including the floor and ceiling areas.
In the material list, the partial list "Room" under the tab called "Material List and Stairs" has been extended to include the new room areas. The partial list has been divided into the following sub-groups:
room areas, room areas sorted by area, system limits, living space, living space by storey, living space total, GFA gross floor area, GFA gross floor area total, NFA net floor area, NFA net floor area total, GRV gross room value and NRV net room volume. In addition, the new "Room List" is available in which only room areas are evaluated.
In the partial list called "Room Areas" all areas of a room (ceiling area, floor space, wall area and sloping wall area) will be listed and sorted by storey.
In the partial list "Room Areas sorted by area" is structured just like the partial list "Room Areas": This list is sorted by the areas of rooms (ceiling area, floor space, wall area and inclined areas) and storey . Hence it is possible to quickly calculate, for example, the existing square-metre area of walls per building.
Every individual system limit of a building is listed in the partial list "System Limit". " In addition to this, the "System Limit Total" is also evaluated in this list.
The partial list called "Living Space" is structured so that the net area of each individual room is calculated. In the two sub-groups "Living Space by storey" and "Living Space total", the net area per storey or the total net area of all the rooms in the building are listed.
The partial list called "GFA Gross Floor Area" is generated by using the gross area of the system limits. The "gross floor area" is the sum of all the building's floor areas on each storey. The area of the walls is not taken into account when calculating the gross floor area. The partial list is structured so that the gross area per storey is evaluated. In the sub-group called "GFA Gross Floor Area Total", the gross areas of all storeys are added up and evaluated.
The partial list "NFA Net Floor Area" is generated from the net area of the "Room". The "Net Floor Area" is the total of the floor areas of all ground-plan planes. Wall areas are used in this calculation. This is the main difference between "gross floor area" and "net floor area". In this partial list, the gross area per storey of "Room" is analysed. In the sub-group "NFA Net Floor Area Total", the gross area of all storeys from "Room" are added up and evaluated.
The partial list "GRV Gross Room Volume" is calculated from the gross volume of the "System Limit Total". The "gross room volume" is the total of the construction's room volume over the gross floor area. It is enclosed by the outer periphery of the construction's base from the outer walls and the roof including dormers. Thus in the partial list "GRV Gross Room Volume", the gross volume of the whole building is evaluated.
The partial list "NRV Net Room Volume" is calculated from the gross volume from "Room". The "net room volume" is derived from interior room volumes of all rooms, whose floor areas belong to "net floor area". In this partial list, the gross volumes of all rooms in the building are evaluated.
Under "Evaluations", the tab "Room Areas" has been added to the pre-settings (Alt+F7). The following setting can be used to evaluate room areas.
Floor space: It is possible to set up whether floor space net areas are to include cutouts or not. Furthermore, it is possible to set whether all cutouts should be deducted or only those over a certain size. In addition, you can set up whether door surface areas are to be added to the gross area, to net areas or to gross and to net areas. Depending on the direction in which the door opens, its surface area will also be added to the room on the other side. The whole area (thickness of the wall + layer thickness x width of the door) will be used. If this option is used, then the perimeter of the room's floor space is extended by the width of door + layer thickness. The direction in which the door opens is also incorporated.
Wall areas, ceiling areas and inclined areas: Here it is possible to generally set whether cutouts are deducted from the net area or not. Furthermore, it is possible to set whether all cutouts should be deducted or only those over a certain size
In version 11.2 the ceiling shape master data has been improved. Under the "Look" tab you can now set whether the ceiling shape in the visualisation is shown from underneath "open" (previously the only option) or "closed". The new effect is shown to an advantage especially with 3D solid ceilings. By using the appropriate settings of the texture, the top side, bottom side and the side areas of the ceiling can be designed with different appearances. <Highlight Film Planner>

Structural Physics

In version 11.2 there is the possibility to have the energy performance of areas evaluated in the material list. The program automatically recognises the so called "energy performance types": outside windows, inside windows, outside doors, inside doors, exterior walls, interior walls, floors, ceilings, roof surface areas and collar beam systems. Each of these "energy performance types" evaluates energy performance areas in the material list. The energy performance area of windows and doors is calculated by using the width and height of the structural component. The area of exterior and interior walls arises from using the length and height of the timber layer. The calculation always uses the maximum length of a wall. Window and door cutouts are not incorporated into the energy performance area. The length and width of the structural element are used when the energy performance area is calculated for floor and ceiling shapes. As before, cutouts are not incorporated. The area of a collar beam system is calculated from the intersection between the system limit and the roof. The calculation for roof surface areas uses the intersection between the system limit and the individual roof areas.
For outside windows, outside doors, exterior walls and roof areas an additional alignment is available. By selecting the command "View" → "3D Representation" → "Set North", the direction can be determined. The program then automatically determines the direction in terms of north, south, east and west of the aforementioned components in the material list. In addition, each structural element can be assigned a so-called "U-value" under the material list tab. These can also be used in the transfer into the material lists. The data in the material list can then, for example, be transferred to Excel by selecting the command "File"→ "Export Material List"→ "Microsoft Excel". <Highlight Film Energy Performance>
The list/tab "Structural Physics" has been added to the material list. In order to show this list, it must be created via the command "Format" -> "Create new tab-list". In this list all "Energy performance types" are listed individually as well as in groups. Structural physical values such as alignment, pitch, energy performance areas and U-values are evaluated for each component. In addition, the "Enclosed room" is also evaluated in the new list. <Highlight Film Energy Performance>

Coverings 3D Wall Ceiling

In version 11.2 the horizontal section has been added to the wall view. It is now possible to make the adjacent walls of the horizontal section visible. However, in order to show the abutting walls, they must have a logical wall connection. With this wall view, it can be checked quickly and easily, for example, whether the layers have been correctly intersected. In addition, direct changes to the abutting walls in the horizontal sections can be carried out via the editing command "Change". The option "Adjacent Walls Visible" has been added to the view settings (F7) under "Images+3D" → "Auto-Sectioning". Only when this option is activated, the abutting walls will be shown in the horizontal section. In addition, the depth of the adjacent walls can be entered. (Vario)
The "Overview Drawing" in the screen of the carpenter's dimensioning or in the single member view has been extended. Coverings can now also been shown in the overview drawing. For this, the menu point "Coverings" has been added to the appropriate view settings. Optionally, you can select whether all or only marked coverings are to be shown in the overview drawing (display settings (F7), Single Member, Carpenter's Dimensioning and Single Member, Overview Drawing). <Highlight Film Various New Features for Wooden Houses>
For the editing command "Abutting on division line" of boards in wall view, the last value entered will be saved. Hence, if it is the same, the distance of the boards no longer needs to be re-entered each time they abut. (B"enbender)
The auto Wall function (F10) has been revised for one special case of applying coverings. (Albert-Haus)

Single Member

In version 11.2 "Tyrolean dovetailing with Frosch" and "Klingschrot" are now available as MCAD processing. Furthermore, the appropriate corner macros have been added. These two new processing options build upon the "normal" Tyrolean dovetailing and can only be operated by using additional parameters . Just as with "Tyrolean dovetailing with Frosch", "Klingschrot" is created so that processing is also visible in 3D. In the wall view, it is possible to create the MCAD at the end and the beginning of the wall or to assign a wall to the appropriate MCAD. The parameters are pre-populated so that the MCAD processing option can be used directly. By entering additional parameters, the processing options can be adapted individually and flexibly. The processings are calculated from the start or the end of the timber.
The following features apply to "Tyrolean dovetailing with Frosch" and "Klingschrot":
The position of the processing on the higher or lower half log (regardless of whether the half log is larger, smaller or exactly 50% of the whole log) is automatically calculated and created on the correct side.
Automatic calculation of the height of the whole log.
Automatic calculation of the width of the complementary component.
If no projection is specified, then this is set to zero.
If the rebate is specified, then the length (overlapping length) is set to "component width" rebate + projection". In this case, the rebate remains the same on wide walls and the overlapping length follows automatically.
If only the overlapping length is specified, then the rebate's "component width " rebate" is the same as "overlapping length + projection". If the distance to the reference edge is = 0 and the overlapping length is greater than "component width + projection", then the overlapping length is reduced.
If the overlapping length and the rebate are specified, then the overlapping length will be interpreted as the maximum length of the moulding and the rebate depth interpreted as the minimum depth. Therefore, depending on the width of the timber used, either the rebate depth will automatically be increased or the overlapping length will be decreased so that the same MCAD or corner macro can also be used for different wall thicknesses.
The following features apply just to "Klingschrot":
- For Klingschrot, the distance to the reference corner or the depth of the scarf joint is automatically calculated via the overlapping length or the cutter-head length.
- For Klingschrot, it is important that the radius of the curved part of the dovetailing corresponds to the Klingschrot cutter-head.
- The difference must correspond to the length of the overlapping or cutter-head length and the excess length of curved part of the cutter head.
- At most, the projection or excess length can only be as large as the horizontal part of the cutter head.
- The difference between the overlapping length and the projection must always result in the cutter-head length. <Highlight Film Log Constructions: Tyrolean Dovetail, Klingschrot and Frosch>
There is a new single member processing: Profile Head (106). The new profile head is available for CMP and BVN export. In older CMP versions or during BVN export, it is exported as a convex/concave profile or as a member head. As of CMP version 10.4 onwards, it can be exported as its own process. If the profile differs from a quadrant, it will be exported as "free profiling" <Highlight Film New End Type "Profile Head">
For BTL export and Hundegger SPM/PBA export there is now a message, if the file name already exists and the question if you want to overwrite it or assign a new file name.
Line markers are automatically converted into markings/scribes for the export to Hundegger SPM/PBA machines.
Furthermore, under the general machine settings you can set if a contour with marker/scribe is possible on the machine or not.
For the manual creation of markings on components which will be processed on the SPM or PBA machine, new MCAD processings "Scribe"." are available now (see also Master Data Macros, Contents & Revisions)

Material List

If it has been defined in the partial list settings that a partial list is to be exported with the command "Excel Export with Template", then a symbol will appear before the name of this list.

Profile

The definition of hip dormers and half hip dormers in the profile assistant has been enabled (for a full explanation see "Rafter System"). <Highlight Film Assistant for Hip Dormers>

Master Data Macro Program

For the creation commands under joist system and wall view (e.g. "Element free", "Placing of element" etc.) the so-called group suggestion has been revised. (Weiss)
The master data can be re-named by a right mouse-click and then by selecting "re-name".
Assimilation and picking of fasteners & brackets has been corrected. (Schw"er)

Master Data Macros, Contents & Revision

In the master data a new group called "Profile Heads" has been added. The existing end types from the groups "Profile concave" and "Profile convex" have been transferred to the "Profile Heads" group and the "Profile concave" and "Profile convex" groups have been deleted . The profile head group now contains the previous convex and concave profiles as well as several examples for the new end type "Profile Head" <Highlight Film New End Type "Profile Head">
The MCAD macros of the group "Prefabricated Houses" -> "SM" have been extended by the following macros: "Scribe", "Free Contour" and "Marking Point".
Joists/beams from the company STEICO have been added to the master data in version 11.2. The basis for this beam is a 3D object which has been modified from the master data of l-beams ("Visualisation" -> "Other 3D Objects" -> "STEICO joist"). In this master data the "Type" can be set to "Ribbed Beam". If this is the case, then a second reference field for texture will be added to the "Look" tab. This texture determines the appearance of the ribbed beam's centre ridge. In the timber framing master data under "Elements" -> "Profiles" the group "STEICO joists" has been added for the simplified entry of a joist system. This group contains Steico's whole range of products for roof constructions with ribbed beams. <Highlight Film Ribbed Beams>
From this ribbed beam, all create commands in the joist system can now be accessed. (e.g. "Element, free", "Space area" etc.).
For the construction of hip and half hip dormers, corresponding examples are available in the master data.

Structural Analysis

When carrying out rafter analyses from the profile administration ("Profile/Dormer" -> "Rafter Analysis"), the structural material (e.g. C 40, GL 24C..) which is set at the rafter stage, is now correctly transferred to the structural analysis program and evaluated accordingly.
In version 11.2, the command "Structural Calculation" has been integrated in the "Extras" menu (main menu tool bar). Up until now this command was found under "File" -> "Export". The short-cut key of this command "Shift+F11" can still be used.
The calculation standards preset under Alt+F7, e.g. EN5-"2209 (Alt F7 -> "Structural Analysis" -> "Frilo") is now saved correctly.

Rafter System

In version 11.2 the construction of hip dormers and partial hip dormers has been made possible in the profile assistant. The hip dormers have been added under "Triangle Dormer" in the profile administration, which can be found under "Profile/Dormers" in the program selection. If you click on the hip dormer in the profile administration, a standard template will be loaded into the assistant and can be edited as required.
Firstly, the main roof profile for the dormer is allocated and under the batten tab the dormer can be assigned a roof structure.
Under the tab called "Dormer" the position of the dormer on the main roof is determined. For this, almost all combinations of the following input options are offered: top level parapet timber, projection parapet timber, distance from the ridge and distance from the external edge of the jamb wall. The dormer data is defined by half the width of the dormer, the height of the windows (alternatively the TL eaves purlin) as well as the pitch of the dormer. All inactive values are constantly updated (follow-up calculation) and help check your entries and give a better overview. Eaves heights and roof overhang can be taken from the suggested values; variable roof battens can be entered manually.
Under the following tabs (Purlin and Members), the required members for the dormer are integrated. For fast input, important data such as width, height etc. are extracted from the reference field and can thus be integrated directly.
Furthermore, there is the choice to produce the hip dormers with valley blanks or valley rafters; the necessary cutout in the main roof is created automatically.
The "Hip" tab is decisive for the definition of a hipped roof dormer. Under "What is known"" you can choose all possible combinations of "Basic Measurement", "Ridge Height", "Eaves Height", "Length of Roof Overhand", "Roof Pitch", "Top Level Eaves Purlin" and "Top Level Rafter on Jamb Wall". It is not possible to enter the ridge height as this value corresponds to the ridge height of the dormer. With the help of the additional setting "Like Dormer", all the other inputs can use the values from the dormer area, which naturally facilitate the definition of a hip or a partial hip. The pitch can be set to that of the main roof by using the setting "like MR". This is followed by the input of the hip rafter, hip eaves purlin and for the hip or partial hip rafter. Consequently, the hip or partial hip area can be easily and conveniently constructed.
The data entered in the assistant is, as usual, supported by a constantly refreshed image on the screen. Here the entire dimensioned front and side view and the valley plank or valley rafter, the hip rafter and, of course, the textured 3D image of the hip dormer are available.
After the hip dormer has been finalised in the assistant, the drawing can be printed from the profile administration. The different views of the drawing can now be adjusted at will with CAD or manual dimensioning. For this, an individual layer is available for each view.
The rafter system entry is now carried out under the new command "Hip Dormer" ( Rafter System → Dormers). A triangle dormer which was created in the profile is automatically suggested and can be placed in the entry field with just a few additional steps.
Of course, it is not absolutely necessary to create the dormer with the dormer assistant, it is also possible to use a "free hip dormer" from the master data. Some examples of dormers have been added to the master data.
The hip dormer data placed in the rafter system can be accessed, as always, via the gripper. When the gripper is active, the editing commands "Modify", "Position", "Copy", "Calculate", "Macro" and "Delete" become available as well. <Highlight Film Assistant for Hip Dormers>
The end type "ridge scarf" has been improved. The setting "automatic" has been integrated into the fields "Counter Component Height" and "Counter Component Pitch". Therefore, the pitch and the height of the counter profile no longer need to be entered manually or by clicking on the counter component. The program calculates these values automatically and they are then shown in the hint information. With this, special ridge scarves such as Masard ridge, level valleys, ridge scarf joints between purlins and rafters for half hip constructions or unevenly pitched pairs of rafters can be constructed easily and conveniently.
Then end type "Profile Head" has been added to the end types. This new end type allows you to assign a second curve. The following combinations are available: concave/convex, concave/concave, convex/convex, convex/concave. The required combination can be selected from the screen. In addition, a further scarf joint and distance to the curves is available. The definition of the curve itself has been extended and now includes "Quadrant", "Superelevation" and "Length X/Y". Examples of these can be found in the master data. <Highlight Film New End Type "Profile Head">
Extensive improvements have been made with regard to the intersection of bird"s mouths and components. (R"rig, Bethel, Zimmermann, Haudenschild, Sebalex, Hilzinger, Gr"chel, Italy, France")
The 3D image with editing has been corrected in specific cases. (Sebalex, Hirsch)
A special drilling on the face side of a post (drilling axis on the clipping area) is now possible. (R"rig)
If placeholders are used in the field "Designation" located under the "ML" tab, these can now be written on the plan via the F7 key. (Russia)
In Version 11.2 the functionality of the so-called points of intersection has been extended. Automatic scarf joint intersections which are automatically produced by setting the component to "hard", "middle" or "soft", can now be edited in the point of intersection mode.
In order to make the points of intersection visible and processible, the new mode "Mark intersection points" has been added to input field at the bottom of the program (under "Object - Mark Details")
If you change to this mode, the points of intersection for the marked components can be made visible by using the "Show intersection points" command.
After executing this command, all points of intersection on the previously marked components will be shown. The points of intersection are shown as blue spheres and are visible and processible in all views. The editing of the points of intersection is especially clearly defined in the textured 3D display with the transparent portrayal of the timbers (button in the 3D icon menu). In the point of intersection mode only intersection points can be snapped. For better overview, components can be marked with "shift + left mouse button" and then hidden by using the visibility button (a more detailed description of points of intersection can be found in the Version 10.5 Highlight Film "Points of Intersection" on the SEMA homepage under "Highlights" -> "Complete Overview" -> "V10.5 12/ 2008").
Subsequently, the points of intersection of an automatic scarf joint intersection can be processed, for example leader beam and post (both "soft"). If the cursor is placed over the point of intersection, the content of the point of intersection is described in the preview (hint). With an automatic intersection of a scarf joint for example, the hint reads as follows: LEADER BEAM - POST intersection; LEADER BEAM: scarf joint ra (40-3-3); POST: scarf joint ra (40-3-1). If the points of intersection are marked, the "Change" command is available. In the master data window of the point of intersection, the individual scarf joints may be completely suppressed if required ("Produce: yes/ no").
In version 11.2, the access to the settings of the connection point has been newly programmed. The position of the scarf joint which is automatically set by the program, can now be turned around. The depth of the scarf joint (standard is "middle") can now also be changed by a manual or percentage measurement. When entered in the master data, the changes to the point of intersection will immediately be updated and correctly shown on the screen. Hence, the user sees the desired results of the intersection before confirming the command. If it is necessary to change the position of an automatic scarf joint intersection or to move the scarf joint depth off-centre due to design reasons, this can be carried out easily and clearly via the point of intersection. <Highlight Film Points of Intersection: Scarf Joint Position and Depth>
Elements, such as hip, valley or barge rafters which lie on the ridge of a clipped purlin, now "get" an exact bird"s mouth (plumb and clipped area of the purlin). Low profiled or rotated rafters also behave in a similar fashion. (Italy)
3CAD drillings now apply for the entire component height of ridge and valley rafters. (Hilzinger)
Fasteners which have been anchored to end types of 3D timber components are now visible in top view. (France)
Elements such hip, valley or gable rafters which are on the ridge on a clipped purlin can now be produced with an exact bird"s mouth. This also works with lowered or turned rafters. For this purpose, the automatically created processings can be changed in the node mode. The contents of the node are described in the preview (hint) when the mouse pointer of placed over a node (e.g. element-purlin intersection: element: bird"s mouth (4-20-1), purlin: line marker (4-60-3). When you change the node, you can also change the processings of the point of connection in the master data. The automatically create bird"s mouth can be changed to "Bird"s mouth, exact". The changes are immediately, i.e. while they are entered, updated and displayed correctly on the screen. Thus you can see even before you confirm your entries what the intersection will look like and you can create an exact bird"s mouth on the clipping. (Italy, France)

Stairs

For the production of hand-rail wreath with a profile moulder, you need the so-called "Wreath Lengthening" " which is necessary for the placement of the tool. In the master data of the handrail, under the "End" tab, the "Wreath Lengthening" is available for the start and end of the component. In the settings menu you can then decide for either a "short" or a "long" design. With "Projection" you can lengthen the wreath by a manual input. The "Cut" can be plumb or right-angled. Of course, the "Wreath Lengthening" is also displayed in the developed view and is thus also available for the print-out version.
Thus the manual or machine production of high-quality handrail wreaths has been perfected in version 11.2. <Highlight Film Wreath Processing with Profile Moulder>

3D Representation Visualisation

A changed angle for wandering through buildings (+/- camera aperture angle) remains changed also for the photorealistic calculation.

3D Objects

In version 11.2, the import of 3D objects has been improved and developed considerably. An imported 3D object (e.g. 3ds, 3D dxf...) can now be broken down into individual elements, provided that the externally created 3D object has been subdivided. The individual elements can then be converted into "real" timber and roof areas. Thus, it is possible, for example, to import a complete building which has been created in an external program into the SEMA program and convert it with a few mouse-clicks into a fully-fledged SEMA project with 3D timber components and roof areas.
In order to simplify the individual procedures of the conversion of 3D object, a new tool bar "Component from Object" has been created. This can be activated with a right-click over the tool bar area.
The first command on the new tool bar is the "3D Import". This command corresponds to the accustomed 3D import command in the 3CAD menu. In the import screen the required dxf or 3ds file can be selected and, if applicable, the setting for the size of the imported file. The positioning of the object is carried out with the normal input in the entry line. The imported object can now be edited in 3D, for example. With the next command "Separate 3D Objects", the object is broken down into its individual components. This occurs fully automatically and can be followed in a calculation window. After the object has been broken down, its individual "external components" can be marked.
To begin with, the roof areas of the imported object need to be converted into the correct SEMA roof areas. In order to simplify the process of marking the imported roof areas of the imported object, the third button "Mark all components with same outline colour" is now available. Once all the "Object roof areas" are marked, the command "Roof area from object" can be clicked. This new command also has been integrated into the roof design create commands. Now you simply have to confirm with "OK" in the entry line of the command. In addition, two additional options buttons are available. "Abandon existing object (Alt+1)": With this you decide if the original 3D object should be deleted or not. "Use 3D object lower areas (Alt+2)": Here, you define the plane on which the SEMA roof area/surface will be.
Now the roof areas of the imported object have been converted to fully-fledged SEMA roof areas.
In the next step, timbers which are still 3D objects can be converted to SEMA timber components. For this, the timber objects may be marked in the same fashion as the roof areas via the new button. The fourth button on the tool bar "Timber components from object" can also be found in the create commands of the 3CAD menu. Here, you must also confirm with "OK" in the entry line. The aforementioned "Abandon existing object (Alt+1)" button is also available. The converted timber objects are now "real" SEMA 3D timber components.
Additionally, there is also the possibility to assign the timber objects to a construction plane. Before the conversion of the timber objects into SEMA timber objects can take place, a construction plane has to be created at the required position, for example on a truss (activate the detailed view of the external 3D object: F7, 3CAD, 3D Objects (rest). When the timber object are marked in the upright construction plane and have been converted to SEMA timber components, these will then automatically be assigned to the construction plane. Naturally, this is of a great advantage for the further processing of the project as well as for the evaluation in the material list. <Highlight film 3D Import of Members, Roof Areas and Trusses>

RCE Import

Now data from CSCE's truss program "RoofCon" can be imported into the SEMA program. The Roofcon RCE data can be read by using the last button on the new tool bar "Component from Object". This function can also be found under "File", "Import" and "RCE Import"
After selecting the RCE data to be imported, the data (roof areas, trusses, truss timbers and appropriate nailboards etc.) will be imported directly and fully automatically into the SEMA program and converted into the corresponding SEMA component. Roof areas, constructions planes (per truss) and the associated truss timbers are automatically created. Likewise, nailboards are created as 3D objects. The imported components automatically keep the additional information which was defined in the RCE format by entries into the material list tab.
By using this import, a large amount of data can be created in a simple manner (only one command) and with a high level of detail (real SEMA components, e.g. timber members with double cuts). <Highlight Film RCE Import / MXF Import>
After the import you can now find important import information in the import protocol. Amongst others, the exact number of imported trusses, members and other 3D objects. Imported and automatically created members, trusses etc. have, of course, to be checked.

XML-SCI Import

The XML-SCI import has been enhanced. Consequently, it is possible to control and import hip and triangle dormers. As an option, the length of the projecting roof and its pitch may be entered for saddle or triangle dormers.
Optionally, the reference to the spacing master data may also be controlled. Wall and ceiling timbers can be created via six 2D points.
The creation of 3CAD timber components and constructions planes has also been made possible.

3D Wall Ceiling

Applying battens to walls with the division reference "on wood" and the covering type "Batten mem., all" has been improved. (Faeton)
If a timber member in a roof or ceiling element does not touch a layer, then no nailing will be carried out. (Weissenseer) <Highlight Film Various New Features for Wooden Houses>

Release History V11.1 Build 5600

General Points

Photorealistic representation for the Windows 7 operating system has been enabled.
It is once again possible to exit the photorealistic representation with "ESC".
The automatic wall output does not print a titleblock for every wall anymore. (Sailloft)
There is a new command under the editing menu: "Scaling". This command makes it very easy to change the size of ground-plan polygons, CAD polygons or terrain polygons.
There are two options available:
"Scaling with factor": polygons can be enlarged or minimize by a certain factor
"Scaling, distance": polygons are enlarged or minimized by the entered distance. Thus polygons that already exist can be used and changed very quickly and do not need to be created again. <Highlight Film New Command: Resizing Polygons>
The magnifier does no longer enlarge areas with a constant X/Y-ratio but is variable. Thus specific details can be enlarged even more exactly and then edited.
Now always only the filed house ground-plan is deleted. (Zobl)
For placeholders a new option called "Get values from host component" has been integrated. With this option, values from one component can be adopted for another component.
Example: an extrusion object is inscribed into a log-house component " with the additional information under the ML tab -> "Annotation" that the "Get values from host component" option has to be executed under the placeholder "Annotation". This means that the value entered in the annotation of the log-house component is automatically passed on to the inscribed extrusion object. This also means that the values determined by the auto packaging are passed on.
In the same way, this option can be used for 3CAD objects that have been stuck to another component.
In the "3D view from inside" (navigation mode) you can now change the angle of view when wandering through the building with the "Plus" and "Minus" keys.
It is now possible to change ground plans in the Presenter version. (France)
The search feature in 3D has been corrected.
The check command, particularly for the screen image of the profile assistant, has been revised.
The marking and de-marking of components when using a yellow drawing area in the program has been revised. (Meyer)
It is now possible to delete user-created master data containers in the Italian program version. (Italy)
Interaction with the HASP dongle has been improved.
The print output for Windows 64-bit operating systems has been improved. (B"chel, D"hting, Erny)
Access to certain F7 settings has been optimised. (Regnauer)
The representation of punched extrusion objects has been revised. (France)

Terrain Modelling

Terrain edges can now be snapped in 3D and then be split with either the "Abut" or the "At length" command. This also works the other way round, i.e. with the "Abut" or "Connect" command they can be re-connected.
It is now also possible to make terrain edges "straight" via the "Others" command in 3D.
Partial terrains in the background can be marked with a right-click in 3D and then be edited.
In addition to that there is a new creation command under the "Terrain" menu called "Terrain from object". With this new function it is possible to create partial terrains from any kind of ground-plan/CAD/MCAD polygons, lines, circles, elipses etc. After marking the objects (e.g. lines, polygons, circles etc.) the master data window of terrains opens and individual settings and adjustments can be made. After confirming with "OK" the pre-defined terrain is created out of these objects. This is a very fast and convenient way to create circular partial terrains for example. <Highlight Film New Features for Terrain Modelling>
Under the storey administration of terrain a new option has been added: "Height at sea level". If you enter a height at sea level, the entered height is automatically calculated for every storey.
Consequently, also the master data of terrain has a new value: "Height at sea level". The entered height at sea level in the storey is automatically calculated and adjusted on the basis of the entered basic height in the master data. For relative terrains the height at sea level is not displayed.
The position of terrain base points can be changed via the "Position" command with the input option "Position, absolute height (CTRL + 7)" and then either -> "Heihgt at storey height" or -> "Heigth at sea level".
It is now also possible to group several partial terrains via the "Group" command under the "Others" editing command menu.
In the display options (F7) -> "Terrain" it is possible to display the height at sea level in the ground plan via the "Terrain base point at sea level" option. The height at sea level is then also indicated in the hint information of the terrain base points. <Highlight Film New Features for Terrain Modelling>

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

The "Scaling with factor" command now also works if the program is set on "mm". (Russia)
For MCAD drillings the centre of the MCAD circle does not have to touch the component edges of members or layers anymore to create a processing. MCAD drillings now create a processing on all components concerned by the processing if the min-max box of the circle touches the component.
For placing anchor points at grouped CAD objects there is now a new option available in the input line: "Aspect ratio constant (Alt+1)". If you activate this option before placing the anchor points, the CAD objects always keep their aspect ratio when inserted even if they have been created as variable macros. Thus it is possible to create CAD macros that can be variable and also constant. (Regnauer)
The MCAD fastener "Pitzl post bearer" has been revised so that it now creates correct processings on members even if an end type has been allocated to the component end. (Merkle)

Roof Design

In version 11.1 the so-called "easy-to-understand measurement (of quantities)" have been programmed. With this print-out it is possible to re-calculate and check roof area measurements in a logical and simple way. The roof areas are split into simple polygons which can then be calculated with simple formulas.
Under "Extras" -> "Measurement Lists" there is the "Roof design evaluation and summary calculation" sub-menu. Apart from the well-known evaluation features such as quantity lists and the calculation lists there is under "Others" the new "Area-polygon reduction (easy-to-understand measurements)" item.
On the first page of the evaluation, the roof design of the project with all partial roof numbers, roof area numbers and cutouts is displayed. Below you find a description of the basis of calculation for the area, e.g. mathematical formulas for the calculation of rectangular areas, right-angled triangles and trapezoidal areas. The roof areas are split into such sub-areas (i.e. rectangle, triangle, trapezium) which can then be checked with the simple formulas.
On the following pages the individual roof areas are listed. On the left side, drawings of the roof areas with their divided and numbered rectangular, triangular or trapezoidal areas are displayed. On the right you find the roof area with number and pitch as headline. Below the individual areas with their formulas as well as the overall result for this areas are displayed. If there are any cutouts, these are also listed with their size and how they are calculated. With the help of this tool, even quite complex roof designs can be easily measured and checked.
The sorting of the partial roofs in the easy-to-understand measurements has been revised. (Irion) <Highlight Film Easy-to-Understand Area Measurements>

Single Member

For CMP export, the rise in certain situations for scarf joints with angle, inclination and rise has been optimised. (Bach& Perreten)
If the single member transfer option for components is set on "No" and they are exported to a production machine, a message does now appear to point that out.
Kx and Speed Cut machines: the bird"s mouth optimisation has been improved for cases when two bird"s mouths with minimal distance enter from the same reference side.
Kx and Speed Cut machines: The parameters of the "Dovetail" and "Tyrolean dovetail" have been revised.
Kx and Speed Cut machines: 3D scarf joints have been combined " if you create a clipping or fluting with 3D scarf joints, they are combined to a "Ridge-valley cut".
Kx and Speed Cut machines: The transfer of scarf joints created by a special steel fastener (3CAD or MCAD) at components (especially ridge and valley rafters) has been optimized. (Cost)
PBA export: Under the "General Settings for HHK machines PBA" there is the option: "Align component position according to exterior contour". If this option is active, the components are exported in such a way that the exterior contour is automatically on the right side on the PBA machine.
Automatic saving for the types of processing: When you change the type of input under the types of processing and then switch the type of processing, there is now the automatic query whether you want to save the changed input form " which means such changes are not abandoned anymore without you being aware of it.
The combination of identical components in Single Member has been improved.
The K2 export of front scarf joints on bevel cuts which also have a DT tenon or a DT tenon hole has been enabled. (Sebalex)

Profile

The definition of triangle dormers is now possible in the profile assistant (for more information see "Rafter System").

Master Data Macros, Contents & Revision

In the master data a new sub-group has been integrated under "Visualization/3D Objects" -> "Steel Constructions" -> "L steel". It is further divided into isosceles and not isosceles L steels. The cross-sections of these profiles have been created according to the latest DIN EN 10056-1. <Highlight Film New Features for Steel Constructions>
The profiles under the element group of "Timber framing" were supplemented by the following steel beams: L steel, U steel, T steel, Z steel.
Some triangle dormers have been filed in der master data of the rafter system. <Highlight Film New Features for Steel Constructions>
A new type of division, "From opening" has been added to the division of "Coverings/AV" under the "Timber framing" group. <Highlight Film New Type of Division: "From Opening">
The MCAD processing options for massive wood walls have been extended. Under the "CAD/MCAD" group -> "MCAD macros" -> "Processings" -> "Massive wood wall" the following processings have been added: "Rebate S1 when S2 hit", "Rebate S1 when S4 hit", "Rebate S1 + S3 I", "Rebate S1 + S3 II", "Rebate S3 when S2 hit" and "Rebate S3 when S4 hit".
The master data for "Walls/Ceilings/RC-Elements" has been extended with the "Auto Corner" sub-group. This sub-group has further been divided into different wall types, where examples for "2x4", "log construction", "timber framing" and "brickwall+framework" walls have been pre-defined as well as examples for "massive wood walls". The "Log construction" group has been further divided into "Log construction, manual", "Log construction, by machine", "Dovetail" and "Tyrolean dovetail". For "Dovetail" and "Tyrolean dovetail" all five types for each sub-group have been pre-defined. <Highlight Film Automatic Wall Corner Design>

Rafter System

Processings on the side of a component that are created by a U profile are now transferred as scarf joint processings to the wood-working machine. (Ge-Wo Bau GmbH)
In version 11.1 it is now possible to design triangle dormers in the profile assistant. The triangle dormers have been added under the "Saddle-roof dormers" in the profile administration (-> "Profiles/Dormers" in the program selection menu). In contrast to saddle-roof dormers, triangle dormers have no eaves, the barge of a triangle dormer goes directly into the main roof area.
If you click on "Triangle dormer" in the profile administration, a standard template is loaded into the assistant where it can be edited as needed. First the main roof profile for the dormer is allocated and under the batten tab, a roof structure for the triangle dormer can be selected. Relevant for the battens in this case are only the ridge distance and the optimised batten dimensions since triangular areas are always battened from the ridge down to the valley point.
In the next step, you determine the position of the triangle dormer on the main roof area under the "Dormer" tab. Here almost all combinations of the following input options are possible: top level parapet timber, projection parapet timber, distance from the ridge and distance from the external edge of the jamb wall.
The dormer itself is defined by dormer width, dormer height and pitch of the dormer. For the definition of the dormer width, either the internal dimensions (window width) or the external dimension (width of the dormer at the intersection point of the roof areas with the external edge of the first rafter) can be entered. For entering the height, you can either define it via the ridge height or the top level of the ridge purlin. All the inactive values are constantly updated (follow-up calculation) and help check your entries and give a better overview.
Under the following tabs, the required members for the dormer are integrated. For a fast input, important data such as width, height etc.are adopted from the corresponding field and can thus be integrated directly.
Furthermore, there is the choice to produce the triangle dormer with valley blanks or valley rafters " the necessary cutout in the mainroof is created automatically.
The rafter spacing of the triangle dormer is created as closely to the indicated distance as possible. The rafter pair is always flush with the exterior edge of the dormer. If you enter a "Projection on the gable", there is also a rafter pair on the barge.
The inputs you make via the assistant are, as always, constantly followed-up in the screen image where the fully dimensioned front and side view, the valley blanks and, of course, textured 3D representation of the triangel dormer are available.
After completing the triangle dormer in the assistant, the dormer drawing can be printed out right from the profile administration. The different views of the dormer drawing can now still be added to, with CAD objects and manual dimensioning for example.
The rafter system is now entered with the new "Triangle dormer" command ("Rafter System" -> "Dormer"). The triangle dormer created under "Profiles" is automatically suggested and can be placed with just a few addditional inputs in the input box.
Of course, it is not absolutely necessary to create the dormer with the dormer assistant, but you can also use a "free triangle dormer" from the master data. Some example dormers have been added to the master data.
The data of the triangle dormer placed in the rafter system can be accessed, as always, via the gripper. And with the gripper active, the editing commands "Modify", "Position", "Copy", "Calculate", "Macro" and "Delete" become available as well. <Highlight Film Assistant for Triangle Dormers>
It is now possible to create a double cut of a valley rafter at a ridge purlin and a tilted purlin. (R"rig)
3D scarf joints now create the right tail processing at a clipped rafter. (Italy)
In a special situation, the "Cut 2 x" command did not work on clipped rafters in top view " this has been corrected. (Italy)
The creation of a 3D timber component with correct preview works now also with the F7 setting -> "Representation of timber members" as "Axis" or "Axis + object". (Gessner)
The transfer of 3D timber components to the material list has been improved. Such components now automatically find their right place in the right partial list if the allocation option (under the ML tab of the component) is set on "auto". Manual allocation to "Wall timber" or "Truss timber" etc. is no longer necessary. For example: 3D timber members created in a construction plane are now automatically transferred to the "C plane member" partial list. (France)
The editing options for "Purlin elements" in the purlin master data have been extended. In addition to "Mark scarf joint" there is now also the option "Mark scarf joint exactly" " which means that the notch for the purlin is not executed across the entire purlin width but is processed exactly. (Italy)
Extensive improvements and corrections have been carried out for bird"s mouth and component intersections (Schwarzwald-Abbund, IKB, Reining, Schwarz, Zimmermann, Italy, France")
Posts can now have scarf joints on the front area created by 3D scarf joints of steel components which are then produced with "Pocket 308" on the Hundegger machine. (France)
Processing on elements created by rectangular profiles are now longer. Thus they become easier to produce on wood-working machines. (Italy)
The spacing of closing boards, particularly around roof windows or other openings, has been revised. (Zimmermann)
The 3D representation with special editings has been corrected in a number of cases (Romelli, Italy)
A special eaves boarding notch is now correctly created and transferred to the wood-working machine. (B"enbender)
For a special case, 3D scarf joint processing on the rafter ridge has been made possible. (Italy)

Stairs

Bottom post connections are now re-calculated automatically. (Oberholzer, Ambauen)
The adoption of the string curve for the handrail has been revised for a special case. (Schilling)
The calculation of step cut-outs in the strings has been optimized. (M"ler)
There is a new edge type to rough mill tread cutouts in posts. To avoid tears/splinting when milling tread cutouts in posts, an additional milling line can be exported. (EBS)
The paling/baluster spacing for spiral stairs has been improved. Palings are now created centered on the projection of spiral steps. If there is a riser, the paling is placed between the front edge of the riser and the front edge of the tread. If there is no riser, the paling is in the middle of the projection.
Parametric lengthening of the string at the last step: it is now possible to create a support at the end (last step) of the string. For that purpose, the master data of strings has two new items under the "Design" tab: "Ver. Height" and "Ver. Length".
"Ver. Height": Here you can enter the support thickness either from the tread top or bottom level.
"Ver. Length": Here you can enter the length of the support with reference to the string end.
So the support does not have to be added manually anymore. <Highlight Film stairs Upgrades 11.1>
Straight strings with fixed width: it is now possible to enter a fixed width for straight strings. If the setting under the "Design" tab for the course of the curve is on "straight", "part of the string, 1 sided", "part of the string, 2 sided" or "part of the string, adjusted" you have the following options under the "Dat" tab: "Horse-string measure", "Width from top", "Width from bottom" or "Width, average".
"Horse-string measure": the string width is determined by the distance from the top and bottom.
"Width from top:" here the horse-string measure at the top and the fixed width is entered. The bottom horse-string measure is then calculated automatically. However, if the width is too small the treads might project at the bottom edge of the string.
"Width from bottom:" here the horse-string measure at the bottom and the fixed width is entered. However, if the width is too small the treads might project at the top edge of the string.
"Width, average:" by entering the string width, the distance is evenly split between top and bottom. Auxiliary lines from the intersection points of the front edge and back edge of the treads are drawn. In the middle between the two, the so-called center line is created. At this center line, the entered width is split evenly. However, if the width is too small the treads might project at the bottom and top edge of the string.
Strings with fixed widths can thus be created. For users with fixed board width on stock their work becomes now a lot easier. <Highlight Film stairs Upgrades 11.1>
There are also new types of connections for posts: In the post data record under the "Con" tab new post connections on top and on bottom are available. For the "Connection, top" you can now define which fixed length the post will have, measured from the top level of the tread. The parameter from "Projection" is adopted as the length.
For the "Connection, bottom" you can define which fixed length the post will have, measured from the bottom level of the tread. Again, the parameter from "Projection" is adopted as the length.
If several treads enter one post, the top tread is used as reference for the top connection and the bottom tread for the bottom connection. <Highlight Film stairs Upgrades 11.1>
For cutouts of posts in treads: the notch created by posts in treads has been revised and manual post-editing has been reduced to a minimum.
The automatic placing of posts has also been revised: For stairs with a small well the posts are no longer placed on top of each other.
For single stair adaption, snapping intersections points has been improved.
Tenons are automatically cut. If the tenons for example of a string are created at a length that makes them project over the component edge, they are now cut automatically with component inclination. The board outline is thus no longer unnecessarily enlarged.
The bolt calculation for corner treads has been improved.
Cutting lists for optimized machine export: under "Extras" -> "Stairs output" -> "DXF export" of stairs components, after export there is now a so-called "Board list" (next to the laminating and board optimization) available. Here the lengths, width and thickness of the necessary boards and the number of boards are displayed. Thus you have the necessary data for gluing or cutting the boards.
Optimization across stairs: If there are several stairs in a ground plan they can now be optimized together for gluing or optimized 1:1 output or machine export. <Highlight Film Export to CNC Machines>
Machine export: It is now possible to use placeholder in the INI file that transfers data from the ML tab to the CAD/CAM system. Depending on which information from the component you want to transfer, you have to enter the corresponding placeholder in the INI file. You can take a look at the correct placeholder under "CAD text, 1-line" -> "@". If you click on "Component" you find the placeholder for the ML tab. Now copy the placeholder (CTRL+C) and insert it in the INI file (CTRL+V) and enter the ML tab information " and everything is transferred to the CAD/CAM system. If there is no information in the ML data, the name and the evaluation number (e.g. WA_1_1) are transferred. Since this information can not be used by every CAD/CAM system, a message will pop up if it is not the case.
Machine export: additional saw cuts for treads and riser
With the setting "TR_ZOOM_KONVEX = distance of the sawing line" in the INI file additional sawing lines can be exported. These sawing lines can be intersected on konvex corners with the "TR_SAWING_CUT" setting. Projections for the different corners can be assigned with with the "TR_SAWING" setting. The sawing lines are automatically lengthened to the board outline.
For the raw milling of konvex corners there is now an extra milling line available, which is where originally the contour lines was and can thus not be defined by entering a distance. <Highlight Film Export to CNC Machines>
Two half profiles for handrail wreaths: The profiling for the line-by-line processing can now be either created as one profile or as two half profiles.
Rail/Horse mitres as individual lines: The mitre cuts of (hand)rails can now be exported with two lines.
Drillings can now be "lengthened" by an entered value " something that is mostly needed when processing the handrail wreath.

Material List

Under the material list templates there is a new partial list called "Timber components".
The selections made in a partial list are now once again filtered correctly. (Ganter)
The member optimization after the "Description" field has been enabled. (France)

3D Representation, Visualization

The master data for the calculation of photorealistic representation has been extended. Under the second tab it is now possible to determine the size of the scene and the daylight calculation can be adapted to the size of the project:
Small: for buildings and terrains up to a size of approx. 20 m (fast calculation)
Medium: for buildings and terrains up to a size of approx. 50 m (normal calculation speed) " we recommend this setting for interior views
Large: for buildings and terrains of 50 m or more (time-intensive calculation).
For the best outcomes, particularly for large-scale projects embedded in a particular terrains, keep these settings in mind.

3D Objects

The representation of grouped objects, such as extrusion objects, which have been inscribed in components or boards, has been improved. (Regnauer, France)
The auto fastener feature has been revised. (STEICO)
In version 11.1 L profiles have been added to the master data for standard profiles. Under the image selection you find now not only rectangular, round and T profiles but also L profiles. They are further divided into isosceles and not isosceles L profiles. The cross-sections of these profiles have been created according to the latest DIN EN 10056-1. Both types of L steels create processing in members -> if you go to the corresponding processing tab, you will see a timber component in the screen image which is processed according to the settings. These settings are more or less the same as for I profiles, i.e. you determine the distance to the ribs of the profile and certain processing options. Processings can be at the front or the side of a component. You can for example create a ceiling beam whose front side rests on an L steel or the L steel reinforces a post.
The weight of the profiles has been adapted individually for every type of L steel, so that every profile can be transferred with its exact weight (kg/m) to the material list. <Highlight Film New Features for Steel Constructions>
In the same process, the master data for U steels, T steels and Z steels have been revised and for all of these profiles a "Processing" tab has been added. For T and U profiles you have the possibility to determine if the rib will be "right-angled" or "exact". Thus all steel profiles integrated into the master data create proceesings in timber components.
The Z position of 3D cuts is now treated correctly. (R"rig)
Drillings that create a NHT connector have been corrected. (Schw"er)

3D Wall Ceiling

Macros that contain CAD text on their guideline have created a run-time error " this has been corrected. (Gebr. Friedrichson GmbH)
The auto wall feature (F10) has got a new option: "Corner macros". Pre-defined corners can now be placed automatically at exterior or interior walls. The link in "Auto Wall" automatically refers to the master data of the auto corner feature. For that purpose, the master data (Walls/Ceiling/RC- Elements) has been supplemented by the "Auto Corner" group " where corners for exterior walls (EW), exterior wall T connections (EWT), interior walls (IW) and interior walls T connections (IWT)
can be filed and pre-defined. For exterior and interior walls, a main direction can be determined. This indication of the main direction then determines which wall is "Wall 1" according to the current logic. If you for example enter a value of 0.0" for the main direction, so all horizontal walls are "Wall 1". If you enter a value of 90" all vertical walls are "Wall 1". For the angle area you can enter an angle "from:" " "up to:" in the dialogue box (for exterior walls from 0.01" up to maximum 360" and for interior walls from 0.01" up to maximum 180"). For each tab up to nine angle areas can be pre-defined. Once angle areas have been pre-defined they can be accessed via a link in the master data of the pre-defined corner macros and a corresponding corner macro can be allocated to every angle area. Thus it becomes for example possible to differentiate between 45", 90" and 270" corners and assign the suitable corner macro to each angle area. It is possible to differentiate between exterior walls and interior walls already when constructing the walls. For exterior walls a distinction is made between interior corners (e.g. 270") and exterior corners (90"). To be able to differentiate between interior and exterior corners, the walls have to be closed polylines.
All corners with more than 180" are called interior corners and all with less than 180" exterior corners. For exterior walls it does not matter from which side you look at the wall. For interior walls, however, the side you look at the wall is necessary to determine the angle. The program differentiates here between view side and counter side. The angles for interior wall corner connections are measured from the view side of the main direction wall. The angles for all T wall connections are measured from the view side of the "stud" wall. In contrast to the manual placing of corners, for the automatic placing walls need to have a logical wall connection.
If all angle areas are covered and the corresponding corners have been filed, the corner macros are automatically inserted if the "Corner macro" box under "Auto Wall" (F10) has been ticked and the process is started with "Start".
As part of it, the new "Corners automatically" command has been added under programm selection -> "3D Wall" -> "Insert corners". When you select this command, the pre-defined master data of auto corner opens and you have to mark the required walls and confirm with "OK" " and the pre-defined corners are inserted automatically. <Highlight Film Automatic Wall Corner Design>
Coverings applied on a ceiling shape now react correctly when the height of the storey is changed. (Lerch)
For walls there is now also the possibility to change the width, height and line of sight under wall view -> "Change" -> "Component". It is also possible to change the layer structure under the "L" tab. Overall, this means you can make the same changes in wall view as you can make in top view.
For version 11.1 a new type of division "From opening" has been programmed. With this new type of division, the program always tries to use entire boards from an opening (e.g. window, door) to the start or end of a wall. The reason for this is that openings in gable walls are usually more in the middle of the wall to avoid skew cuts on windows and doors. And with this new option in which the first board is applied left or right from an opening, the chances of being able to use a standard boards without any further processing is much higher. (DFH) <Highlight Film New Type of Division: "From Opening">
The automatic notching out for purlins in walls under the setting: "Automatic notches in wall" in the pre-setting (ALT+F7) -> "Walls/Outlines" -> "Others" has been revised and improved. (D&Z Holzbau)

Walls and Ceilings (Members)

The menu of wall members has a new creation command: "Element with component reference". With this command it is possible to e.g. place posts with one click truly axially under existing members such as ceiling beams or purlins. As with the normal placing of elements, you have all the timber framing master data available for this.
You first of all have to select the required wall or reference line. Then you can click one component after the other. With the automatic command repetition the command does not stop after placing one element. You have also the possibility to determine several reference components with the marking box or the marking bar. Thus you can very quickly and comfortably place e.g. structural studs truly axially under ceiling beams. (DFH) <Highlight Film New Command: Element with Component Reference>
The auto dimensioning of the "Auto wall" function has been revised. The calculation of timber members is now started correctly. The clipping area of the vertical section in wall view has been revised (Br"inghoff). The "Auto wall" function has been revised in some small detail " the calculation of macros is now started correctly. (Wigo)

Release History V11.0 Build 5400

General Points

The calculation of 3D end types - with the background calculation switched off - has been optimised. (Gumpp, Dittus, Renggli)
The maximum capacity of the drawing buffer has been increased. (Steico)
The new name and logo of the version V11.0 SEMA EXPERIENCE 25 YEARS have been integrated into all parts of the program.
The magnifier feature of the mouse wheel can now be used when the following functions are active: "Magnifier", "Shift drawing (pan)" and "Turn building".
A "Full screen" mode has been added to the menu bar under "View" " with this new option, the "full screen" mode can now also be used when not in the "Roaming building" mode. This full screen mode is particularly useful for presenting the building projects.
In version 11.0 the right-click options have been extended. However, the selected components box is still called up via the right mouse button. And if you make a right-click in the snatch area of several components, these components appear in the selected components box where you can select the required components one after the other in the usual manner with the pressed-down CTRL key. For better overview, this selected components box has now a scroll bar if more than five components have been selected.
What"s new about the right click is that it gives you access to editing commands. If you right-click one or several marked components another box with the available editing commands will appear above the selected components box. These commands are displayed as icons as well as in text form. To give you a better idea of which commands are available for the selected component(s), only the commands that can be used for the selected component are listed, all others are not shown.
If you right-click a component without marking it previously this component becomes automatically marked, i.e. to edit a component it is no longer necessary to mark it beforehand. If you right-click several components in the snatch area without marking any previously, the first component in the snatch area becomes automatically marked and can be edited.
When right-clicking on the empty drawing area, commands that are available without marked component, e.g. insert macro or grid check, are listed.
Above the box with editing commands there is also a so-called miniature icon bar in which the editing commands are only shown as little icons. Depending on whether a command is available for a component or not, the icon is active or inactive.
Once you are familiar with the icons, you can switch off the text box with the editing commands and only work with the miniature icon bar. Under Alt F7 -> "General points" -> "Operations" you can untick the "Show editing commands in right-click menu" options.
The right-click options will be particularly helpful to new users of the program and it makes working with the program faster and more intuitively.
The miniature icon bar can also be used with the left mouse button. To activate this left mouse button use, go to Alt F7 -> "General points" -> "Operations" and activate the "Show miniature icon bar" option. After having marked a component (with the left mouse button) move the mouse pointer diagonally to the top right and the miniature icon bar will appear and the editing command become available. <Highlight Film User-Friendly Right Mouse Button>
In version 11.0 components can be "filled" in 2D. In the standard bar you find now the new "Show components in 2D filled" button. When clicking this button, all components are automatically filled with their lightened outlined colour. The outline colour of components is individually determined in the general colour settings. The colour setting options for members, walls etc. all have a new field for the filling and for the hatch style where global fillings or hatch styles can be defined. By default, the filling field for members is empty, but if the "Show components in 2D filled" option has been activated, the filling is generated automatically.
In the "filled" representation the entire project is much clearer already at the first glance. Individual components can be much better seen than before. Again, this makes it easier to find, mark and edit components particularly for new users of the program. Because the filling colour is lightened and transparent, end types and processings can still be seen very clearly. Also hatched areas such as front faces, walls, ceilings etc. are filled transparently and this combination creates very nice and clear detail images. The same goes for profile drawings, e.g. dormer, normal profiles, pitched-roof profiles, which become much clearer as well.
The "Show components in 2D filled" is automatically integrated into the standard bar. In addition to that it is also available under the "Adaption" menu -> "Commands" -> "View" as well as under F7 -> "Images + 3D" -> "Representation" where it can be activated or deactivated. Via this button you also determine if you want to fill components in a drawing for print-out. If you never want to print out filled components you can make the necessary setting under Alt F7 -> "General Points"-> "Look" -> "other options" and determine that the print-out is as set under F7 or that the fillings are not printed. <Highlight Film Adding Fillings to Components and Members>
The "Look" tab of almost all components has been extended and you can now individually determine the outline, the filling and hatch style of the different types of components. This enables you e.g. to display certain members of a joist system like raising pieces, closing boards or fillers with a different outline colour and filling which makes your drawings so much clearer. In the same way it is also possible to indicate glulam purlins in top view by a special colour or hatch style.
Here a short description of the new options at the example of a purlin:
Under the visualisation and inscriptions settings you find the setting options for component outlines. "Global: yes" means that the look of the purlin is adopted from the general colour settings and the following settings for the outline are deactivated. With "Global: no" however these settings do apply for the purlin. Under these settings you can define the outline colour, the line thickness and the line style. Below that are fields for the filling/filling patterns in top view and for sectional representation. If there is no setting for any of these fields, the settings from the general colour settings apply.
To individually define these fields a new master data record for "Filling"s has been programmed that looks as follows: First of all the options are between "empty", "fully filled" or "hatched" areas. If the option is set on "empty" the component does not receive any filling and all other entries are blocked. If the option is set on "fully filled" the fields for the background definition become active. Under the "Transparent" setting ("yes/no") the normal colour selection is available. Apart from the possibility to mix your own colours also certain options for colour definition are offered: "no colour" means the component is not filled. "Colour as outline" means that the filling will have the same colour as the outline. "Colour as lightened outline" means that automatically the lightened outline colour is used. If the option is set on "hatched" the fields for the hatch style definition become active. First you select the hatch style and the hatch size can either be set on "zoom" or "constant". Then you determine the size factor and the angle and finally the colour. In version 11.0 it is also possible to create a hatch with a background colour (see above the settings for "fully filled"). In the master data there are also some filling and hatch examples to give you a better idea of what it can look like.
Improvements of photorealistic representation:
The calculations for natural daylight as well as the subsequent image calculation have been made much faster. These calculations are now carried out on a "multi thread" basis and thus better use the potential of modern dual- or quad-core computers much better. On a quad-core computer for example, these calculations now require only approx. 16% of the normal time.

Icon Bars/Palettes

The design, look and handling of the program, especially of the icon bars, has been changed and enhanced for version 11.0. There are now
- new possibilities to display icons and buttons;
- command palettes and master data containers;
- new possibilities to arrange the elements of the program;
- more possibilities for user-defined buttons and
- the possibility to access editing commands via icons.
New possibilities to display icons and buttons
- Via "Adapt" under "Icon bars" you can adapt the representation of icons and buttons individually for every icon bar. Select the icon bar you want to adapt on the left side of the adapt menu and then the following new settings are available:
  - "Standard/minimum" -> without button text, only icon. You have the possibility to make the button text visible and display it on the right side of the symbol.
  Icon size: minimum (16*16) " the current setting.
  - "Text right/minimum" -> visible button text, on the right side of the symbol.
  Icon size: minimum (16*16).
  - "Text bottom/minimum" -> visible button text, below the symbol.
  Icon size: minimum (16*16).
  - "Text bottom/small" -> visible button text, below the symbol.
  Icon size: small (depends on button text *43). This text is mainly used for user-designed buttons (for more details see: User-designed buttons).
  - "Fixed width" -> With this setting it is possible to give the button and text the same width so that they can be arranged one below the other. In addition to that, the width can also be continuously adjusted with the slide control.
- The button size for "Standard/minimum" and "Text right/minimum" can additionally be enlarged to 24*24 in the "Adapt" menu under the "Options" tab -> "Large buttons". We recommend that setting for large screens with high screen resolutions.
- Buttons that are dragged from one icon bar to another take on the display settings of the target icon bar.
- You can copy buttons from existing icon bars into other icon bars with the CTRL key. If you do not release the CTRL key on another icon bar, the button also remains in the original icon bar, i.e. you have two buttons.
- New buttons that are supplied by SEMA, e.g. "Terrain on/off", are automatically inserted right after the "Ground plan on/off" button in the "Display options F7". For new buttons that are automatically integrated by SEMA we always try to find the best possible position for this button. If, however, this is not possible the new button will be inserted at the end of the icon bar.
Introduction of command palettes and master data containers. New possibilities to arrange the elements of the program.
- In version 11.0 the icon bars have been extended by so-called "Palettes" " there are generally two types of palettes: command palettes and master data containers. Palettes offer quite more functionalities than normal icon bars. Palettes can be attached to all four sides of the screen (docked) or they can "float", i.e. not fixed to any side. Fixed palettes can either be "docked " open" or "docked " automatically hidden". For "docked " automatically hidden" there is a symbol that opens the palette when you move with the mouse over it.
- Command palettes and master data containers can be created and changed under the new "Palette" tab in the "Adapt" menu.
- Command palettes are areas that can "take in" buttons. You can make the same settings for command palettes as for icon bars (see also New possibilities to display icons and buttons).
- Master data containers are areas in which selection options for SEMA macros, 3D objects and 3D processings can be arranged on the screen in the same way as described for palettes. It is possible to have several master data containers and for the containers almost all settings as in master data administration and for creation commands are available (see also Master Data/Macros).
- The following pre-defined palettes are available:
  - Program selection -> here, all creation commands are listed.
  - Editing commands -> here, all editing commands are listed.
  - Input area -> here, all marking options, input forms and options as well as visibility selections are listed.
  - CAD DIM MCAD 3CAD -> here, the program parts CAD, DIM, MCAD and 3CAD and the layer selection are listed.
  - Master data container -> here, a standard container is supplied.
  These five palettes are the basic palettes of the SEMA program and their contents cannot be changed, nor can they be deleted.
- Further setting options for palettes:
  We recommend creating a backup file of the existing compilation before you make any changes!
  - With a right-click on the top menu area, the palettes are listed below the icon bars and can be switched on or off here, or alternatively, they can be switched on/off in the "Adapt" menu.
  - With the "Fix" option palettes can also be "locked" in their current position. If palettes have been fixed in such a way they can not be removed from the side the screen and float or vice versa.
  - By opening the "Adapt" menu this fixing is automatically cancelled until it is closed again, i.e. with the open "Adapt" menu palettes can be arranged freely. Before you can relocate or edit a "docked " automatically hidden" palette you first have to change it into a "docked " opened" palette via the "pin" in the title field of the window.
  - Docked and floating palettes can be nested, into each other, next to each other and as tab.
  - When you create a new palette it is by default floating. If you then grab it in the title field at the top you can shift it around and also fix it to the side of the screen. If you move the palette with the mouse to the side of the screen you can see a transparent area as preview. This also works for nesting palettes.
  - Under the "Adapt" menu "docked" palettes can be automatically undocked by clicking "floating" and then be moved to the top left of the screen.
  - If you transfer icon bars/palettes from one computer to another computer with different screen resolution, the standard floating icon bars (e.g. "3D view") are displayed where they were on the original computer (depending on the screen resolution). To get them back to the SEMA standard location you have to execute the "Align tool bars" option under "Adapt" -> "Options".
  In the same place ("Adapt" -> "Options") you can set under the "Colour scheme" of the program layout in which colour you want display the relocated icon bars/palettes, the options here are: system, blue, green and silver.
- Depending on how they are arranged, the width and height of palettes can be manipulated. After a certain size, scroll bars are automatically included.
- Special functions of the five basic palettes (also see above):
  To keep the basic layout and look, the five basic palettes have been programmed in such a way that it is not possible to insert further palettes between them and it is also not possible to shift them around (except the master data containers). However, since computer screens become bigger and bigger and with always higher resolution, users might want to integrate for example their own command palette below the box with the editing commands, or to move a palette from the right side of the screen to the left side. For such changes the following settings in the "Adapt" menu are available:
  - If you select one of the five basic palettes you can activate the "Show title bar" option for this palette which allows you then to insert your own palette below this selected one. In addition to that the palette can be grabbed with the mouse and moved around.
  But, be careful: If you move a palette away from the right side of the screen you can only add it again to the right side if the title bar has been activated in the target palette. And to keep the basic palettes safely in place, we recommend deactivating the title bars afterwards.
  - In the "Adapt" menu -> "Options" -> "Palette adjustment area" it is determined which area is adjusted when the size of the program window is changed. If the adjustment area for the right side is for example set on "End" and then the program window is made smaller, the end area of the last palette at the bottom (i.e. the palette of the editing commands) is pushed together. The CAD DIM MCAD 3CAD palette is not pushed together because it belongs to the bottom screen side.
Extension of the user-defined buttons
- As of version 10.4 it has been possible to define certain commands as so-called "User buttons" via "View" -> "Icon bars" -> "Define commands" (see also the highlight film on the SEMA website under "Highlights" -> "General" -> "User Buttons"). With version 11.0 these user-defined buttons have been further enhanced:
  - "Start applications or documents" " with this new function you can define the start of an application program or the opening of documents as a user button and you can even combine the two settings and start an application with a document. If you only indicate a document, the relevant application (as set in the operating system for the file type) is started.
  - The allocation of symbols has been further enhanced. As already mentioned under "New possibilities to display icons and buttons" there are two basic sizes of images: minimum size (16*16) and small size (43*43). Now you can allocate for each of the two images sizes the symbol (image) from preview, from a file or from the SEMA symbol list. If you create a user button for a command for which there is a preview image in the SEMA program, the program automatically suggests the symbol (image). Also, when you create a user button from an editing command the icon is automatically suggested.
Accessing editing command via icons
- All editing commands have been programmed as buttons in the "Adapt" menu under "Commands" -> "Editing_commands".
  In addition to that, our design and development teams created a meaningful icon for each of these editing commands. Each of these editing commands can be placed in the usual manner in icon bars and command palettes.

Terrain Modelling (New Module)

The terrain modelling feature for fast and simple input of complex "landscapes" is certainly one of the highlights of the new version 11.0. With this new module you can show your customers in advance what their future home will look like in the natural environment. The possibilities are almost limitless and streams, hills, ponds, fields and roads for example, can be comfortably created with the new terrain modelling. Buildings located on a slope can also be modelled and perfectly adapted to the terrain.
You find the new module "Terrain" in the program selection menu right below "Ground plan". Landscapes can be created with the creation commands "Terrain, rectangle" and "Terrain, free form".
In the master data many different settings can be made:
- Basic height: Here you can determine the height of the terrain and all relevant base points, even before starting to create the terrain.
- Height: Here you determine if the height is relative or absolute. "Absolute" means that the entered basic height always refers to the level at which the terrain is created. "Relative" means that the entered basic height refers to the terrain below.
- Slope: Here you have three options: "none", "punch" or you can enter a width. If you select "none" the terrain does not include slopes. With "punch" you can model building pits or holes directly into the terrain. By entering a width, a slope in the terrain is defined. You don"t have to take the slope into account when constructing the terrain because it is created automatically and can, of course, be adapted later on.
Via the "Look" tab you can allocate specific different textures to different parts of the terrain. In addition to that you can change the line thickness, line style etc. in 2D.
When creating a terrain, a so-called "terrain base point" is created at every corner point. These points can be subsequently shifted in 2D and 3D with the "Position" command. For the position command a new additional option has been introduced with which it is possible to change the height of individual or several terrain base points or to take the height of any reference point and transfer it to the input box.
If you "cut" a terrain edge via the "Abut" command -> "To length" a new terrain base point is automatically created at the abutting point " which can then be edited as described above. Furthermore, terrain edges can be subsequently shifted in 2D with the "Position" command. An existing terrain can be edited and modelled with the "Add" and "Punch" commands as well as with the additional options "Box", "Free form" and "Object". Terrains can also be edited with the "Copy", "Mirror" and "Position" editing commands.
With the "Calculate" command marked terrains are calculated anew.
If two terrains intersect, one terrain can be moved in the foreground or background with the "Others" command. If several terrains intersect/overlap it is also possible to move one terrain via the "Others" command one layer to the front or back. This then also influences the priority with which the terrains are drawn in 2D or 3D.
Terrains can also be edited via control points in the curve mode ("Mark object details") to round edges for example. Generally, the handling of terrains is similar to the handling of CAD polygons.
Individual terrains or several terrains together can be filed as macros and then used again in other building projects. Different terrain macros such as ponds or roads have already been filed as macros in the SEMA master data and can be integrated as macro in any terrain. Under the master data there are also a number of terrains with different textures filed, e.g. lawn, water, gravel or humus, and can be used for modelling.
The display settings (F7) have been extended to include "Terrain" settings as well. Apart from the normal layer switch, the terrain base points can also be given the required height and named with an abbreviation. Under "Representation" you can switch "Base points", "Slope in 2D", "Terrain edge in 3D" and "Terrain net in wire-frame model" visible or invisible.
The "General settings" (Alt+F7) also have been extended to include "Terrain". Under "General points" the "Sound" tab has been added. Here you can integrate a background melody by path or file entry. You have the choice to either hear the melody when roaming through the project (F8) or also have it play when in textured representation. To be able to activate this option, at least one terrain has to exist for the building project. The 3D floating menu also has a new button with which the melody can be switched on or off.
Under the "General settings" (Alt+F7) the "Resolution of terrain free forms" can be set ("General settings" -> "Look" -> "Resolution of extrusion and rotation objects" -> "more" -> "Terrain".)
In the roaming mode (F8) there is an additional option for terrains: "Take terrain into account when roaming (Alt+3)". When you activate this option, the program automatically recognizes hills or slopes and follows the topography accordingly. <Highlight Film 3D Terrain Modelling>

Master Data Macros

When a group is re-named, the help images also change accordingly.
When the data input area is enlarged, the tab width follows suit, i.e. the displayed list width becomes wider.
In stairs construction the textured representation is used to represent "symbols" (thumbnails).
The "hint" text for the weight of components now also shows the weight parameters. (Regnauer)
When fetching ("picking") data from the master data, the first four characters of the master data name as checked as well.
The master data administration as well as the selection menus for the creation and editing commands have been enhanced in look and handling for version 11.0:
Master data menu
- The size of the master data administration window can now be changed with the mouse. And also the area of the group selection (tree) can be changed in size.
- The layout of the master data menu for creation commands has also been enhanced.
- The areas for screen images and data can now be minimized or maximized with the new "double arrow" button. In the button bar of screen images, always the last used buttons are displayed. Buttons that are never used disappear over time in the pull-down menu.
- The size of the areas for "Object selection", "Screen images", "Data" and "Group selection" (tree) can be changed. In the same way, the overall width/height of the master data menu can be changed. Via a right-click into the object selection with the mouse the following settings can be changed:
  - "Master data menu view" -> Here you show/hide the information bar, the screen-image area and the data input.
  - "Symbols" -> Via "Update group" the symbols (thumbnails) for the entire group can be created.
  With the settings under "Screen image 1 up to help image (if exists)" you can predefine from where the symbol will come from. The setting can be made for each individual master data separately. If you want to use it for several master data together, they have to be marked accordingly beforehand.
  - "Options" -> "Close group selection automatically" -> If this option has been activated it means the group selections (tree) closes automatically when you click the "OK" button. If it is not activated, the group selection (tree) it remains how it has been set via the "Open/close overview" option. (Regnauer)
  - Options" -> "Permit variable position and size of the master data menu" -> If this option is switched off, the master data menu whose width or position has been changed before is reset to the standard width when opened again and the position is moved back to the right. The height of the master data menu, however, remains unchanged.
  With this option switched on the master data menu "keeps" the changes in width and position. These settings also apply to the editing commands, e.g. "Modify", of the master data menu.
  - "Options" -> "Restore SEMA standard for the master data menu (layout)" -> With this option all changes of the position, size and visible elements of the master data menu (layout) are reset.
  - "Options" -> "Restore SEMA standard for the object selection view (symbols/list)" -> With this option all settings of the object selection view (type of view, symbols, symbol size, list display etc.) which might have been changed for individual master data types are reset to the SEMA standard.
The following extensions have been programmed for "Object selection view"
- For the settings of the "Object selection view" a new "quick change" buttons has been introduced with which the different settings can be clicked through like in the Windows Explorer.
  Up to now it was possible to switch between "List" and "Thumbnail" under "View" but now there are more options: "Extra large icons", "Medium-sized icons", "Small icons", "Tiles" and "Details". Furthermore, it is possible to change the size of the icons variably with the slide control or the up/down arrows. For the master data containers this is only possible with the up/down arrows due to technical reasons.
- "Icons with name" -> The icons can also be displayed without the master data name, however, only for the creation commands.
- Under the "Object selection view" there are also two possibilities how to save them:
  - "Across-type settings" -> If this option is active, a change of the type of view applies to all master data types (type) where this option has been activated.
  - "Type-specific settings" -> If this option is active, a change of the type of view applies only to the master data type (type) currently selected.
  Clarification: A master data type (type) is a (main) system branch in the tree (on the left side in the master data administration). E.g. under the "Rafter system" -> "Rafters", "Trimmers/filling posts", "Elements" etc. are master data types.
- The settings of the "Object selection view" and the "Master data menu" are saved separately for the master data administration, the creation commands and for each master data container.
For screen images and help images the following extensions have been programmed:
- The contents of each tab can be saved in the clipboard with a right-click onto the image and the "Copy to clipboard" command. Depending from which tab the contents are copied, the data might be saved in several formats in the clipboard. Normal line drawings are copied to the Windows clipboard and additionally as real CAD macro to the SEMA clipboard. Textured representations are copied to the Windows clipboard as well as to the SEMA clipboard.
- The possibilities to insert contents into a help image tab have been extended (some of these possibilities have already been available in the previous versions, but for the sake of completeness they are mentioned here again):
  - "Load from file" -> Here you can insert existing image files or animated GIF files.
  - "Last CAD macro from SEMA clipboard" -> Here, the last copied CAD macro is inserted. Thus you can copy CAD macros from the SEMA main program to the clipboard and then insert them via this option as a separate help image.
  - "From Windows clipboard" -> Here you insert the current contents of the Windows clipboard, independent from which program the content comes - it can be a piece of text from the text processing application or a screen shot for example.
- You can insert contents from the clipboard as "Image for current object" or as a "Group image" (for all objects without their own image).
- Also new are the help image properties " under the "Properties" information about the help image (file) is to be found, e.g. file type, file size, file name etc.
- The contents of the clipboard can be inserted into the SEMA main program or into another program (e.g. Paint, Word etc.) with CTRL + V.

Rafter System

The calculation speed of projects with many steel components has been substantially improved. (France and others)
In version 11.0 the editing command "Cut 2x" is introduced for 3D and all views (vertical section, horizontal section, north elevation etc.). To allow users to use the command in 3D in the same way as in top view, the 2D command has also been revised. When using the "Cut 2x" command now, you have to indicate in the input box the two areas or edges along which the component is to be cut. The selected area or edge is indicated by a special mouse pointer symbol. After clicking onto the area (i.e. confirming it), the cut component is immediately displayed. Then the user has to decide if he wants to cut the component acutely or obtusely. The input line for the end type or cutting angle is not necessary in 3D "because by determining the cut, the cutting angles are clearly defined. Thus, component intersections become possible in 3D that were not possible with "Cut 2x" in 2D top view. For "Cut 2x" in 3D there is also the possibility to define the cutting areas by clicking three points. The area snap with "Cut 2x" also allows users to cut a component against surface areas of different components which is normally not possible when bevelling. But now it is possible for example to cut a tie beam against a purlin with a double cut and at the same time against the rafter above. <Highlight Film Cut 2x and Abut in 3D>
Furthermore, also the editing command "Abut" with its additional options "To length" and "Connect" has been made available for 3D. The length (input box) can either be entered manually or by a mouse click on a reference point -> by clicking with the right mouse button a reference point is determined from which the new length input is calculated. The suggested end type can then be either adopted or another end type can be taken from the master data. Helpful in this context are the options to transfer the end type via "Copy" or via the quick selection option (small arrow at the master data button).
The "Connect" option can be used exactly the same way as in 2D top view. <Highlight Film Cut 2x and Abut in 3D>
In version 11.0 it is for the first time possible to freely enter timber components in 3D. A reference to a roof area, a wall or a ceiling is no longer necessary. For this new option you find a new command under the 3CAD menu: "Timber component". Basis for the timber component option is the timber member from "Timber Framing". If you click the "Timber Component" command, the appropriate master data stock will open and give you access to all existing wall and ceiling members. In addition to that, it is also possible to file your preferred "3D Members" in the master data. Unnecessary input fields in the master data become inactive. Since the definition of the timber component depends on the module, the input fields under the ML tab are most important. Apart from the designation, the allocation target for the transfer is very important; it determines the position of the timber member in the material list or single member. As allocation target all possible members (e.g. rafters, purlins, ceiling members etc.) can be selected. The timber component thus becomes part of the normal list of selected members. The storey allocation in the material list is automatically determined. The timber component is always transferred to the storey it was created in (e.g. attic storey, joist system etc.). Affiliation to a wall or roof element for example is automatically achieved if the timber component is created in 3D in wall view or roof element view.
You can enter a timber component either in 2D or in 3D. To create the timber component, two input options are available. In the first input option the component is determined by two points. First of all, a reference area has to be selected. Then the starting point and end point of the timber component are determined. Now the distance and the position of the component are entered and complete the input. With the second input option, the timber component is determined by entering a starting point, an angle and a length. The other input fields (distance, position) are the same as for the first input option. To enter a timber component, several additional options buttons are available. With these additional options you can turn the component by 90" (Alt+1), place the reference point on the X-, Y- or Z-axis (Alt+7) and also rotate the component around the X-axis. A colour coordinate system at the component makes your entries easier.
For the 3CAD timber component, there are editing commands in 2D as well as in 3D available: "Cut", "Abut", "Copy", "Position", "Delete", "Modify", "End type", "Macro" and "Texture 3D". Furthermore, F7 settings for the labelling and representation of the 3CAD timber component are available (F7 -> "3CAD" -> "Timber Component"). <Highlight Film 3D Component Input>
The 3D editing option "Cut" has also been revised. Particularly, very flat cuts and cuts at the beginning or end of a component have been improved; so that you can now create an inclination at horizontal members with a flat cut.
Furthermore, extensive improvements and corrections for bird"s mouths and component intersections have been programmed. (Hauser, Hilzinger, Holzelan, B"i, Italy, France)
Closing boards with the end type "Penetration" and a "Penetration depth: 0" now create a bird"s mouth instead of a scarf joint on ridge and valley rafters. (R"rig)

Stairs

Saving back connecting railings now also works via the gripper of the connecting railing.
The machine export of drillings created by 3D objects has been revised. (EBS)
The DXF export of processings that are created by fasteners/brackets has been revised. (EBS)
The possibility to change the number of bundles in the data record of connecting railings has been improved. (EBS)
New possibilities to enter flight elements: When creating a "straight flight element, bottom/last step" and "straight flight element, free" there are now two new additional option buttons in the input box. With this new feature you can create "flared" staircases in a very simple and straight-forward way. Depending on which option you choose, the flight element will open or close. Furthermore, it is possible to create flight elements with a different radius on the inside and outside of the staircase. What used to take quite a long time can now be created with just a few clicks of the mouse. <Highlight Film New Possibilities to Enter Flight Elements>
The CSG representation has also been improved in a number of points.
Stair Railing Designer: In the data record for posts and palings there is now a new tab for connection points "CP". Here, the connection points to handrails, booms, bundles, horses, strings, risers and treads are listed. For every connection point, a connecting object can be created. Lateral, vertical and horizontal connections are available.
Lateral connection: Here you can create so-called cross-bar supports, where you have input options for a partial object of the bar (post/paling) and a partial object of the board (handrail, bundle, boom, horse, tread, riser). For both partial objects there are input fields for length, diameter and inscriptions. If an inscription has been allocated, the ML tab of inscriptions is valid, otherwise the ML tab "CP" is used.
Vertical connection: Here you can create so-called railing supports and handrail supports. And again, two partial objects with length, diameter and inscription are available. At every partial object a projection at the beginning and the end can be determined. Additionally, also a hinged joint can be defined. If a hinged joint is used, the partial object follows the board component. If an inscription has been allocated, the ML tab of inscriptions is valid, otherwise the ML tab "CP" is used.
Horizontal + vertical connection: Here you can create e.g. variable handrail support. A vertical, a horizontal and a partial object for a board component (handrail, boom) are available. For these three partial objects there is a length, diameter and inscription input. Additionally, also a hinged joint can be defined. If a hinged joint is used, the partial object follows the board component. If an inscription has been allocated, the ML tab of inscriptions is valid, otherwise the ML tab "CP" is used.
With this new feature complex railings can be pre-defined and connection points can be accurately reproduced by 3D objects. There is a separate material list tab available for connection points or 3D objects that enable perfect material evaluation. If 3D objects are inscribed with processings, also drillings and cut-outs will be created in the component. This new feature greatly enhances the "Stairs Construction" module visually and technically and its material evaluation option further complements this improvement. <Highlight Film New Stair Railing Designer>
Concrete measurements: If you change the measurements of an existing concrete staircase, the tread front edges to not overlap anymore. If you start at the last step, the concrete "core" follows accordingly and can be calculated much better now. With "Calculate measurements" you can select the required type of calculation and then start calculation with "OK".
Abutting boards: If different boards are marked they can now be edited together with the "Abut" command.
Improved calculation speed: If inscriptions are allocated to stairs components, the calculations for it are much faster now.

Material List

For entering material list or single member numbers manually, 6 digits are now available. (Dittus)
For the "Excel export with template" the number of pieces for the individual items of the member optimization list is correctly transferred. (P"hhacker)
When creating calculation lists, all settings are again shown completely in the "Partial list properties".
When carrying out an "Excel export with template" the formatting of numbers is executed as set under the regional and country settings. (Str"y)

Single Member

Components with different parameters are now listed separately under 'Dovetail'. (Barel)

3D Wall Ceiling

For the master data of windows and doors under the "Layer Recess" tab there is a new field: "Coverings". With this function it is possible to explicitly define a separate type of covering for every window and for every door; i.e. it is possible to apply different coverings for windows and doors in one wall. The following types of coverings are available: "flowaround", "separating" and "none". If the covering is set on "auto" the window/door automatically gets the same type of covering as the wall. In addition to that it is also possible to apply a condition for the selected type of covering. The set type of covering for the window/door is then only applied when this condition is fulfilled. So the set type of covering for windows is e.g. only applied if the window is either smaller or bigger than the set value.
The weight of windows and doors is now also correctly evaluated if the weight calculation is based on m". (Renggli)
In certain constellation it was possible that the centre of gravity was indicated outside the wall outline " this has been corrected. (Renggli, Frey)
For walls with two wall edges (top and bottom boom) and different heights, the wall members are now correctly exported into the WUP file (PHP export). (Regnauer)

Coverings 3D Wall Ceiling

Sectional views of boards are once again represented correctly, independent of the "Transparent areas" setting. (Frankenhauser)

Release History V10.5 Build 5200

General Points

The placeholder for the "Single Member number" is now also included in the PDF drawing output, if it has been set accordingly in the pre-settings. (Dittus)
In the Drawing Administration it is once again possible to confirm all the values with "Enter" under the "Change storey" command. (France)
The visualized representation has been revised and improved fundamentally for area representation, area representation with edges (black/white) and textured representation.
The zoom functions (turn, magnifier, shift, roam".) were made much faster, so that it is now, for example, possible to quickly and smoothly turn even large 3D projects.
The visualization problems with ATI graphic cards have been solved, as have been the problems with the Windows Vista operating system. Using the "Windows Aero" colour scheme with the SEMA programs is now possible without any problems.
To switch from one window to another window (with several windows open) has also become faster.

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

Moving several CAD components to the foreground. Via the "Others" command it is now possible to move several CAD components at the same time to the foreground or the background.
Updating of MCAD macros and normal macros. After the length of a wall has been changed via "cut/lengthen" or after intersecting corners, the MCAD macro is now correctly updated. (Wigo)
Dimensioning according to DIN standard. The auto dimensioning feature for walls in top view has been revised to that it now dimensions according to DIN standard. <Highlight Film Associative Dimensioning>
Associative dimensioning: dimension lines created by the auto dimensioning feature can now be re-calculated associatively (F5) in top view by marking these dimension lines. Dimension points that were created subsequently are no longer abandoned for this re-calculation. In addition to that, the master data of dimension lines has been extended, so that it is now possible to "tell" the dimension line which components it refers to. This lets you actually auto dimension CAD objects (circles, boxes or polygons), wall thicknesses, timber members, macros and coverings. And also interior walls and indentations in top view are taken into account and automatically dimensioned.
There is also a new command called "Area dimensioning" " with this command you can assign a certain area to every dimension line. If a component or CAD object "touches" this area, the component/CAD object is also dimensioned on the dimension line. Furthermore, the "Point-of-intersection dimensioning" command has been extended so that it is possible to delete already created points of intersection and created new ones.
The display options (F7) -> "3D Walls/Windows" and "3D Doors" also have a new option: "Transfer height to dimension line" which means that you can now display the height of windows and doors in top view as well as in wall view. <Highlight Film Associative Dimensioning>
Radian measure: a new option has been added to the "Cross-section dimensioning" command, the so-called "Radian measure". With this option you can quickly and easily dimension arcs of circles. <Highlight Film Associative Dimensioning>
The component selection for CAD objects when working with editing commands has been improved. (Hilzinger, Lottermoser, Haindl, Blum)
The "Re-mark last marked object" option under the visibility button has been revised. (Hilzinger)

Profile

The marking of dimension lines especially in profile drawings has been revised. (Rieping)

Coverings, 3D Wall Ceiling

When you import a wall with height offset via the XML interface, the complete wall is now "lifted" by this offset dimension. This also means that subsequently entered parapet heights of windows/doors/macros refer to this offset height and no longer to the storey height. The height dimensions of windows/doors/macros, however, do not change when the XML file is imported. (Adlerhaus)
The "layer outline" switch under F7 -> "Wall shapes / wall layers" has a new option: "Outline, visible layers" " with this option it is possible to only display active layers as outlines in ground plan and 3D.

Material List

In the material list, a new export option to Excel has been created ("Microsoft Excel with template").
With this option it is possible to transfer several partial list individually, but at the same time, to Microsoft Excel. In the Excel template you can make certain settings for "Spreadsheets" and "Areas" which are then addressed via the material list. This means you can use all Excel functionalities in the template and then just add the data from the SEMA material list.
Under Alt + F7 -> "Lists/Single Member" -> "Excel" tab you can determine the Excel file you want to use as template, and you can also set where you want to save the target file as well as the name of the export file.
You find further setting options for this export under the "Partial list properties" -> "General" tap -> "Excel export with template":
"Export this partial list to Excel" " here you determine if you want the partial lists to be included in the export or not.
"In spreadsheet" " here you can access an already existing spreadsheet in Excel, i.e. the transferred data of the material list are exported into this spreadsheet. If this spreadsheet does not exist under Excel, it is automatically created.
"From cell/area" " here you determine the cell (e.g. A1) as of which the data is entered (depending on the insertion mode). In the same way, you can also select areas which were defined in the template before.
"Insertion mode: overwrite cells/area" " the existing cells/areas are overwritten.
"Insertion mode: insert cells/area" " the cells/areas are inserted.
"Insertion mode: insert entire lines" " additional lines are inserted (depending on the required cells/areas).
"Columns " export headline" " here you can decide if you want to export the column headline such as PCS, designation etc. or not.
"Export these partial lists or automatically created partial lists" " these settings only become valid if the partial list automatic feature is active for this partial list and they determines which partial list will be exported.
"Allocate additional cells" " here you can enter values (or placeholders) in certain cells of the set spreadsheet.
You can only carry out the "Microsoft Excel with template" export under "File" -> "Export of material lists " files" -> "Microsoft Excel with template".
After export you can open the export file anytime again with the addition command ("Open export file with Microsoft Excel with template") or via the "Export file with Microsoft Excel with template" icon in the icon bar.
Under the transfer menu you now also have a "Microsoft Excel with template" export option which means that the Excel export is automatically carried out after a transfer. <Highlight Film Export to Microsoft Excel with template>
The "Free 1" to "Free 15" columns are once again translated correctly in the foreign language versions.

Single Member

The automatic evaluation of the component height for the Tyrolean dovetail has been revised and it is now determined correctly, if not already indicated in the MCAD. Furthermore, the MCAD parameters P16 and P20 are now also evaluated correctly. And the length dimension has been corrected as well. (Christa)
Components that are overturned 3 times when transferred, now receive their cross-section correction according to the settings. (Hilzinger)
The inclination of the "Lengthening" end type is now transferred correctly when the strut pitch is very flat.
For the export of scarf joints in BTL format the rotation angle has been corrected. (Stampf)
If you do not enter a file ending for BTL export, it is now added automatically.
Inclined grooves are once again transferred to the Hundegger K2 machine as sawing groove. (Romelli)
For the BTL export of step joint notches, parameter P16 is now taken into account.
When exporting to the Hundegger P10, the fields "Packet" and "Timber grade" are now correctly allocated. To make sure the changes work, re-set these fields once. (Wallner)
Covered bird"s mouths, for which the component is overturned 2 times, are now once again transferred correctly to the Hundegger K2 machine. (ABZ Ulm)
The import of 6.3 BTL files has been corrected. (Kiefer)
In the pre-settings for processings the limit values of the Tyrolean dovetail were increased. When you access the Single Member data for the first time now, the pre-settings for processings are automatically "converted".
Under the "Pre-process bird"s mouths" option, bird"s mouths with purlin width are now again taken into account. (Krum, Kleeberger)
Scarf joints that are to become flutings have once again been revised. (Azzolini, Apo)
If several tenon holes are on top of each other in a post, they are now combined to one tenon hole.
"Deepenings" of dove-tail tenon holes are now displayed correctly. (Zobl)
The (maximum) drilling diameter in the processing pre-settings has been increased.
The export of rabbets to Kx machines has once again been adapted to the machines.
Export to Hundegger PBA/SPM machines has been extended:
Under the general machine settings of the Hundegger PBA the option "Contour" and "Window" have been added.
General:
Here several new options have been integrated: "Turn before transfer", "Align position of component according to external contour" and "Create nesting for top and bottom level".
For "Turn before transfer" all components are turned 180" before transferring them. Then, under the additional "Overturn before transfer" you can determine if you want to overturn the components 1x, 2x, 3x or not at all and also if you want to transfer them standing up or lying down.
For "Align position of component according to external contour" the component is turned in such a way that the external contour side is the top side of the component. If this option is not active, the external contour is automatically calculated onto component side 3 when the external contour is on component side 1.
For "Create nesting for top and bottom level" two nestings are transferred; for one nesting the top side of the component lies on top and for the other nesting the bottom side of the component lies on top.
Contour:
Here you can define if you want to transfer the contour or not.
You can transfer contours with the "Produce contour as internal contour if possible" or the "Internal contour" option to the PBA machine. Which means, that only contours are taken into account that are on component side 1 and/or component side 3 and go through the entire component. For all other contours you can determine with which "Tool" to produce a contour that exclusively consists of "straight edges" or "roundings". These "Tools" are: tool diameter, marker, inkjet or chain saw (only for straight edges).
Windows:
Here you can now define if you want to transfer windows or not.
With the "produce rectangular windows with PBA windows processing" option the window macro of the PBA machine is controlled. If this option is de-activated all windows are transferred to the PBA machine as "Internal outline".
With the "PBA window processings for scarf joints" option you can transfer scarf joints as of the set size in such a way that they communicate with the PBA windows macro.
Under the setting: ""Quality for the PBA window processing" you can define if you want to transfer the processings options "unplaned" or "smooth" as well. <Highlight Film Massive Wood Walls PBA / BTL Extension>
For the export to the Hundegger PBA/SPM machines, only scarf joints (rebates) that have contact are combined to one processing.

PHP Machines

There is now the possibility to evaluate additional information (e.g. the single member number) under Alt+F7 -> "PHP Export" for the transfer to the HOLZMA panel saw. (PSP, PST, Stezia)
The transfer of the nailing to the Weinmann machines has been revised. (Chalets)

Master Data Macros, Program

The input option used for defining a macro is automatically suggested again when another macro is defined. (Regnauer)

Master Data Macros, Contents & Revision

The Master Data of the Simpson fasteners have been revised. (STEICO)

Structural Analysis

The structural analysis for rafters can once again be accessed from the profile administration. (Zobl)
It is once again possible to carry out a structural export for purlins and ceiling beams in the school version of our software.
Export to the structural analysis program MDBAT has been revised and the ceiling load is now transferred correctly. (France)
The transfer of valley beam roofs has been improved.
Now it is possible to set a distance for the recognition of supports under Alt F7. In this way, even a wall whose ceiling beam connects to only one layer - i.e. there is a distance to the wall - for example, will be recognised as a support. Horizontal and vertical distances can be defined separately (Alt F7 -> "Structural Analysis" -> "Structural Analysis of beams"). (Gumpp & Maier)
Beam structural analysis: the input option "adm. final deflexion in virtually constant situation" in the Export menu is now inactive. (STEICO)
Simpson hangers (IUT series) are now offered correctly for several beam heights. (STEICO)

Rafter System

The "Fasteners at end type" functionality has been revised in some points.
Drillings for the end type 'Tenon', particularly for the tenon hole, have been revised. (Italy)
Rafter tracings are once again transferred correctly onto wall members. (Christa)
Longitudinal joints (grooves) resulting from 3D processings or steel components are now created correctly. (Italy)
The input for tension drillings for tenons has been revised. (Potts)
The planing of closing boards is now also included and evaluated in the material list. (ABZ Ulm)
The cutting angles of valley rafters with dove-tail tenons have been revised. (Joos)
Longitudinal processings (3D scarf joints, grooves, slots) at elements have been revised. (Italy)
In Version 10.5 two more "Skew notch" end types have been added. There is the so-called "Skew notch, on both sides, straight". Like with all the other types of skew notches, you can take a look at it under the image list of the end type. Similar to the breast skew notch, the "Skew notch, on both sides, straight" is used for members that meet at 90". The skew notch enters the counter component bisectric on both sides with the indicated depth. If necessary, you can also enter the reference side for the skew notch. And also the counter processing can be defined exactly and then processed or milled accordingly. You can define a tenon for the "Skew notch, on both sides, straight" under the second tab of the end type; it is the same as for all the other skew notches. The drilling for the tenon has not changed (was already upgraded in the previous version). All entries for the end type can be checked on the screen image.
Then there is also a special skew notch for members that meet at an angle. Under the "Skew notch, on both sides, inclined" option, the member enters the counter component with the front as well as the heel bisectric with the indicated depth. It is also possible to create a connection with tenon and drilling. The handling is the same as for the "Skew notch, on both sides, straight" and in the master data you find some illustrating examples. <Highlight Film Straight and inclined skew notch on both sides>
In version 10.5 you can now enter a ridge tenon. Under the "Ridge scarf joint" end type you can determine the "Type" and this is either "Scarf joint" or "Tenon". If you select "Tenon", you determine in the next input field what kind of processing you want to create, i.e. either a "Tenon" in the component or a "Slot" in the counter component. The "Component width" can either be entered manually, or it can be a percentage of the overall member width or 1/3 of the member width. And to make assembly easier, a tenon play can also be defined. Furthermore, there is the option to enter a shortening dimension. To define a drilling, go to the second tab "Dri".
What"s new for the ridge tenons as well as the ridge scarf joints is the so-called "Scarf joint reduction". For extremely obtuse connections (i.e. very flat roof pitch) the angle of the scarf joint becomes very acute which might lead to problems when producing the connection on a wood-working machine. Here you can now first define a limiting value for the angle " which defines as of which angle a scarf joint reduction is carried out automatically. In the next field, "Scarf joint angle" you enter the desired angle. This scarf joint reduction is not only available for ridge scarf joints but also for all other scarf joints.
To make the use of this new option as comfortable as possible, the Profile Assistant has been enhanced as well. Under the "Rafter" tab it is now possible to define the ridge design with a cut or a ridge scarf joint and also a ridge tenon. If you then use this profile in "Roof Design" in combination with the automatic rafter feature, tenons and slots are correctly assigned " or, to put it differently, the connections fit without any need for further refinishing. And again, you find some illustrating examples in the master data. <Highlight Film Ridge Scarf Joint and Ridge Tenon>
A completely new end type was introduced in version 10.5 " the dove-tail scarf joint. For this new end type a new group called "DT scarf joints" has been created in the master data and a number of examples have been added.
As always, there is the helpful screen image that shows you the latest changes. In the master data of the DT scarf joint you can select the required type of scarf joint (drawing). Then, depending on your selection, the necessary input fields become available (others, not needed for this particular type, are not displayed for better overview).
"acute DT scarf joint": same as the normal scarf joint, you first determine the position (top, bottom) and the depth of the DT scarf joint. Then you can enter the length of the DT scarf joint ("Length2") either by entering a value or as a percentage of the counter component. Further input options include "full" and the definition of a projection. Whereas a positive projection lengthens the DT joint beyond the counter component, a negative value shortens the DT joint.
Under the second tab you define the back nick ("Distance4") of the DT scarf joint. The entered distance is applied at right angles to the back edge, i.e. the same way as an input for a right-angled bird"s mouth depth. Optionally, the back edge of the DT scarf joint can be produced right-angled or tapered. For machine production, it is also possible to round the corners of the DT joint with a specified finger-router diameter.
Under the third tab ("Dri") the settings for the drilling can be made. You can drill all DT joints only once but you can move the drilling with the so-called "offset" value to any position, additionally you can also determine the drilling depth.
"right-angled DT scarf joint: the only difference to the acute DT joint is the input under "Length1". This length determines the penetration depth of the DT scarf joint. From the end point of the scarf joint this length is increased automatically right-angled until it reaches "Length2" (which also means that "Length1" should always be shorter than "Length2").
"bisectric DT scarf joint": Here the connection of the end points of "Length1" to "Length2" is produced bisectrically.
"plumb DT scarf joint": The design of the DT joint between "Length1" and "Length2" is vertical. For this type of scarf joint all setting options are available, i.e. you can enter roundings for all corner points. <Highlight Film New Dove-Tail Scarf Joint End Type>
Furthermore, another new group of end types has been created: the so-called "wedged" scarf joints.
Under the end type "Scarf joint" you can select under "Type" what type of scarf joint you want to use. Depending on your selection, the necessary input fields become available.
For the "simple" scarf joint " which is still in the "Scarf joint" group " it is now possible to enter a shortening dimension. In addition to that, it is also possible to enter a "reduction" (see description under "ridge scarf joint").
The first new scarf joint type is the "covered scarf joint". By entering a so-called "covered joint" that connects via a mitre cut with the counter component, no cross-cut end or corner connection is visible. The side of the "covering" (left or right) is determined with the last input.
With the "Scarf joint, with wedges" option scarf joints can not only be hidden but also cogged " in which case the scarf joint is produced with the finger router (for which you can enter the diameter in the "FR DIA" field). If you enter a width for the opposite area of the contour, the scarf joint is held together without any additional fastener. In the last input field you determine the alignment of the contour: "diagonal" or "longitudinal". Without "covering" the wedged scarf joint can also be used as an abutted connection.
Also new in version 10.5 is the so-called "slit & tongue joint" which can be used for corner connections as well as for abutments. The handling of the slit & tongue joint is the same as for the ridge tenon (see description above). However, for the S&T joint there is one additional input option, the position (normal or 90" rotated) of the joint. Also available here is the scarf joint reduction and you can create a covered S&T joint.
Also new in version 10.5 is the mitre tenon. The settings here are more or less the same as for the S&T joint " the difference is that the members receive a mitre cut. For the covered mitre tenon there is furthermore the possibility to mark-out the tenon by the indicated dimension so that the "tenon hole" does not go beyond the mitre cut. <Highlight Film New Dove-Tail Scarf Joint End Type>
In version 10.5 it is for the first time possible to edit so-called points of intersection. A node contains one or several such points of intersection that are created e.g. when members intersect. And now it is possible to access individual editings such as markings, planing, end types, 3D processings etc. with the new point-of-intersection technology even before transfer to Single Member.
To make these points of intersection visible and editable the new "Mark points of intersection" mode was introduced and is available below the "Mark object details" option. If you switch to this mode, you can make the marked components visible with the "Show nodes" button.
You can mark the components with the usual marking aids (e.g. left mouse button, several components with ctrl + left mouse button, marking bar with right mouse button, marking frame with left mouse button).
After executing this command, the nodes of the area marked before become visible. The nodes are indicated as blue spots and are visible and editable in all views. When in the node mode, however, you can only snap nodes.
If you want to "switch off" certain components for better overview, you can mark these components with shift + left mouse button.
The "contents" of nodes are described in the hint if you place the mouse pointer right above a node. The information given here are the different types of processings, e.g. rafter/purlin intersection, rafter: bird"s mouth (4-20-1), purlin: line marker (4-60-3).
When you mark a node, the "Modify" command becomes available " and the processings of the node can be set in a master data window. You can for example suppress the line marker on the purlin for the rafter/purlin intersection with "no" - which means that the marking on the purlin for this point of intersection will not be produced. The modified node is then indicated in brown in the drawing.
You can quit the point-of-intersection mode either with "Esc" or by clicking on "Mark objects". If you then go back to the point-of-intersection mode, previously modified nodes are still indicated as modified, i.e. they are displayed in brown.
If you mark several nodes, you can either edit them individually or, if they have shared data, you can edit them together.
You can also use the point-of-intersection mode when in any of the "Views" (except "Carpenter"s Dimensioning") of a component. Here, the points of intersection become also immediately visible " however, only under "Carpenter"s Dimensioning" the nodes are, of course, not visible.
Especially in "Single Member view" it is thus possible to get a clear overview of the nodes and, if necessary, de-activate certain processings.
Some examples of use:
- if you want to suppress the marking on the purlin only for certain rafters,
- if you don"t want to produce the rafter tapering for some rafters,
- if the planing is not necessary for one component,
- if the bird"s mouths in rafters in the area where the purlin has been clipped with a 3D object are unnecessary.
<Highlight Film Points of Intersection>

Stairs

A new INI file for Hops Version 5 is available; under "Profiles" -> "E-Platz" -> "System" you find the new TRP_Hop5.ini.
The overall execution of strings and horses is once again represented correctly.
If you subsequently change the position of palings or paling fields this is done correctly now.
The numbering of the sides of posts for the tread cut-outs has been revised. (France)
Risers with negative projection and overlapping milling are now exported correctly.
Sleeves are now represented correctly in 3D if the storey height is not "0". (Winter)
Machine export of posts. Now you have the choice to either export posts with several developed views or as 3D components. You have to set in the INI file how to export posts.
Improvements have been made in the machine export of handrail wreaths: if you want to export a handrail with an inscription, the program now supplies guidelines for the spherical cutter.
New types of connections for posts and palings. For posts and palings new types of connections have been added. You can now connect palings/posts at right angles with a distance, at right angles with a mortising depth or with a skew notch at a board or tread. You find the settings in the "Parameter" sub-menu.
And, of course, you can define the top and bottom connections differently. <Highlight Film New Types of Connections for Posts and Palings>
Placing palings individually. It is now possible to place palings individually. To make that possible, the existing palings were split into two master data records. Now there is one master data record for placing the palings and one for spacing the palings.
The calculation of the palings field has been improved. If you move a post beyond the flight elements, this areas is now also taken into account for the division of the palings field.
Bundle input now also for the automatic data record. In the automatic data record of the railing there are now only eight booms/ropes available, but in addition to that there is also the possibility to use the bundle input. In the sub-menu of the "Bundle input" there are input options for "Area", "Number", "Type of division" and "Boom/rope".
Under "Area" you determine whether you want to use a fixed spacing distance or if you want the program to do the spacing automatically. With "Number" you can determine how many components are to be spaced, and with "Type of division" you determine how to divide the components; the options here are "parallel", "vertical" and "averaged". Under "Boom/rope" you define what kind of boom or rope you would like to have.
There is also the extended bundle input option in the input box: If you want to allocate a boom to an existing staircase there are three options that become available (options button in the bottom right of the input box). With the "single input" a single boom can be added at the required side of the stairs with "from" " "to". For the "Area bundle input" the additional options "Area", "Number", "Booms" and "Type of division" are available. For the "Automatic bundle input" on the other hand you have to first determine the side of the stairs and then enter the "from" " "to" values.
Then you have to determine the bundle reference at the top and at the bottom. If you then confirm the number of booms and the type of division, the booms are spaced between the reference components. <Highlight Film Bundle Input for the Automatic Data Record>
New "Direction" for handrails and booms. Up to now it was only possible to give handrails and booms either a "vertical" or a "parallel" direction, but now the additional options "Parapet absolute, parallel" and "Parapet relative, parallel" are available.
These settings are very important to define railings in the stairs data record.
"Parapet absolute, parallel" " here the handrail/boom is shifted parallel to the reference component until the parapet/balustrade height is not longer below the entered height. The parapet/balustrade height is measured from the tread front edge.
Parapet relative, parallel" " here the handrail/boom is shifted parallel to the reference component until it is no longer below the entered distance to the reference component.
Inscription of 3D objects into handrail wreaths has been improved.
Improvements for cutting corner connection. The curve references are no longer lost when a corner connection is cut.
Improvements of the board optimisation. The projections of spiral steps are now taken into account for board optimisation.
Only the necessary windows remain open. If you take a string, boom or handrail into "View" or "Developed View" and then delete the put-up component in "Top View", the no longer needed "View" and "Developed View" windows are automatically closed.
Under the settings for the "Last step" of strings it is now possible to enter a negative value.
It is now possible to intersect strings, handrails and booms with each other.

3D Objects

Basic objects can now, once again, be anchored to steel components under the Windows Vista operating system.
If several processings are combined to one group and then inscribed via the "3D inscription" tab into a member, these processings now also create counter processings at the relevant components.

3D Wall Ceiling

For windows and other 3D objects the inscription is now evaluated correctly when exporting to PHP. (Kampa)
Auto dimensioning of walls in wall view. The automatic wall feature F10 (wall automatism) has a new option: "Auto dimensioning". Here you can select the master data you want to use to dimension the wall. With this command you can automatically dimension the walls when using the automatic wall feature. For the dimensioning, all wall view windows open and after completing dimensioning, the windows close again automatically. <Highlight Film Auto Dimensioning under the Automatic Wall Feature>
Layer offsets of ceiling elements. There is now the possibility to enter or adopt the layer offsets for ceilings or ceiling elements separately under Alt+F7 -> "Walls/Outlines" -> "Ceiling element" tab. With this new option, we effectively separated the layer offsets of the ceiling elements from the ceiling.
In the previous versions, if nailing lines crossed, you only got a warning message that told you in which layer the nailing lines cross, but now the message also tells you in which wall.
Message for invalid wall geometries. When you shorten or lengthen a wall and as a result an invalid wall geometry is created, a warning message appears and the command is stopped.
Filed T-connections for walls with just one/a few layer(s), the wall (with several layers) is now connected in such a way that its layers are intersected with the outmost or first layer.
Changing the room height. If you change the room height via the "Modify" command, this is now shown correctly in the drawing and is also correctly adopted.
The calculation performance (speed) when calculating wall notches has been improved.

Release History V10.4 Build 5000

General Points

The message 'no valid display list' does not appear anymore in 3D View (Diemme, Centrotrentino, Kohler, Schwob, Cruard)
The "anchors" of legends in plan templates now behave properly again. (France)
All settings (F7, Alt+F7, colour settings etc.) can now be swapped in and out. Go to "Extras" -> "Options" -> "Swap in/out SEMA Settings" where the following options are available: "Swap in", "Swap out" and "Send to".
You can now define material lists in such a way that the material list is automatically printed out on the drawing. You find the new category "Placeholders/variables" -> "Lists/Single Member on drawing" in the master data. Here you can define as many variables as you need. Once you have defined a variable you can switch to the material list you want to include into your drawing. Under "Partial list properties" -> "General points" -> "Representation of the list on drawings" you can select the variable which is to be inserted into the drawing. Then you can go back to the drawing (plan) into which you want to insert the material list and insert the variable via "CAD" -> "Text" -> "single-line" or "multi-line" -> "Enter placeholder" -> "Link". Thus all changes that were finalized by transfer are automatically updated in the inserted material list. <Highlight Film Material Lists on the Drawing>
In the pre-settings (Alt+F7) you can determine under "Lists/Single Member" -> "General Points" to include automatic partial lists for every tab of the Material List. If you use "Automatic partial list creation" or "Representation of the list on drawings" for tabs/lists without the NUM/MEMB option, we recommend not to de-activate the "Representation of the list on drawings" option because otherwise you have to open the corresponding list every time and update it.
Creation and editing commands as well as scripts can now be filed as individual, user-created buttons. The can be defined under "View" -> "Icon bars" -> "Commands" or via a click with the right mouse button in the menu filed or the executed command to call up the function. Then you can decide if you want to define the new button as a creation/editing command or as a script.
With this new technology you can create your own "tool box" with often used commands, including the master data and the input form. <Highlight Film User Buttons>
You can now also use a photo as background image for "area view with edges" or "area view coloured" and for "textured representation".
Editing commands such as cutting, modifying etc. are first of all inactive in version 10.4. Only once a component has been marked, all available editing commands for this component become available. This makes the program even more user-friendly, particularly for beginners.
The visibility switch was extended by the "Last marked object" option. With this functionality components that have been edited can be easily marked again.

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

If components with anchored MCADs are deleted, the MCAD is created again by the deleted member if it is calculated anew (shift F5) " this has been corrected! (Regnauer)
The auto-dimensioning feature has been extended in different aspects for wall, roof and ceiling elements. For vertical, horizontal and skew dimension lines there is now the option to determine the distance between the dimension lines.
The effect tab for MCAD was completely revised in version 10.4. Now the user has many possibilities to set the "Eff" tab for the different areas.
In version 10.4 the so-called "Tyrolean dovetail" and "Dovetail" are available as MCAD processings. The user can create the MCAD in wall view either at the end of the wall or the beginning of the wall or he can allocate the corresponding MCAD to the wall. Then it can be filed as a corner macro. Some of the parameters are already determined by the program, so the user only has to enter a few parameters. For "Dovetail" there is a European version and an American version. <Highlight Film New Features in Log Construction>

Placing of Elements

For roof and ceiling elements there is now the possibility to change the "view" side of the element. The setting can be made in the master data of elements under the "Component" tab -> "Sight". <Highlight Film Roof and Ceiling Elements>
The component lengths as well as the single member numbers of roof and ceiling elements are now shown in "element view". To activate this option, go to F7 - > "Pictures 3D" -> "Auto cut" -> and activate "Component values can optionally be displayed". <Highlight Film Roof and Ceiling Elements>
The position of horizontal or vertical cuts in wall view now adapts to the F7 settings. Manually created cuts are not covered by this setting. <Highlight Film Roof and Ceiling Elements>
For the creation of roof battens with the automatic roof feature, the closing boards are not taken into account anymore.

Single Member

BTL format: the miller side for the free contour processing was corrected. (Lignocam)
The Hundegger SPM machine has been integrated as a separate machine and was included in the export menu.
The following processings are now also transferred to the Hundegger PBA machine: "Tenon", "Dovetail tenon" (only without cutouts), with or without rabbet.

Extension for the Hundegger Kx and the SC machine

Under the export menu, there are now also "General Settings".
Under these "General Settings" the user can now freely assign a component name for export. By default the "component designation" is suggested. And also placeholders are available, i.e. the component name can be a combination of different placeholders and texts.
For internal scarf joints the user can determine under the "General settings" how to produce these scarf joints. Only internal scarf joints that are larger than the set maximum scarf-joint length are taken into account. Furthermore, the user can determine if they are to be processed as "Saw groove" from one side or from two sides. In addition to that, the processed member receives two lateral scarf joints left and right for greater accuracy. For these two scarf joints the user can either decide to produce them with a fixed width or with a minimum width. Thus, especially for log constructions, a simple scarf joint for the notch of lintel and sole-plate members can be created by a 3CAD scarf joint or MCAD and does not need to be created in the application by a combination of different processings.
For "3D pockets" you can decide under the "General Settings" if you want to produce this pocket (cut-out) with a 4-axis or a 5-axis moulder.
Scarf joints and bird"s mouths with a cutting angle and a cutting inclination are now also transferred as a "3D pocket". (France)
Under the "General machine settings" the tool for the groove (15:0) can be pre-set.
Under Single Member the "Tyrolean Dovetail" was introduced as a separate processing. It can be transferred to Hundegger K2 and K3 machines (built after April 2002). To transfer the processing, you have to activate the "Machine supports Tyrolean dovetail" option (under "16 Log Cabin joint -> "1603 Tyrolean dovetail"). <Highlight Film New Features in Log Construction>
Under Single Member "Dovetail" was introduced as a separate processing. It can be transferred to Hundegger Kx machines. To transfer the processing, you have to activate the "Machine supports dovetail" option (under "16 Log cabin joint" -> "1601 dovetail"). <Highlight Film New Features in Log Construction>

Extension of the BTL Export

"Dovetail" was also included as a new type of processing in BTL Export (as of version 10.2)
And the "Tyrolean dovetail" has been included in BTL Export, version 10.2, as well. Under the "General settings" a "rough milling" for the Tyrolean dovetail can be activated.
For export in BTL format, the "General settings" have been adapted to the different BTL versions and are available under the export menu.
This option is also available for CMS, EGA, Essetre, Kr"i, Schmidler, Uniteam and Weinmann machines.
In addition, there are several fields under the "General settings" to enter project data and component data.
As of BTL version 10.2 the user can decide under the "General Settings" for bird"s mouths if he wants to transfer the rafter nail drilling as an option or, as it was the case up to now, if he wants to place a separate drilling.

PHP Automatic Features

For massive wood walls the user can now decide if he wants a saw cut at the beginning and the end of the wall or not: Alt+F7 -> "Evaluation" -> "Others".

PHP Machines

PHP export has been extended, i.e. the machines of Randek Bautech have been added. For this purpose the BTH format and the newer CDT format were integrated into PHP export.

Material List

Under the import of material lists, a new field has been added: "PAR" (parcel). To make sure this field is imported it has to be listed in the import file with "PAR". (Br"nighoff)
In the partial list properties of member optimization, you once again see the contents when you select "Free 1". (France)
For length optimization the (partial) member numbers were further optimized. (Chauvin)
To make it possible to enter the width and height in the material list in metres, the "Show width/height in centimetres (if standard measure is metre)" option can be de-activated: Alt+F7 -> "Lists/Single Member" -> "General Points" ~
The new list type "Structural analysis list" has been added to the Material List. It can be integrated into the existing list catalogue via "Format" -> "Create new tab/list". This new type of list has also been integrated into the SEMA standard catalogue. All ceiling members that have been analysed are included in this list. For this purpose, also special structural analysis numbers were introduced and they can be "switched on" in the drawing.
In the Material List there is also a new field called "Weight (pcs)". Under this field, the weight is always indicated per piece, even if several components are listed together.

Master Data Macros, Contents & Revision

For the new "Reference line with area" command, a screen image for the joist system is available.
For MCAD macros, point, line and area loads are listed for structural analysis transfer (see also Structural Analysis)
Under end types a new group called "End type and 3D object" has been created and filled with examples (see also Rafter System)
Under "CAD/MCAD" -> "MCAD macros" -> "Processings" the new groups "Log construction dovetail" and "Tyrolean dovetailing" were created and also integrated into the corner macros (wall master data).
In addition, drillings have been integrated for MCAD (top view) that take effect on boards/panels and members.
Master data for "Material list on drawing" were integrated (see also General Points).
Under "Stairs" several booms and ropes for suspended stairs were created under the "Booms" group.

Profile

The look of the material list tab in the profile assistant of the roof window has been corrected.

Rafter System

The end type "Lengthening" with creation of a step-joint notch at an inclined counter component has been revised. If the notch enters the counter component completely and the resulting bird"s mouth can no longer be produced, it is changed into a scarf joint. (Holzbau Deuerling)
If there are two rafters right next to each other (no play between them), no closing board will be created. (Jantzen)
The cutting angle of posts on rising elements has been revised. (Frankenhauser)
The "Tenon" end type was extensively revised: apart from the play at the side there is now also the possibility to enter a play for the front side of the tenon, i.e. the mortise is made bigger by the entered value. <Highlight Film New Features for Tenons and Skew Notches>
Right below, the program offers now the possibility to create a so-called "Suspended tenon". A simple dimension input shortens the component with the tenon. In this way the user can define a distance to the next component.
Under the third tab of the "Tenon" end type there are now extended settings for the mortise available. And for the so-called "Flattening" another tab was introduced. <Highlight Film New Features for Tenons and Skew Notches>
The "Skew notch" end type was also revised and extended. The type of skew notch is now better illustrated with drawings/images. The "Breast skew notch" was completely re-programmed. <Highlight Film New Features for Tenons and Skew Notches>
Components can now also be represented as axes. Under F7 -> "Rafter System" -> "General points" -> "Representation of members" the new options "Object", "Axis" and "Axis and object" are available. For wall and ceiling members you find these settings under F7 -> "Elements" -> "Representation of members".
Every end type gets an additional "3DO" tab in version 10.4. Under this tab there are links to embedded fasteners/brackets or other 3D objects and they can thus be defined as part of the end type.
Processings can now also be displayed in 2D (top view, wall view etc.). The display settings are under F7.

Stairs

If 3D drillings are placed in a stairs posts, the drillings have now the correct number of the side of the post after DXF export.
The output (machine export) of integrated arcs of circles has been revised. Identical lines are now combined. (Oberholzer, Manhart)
Horse lines are now displayed correctly in the developed view for treads after the horse input "from " to" has been made. (Linker)
The dimensioning of handrails of connecting railings has been revised. (Schilling)
Bolts that are assigned to an automatic stairs data record are now immediately and automatically calculated when modified.
Palings-based adaption: in version 10.4 there is now the possibility to create an adaption based on the palings; and there are two types of adaptions available. <Highlight Film Palings-based Adaption>
Automatic spacing of the palings/balusters with changing position of the post: if the area of an existing palings spacing becomes larger or smaller by changing the position of the post, the palings spacing is automatically re-calculated.
Railing input "from" " "to": it is now possible to enter stairs railings with the familiar "from" " "to" option.
Bottom step and last step posts with a distance: in the railing master data a distance can be entered for the bottom step post and the last step post, thus the user can place the post where he wants it already in the data record of the automatic feature.
Several booms/handrails in the automatic data record: up to eleven booms/handrails/ropes can be allocated and thus new railing types can be filed.
New possibility for geometry adoption for booms and handrails: in the master data of handrails or booms new settings can be made under the "Des" tab.
Reference: here a reference component is determined from which the geometry is adopted. You can choose between "Tread, front edge", "String, bottom edge", "String, top edge", "Handrail, bottom edge", "Handrail, top edge", "Boom, bottom edge" and "Boom, top edge". <Highlight Film Modern Railing Designs>
Bundled input of booms and handrails: if you want to enter several booms/handrails in one step, you can do that with the so-called "bundled input". <Highlight Film Modern Railing Designs>
Cutting palings to fit stair component"s geometry: for curved components you had to cut every paling separately to follow the component geometry, but now it is possible to cut several palings at once and still follow the component geometry.
Machine export: the "arc of a circle" output has been revised. It is now possible to export arcs separately or together. The necessary setting is made in the INI file; PLINE = 4 -> Output as separate arcs; PLINE = 5 -> Output as poly-line with integrated arcs.
The starting point for mitre cuts on horses is always at a convex corner.
If there are cut-outs for posts on a tread, there are now new types of edges for machine export available. For cut-outs on the left side of a tread it is edge type 1240 and for cut-outs on the right side it is 1340.

3D Objects

3D editings with all three axes variable and stuck to the side are now converted correctly. (Apo)
For non-optimised 3D extraneous objects in the wire-frame model there is now the possibility to reduce the number of lines. In the master data under the "Component" tab -> "Object representation" -> "Wire-frame model" -> "optimised". "Optimised" means that all lines within a certain area that are not necessary are not displayed.
The editing tab for extrusion objects was extended: apart from the existing "F contour" (free contour) there is now also the "E contour" (external contour) and "Scribe" available.

3D Wall Ceiling

The weight calculation now works properly even if the dimension input has been changed to "cm" or "mm". (Regnauer)
The top-view symbols of macros have been extended. If two macros are displayed on top of each other there is now the possibility to display the top-view symbols staggered.
Coverings of round-arched windows are now adapted correctly to the window outline.
In version 10.4 wall coverings become "independent" components that are visible in "Visualization" and that can also be transferred to "Single Member". These panels/boards, applied either automatically or manually, can now receive processings just like normal members. Boards (battens) can now be transferred to the K2 wood-working machine without any problems. <Highlight Film Boards and Battens in Single Member>
In the menu of walls and ceiling elements a new creation command "Reference line with area" was introduced. Apart from the global settings this reference line also includes spacing information.

Structural Analysis (Frilo)

In the structural analysis export menu (shift + F11) there is now not only the "Start structural analysis program" button but also a "Calculate" button. "Calculate" means that the FriLo program is not started but all the necessary data, e.g. for load distribution, is transferred to the SEMA program in the background.
When transferring purlins, you can set in the export menu whether the load compensation of a roof is done via line loads (one rafter becomes the reference component and has to be calculated beforehand) or point loads (all rafters have to be calculated).
Also, the relevant supports are shown in the menu "tree". If you click on such a support in the tree, the corresponding support in the drawing starts to flash.
As of version 10.4, purlins are exported to the FriLo HO7 program and calculated there. The HO7 program is automatically installed with the installation of the structural analysis part of version 10.4 from the SEMA CD.
With version 10.4 it is now possible to structurally analyse a complete joist system.
When opening the structural analysis export, all components of the ceiling are "gathered" and listed in the transfer menu. In the transfer menu the user can now pre-set the permissible deflexion of fields and cantilevers. In the transfer window the exact support situation as well as the automatically calculated proportionate area load is displayed. The subsequent calculation happens in the background (structural analysis program is not opened). After the calculation problematic components are displayed in a separate window. The critical values (utilization factors) are also displayed.
These components can now be marked and changed accordingly (reduction of cross-sections and load application areas, adding additional supports etc.). Then the joist system can be calculated anew until no problematic components exist anymore. <Highlight Film Automatic Ceiling Analysis>
Also new is the material definition for the structural analysis of members. Under the "ML" tab a new field called "Structural M" has been added. By clicking the right mouse button, different classes of hard- and softwood and laminated timber (DIN standard and Euro code) become available. The settings are then transferred to the structural analysis program and taken into account for the calculation.
There is also a new functionality for the "FriLo Structural Analysis program" icon bar (which can be switched on by a right-click onto the icon bar area). There is a new button for structural analysis export as well as a F7 button for the representation of the load application areas and utilization factors. Also included was the "HO7" FriLo program which is used for the calculation of continuous beams (ceiling beams, purlins etc.).
A "structural" list of the ceiling beams is now also available in the material list. For this purpose there is a new partial list tab called "Structural analysis". In this list an unambiguous structural analysis number is determined that only combines members if they have identical utilization factors. The handling of these structural analysis numbers is the same as for material list numbers. The structural numbers can also be written onto drawings (F7 -> "Joist system" -> "General points" -> "Structural analysis" -> "Structural analysis numbers"). Furthermore, a field for the utilization factors has been integrated into the structural analysis list as well.

Release History V10.3 Build 4800

General Points

In the properties of the arrangement border, the setting "Use saved scale" is once again saved correctly. (Zobl)
The possibility to adopt (copy) all values of a component has now been made available also for the creation command. For this purpose, the copy symbol was added in the master data. When you click it, the mouse pointer changes into the well-known dropper and all the data of components of the same type can be adopted into the master data. The delete symbol (recycle bin) had to be removed because there was no more room for it; instead the delete function for master data under the creation command was moved to the right mouse button and appears here in the drop-down menu.
When you hold the SHIFT-key during point snap you can now also snap the center of a line (component). You can see it on the new mouse symbol.
With the point snap you can now also snap parts of a line (component): just press the appropriate number during snapping. If you for example press "3" while snapping, you can snap 1/3 and 2/3 of the line; if you press "5" you can snap 1/5, 2/5, 3/5 and 4/5 of a line.
In 3D Representation, when rotating the building, the claw remains active until another command is executed or the "Rotate building" command is cancelled with "ESC". However, if you execute "Rotate building" during another command, the functionality ends as soon as the building has been rotated. You can switch off this functionality under the Pre-settings (Alt + F7) -> "General Points" -> "Operation" -> "Mouse button allocation" -> "automatically repeat function for 3D rotation".
The mouse wheel now offers the zoom function "Show drawing smaller/bigger". The part of the drawing to zoom in or out is the part where the mouse pointer is. You can activate this functionality under the Pre-setting (Alt + F7) -> "General Points" -> "Operation" -> "Mouse button allocation" -> "Zoom to center of the image". "Zoom to center of image" does exactly the same as the "Show drawing smaller" and "Show drawing bigger" icons.
In 3D Representation the "Rotate building" function can be called up with Alt + middle mouse button.
The following buttons and key combinations of the mouse can be allocated under the Pre-settings (Alt + F7) (SEMA standard allocations are indicated with an asterisk):
Mouse wheel: zoom in/out to mouse position, zoom to center of picture and no special function
Middle mouse button (held down): magnifier, shift drawing, rotate 3D building and no special function
Alt + left mouse button, Alt + middle mouse button and Alt + right mouse button: magnifier, shift drawing, rotate 3D building and no special function.
Under "View" -> "Icon bars" a new bar with the "Display options F7" has been compiled with which you can switch on or off the main F7 options. Of course, you can also adapt the icon bar to your needs. Additionally, under "Adapt" the F7 buttons for "Room" and "Intersection" are offered (request from the SEMA Forum).
Improvements of the performance (program speed) has been realised in the following areas:
- Re-marking of many CAD elements when selecting components has been optimised
- Improvements when marking many objects (screen redraw)
- Faster definition/insertion of CAD macros
- Walls are intersected 1x with the roof after they have been intersected with one another, i.e. fewer intersections with the roof
- Faster point-of-intersection dimensioning
- Improvements when drawing polygons (with many sides)
- Snapping extraneous objects or extrusion objects (e.g. palings) in visual representation is now much faster
- Transfer speed and screen redraw of 3D objects has been improved
- Substitute representation in 2D for rotation objects has become faster.
When sending an e-mail directly from the program " via "Send to" -> "SEMA Hotline" - the correct e-mail address for the country in question is automatically inserted.
The "Easy SEMA Program Update" option now automatically checks if the user is registered and authorized to download the new update.
For the XML import there is now the possibility to set the import path under Alt F7 -> "PHP Import/Export" -> "SCI Import". If you change the import path it will be valid for this session. (Kampa)
If you use the scale magnifier under "Layout" view, the program no longer marks components. (Zobl, R"rig)
The building project directory is once again enabled correctly under Windows Vista.
For post-transfers you can now determine in the pre-settings (ALT+F7) if you want the numbering of the post-transferred components to start with the next available number of the partial list or of the overall list. (Frankenhauser)
The XML interface has been changed in several details: Now 3D objects are also addressed in our Master Data and created. This also applies to Walls/Windows/Doors and Macros. Thus you can for example address general component values, layers and divisions in the wall as well as the look of the wall.
Furthermore, there is now the option to import individual or complete CAD text blocks and change the font size and font type.

Building Project Administration

Closing a project under the building project mode 2 has now been protected better against network problems. For this purpose the header file of the SEM files has been included into the check-up.

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

CAD polygons can now be changed into ground plan (layout) polygons " for this purpose the "Change CAD elements in ground plan / layout" command has been introduced under "Miscellaneous".
The colour of CAD points can now be changed later on. (Zobel)
CAD macros with placeholders can now be linked to components in sectional views.

Coverings, Roof

The reference point for the tile-grid calculation is now the uppermost point of the layer below (normally the counter-batten layer). This means that the tile layer can now project over the eaves to get the exact m" area of the tiles. The vertical grid is not influenced and thus correct.

Printing & Plotting, Drawing Design

When printing a CAD text with border, the text is covered by a filling in the size of the text box. Therefore, a new option has been integrated: Under "Alt F7" ""General Points" ""Look" ""Print white text background". If you activate this setting, a CAD text with border will be printed out with white background. (Regnauer)
The automatic drawing printout features have been extended. You can now arrange several walls and single members automatically according to certain criteria on one page and print it out.
For the automatic drawing printout which you find under "Extras" a template has been made available: "Wall output by the line A4". Just click the "Load" button and the function is ready to use.
Additionally, you can now make the following new settings for drawing templates: Under "Page setup" -> "Align arrangement border" you can determine how the walls/components are to be arranged on the page, i.e. either by the line, in columns or centered.
Furthermore, the borders of the arrangement borders can now be switched on or off.
And in the properties of arrangement borders you can individually define whether you want to print it out or not and also the colour, line style and line thickness of the border. You can also decide if you want to use the settings from the "Global Settings" (under "Colour settings" -> "General points") or not.
In Single Member you can call up this new automatic feature under "Extras" -> "Automatic drawing output".
A number of new drawing templates for these automatic printout features have been created; for wall and single member printout, for formats from A4 to A1. <Highlight Film Automatic Drawing Printout>

Single Member

Circles with a large radius (under "Free contour") are now also transferred as center-point circles to the Hundegger K2 machine and others. (Silvestri)
Under "EAS Export" the contents of the "Quality grade" and the "Timber grade" fields were mixed up " this has now been corrected.
For the export of free contours with "CMP 10 format" some detail (process key) has been improved. (DDX)
The accuracy for the recognition of a front scarf joint has been increased for CMP (EAS) import. (Dorica, Essetre)
Components with tenons (e.g. angle braces) are now planed with the correct length.
In the general machine data for the Hundegger K1/K2/K3 machines you can now make a global setting whether and how tenons are to be chamfered.
For the design2machine interface the following extensions for the BTL11 format have been made:
- The shape of the tenon (round, square, rounded and with corner radius) is transferred
- For tenons and dove tails the new processing "Rabbet" is now available
- Variations can now also be transferred
- Components from member optimisation are now combined to one member and transferred (RAWPART)
- Components are transferred with their line colour.
For the "Export to machines" you can now define for the SEMA EAS Export and all machines included in it the component name via a placeholder. (F"sler)
You can now enter tenons either as "automatic", "round", "square", "rounded" or "with corner radius" " for a more detailed description see Rafter System.
Please make sure that you only enter tenon forms that can be produced by your machine.
In the general machine settings of the Hundegger K1, K2, K3 and Speedcut you have the following options under "05 Tenons":
If you set the tenon form on "automatic" you determine with the "For "automatic" setting, produce tenon: round, square, rounded or with corner radius" setting how the tenon is finally transferred to the machine.
With the next four settings you can determine how to transfer the settings "round", "square", "rounded" and "with corner radius" to the machine.
For the Hundegger P8/10 wood-working machine you can determine under the general machine settings under "Tenon Conversion" how the program treats the different tenon forms (round, rounded and with corner radius).
You can also influence the form of tenons in a similar way for the export to machines via the BTL format, it depends, however, on what version of BTL format you use.
Please note: If you don"t know beforehand what kind of machine will be used to process the project, we advise to use the "automatic" setting for the tenon in the SEMA program. <Highlight Film Rabbet: Tenon and Dovetail Tenon>
For the new end type "Tenon with rabbet" you can determine under the general machine settings of the Hundegger K1, K2, K3 and Speedcut under "05 Tenons" if the rabbet is transferred or not. (Eling, Sauter, USA, France, Japan, Hundegger K2, Weinmann)
The same goes for the new end type "Dovetail with rabbet" " also here you can determine under the general machine settings of the Hundegger K1, K2, K3 and Speedcut under "17 Dovetail" if you want to transfer the rabbet or not. (Eling, Sauter, USA, France, Japan, Hundegger K2, Weinmann)
To communicate with the Hundegger PBA machine, the new interface format SPM has been integrated: under "File" -> "Export to machines" -> "Hundegger" -> "Hundegger PBA" you can start the export.
Under "Export to machine" the "SEMA EAS" option was changed into "CMP Export" and the "Ascii Version" was changed into "CMP Version".
For the export to a machine - "CMP Export" - you can now make settings so that scarf joints without angle and inclination are exported as slots if they have a certain width. (Cost)

PHP Automatic Features

Rounding problems when transferring multi-walls to the laser have been solved. (Wigo)
The automatic nailing feature now also includes punched out boards, i.e. for the punched out area no nailing line is created. (Regenauer)

PHP Machines

The machine control for the Homag Saw (panel saw) has been programmed and the machine included in the PHP Export.
For the transfer to Weinmann machines, switched-off boards are not included in the zero-point calculation (ELM) for export. (Kampa)
For the Weinmann export, the header information of the current building project is now transferred as well.
In the "Wall Head Data" of the Weinmann export there is now the possibility to include a line of text: the additional field of the wall requires therefore the entry "TXT = Text entry". (Bien Zenker)

Building Project Administration

When swapping in building projects, only the existing building project with the same serial number can be overwritten. For that purpose, you can now use the new feature "Keep number". Warning: When you execute this feature, the existing building project will be deleted irretrievably! (Regnauer)

Material List

The number of possible places for the "Free 1" and "Free 2" fields has been extended to 250. (Gl"kler)
Subtotals with "cm" as their unit of measure now actually display the subtotals in cm. (Viereck)
When exporting the material list, marks of division and tab stops are once again exported as set under Alt+F7. (Bien " Zenker)
The "Widths" and "Height" fields of the material list are now adopted with the correct units (cm, mm...) when copied from the material list into the drawing. (France)
The number of the fields "Free1" to "Free4" has been increased to 15 and you can freely define the name of these 15 fields. You can execute this function under "Format" -> "Edit masks" -> "Column headline". (M"ler, Frankenhauser and others)
You can now sort individual components of Member Optimisation in such a way that the shortest components come first. Under "Lists/Single Member" -> "General Points" -> "Show partial numbers of members in ascending order" you can make this setting. (Chauvin)
In the material list and under the ML tab a new field was added: "Dimension". It is used for 2x4 (two by four) master data.
For the data transfer to the material list, it is now also possible to transfer components later on without changing the component numbers of the already existing components " with the new "Post-Transfer" feature.
All components that have to be "post-transferred" have to be marked and the "Post-Transfer" option has to be activated during transfer. These post-transferred components are then added to the end of the list and given the next free consecutive numbers. (Frankenhauser, Ochs, Regnauer, Huber&H"l, Hammer, B"hi, Zimmermann) <Highlight Film Post-Transfer>
There are also two new transfer types for the data transfer to the material list: "Standard" and "Building stage":
"Standard" is the normal transfer type that has been used so far " the components are transferred and numbered, however, if you have subsequent changes and transfer them to the material list, the numbering changes.
"Building stage" means only the components of one building stage are numbered consecutively.
Example: You want to transfer the roof of the main building in building stage 1 and the annex (maybe a garage) in building stage 2. For the transfer of building stage 1 (roof of the main building) only the components of the building stage 1 are numbered, and for the transfer of building stage 2 (garage) only the components of building stage 2 are numbered. There is a separate list catalogue called "Building stages" which can be allocated to a list under "Format" -> "Allocate list catalogue anew". However, you have to do this before you start transferring the different building stages.
The list catalogue "Building stages" is only an example; its settings can be adapted to your individual needs. In our list catalogue every building stage starts with the material list and single member number 1.
And under the Display Options (F7) of the components (rafter system, walls etc.) the "Building stage number" field has been added.
With the general search feature of the program you can search for components on the basis of their building stage numbers and then mark them.
For placeholders, the new building stage numbers have been added as well. (Str"y)
We recommend deciding for one transfer type for a building project, i.e. to either use only "Standard" or only "Building stage" for the entire project.
The ability to update the numbers of the material list and single member list has been enhanced: Here you can now change the numbering of individual positions/items that contain a certain value in one column. Activate this feature under "Extras" -> "Update material list numbers" and also indicate the column and its content. But make sure that this is always the last thing you do in a list, because otherwise the numbers are newly determined when you transfer it again.
In the "Properties" of the partial lists, under the "Print" tab, now also the placeholders for the pre- and post-text are evaluated accordingly. Always the value of the placeholder of the first component in the list is indicated.
The "Calculation Area" field is now also available in the sorting masks. (M"ler)

Profile

The dimensioning in the screen image of the Profile Assistant is now switched on by default.

Master Data, Macros, Program Errors

In the master data under the help image tab you can set with a right-click that if a help image exists this will be shown instead of the screen image.
In the master data administration you can set under links that they come up when you use the creation command and thus you can decide which link you want to use. Under "Link" you can set the option (right mouse click) either from "Query - status" (creation command) to "Query " allocate anew" or "Query " open". You start the query during creation with a right mouse-click onto the master data or by clicking the question mark symbol (blue) in the headline box, which is the fastest way. All master data for which the query has been set have the blue question mark. (Kampa)

Master Data, Macros, Program

In the Master Data administration you can set under "Links" what queries are asked for the creation command and thus don"t have to decide before you make your entries which links to use. In the link field you can now decide with a right-click under "Status " question-mark system" if you want to set it to "Query " allocate anew (+ return)" or "Query " allocate anew" or "Query " open".
Under "Query " anew (+ return)" the selection options of another link open and the selected link is directly adopted without opening it first. Under "Query " allocate anew" the selection options of another link open and then the link itself opens. And under "Query " open" the link, if one has already been set, opens so that you can edit it.
You start the query either during creation with a right-click onto the master data "Ask about link data" or by clicking the blue question mark in the headline bar. All master data for which a query has been set have this blue question mark. The setting is valid across several master data levels and you can also carry out the query under the "Change component" command. (Kampa)
The "behaviour" when clicking onto a set link can now also be individually determined for each link. If you right-click the link field you can define under "Status " standard click behaviour" whether you want to use "Query " allocate anew (+ return)" or "Query " allocate anew" or "Query " open". Under "Query " anew (+ return)" the selection options of another link open and the selected link is directly adopted without opening it first. Under "Query " allocate anew" the selection options of another link open and then the link itself opens. And under "Query " open" the link, if one has already been set, opens so that you can edit it.

Master Data Macros, Contents & Revisions

To print out several drawings on one page, new plan templates are now available ("Drawing administration" -> "Plans). These templates are particularly useful fort he "Automatic wall output" and the "Automatic drawing output" in Single Member.
To produce building components according to building stages, there is a new template in the material list: "Building stages.KVL".
The 2x4 system has been integrated into the Master Data " and all the necessary parts of the master data such as roof, wall, ceiling etc. now contain 2x4 master data so that it is now possible to design a complete building with the 2x4 system. <Highlight Film "Two by four" System>
And a building project template for the 2x4 system has been integrated as well " you find it when you create a new building project under the "Template" options.
For the end type "Tenon" some more round tenons were added. <Highlight Film Rabbet: Tenon and Dovetail Tenon>
Additionally, there are now tenons with rabbet available.
And also for dove-tail tenons there are now some types with rabbet available. <Highlight Film Rabbet: Tenon and Dovetail Tenon>
To represent planed surfaces in visualisation, a special texture called "Planing" (under "Textures" -> "Wood") has been created.
Also available now, a new wood texture called "Spruce 06".
For the Koramic Z18S tiles the pitch area of the tiles has been corrected. (Will)
For the Rubin 11 V-K tile, the widths of the barge tiles have been corrected. (Frankenhauser)
Also corrected was the material evaluation for the ridge starting tile SF9 from Trost. (Stumpf)
Right next to the "End types" there is now also a new group called "Tapering" " under the "Rafter tapering" sub-group you find some examples.
nder the Master Data of timber framing as trimming has been included.
Under the wall Master Data, a new group called "Massive Wood Wall" has been included. These massive walls can be exported to the Hundegger PBA machines or with the BTL format to other machines. <Highlight Film Massive Wood Wall>
Particularly for log constructions, a new macro "Mark S3, centered" was introduced.
The "Contour" group under 3D editing has an additional text option with which a certain text/name (e.g. SEMA) can be transferred onto a timber element via a wood-working machine.
Under "other 3D objects" there is now a new group called "Stairs design" with the following sub-groups: "Basic object", "Examples" and "Figures". These master data are necessary to work with adaptable palings.
Under "Textures" a new wood texture has been added (Spruce 06).
For the "Glass wool" texture special adaptation options have been included. (Italy)
The master data of the roof structure have been revised in some details.
A special rafter base point has been added to the 3D editing "Contour".

Rafter System

If the filling-post link is removed from the roof window master data, this is now executed correctly. (Italy)
The value entered for the "Cross-vista height" of a roof window can now be more than 10 cm.
Bevelling members to the top edge of valley and ridge rafters has been improved. (France)
The end type "Penetration" has been revised and the counter processing improved. (Italy)
The input for the roof window play on top for roof windows with right-angled aprons has been revised. (Regnauer)
The creation of elements (valley and ridge) has been made faster for the automatic roof creation and for the normal creation commands.
The screen images of rafters are now redrawn much faster and that means that creation commands for rafters can be executed much faster.
For version 10.3 the handling and determination of planning areas of components has been fundamentally revised. The determination of the planing area is done without reference to the floor area, i.e. for planing there is now an independent area that can be switched visible under F7 -> "Roof Design" -> "Surface areas". For every roof area one planing area is created as a polygon and can be edited with all the well-known polygon commands such as "Add box", "Shift box" etc. Thus the dividing line between hidden and exposed boarding (definition via floor area) can be defined independent from the planing area (e.g. the rafter inside the building is not to be planed but the hidden boarding abuts with the exposed boarding on this rafter).
The intersection of components with the planing area is defined via settings under Alt F7 ("Evaluation" -> "Roof" -> "Plane components" -> "more"). Furthermore you can determine here which components are to be planed and whether a component is to be planed completely or only in the overhang area with or without allowance.
To reset the planing to its original state there is under "Others" the editing command "Calculate planing area(s) anew".
To be able to check the planing of different components quickly and comfortably it can now be switched visible in Visualisation. In the sub-menu of the icon "Options for the representation of the editing" there is the "Display planing" option available and also under F7 "Images and 3D" -> "Visualization". You can determine the colour or texture of the planing area for Visualization under the colour settings of the Roof Design, as well as the representation of the planing area in top view. <Highlight Film Planing: Cutting in 3D>
For version 10.3 the editing command "Cut 1x" has been completely revised and made available for 3D and all other views such as vertical section, horizontal section, north elevation etc. To standardize the command in top view and 3D, also the 2D command has been revised and when you use the "Cut 1x" command you have to indicate in the input box onto which edge or area you want to cut the marked component.
In 3D there is apart from the area snap also the possibility to define the area of intersection by clicking 3 points (input options). And you can also cut the target area with a distance if you press the spacebar before the area snap. The area or edge is indicated by the corresponding mouse-pointer. After clicking an edge or an area the cut component is immediately displayed in its cut form " i.e. even before you clicked "OK" you can double check it on the preview image.
Also revised and extended has been the end-type behaviour for "Cut 1x" and so the end-type selection for example also appears when cutting wall and ceiling members. The suggested end type can simply be adopted or taken from the master data. Other helpful options include the "Copy" command and the quick selection (little arrow on the master data button).
If you just want to cut a component once (i.e. you want to bevel the component onto the area) there is the "Enforce simple cut" button in the bottom right of the input box. If you press this button while executing the command, the end-type window disappears and the bevel cut is shown in the preview.
But also the way to cut several components at the same time has been improved. If there are for example different cuts at the component ends, the different data in the end-type master data are indicated with. If there are unknown end types at the component ends, this is indicated with the text "Allocate data" at the end type. Now you can pick the required end type for all components or adopt it with the dropper (copy button) from a component directly from the drawing. In this way, you can for example cut purlin heads without losing the original purlin-head data.
With the standardization of the commands, you can now intersect different components (rafter system components, wall and ceiling members as well as stairs components) in 3D. <Highlight Film Planing: Cutting in 3D>
Furthermore, the "Cut, lengthen/shorten" command has been revised and made available for 3D and all other views.
You can enter the required lengthening dimension in the input box either manually or by clicking a point in the drawing. You enter the lengthening dimension in the direction of the component. Or you enter the overall length of the component.
The end-type behaviour for "Cut, lengthen/shorten" is the same as for "Cut 1x" (see description above). And, of course, you can also allocate an end type to wall and ceiling members directly while carrying out the creation command. <Highlight Film Planing: Cutting in 3D>
Instead of a ridge and valley rafter, you can now create two gable rafters side by side: use the "Ridge/Valley on line" command and the gable rafter master data. After you have confirmed the information box (that you are about to create two rafters side by side) a gable rafter is created according to the settings in the master data on the right and left of the roof edge.
This option is also available for the automatic roof feature when the gable rafter is included in the "TMB" tab of the partial roof master data under the links for ridge, valley etc. <Highlight Film "Two by four" System>
Rafters can now be divided onto an existing building grid with the new creation command "Divide in building grid" (Raster System -> "Rafters"). You can activate the building grid and make your settings via the well-known icons in the standard bar or via "Activate grid" and "Settings for mouse snap and grid" under "Extras".
After you have clicked the new command "Divide in building grid" you find the roof area prompt in the input box. The preview window shows the area within the roof area for dividing the rafters and after you have confirmed with "OK" a truly axial rafter is created on every building grid point.
This functionality is also available for the automatic roof feature ("Extras" -> "Roof automatic F9").
And for ceiling beams the new command has been made available (joist system) and thus enables the user to divide ceiling beams according to the building grid. <Highlight Film "Two by four" System>
With the new version 10.3 you can also define the shape of a tenon: On the second tab of the "Tenon" end type you find the definition of the tenon shape under the settings for the play. The following settings are possible: "angular", "rounded", "round", a manual input of the radius and "automatic".
"Rounded" means that the tenon is rounded with the radius of the finger router.
"Round" means that the tenon is rounded semi-circular (tenon thickness is the circle diameter).
"Automatic" means that the tenon is produced as set in the machine data (for more details, see Single Member). <Highlight Film Rabbet: Tenon and Dovetail Tenon>
Also new is the so-called rabbet for tenons: new, third tab for the end type "Tenon". Apart from the rabbet depth you can also enter the marking-out for each component side and you can define the form of the rabbet. The settings are the same as described above for the shape of the tenon. Additionally you can enter a play, i.e. the rabbet hole is made by that much bigger. All inputs are shown in the screen image and changes are constantly updated. With a rabbet a tenon becomes a larger support area and thus higher stability. <Highlight Film Rabbet: Tenon and Dovetail Tenon>
In the same way, the end type "Dovetail tenon" can now be made with a rabbet. Again you find the new "Rabbet" tab under end type. The settings are the same as for tenons. <Highlight Film Rabbet: Tenon and Dovetail Tenon>
Tie beams can now be edited with the "Cut" and "Cut 2x"commands.
When placing a tie trimming (without filling post) the error that a trimming is created when clicking a point right next to the tie, has been corrected.
The length allowance of the eaves boarding (Alt F7) can now have a negative value.
If you adopted a tenon from another component for a component end that had been abutted before, the tenon was always created with a 90" repositioning and you had to correct that manually " this has been corrected and the tenon is now created correctly.
To be able to create rafters with a low component height in the eaves, the so-called "Rafter tapering" has been introduced.
You find this tapering in the Master Data right next to the end type. For the rafter tapering without purlin reference (first field in the drop-down menu) you define the tapering length. You can enter the dimension either with reference to top-view or inclination. The tapering depth is indicated at right-angles to the component. The form of the outlet of the tapering can either be right-angled or horizontal. With the last input you determine whether the tapering is to be produced only at the rafter or also on the ridge/valley rafter.
If you decide for rafter tapering with purlin reference, the outer edge of the lowest purlin in the roof area determines the tapering length and depth. To be able to "move away" from this point, there is the option to enter a vertical or horizontal distance. Additionally, you can decide that a tail is created or that the outlet of the rafter is created with reference to the purlin"s top edge.
The two fields "Form" and "Effect" have the same functionality as for the tapering without purlin reference. For the definition of the rafter tapering, the active screen image lets you see your changes immediately. The rafter tapering does not only apply to eaves purlins but also if you use a top boom for a wall and this top boom touches the rafter.
The Master Data for this rafter tapering appears in the master data of the selected roof area where a new field has been added under the rafter reference. This means you can already define the tapering while creating the profile and all rafters or elements of a roof area then automatically have this tapering. <Highlight Film "Two by four" System>
The "Component length" placeholder is now taken into account for closing boards. (France)

Stairs

All placeholders for the stairs can now again be used correctly in the drawing legend.
The height calculation of connecting railings has been revised. (Schilling, Lederbauer)
The projections of treads and risers are now also in case of grouped millings transferred correctly.
The rounding of step corners has been revised.
For millings for inlays a projection can now be entered (setting in the INI file).
Negative tread cutouts are now handled correctly.
The optimised DFX output for Alphacam has been extended. (Ambauen)
The connection of treads with horses has been improved. Bolts and dowels are now correctly divided.
The automatic dimensioning of treads (F7) has been revised.
Round profiles, rectangular profiles and I-girders now create a processing on stairs components.
The preview feature of risers has been revised. Now all editings/processings are displayed.
The walking line now ends, as stipulated in the DIN guidelines, at the front edge of the last step.
String intersections have been corrected: when two strings are intersected with the additional option "Round" the treads are correctly calculated now.

In the INI file of the machine export new settings can be made, for further details see the BSP_MASCH_EXPORT.txt.

There is the possibility to enter a play for paling drillings/paling processings. It is differentiated between a paling drilling of a connecting railing and a paling drilling of a normal railing. Additionally there is the option to include the play at the bottom or at the top, or separately for stuck-through palings.

PALPLAY_SR_THROU=0	Value in mm, indicates the play of the paling"s drilling in the stairs railing for stuck-through palings
PALPLAY_SR_BOTTOM=0	Value in mm, indicates the play of the paling"s drilling in the stairs railing for palings at the bottom (string/boom)
PALPLAY_SR_TOP=0	Value in mm, indicates the play of the paling"s drilling in the stairs railing for palings at the top (handrail/boom)

PALPLAY _CR_THROU=0	Value in mm, indicates the play of the paling"s drilling in the connecting railing for stuck-through palings
PALPLAY _CR_BOTTOM=0	Value in mm, indicates the play of the paling"s drilling in the connecting railing for palings at the bottom (string/boom)
PALPLAY _CR_TOP=0	Value in mm, indicates the play of the paling"s drilling in the connecting railing for palings at the top (handrail/boom)

Round mortises of rounded tenons can either be exported rounded or square.

MORTISE_ROUND=1	0 : Tenon holes of rounded tenons are exported square 1 : Tenon holes of rounded tenons are exported rounded
TR_MORTISE_ROUND=1	0 : Tenon holes of rounded tenons in treads are exported square 1 : Tenon holes of rounded tenons in treads are exported rounded
BR_MORTISE_ROUND=1	0 : Tenon holes of rounded tenons in boards (strings, handrails, ") are exported square 1 : Tenon holes of rounded tenons in boards (strings, handrails, ") are exported rounded
PO_MORTISE_ROUND=1	0 : Tenon holes of rounded tenons in posts are exported square 1 : Tenon holes of rounded tenons in posts are exported rounded

If a processing of an ashlar or an extrusion object is set flush with a component edge, there is the option to assign a projection.

ASH_PROJE=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D ashlar processing

ASH_ PROJE _TR=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D ashlar processing over tread outline
ASH_ PROJE _RI=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D ashlar processing over riser outline
ASH_ PROJE _BR=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D ashlar processing over board outline
ASH_ PROJE _PO=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D ashlar processing over post outline

EXT_ PROJE =0	Value in mm: projections for 3D extrusion object processing

EXT_ PROJE _TR=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D extrusion object processing over tread outline
EXT_ PROJE _RI=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D extrusion object processing over riser outline
EXT_ PROJE _BR=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D extrusion object processing over board outline
EXT_ PROJE _PO=0	Value in mm: projections for 3D extrusion object processing over post outline

Automatic corner connection of strings: In the automatic data record of the stairs you can define strings with component connection. The design (tab "DES") in the string data record determines how the string corners behave. The following options are available: "Long " short", "Short " long", "Long " short, plateau", "Mitre", "Tail, bottom" and "Tail, top". Additionally you can determine a fixed or percentage value from top or bottom for the height position of the tail connection.
The corners of treads can be rounded and you have the possibility to assign to every tread corner a separate cut-out and a separate radius.
Adaptable 3D objects for palings and post: In the master data under "Visualization/3D Objects" -> "other 3D objects -> "Stairs design" there is a group called "Basic objects" and in this group two basic objects have been created as templates: one is the basis for a 3D object that is fixed at the bottom or at the top and the other one is for a 3D object that is fixed in the center, i.e. the two ends of the component adapt. Thus you can create perfect 3D objects whose shape is not distorted if you, for example, change the length. <Highlight Film Adaptable 3D Objects>
The behaviour of end types for "Cut 1x" and "Lengthen/Shorten" has also been revised and enhanced: The suggested end type can now be simply adopted or, as usually, be taken from the master data. Also helpful in this context is the fast selection (little arrow at the master data button) and the "Copy" option.
In the data record of the string, under the "DESIGN" tab there are new types of curve calculation available:
Curve, uninterrupted: The curve is calculated over the entire stairs side, taking bends and posts into account. String connections are created without offset. This option has been taken from previous software versions.
Curve, interrupted: The curve is interrupted on bends and posts. Every string only uses its actual treads for the calculation and an offset between the strings can emerge. The major advantage of this type of calculation is that boards with small widths can be calculated. And with the additional "BO/TO = TO -> BO" setting absolutely parallel strings can be created.
Straight: Means a string without a curve is created. To calculate the horse-string measure or the string inclination, only non-adapted treads are used (adapted treads are not taken into account). This option is normally used for non-spiral stairs.
Part of the string, one-sided: Straight strings with special horse-string measure adjustment at the bottom and top. The string inclination is calculated based on the non-adapted treads. The program tries to keep the string straight as long as possible. In the adapted area, the top and bottom edge of the string only adapt to the set horse-string measure.
Part of the string, two-sided: Straight strings with interrupted curve and parallel horse-string adjustment. In this case, only two calculation criteria are combined. The string is kept straight along non-adapted treads; for adapted treads a parallel horse-string adjustment is calculated and the string gets a curve in this area. The components are not adjusted on their transition points " thus an offset between the strings emerges. The major advantage of this type of calculation is that smaller string cross-sections than under the "SbpHSM" setting are created.
Part of the string, adjustment: Straight strings with continuous curve and parallel horse-string adjustment. This is a combination of several calculation criteria. The string is kept straight along non-adapted treads; for adapted treads a parallel horse-string adjustment is calculated and the string gets a curve in this area. Additionally, a compensation value for the component transition (connection between string and string) is calculated, i.e. there is no offset between the first and second string. <Highlight Film Calculation of the Course of the Curve>
The "Point snap on the side line" option of individual adaption now also works for stairs without stairwell.

3D Objects

It is once again possible to assign a filling (hatch) to an extrusion object. (Bien-Zenker)
The resolution of round profiles has been revised. (MooBie Holzbau)
The weight calculation after importing several 3D objects has been corrected. (Stadelmann & Stutz)
For anchored 3D objects there is now the possibility to enter anchor distances as percentage value. Go to the "Anch" tab of the 3D objects where you can enter a percentage figure or the required distance from the component edge. This means, for example, you can create 3D drillings with always 15% distance to the component area.
For the effect of 3D editings on components, the "Edit" tab has been further extended. Now you have the following options: "Effect on all", "Effect on target components", "Effect on all others" and "Effect on selected components". If you select "Effect on all" it means that on every component that is hit by the 3D editing a processing is created. "Effect on target components" means that you can determine which members are to get a processing. "Effect on all others" means that all unmarked components that are hit by the 3D object get a processing. "Effect on selected components" means that you select with the mouse the components on which you want the processing to be created.
The weight determination of imported, turned round profiles is once again calculated correctly. (ABZ Bodenseekreis)
3D objects that are anchored to a component can now, apart from the two existing dimensions (mostly "Width" and "Length"), also take the "Depth" dynamically from the component.
They only do it if the dimension in question is variable (option must be on "var"). For the dimension that uses the dynamic depth there is an additional button to clear this functionality ("A mode = anchor mode). If you see this option for a 3D object you can make this functionality (to take the depth) available. After you have clicked it, this option disappears and you can use this function via the "Fix/Var" setting of the dimension. The "Depth" of a component to which the 3D object is anchored to, is determined by the maximum "Penetration depth" at the corner points of the 3D object.
Example: A 3D drilling anchored to a wooden surface area has to be set in such a way that it always only enters 50% into the wood " independent of the thickness of the wood. In this case you have to set the length of the anchored drilling to "var" (it thus takes the entire penetration depth into account) and then set the anchor distance at the end to -50%.

3D Wall Ceiling

If boards have been allocated with a window macro, the coverings are now created correctly in the layers. (Regnauer)
Cutouts of wall macros in the layers are once again displayed correctly. (Aga and Stadelmann&Stutz)
Roof and ceiling elements can now be reset to their original height.
In the absolute automatic nailing feature the collision area of nailing lines has been extended, i.e. for openings and also for fringe areas there is now the option to indicate an edge distance to the absolute nailing (that means no absolute nailing is created in this area). The settings for collision control also apply to punched out areas of windows and layers.
The center of gravity of wall, roof and ceiling shapes has been re-programmed: Now all components of a wall that have an entry in the weight definition and the setting "Yes" for the center-of-gravity calculation participate in the calculation. The center of gravity of each of these components is determined and then the overall center of gravity of the wall. All components that have been created under View can be included in the center-of-gravity calculation as well as anchored 3D objects. Via component check the overall weight of the wall can be checked and the weight of the individual components that are part of the center-of-gravity calculation can be checked via the "Weight CoG" placeholder.
The weight/center-of-gravity weight is also included in the material list evaluation. If a wall has a separate entry under weight, this weight is used otherwise the components of the wall are used for evaluation. Cutouts for windows, doors and macros are also included in the center-of-gravity and weight determination. <Highlight Film Weight/Center of Gravity>
The logic of the automatic multi-wall feature has been changed in such a way that you can now optimise walls via the wall numbering. With a setting in the multi-wall menu you can combine the walls according to their wall or element numbers in a certain order. It starts with the lowest number and then as many of the next highest wall numbers that fit on the cutting table are taken into account (the settings is under Alt + F7 -> "Multi-wall" -> "Walls" -> "Others" -> "Prospective numbers"). This function offers the user the best-possible basis for the production of multi-walls and loading plans.
Now you can also create walls without timber member and individual walls as multi-wall (Alt + F7 -> "Walls" -> "Others" -> "Allow single walls as multi-wall" and "Allow wall without wall members as multi-wall"). These changes also apply to roof and ceiling elements.
The master data of roof and ceilings elements has been extended. With the "Others" field (second tab) MCADs or timber members can be assigned to all not defined edges of roof and ceiling elements.
The editing of wall, roof and ceilings layers has been simplified: Under "Wall outline" -> "Edit layers" you can mark layers and edit them. With this function you have now manifold possibilities to manually edit layers in different areas. However, if you change the wall shape, it automatically effects the layer. But if you punch layer, the remaining layer projections at the start and end of a wall remain unchanged when you use the "Lengthen/shorten" command. To reset all manual punch-outs, use the "Cut to height" or "Cut to roof" command. <Highlight Film Editing Layers>
Furthermore, the automatic multi-wall output has been extended: You have now the possibility to decide between the two options "Timber distance" and "Layer distance". And the manual output has also been changed: When you manually create a multi-wall you can now also define the distance between the layers from the wall; use the new option "Layer projection" for this.
The rounding problems of the transfer to the Laser Con have been corrected. (Wigo)
To be able to meet the demands of alternative timber constructions, new wall sockets and connections have been programmed. For example in the "Two by Four" system, very small timber cross-sections are used so that it is necessary to use double top and bottom booms for the wall. To guarantee the highest possible stability for connecting walls, corner connections and abutted walls a top and bottom boom is lengthened into the neighbouring wall (for connecting walls shortened); i.e. the walls are interlocked.
To create such an interlocking, you have to proceed as follows: In the master data of the wall member (e.g. boom) you have to set the options "Lengthen, start" and "Lengthen, end" to "Yes". These modified members can then be included in the wall master data and are used in the automatic wall feature and the lengthening or shortening of the booms is done automatically by the program.
For T-walls the same settings as for booms apply. In this case the top boom of the T-wall is lengthened and the top boom of the wall is automatically intersected with the lengthened boom of the T-wall.
There is also a solution for particularly long walls you want to abut: The booms need to be set as described above. The lengthening dimension of the boom can be entered under Alt F7 -> "Members/Joist System" -> "Elements" -> "Lengthening/shortening dimension for wall abutment". The lengthened member automatically shortens the hit member. If there is a positive value under Alt F7 the member is lengthened at the wall end, and if there is a negative value the member is lengthened at the beginning of the wall. <Highlight Film "Two by four" System>
For the evaluation of layers the layer menu has been extended. You have now the possibility to let individual or all layers participate in the surface area to be determined. For the layers that participate, also a shadow is determined. The calculation area is evaluated in the material list via a placeholder (placeholder "Wall" -> "Calculation area"). The calculation area now also includes wall, roof and ceiling elements.
For area and cubature evaluations/calculations there is now the possibility to indicate whether you want to use the HO layer (timber/brick wall) from view or the maximum outline of the HO layer (interior side). You find the setting for it under Alt F7 -> "Evaluation" -> "Areas and recesses".
For the creation of whole-log walls the automatic wall feature has new possibilities. You can now create a member across the entire wall body in the Ho layer. The member automatically adapts to the wall outline and creates an outline. For the creation of a member, a member is allocated to the bottom boom or the wall start. If the wall gets a member allocated to the bottom boom, the member is created horizontally; if it is allocated to the wall start, it is created vertically. In the additional field of the wall the following entry is necessary: "Whole log", "Wall outline" and "End".
These walls can be transferred to the Hundegger PBA machine via Single Member or via the BTL format to other machines (see also Single Member). <Highlight Film Massive Wood Wall>
You can now mark several layer edges in sectional view with the marking box and pressed-down "Shift" key. (Kampa)

DXF I3 Interface

GIF graphics are now imported correctly with the "Graphics Import" option. (Zimmerei Fahrenberger GmbH)

Release History V10.2 Build 4600

General Information

To speed up the calculation of processings of members, it is now possible to display drillings as axes of coordinates. For this reason, there is the new 'Representation of drillings' option under the pre-settings (Alt + F7)-> 'General Points' -> 'Look/Optics' -> 'Resolution of sweep and lathe objects' -> 'more'. If you activate the 'Draw drillings as axes', only the drilling axis and a cross where the drilling enters and leaves the component is displayed. This speeds up the calculation time particularly for components with many drillings. (Cost) - This new feature was already included under Build 4400
The font transfer has been optimised.
When the placeholders 'Time:' and 'Date:' are used in a path or file name, the colon is replaced by an underscore because colons are not permitted in path or file names. (Dittus)
When using saved plans, the F7 settings are immediately correctly loaded without having to refresh the screen. (Adler)
In building project mode 2 the feature to check the BP contents has been improved. (Kobus)
The name-giving for a drawing that is output as PDF file has become more versatile: Under the pre-settings (Alt + F7) "General Points" -> "Others" -> "Drawing output, printing job" you can now use placeholders for the file name. (Dittus)
Extraneous files (e.g. graphics) that are no longer needed can now be deleted from the building project under "Extras" -> "Options" -> "Remove external files". This can either be done with the first option "Resolve current BP" manually or with the second option "Automatic resolving" automatically when closing the building project.
To make it easier to get started with the programs, short introductory films were created that show users how easy and straightforward the SEMA programs are.
When importing line graphics, only the graphics" lines are highlighted in the marking preview and no longer the entire "polygon". (Regnauer)
When sending a building project with Outlook, the message that it was not possible to delete a certain directory should no longer appear.
For the editing command "Delete" there is now the possibility to activate a safety check which will then automatically come up when using the command. (Riedelberger)
The default settings for the creation of a construction plane have been changed so that now after creation, the construction plane, i.e. the wall is immediately put upright.
If a roof area and a member are marked in the joist system and then the "only marked components visible" option is used, both " roof area and timber member " are made visible.
For the command: "Determine north direction" the mouse pointer will now always show the current north direction. (Kampa)
Material lists can now be inserted into drawings. Proceed as follows:
Select the list under "Lists/Single Member" and then copy it with CTRL + C. Go to the window with your drawing and then insert the copied list as text into the drawing.
Font type and size are determined automatically by the program, however, if you would like another font format you can alternatively insert the material list via the CAD command "Text multi-line" with CTRL + V. <Highlight Film 3D Import>
If the display options of the master data for the "Create" command is set on "List", a horizontal scroll bar at the bottom becomes available. In case of long master data names you can scroll to the right with it. Also, by right-clicking "View" in the master data you can set the "Maximum window width", i.e. you can make the master data window wide enough for the long master data name. (Kampa)
In the following areas the performance of the program has been enhanced:
(Pagano, Cost etc.)
- copying macros into the clipboard,
- calculating the processing created by a 3D object,
- in the pre-settings (Alt + F7) -> "General Points -> "Resolution of sweep and lathe objects" you have now the option to display drillings as axes of coordinates (speeds up CSG calculation with many drillings),
- also much faster now is the text output, the changing of several texts at the same time (e.g. font style), the punching of lines, copying, shifting, grouping, marking and de-marking under CAD. Also, if there are many short lines, the screen refresh is much faster now,
- and calculations of processings in the background with a dual core processor have been made even faster.
BTL 10.0: The SEMA program now exports BTL files also in the new BTL V 10.0 format.
About 15 years ago, SEMA designed the BTL format to have the possibility to describe components independent of their position on a machine, independent of tools etc. Cadwork used this format for transfer to our Single Member module and further improved and adapted it, just as we did, over the years, however, independent of SEMA. Now we have come up with a common solution so that there is only one uniform BTL format.
Within the SEMA program, an internal format is still used which is very similar to the uniform BTL format. Whenever components are transferred to machines, the program uses either:
- the BVN format for the Hundegger machines or
- the BTL V10 format (as of SEMA V10.2) for all other machine types.
The SEMA program exports components in BTL format. Wood-working machines of more than a dozen international manufacturers can read this format. This type of data transfer is currently used by more than 200 customers.
We work closely together with other software companies and machine manufacturers in this field to be able to supply a uniform and standardized data interface and thus guarantee our customers a smooth data transfer. This new format will, of course, be regularly updated.
On www.design2machine.com this format is introduced in detail. It is a site for machine manufacturers and software companies that use BTL V10 for data transfer. For users, the site offers interface documentation and a Viewer. The Viewer is to view and check BTL files. The rest every machine and software company have to develop themselves.
To prevent rumours:
We have increased resources in our development department especially for the transfer to wood-working machines and to intensify our development efforts for the different Hundegger machines as well as for other machine types that use the BTL V10 format.

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

If CAD texts with border are created within a hatch area, the hatch is now erased from the text box.
When changing a single-line text there is now the possibility to display the text completely: with a right mouse-click on "Text" in the Master Data you can select the "Large text input" option, i.e. a new window with the complete text will open and you can edit the text there. <Highlight Film 3D Import>
There is a new command that makes it much easier and faster to edit Word or Excel files (which were up to now embedded as graphics). You find the icon for the "Edit embedded files" command under the "Customize" menu ("View" -> "Icon Bars" -> "Customize" -> "Commands" -> "Edit"). Thus everyone can place this icon in the icon bar where it is most convenient for him/her. <Highlight Film 3D Import>
The MCAD Master Data have new input options for "Round arches" and "Component chamfers". To enter components with chamfer, there are several options available: you can allocate chamfers to certain areas or sides of the component. For the beginning/end of the chamfer MCAD macros are used (round, right-angled or 45"). These processings are visible under Visualization. In the same way, round arches are created with side reference, with variable length and depth by the corresponding MCAD.
There is already the possibility to assign text macros to windows and doors. Now, this even includes a new placeholder that indicates the door stop. Stop side 1 and 3 are listed as "DIN left" and side 2 and 4 as "DIN right". If you, for example, assign a placeholder under the ML tap in the field "Free 1", the material list will also show the DIN stop direction. You can find the placeholder under "Component" @Stop@.

Roof Design

For the calculation of overhang lengths (by taking into account the horizontal tile spacing) users have the option to use an interim calculation via "F3" in the "Overhang" field of the barge master data. This interim calculation can now also be accessed via a button next to the overhang input. When entering a pitched roof, the interim calculation can be called up during the overhang input with F3. A text in the status bar at the bottom points out this new functionality.

Coverings, Roof

The manual input options for coverings have been extended. For the "Covering area" command there is now also the turned input option available. That means you can now apply, for example, boarding onto lap-jointed purlins or similar constructions in line with the material grid. The input of the covering is thus at right angles (e.g. boarding on rafter) or parallel (e.g. boarding on lap-jointed purlin) to the line of pitch of the roof area.
The roofing tile master data have also been revised and extended.
Eaves battens ending on ridges or valleys are now drawn correctly when an eaves batten distance has been entered. (Jobega)

DXF and SCI-XML Interface

DXF/ DWG import has been enhanced in version 10.2 and it is now possible to import vector graphics, e.g. DWG files, with this option.
CAD elements are grouped automatically after import so that they are easier to edit. Only exemption: if layers are transferred, the drawing is not grouped because the different parts of the drawing are on different layers.
Changing the size of an imported drawing is now possible with the "Crop with reference point" command.
If DXF files with more than 1,000 meters are imported, there"s a message that the file is too big. You can do the following: Import the file nevertheless, scale down the dimensions of the drawing for import or adapt the import factor under Alt + F7. When you start your PC the next time, the Alt F7 settings will have been reset, changes to the import path and factor are only valid for the session during which they were made. When you then import the DXF drawing it is placed on the zero point. This happens automatically when the zero point of the drawing is more than 100 meters from the SEMA zero point away " thus an "unsuitable" positioning of the DXF drawing is avoided. <Highlight Film 3D Import>
3CAD objects are now also exported with the 'DXF 3D Export'.

Single Member

Under Single Member, the utilization of the processor has been optimized. (Abbundzentrum Bodenseekreis)
For scarf joints that are exactly on top of each other, the wider scarf is now transferred. (Pagano)
The export of side cuts, bird"s mouths and scarf joints to the Hundegger wood-working machines P10, K1 and K2 has been enhanced.
- For side cuts, bird"s mouths and scarf joints that cannot be pre-processed by the machines with a machine macro, there is now the option to "pre-process" them with the sawing unit. The side cuts, bird"s mouths and scarf joints are then produced with individual cuts as far as possible with the machine.
- For the Hundegger P10 this feature can be set under "Extras" -> Machine data" -> "Hundegger P10 General Settings" -> "Processing optimization" -> "Side cut with saw", "Bird"s mouth with saw" and "Scarf joint with saw". Furthermore, there is the possibility to enter the saw distance limits for unit 1:5 and 1:6 so that saw cuts that exceed these limits are not transferred. However, if the min. or max. value is set on 0, always all saw cuts are transferred.
- For the Hundegger K1 and K2 these settings can be made under "Extras" -> "Machine data" - > "Hundegger K1 and K2" -> "General Settings" -> "01 Saw" -> "Side cut with saw"; "02 Bird"s mouth" -> "Bird"s mouth with saw" and "03 Notch" -> "Scarf joint with saw".
  Additionally, a "Lift correction" can be entered " according to the machine manufacturer the accuracy of the sawing depth can have a deviation of up to 5 mm, therefore we have set the lift by default to minus 5 mm, i.e. the lift transferred to the machine is reduced by 5 mm.
- Please note: To make sure that the processing with the saw unit is carried out correctly it is important to check if the values/dimensions of the currently used tool (i.e. saw) are identical with the machine data of the machine software and the machine data of the SEMA software. At least the saw blade diameter and thickness have to be checked in the software and if necessary adapted. (Kaserer, Lerchenm"ler, Gessner ...)
In Single Member - "Editing" there is a new option called "Save as image". After you have clicked this option, the current drawing is automatically saved as an image, after it has been given a name. It can then be accessed from the Drawing Administration ("Images" tap).
Also under Single Member there is a new type of editing: "Chamfer". You can get there via MCAD (see Master Data). The processing is then also visible in the textured 3D View.
reated for the special requirements in log construction, the new Single Member editing command "Dimension offset" has been introduced. You can access it via MCAD (see Master Data).
The editing of round arches has also been added to Single Member. You can access it either via MCAD or as 3D editing (see Master Data).
A further new editing options is the "Separating tenon hole".
The top component of a log-construction wall is now also transferred to Single Member and to machines. (France)
In the general pre-settings (Alt + F7) you can determine under "Evaluations" -> "Others" -> "Information text" which text you want to transfer "onto" the component by selecting a placeholder and activating the free text input. (Gessner)
Interior drillings are no longer created. (Zimmermann)
For the dovetail processing there is now a new option: "Middle flattening". This processing is also transferred to all Hundegger machines. (Philiphaus, Hammer, Greenside)
All components in Single Member can now be checked in textured 3D representation and in the new "Area representation with edges". The corresponding icons have been integrated into the standard bar.
For export to the Hundegger KX and Speed-Cut machines, you have the possibility to set the "General Settings" of the machine -> "Length processing" whether you want to create the chamfer with unit 15:2 or unit 15:8. (Hilberg)
Certain front drillings with pitch are now also transferred to the Hundegger KX machine. (Jobega)
In case of two opposite scarf joints on the bottom boom of a truss, the scarf length is now correctly transferred to the Hundegger KX. (France)
A groove with a pitch (inclining) is now also transferred correctly to the Hundeffer KX or Speed-Cut. (Italy)
Line markers that are at the beginning or end of component are left out when exported to the Hundegger KX/Speed-Cut. However, you can change that under the general settings of the machine: "Tool marking on/off". (Kampa)
The export of planings to the Hundegger KX/Speed-Cut can be activated under the general machine settings. (Kampa)
Longitudinal notches on the side of purlins, created by two 3D scarf joints, are now transferred as groove and fluting to the Hundegger K2 machine. (Galli, Italy)
The "30:0 Profile freely definable" option on the Hundegger KX can now be addressed. It can be created and transferred as "Sweep object with processing" (see also 3D Object/3CAD). Under the general settings of the machine the end-mill diameter for the processing can be set.
Please note: Since the machines do not automatically create internal corners, they are produced as accurately as possible.
We recommend to closely monitor processings that are transferred as "Profile, freely definable" to the machine when processing them. It might happen that, for example, large pits fly off the component during processing.

PHP Machines

The machine transfer fort he BOS MOB machine was programmed anew and integrated into the PHP export.
For the Weinmann machine, the board thickness is automatically determined and exported.

Profile

It is now possible to define roof windows in the Profile Assistant (for a more detailed description see Rafter System)

Master Data: Macros

The 3 CAD fasteners of Simpson have been further completed in the master data: ca. 120 additional fasteners and brackets have been added.
The existing 3 CAD steel girders have been extended: In the "Steel construction, I-beams" group there are now all commonly used sizes and for HEA, HEB, HEM and IPE beams now the sizes from 100 to 450 are listed in the master data. For "Timber Framing" and the "Rafter System" additions have been made as well.
Also available now in the master data is a variable 3D drilling.
For log constructions there is now the possibility to assign a counter-sinking diameter for the tension drilling in the MCAD formula.
The CAD macros for architecture, interior design and mechanical services/installations have been completely revised and around 800 new CAD objects were included. The different main groups have been subdivided and offer a large number of different CAD objects. The "Architecture" group for example has been divided into 13 sub-groups that offer everything needed to create permission plans, from balconies, doors and windows to special accessories.
The rafter-nail drilling for bird"s mouths can now be switched off for the following master data types: I-girders, square profiles, 3D editing scarf joint, groove and slot. Only if a bird"s mouth is created by a component intersection the setting under the "Edit" tab -> "For bird"s mouth created by scarf joint" -> "Nail. drill" -> "Auto" or "No" takes effect.
In the master data group Visualisation/3D Objects a new group has been added to the 3D editings: "Contours and round arches". With these new editing options simple and double round arches, profile heads and profilings e.g. on angle braces can be inserted.

Master Data: Macros; Program

The 3D editing "Contour" has a new option: diamond head. (Vocational School Kassel)

Master Data: Macros; Contents & Revisions

The roofing tile master data have been revised and enlarged:
- The product ranges of the tile manufacturers Creaton, Meindl, Eternit, Jungmeier, Gettnauer, Jakobi und Walther haven been completely revised and updated;
- a new set of master data with the entire product range of Koramic has been added and, at the same time, the master data of Keller AG, M"lacker, M"ler und Bogen which are now all part of Koramic, have been deleted;
- furthermore, the complete product range of the manufacturers Pfleiderer, Laumans, ZZWankor and R"en have been integrated into the SEMA master data;
- all SEMA roofing tile master data contain all types of tiles as well as accessories such as hip or cone tiles etc.
By direct links from the roof structure (under Profiles) or directly from roof design it is very easy to compile complete order lists for the tile manufacturer.
- All tile master data are offered in the original pool and can then be selected by the user and transferred to the work pool.
For the new Single Member editings "Chamfer", "Round arch" and "Dimension offset" new MCAD macros have been supplied under MCAD -> "Editings".
For the vertical cut at the beginning/end of a component a MCAD has been provided.
The MCAD macros for marking bird"s mouths have been revised.
The type of connection "Tenon, angle brace, no" has been revised in the Master Data.
For garage doors new textures have been added. (Maier, France and others)

Rafter System

For building macros there is a new insertion mode. Apart from 'Add' and 'Assimilate' there is now also the new 'Assimilate + name' mode. Under this setting, the storeys of the macro are only assimilated into the corresponding target storeys if, apart from the use (walls with/without roof, ceiling) and the height, also the storey name is identical. (Pagano) - This new feature was already included under Build 4400
The 3D editing 'Cut' does not lose its component reference anymore when it is defined in a building macro and then inserted.
The input of roof windows has been completely revised in version 10.2. It is now possible to create roof window trimmers under "Profiles/Dormers" with the Profile program. Under "Profiles/Dormers" you now find apart from the different profiles and types of dormers also roof windows. When you create a new roof window here you are automatically referred to the Master Data where you can select the required roof window. In the Master Data the complete up-to-date range of roof windows of Roto and Velux are available. Once you have selected the roof window (e.g. Roto 6/11) you can continue for all further inputs with the Assistant:
First of all you have to select a profile (in the same way as you do when you create dormers). The width and height of the roof window are adopted in the 2nd tap from the template. Also the distance between the tiles is adopted from the manufacturer"s data.
If you want to take the battens of the main roof into account, you just have to enter the required cross-vista height; the actual cross-vista height is determined automatically by the program and is shown in the inactive field.
Under the 3rd tap you define the type of facework (vertical, horizontal, ") and the play. Trimmers and filling posts are embedded via links and can be defined freely (end type, cross-section, ML tap etc.). For this purpose, the new component type "Trimmer/Filling Post" has been added to the Master Data.
For the roof window itself there is also a new ML tap under which you can enter all the necessary information for ordering and evaluating as well as for the transfer to the material list. By default, the roof window is transferred to the "Material, roof" partial list.
Of special importance for the roof window is the "Look/Optics" tap in the Master Data. Under this tap there is a link to a real 3D object which can be linked with the roof window and is then automatically placed correctly. The 3D object is variable in width and height and thus adaptable to all roof window sizes. Regarding the look of the roof window, several options (wood, plastic) are available in the Master Data. In addition to that, the texture of the automatically created interior lining (resulting from the type of facework) can be set.
With the Assistant you also have the constantly updated screen image available. All necessary joining and construction dimensions are supplied by the new auto-dimensioning master data "Roof window". After finishing the roof window in the Assistant, the roof window drawing can be printed out from the Profile Administration.
There is also the new "Roof window" command in the rafter system. Here you can insert the roof window you have created under Profile with just a few additional inputs. Analogous to profiles and dormers you do not have to use the Assistant but can use a "free" roof window from the Master Data. With the additional options button (bottom right in the input line) you can place the roof window in the horizontal tile grid of the main roof or disregard the tile grid.
You can later on access the data of the roof window with the gripper. By doing so, the following editing commands become available: "Modify", "Position", "Copy", "Calculate" and "Delete".
Of course the roof window can also be linked to a roof element or be used in building macros.
For the print out you can include different text elements such as width and height or the name of the roof window under F7.
Because of the link to 3D objects in the Master Data and the texture settings for the facework, the roof window can be visualized perfectly which gives the building a more realistic look " particularly with Interior View you can show your customers what the room with the roof window will look like. <Highlight Film Roof Window>
In the purlin master data the "Marking on purlin" option has now another setting: "exact bird"s mouth". With this setting so-called marking bird"s mouths are created which are as long as the bird"s mouth seat, i.e. the bird"s mouth does not cover the entire purlin width. This is for example important for ridge purlins with staggered rafters to be able to tell which marking belongs to which rafter. The depth of these "marking bird"s mouths" can be set under Alt + F7 -> "Lists/Single Member" -> "Single Member" -> "Special processings" -> "more" -> "Bird"s mouth depth". Also under Alt + F7 you can determine whether the marking bird"s mouth is to be right, left or on both sides: "Evaluations" -> "Roof" -> "Transfer markings to purlins" -> "more".
The end type "Dovetail" can now have a so-called "middle flattening" which you can enter under the second tap of the end type. A middle flattening creates a horizontal seat between the roundings of the dovetail tenon. In this way it is possible to create a larger "rest area" for the dovetail tenon which is important for large component cross-sections.
In the profile drawing of the roof window the height dimension of the lower trimmer is now also displayed.
The display option "Top cross-vista height" has been added to the roof window display options (F7).
A free, right-angled closing board can now also be entered with reference to the BL of the rafter. In the master data of the closing board, under "Type/Reference" this new option has been added. Thus it is now possible to connect a right-angled closing board directly at the BL of the rafter to the outer wall layer (e.g. plaster). (Fingerhut, Beilharz, Kampa, Russia)
The different parts of an abutted rafter can now be shifted independent from each other and on the reference line a new sectioning point will be created automatically.
Elements (ridge & valley rafters etc.) can now be lowered in the master data or directly when created.
The settings for the eaves boarding have been extended and it is now possible to only notch out elements (ridge & valley rafters etc.) " "Alt F7" -> "Evaluation" -> "Roof" -> "Eaves boarding" -> "more" -> "Eaves boarding, component selection and depth".
The corner connection "Tenon with mitre" now also works with a lying (horizontal) tenon: for the component the required tenon and for the counter component the respective mortise have to be allocated.
Copied rafters now also adopt the fixing of the original rafter.
The dovetail width in % is now evaluated correctly also for skew cuts.
When copying dormers with reference point, the dormer purlins are now imported with the correct height position.
The cutting (bevelling) of components to the clipping areas of ridge and valley rafters has been improved. (France)
Drillings of 3D editings or steel components now also create the corresponding processing on the tenon. (France)
A special notch on a dormer jack rafter has been corrected.

Stairs

The machine export of Stairs has been revised. Dowel drillings are now placed correctly in the posts. (Leiendecker)
The transfer to Woodwop has been revised regarding the transfer of horizontal drillings. (Rogg Breitenbrunn)
The removal of risers from the automatic data record is now processed and saved correctly.
DXF export of top brackets has been revised.
The 'Cut corner connection' command now also works with handrails that have been created with the 'from - to' command.
Under the data record for treads, under "Corners" the cut-out area of treads can be influenced; the following options are available: "acute", "cut-out" and "free angle".
In the same data record, the rounding of tread corners is possible. Here you can assign for each step corner a "Rounding radius"; that also means the treads of self-supporting stairs can be rounded. For cut-out stairs the treads can be tapered to make fitting easier.
Also available now: a faster solution for concave corners. In F7 under "Stairs" -> "General Points" -> "Top View" a marking arrow for concave corners can be activated, i.e. on a concave corner a marking arrow will be created which can be seen in top view and in developed view.
With version 10.2 we have introduced the "from " to" input for string boards. If you create several strings for one stair side with the "from " to" command, there is a separate data record for each of these strings. This is very useful if you want to create strings with different thicknesses for one side of the stair. <Highlight Film Extended string input>
Up to now it was only possible to abut strings in plumb, but now they can be abutted at right-angles, horizontally or at a freely definable angle. <Highlight Film Cutting/Lengthening of posts and palings>
With the new version it is also possible to edit posts and palings with the "Cut" (Cut 1x, Lengthen, Shorten) command. The "Lengthen/Shorten" command works in all views, developed views, sectional views and 3D views. The "Cut 1x" command only where it makes sense. This makes railing designs a lot more flexible.
The machine export to the WoodWOP has been optimised. Horizontal drillings can now also be milled and drillings for palings can now be separated from end type drillings. In addition, it is now possible to enter variables in the INI file, that means that components with different thickness and Z-position of the drilling can be exported via an INI file.
More riser connections have been included.
The position of stairs can once again be changed with the stairs gripper " and all components are then calculated in their new position. (Gemmeke)
Strings are calculated correctly now even if a horse-string measure for the last-step has been entered. (Schilling)

3D Representation: Visualization

With version 10.2 perfect visualisation becomes available: apart from the textured representation there is now also a photorealistic representation that enables a natural and realistic visualisation of building projects. The quality of these "photos" is determined by the improved textured representation, smoothed out edges and natural daylight. And with the natural shadow (possibility to set the position of the sun) the pictures look particularly realistic. Special effects such as "Shine" and "Mirroring" for e.g. floor tiles and parquets are also available (under the texture master data).
The new icon for photorealistic representation is in the 3D floating menu right next to the icon for textured representation. By clicking onto this new icon, a new master data window will open which offers all the different setting options for photorealistic representation.
The "Sun", "Daylight" and "Ambient light" settings determine the brightness of the picture and with "Flashlight" an additional camera light becomes available.
The position of the sun can either be set according to the four directions (north, south, east, west) or with reference to the viewer. When you set the reference on "North" and "90"", the sun will be exactly in the East, at 180" in the South and at 270" in the West. In this context the angle of the north direction under "Determine north direction" has been changed to "0""
With the setting "Viewer" the sun is placed right above the viewer. And with "Direction" the sun can be moved around the viewer by the entered degree.
Particularly the option to combine the height of the sun with the four directions makes it possible to show a building in its natural light at any time of the day.
On the second tab of the master data the options "normal" or "optimal" are available. The best quality of the picture with respect to the daylight calculation is achieved with the "optimal" setting. However, the "normal" setting requires less calculation time. The last setting here - "Light" " determines whether the daylight is calculated for the outside of the building or the inside.
To make it easier for users to use the different settings, SEMA has prepared certain master data, e.g. "Sun at noon" or "Standard exterior view". You find these options under "Visualization/3D Objects" -> "Photo representation".
Apart from the icon "Photorealistic representation" there is also another button that enables the user to enter the scene. That means the data are saved for individual scenes. Thus the pictures can also be saved as "3D View" and then used whenever necessary " or you can save them as "Picture".
Customers who already have the Visualisation module will get the new "Photorealistic Representation" as part of their regular updates with the maintenance contract and the "Textured Representation" will become available to all customers with version 10.2. <Highlight Film Photorealistic Representation>
For version 10.2 a new type of 3D representation has been programmed: "Area representation with edges". In this type of representation all areas become white and non-transparent and the edges/lines are black. If, in addition to that, the "Component semi-transparent" box is activated, invisible edges are displayed in light grey. Particularly for complicated intersection points this offers the best possible overview. The "Area representation with edge" option is available under the 3D floating menu.
Also new in the 3D floating menu is the "Save current drawing as image" button. When you click this button, the current drawing is given a name and then automatically saved as image. You can then access this image any time in the Drawing Administration ("Image" tap).
Additionally, this command is also available in the main menu under "Editing" and can thus be used in every top view, view etc. The icon for this menu is available under the "Customize" menu ("View" -> "Icon Bars" -> "Customize" -> "Commands" -> "Edit"). This means that every user can place this command exactly where he/she wants to have it in the icon bar.
Under Visualization all inclined gable windows or triangular windows are displayed correctly.
The calculation of a photorealistic representation can now be cancelled with "ESC".

3D Objects/3CAD

In version 10.2 the exact net volume for lathe and sweep objects is taken into account for material list transfer. If the weight of a lathe or sweep object has been defined via the "kg/m"" setting, the exact weight can be determined. Furthermore, the weight for a 3D group consisting of several individual 3D objects can now also be calculated when transferred to the material list (i.e. the weights of the individual objects are added up).
However, the following requirements have to be met:
- The group has to be transferred to the material list, NOT the individual group elements (set the ML tap to "Trans ML")
- All individual group elements (that are relevant for the weight of the group) need to have an entry in the weight definition (e.g. kg/m"), for the group, however, the setting for the weight definition has to be 0 (e.g. 0 kg/piece). It is nevertheless possible to assign different weight definitions to the different elements: one element defined with kg/rm, another element defined with kg/m".
For better "cooperation" with other CAD system the import of 3 DS files has been programmed. It means that 3 DS data from other systems can be read and used. For the import of 3 DS files there are two possibilities: "File" -> "Import" -> "3 DS Import" or via the 3CAD menu -> "3 DS Import". For better editing in Sectional View or Ground Plan change the F7 settings under "3CAD" -> "3D Objects" -> "External 3D objects" to "Detail". <Highlight Film 3D Import>
When creating sweep objects you can define whether they create processings that lead to contour millings on the components (see Single Member). For this reason, the "Create sweep objects" command has a new option: "Sweep object with processing" with which you can define whether the processing is at the bottom/back or top/front of the input plane. It is also automatically determined that the processing applies to "all" components, the colour of the sweep object is set to grey and transparent and the transfer to the material list to "No". However, you can change these settings with the "Modify" command.
Furthermore, you can create combinations of several 3CAD processings, groups them and file them as master data. For examples, see the SEMA Master Data. For processing on wood-working machines, please also see the safety information under Single Member. In freely grouped 3CAD processing groups, processings can be copied and turned so that they end up in the same processing group or stay in the same group. <Highlight Film 3D Editings>
The "Round arch" processing has now also been programmed as 3 CAD editing. Here you have for example to possibility to set whether the round arch is to be concave or convex.

3D Wall Ceiling

For the calculation of the weight of a wall the actual size of the wall is now used.
For layer projections it is now possible to enter values of more than 1 meter. (Regnauer)
Layer offsets of macros have been revised. (Regnauer)
For ceiling and roof elements the horizontal and vertical sectional view has been enhanced. Now also members that have been allocated previously to the roof or ceiling element are shown in sectional view.
To better show the size/area of windows and doors, another option has been added to the F7 settings: "Wall Outline" -> "Window" -> "Area" " if this option is activated, you can see the window size ( m") in View and Top View.
The manual dimensioning of windows and doors is no longer disregarded after the automatic wall feature has been run but is adapted to the new situation.
For the automatic dimensioning of wall and ceiling elements, users can now switch the dimensioning of the members off so that they are not dimensioned.
The circumference of a ceiling shape is now also transferred to the material list and evaluated accordingly.
If walls (without automatic wall calculation) are transferred to the material list, the layer 0 (insulation) is shown in the correct thickness.
If members have been assigned to wall/roof/ceiling elements they are now visible in sectional view (horizontal/vertical).

Carpenter"s Dimensioning

In version 10.2 fundamental improvements to Carpenter"s Dimensioning were made.
For component drawings, the program parts CAD and Dimensioning are now available, i.e. you can manually add dimension lines, angle dimensions, CAD texts and symbols to the component without having to convert the drawing into an image beforehand.
The automatically created dimensions of the joining drawings are now "real" dimension lines, points etc. " which means they can also be edited with the normal editing commands. So you can, for example, include additional dimension points on an existing dimension line, or you can shift all dimension lines or change the look/colour of the dimension lines"
The dimensioned component drawings can then be saved " via the "Save" button in the floating menu. When you click "Save" you can either adopt the suggested name for the drawing or enter a new name. It will automatically be filed in the Drawing Administration where you can also find the new "Component" tap. From here you can open/print all saved component drawings. This makes it very easy to embed the component drawings in pre-defined templates or arrangement borders.
Apart from its name, the component is also identified by its Single Member number.
To help you find such a saved component in your drawing (e.g. Ground Plan or Wall View) the "Go to" button has been introduced. This button opens the corresponding view and marks the component you are looking for.
There is also a new button to copy saved component drawings.
All other options such as "Open", "in window", "Close": "Modify" and "Delete" are the same as for the other taps of the Drawing Administration.
If you want to subsequently edit a component (shorten it, assign a different end type or change the cross-section) you can still use the component drawing and update it with the "Update" button in the floating menu. The component and the automatic dimension lines are updated, manually added dimensions or special CAD texts are kept and remain unchanged. <Highlight Film Carpenter's Dimensioning>
Furthermore, you can display components three-dimensionally and textured. The components are shown with all their processings (bird"s mouths, tenons, cut-offs etc.) - this allows you to better check components before they are manufactured. <Highlight Film Carpenter's Dimensioning>
In addition, the new "Area representation with edges" has been integrated into Carpenter"s Dimensioning. With the help of the so-called "gripper" you can turn the component and thus look at it from every side. Also, the "Cant component 90" forward" and "Turn component" option are active here. To make non-visible edges of the component visible, there is the "Component semi-transparent" button. All necessary options are offered in the floating menu of the component drawing.
When you call up a saved component drawing there is now a warning if the component has been modified (e.g. has been cut or because of a new purlin there is an additional bird"s mouth)in the original drawing. After confirming this warning the component drawing can be updated with the "Update" button, so that it also includes the changes.

Release History V10.1 Build 4400

General Information

Under the automatic wall output feature, walls are now sorted according to their A no. (roof/wall/ceiling number). (Regnauer)
If you insert graphics into legend macros, they will also be used in new building projects.
Because of the complicated allocation of access rights in peer-to-peer networks, it was not always possible to correctly address building projects that have been created under building project mode 2 and there were also problems incorporating them into the building project administration. We have introduced several changes that make sure that building projects created in the shared directory can be accessed/incorporated correctly. (Jest"t, Frankenhauser, Lerch, Fa 3Z- Wagerswil, Denker, Italy)
The building project list of the Building Project Administration is now displayed much faster.
For DXF import, the "Check" command has been integrated, so that it is now possible to check certain dimensions already when importing a DXF drawing.
Now placeholders can also be used in the pre-settings of TGF export. (Dittus)
The F7 setting Imaging Cut surface - members "with cross" is now saved correctly. (Regnauer)
The icon that shows that calculations are going on in the background is now visible again under standard Windows settings.
The legend can be edited again and the changes are correctly saved. (Bien- Zenker)
Dimensioning angles of less than one degree(<1") are now correctly represented. (Renggli)
The scroll bar in the Drawing Administration now once again 'follows' the scroll wheel of the mouse. (Renggli)
The transfer of specific zones of interior walls to Build Desk has been revised. (Holzbau Rat und Tat)
For the operating system Windows 2000 the bottom status line has been revised and now the visibility icon is back.
If the contents of a drawing are copied into a picture, the components get their original colour back.
The Plan Administration button works properly again. (Schiegg, Barnimer, Burghart)

Building Project Administration

For the building project administration mode 2.0 (2.1) data safety has been improved once again. There is now, for example, a new message that will appear if you are about to close Windows or re-start your computer and a building project is still open, asking you to close the building project before you shut down your computer.

GRD, CAD, DIM, MCAD

If macros are deleted, also the linked MCAD editings are abandoned now. (Chauvin)
The 2D DXF export has been revised: now line style, line thickness, fill pattern and layer are exported as well, with hatch styles being exported on a common layer called "Hatch".
When using placeholders with X, Y and XY coordinates you can now work with the guideline. (Wigo)
The layer information, especially for macros, has been changed and improved fundamentally. (IKB)
MCAD macros are now allocated to the correct wall after abutting. (Wigo)
The symbols for macros are now displayed correctly again. (Creativ Haus)
Polygons/polylines that have been edited in images with the "in the foreground / background" feature, do no longer appear in the ground plan. (Proegger)
For the "Insert macro" command, the option "X/Y ratio" under the "Rubber band" command works again. (Regnauer)
For graphics imports there have been problems with certain constellations of operating systems and Windows fonts which made import impossible - this has now been corrected. (Proegger, Bliem)
An MCAD box that contains an editing can now be post-edited with "Punch" or "Adjoin" without losing the original editing. (Weiss, Kampa, Bien).

Roof Design

The F7 labelling of roof areas and roof layers has been revised: the displayed area sizes, layer sizes and data blocks for the battens etc. cannot be overwritten anymore. The position of shifted values is saved.
When the roof pitch is adapted, it is now possible to take the new pitch directly from the drawing by clicking onto the roof area.

Coverings 3D Wall Ceiling

3D objects in coverings are now visible in all sectional views.
Layer projections of ceiling elements are now also transferred to the underside.
For horizontal battens, the wall division is now carried out correctly in accordance with the building grid. (Adlerhaus)

Single Member

Under the "General Settings" menu of the Hundegger K2, point 17 "Dove tail" a new option "1702/1703 horizontal and vertical dovetail" has been added. You can additionally set this options to "splinter-free" (which is no longer the default setting). These settings are then exported as part of the machine export of the DT mortise. (only K2)
The transfer of log construction millings has been revised. (Chauvin)
The "Check" command has been integrated into Single Member, so that it is now possible to check dimensions in the single member drawing.
In a Single Member List, it is now also possible to display the processings of components: under "Extras" -> "List of processings" or with the new icon. (Frankenhauser)
Drillings that go completely through a component can now be drilled into the component from both sides, i.e. if there is already a bigger drilling on one side, you can optionally drill this second hole into this side. You can make the corresponding entry on the Hundegger machines K1/K2/K3/Speed Cut under "General Machine Data". (Pagano)
When exporting to the Essetre wood-working machine, the setting "Calculate component anew" is always active, i.e. is always carried out.
Drillings with depth indication are again exported to the Hundegger P10 station. (Picker)
Markings on components are adapted correctly when the component is turned. (Lachner)
The planing problems when exporting to the Hundegger P10 station have been solved. (Bohm)

Summary Calculation

An allowance for an item can now also be entered as a percentage figure: just add the percentage character (%) after the value in the allowance field.
The total amount is now automatically updated after an item has been deleted. (Fleschhut)
There is a new printout template that includes the preview image of the building project.
For the numbering of the individual items, a new command has been introduced: under "Edit" -> "Number items anew" and with an icon in the icon bar. With this command the first two digits of the numbering are automatically counted down after the headline (e.g. 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 etc.).
Placeholders in the pre-texts and post-texts are now printed out: e.g. Project:@BP FIELD1@.
Under "File" -> "List Management" you can now file a summary calculation as template with the "As template" command - or you can use the new template icon (right next to the "Save" icon).

Material List

Placeholder in the pre-texts and post-texts are now also printed out: e.g. Project:@BP FIELD1@.
Under "Member optimisation" an new type of optimisation has been the introduced, the stockyard length optimisation. For this type of optimisation you first have to enter what you have on "Stock". You can enter up to four lengths per cross-section and the different stocks can be saved and then used for other projects. <Highlight Film New Features in Log Construction>
There are further optimisation settings that offer the possibility to fine-tune you stock-keeping.

Profile

For saddle-roof dormers with ridge scarf the program did not create the dimension line for rafter spacing - this has been corrected.
The jamb wall in the profile drawing does not disappear anymore when you enter a negative overhang.
And the overhang length of a profile is now also dimensioned if there is no jamb wall or if the top level of the eaves purlin is negative. (Kampa)
It is now also possible to enter a negative eaves batten distance. Thus you can let the bottom batten project over the rafter to e.g. connect an eaves board. <Highlight Film New Features of the Profile Assistant>
Additionally there is another setting for the eaves batten distance: "auto" - which means that the bottom batten is automatically shifted so that it does not jut out if the rafter or the roof layers are cut off vertically. However, there is also the option to do this manually by selecting "free". <Highlight Film New Features of the Profile Assistant>
Also available now: the ridge batten distance of shed and trapezoidal dormers. With this feature you can shift the ridge batten as far as you need to be able to create the transition of the roofing tiles from the main roof to the dormer roof section individually. <Highlight Film New Features of the Profile Assistant>
To determine the basic dimensions of a roof with different pitches, an additional button has been included in the Profile Assistant. For this auxiliary calculation you first have to enter the overall house width and after you have entered all the other data from the profile and counter profile, the actual basic dimension is calculated and with "OK" automatically adopted. Thus you can see already when you create a profile if a ridge is not in the center. <Highlight Film New Features of the Profile Assistant>
Apart from bricklayer and joining dimensioning, in version 10.1 there is a new type of dimensioning called "Roofer". You can click through the dimensioning button until you have the type of dimensioning you want to use.
For the "Roofer" dimensioning the absolute and relative dimensions of the battens of the profile and the structure height of the roof structure are indicated - thus you have a clearly laid-out drawing to batten the roof.
For this new type of dimensioning the master data of the auto-dimensioning has been extended. Under the dimension tab there is now a new field for a dimension line for the battens. In addition to that, you can also define the distance of the dimension line.
This also means that you can now activate the battens of the profile in joining dimensioning, if you want to dimension the battens in the joining drawing. <Highlight Film New Features of the Profile Assistant>
In version 10.1 the spacing of lap-jointed purlins of lap-jointed roofs has been extended. Lap-jointed purlins can be not only applied in line with the roof pitch but can now be spaced in plumb by using the tilting angle. In the Profile Assistant this input option is already available under the "Lap-jointed" tab. If the tilting angle is 0" the lap-jointed purlins are placed in plumb under the rafter. By entering a bird's mouth depth purlins can "sink" into rafters. <Highlight Film New Features of the Profile Assistant>
On the screen image of the Profile Assistant you can now check dimensions, angles and component data directly in the drawing, because we have introduced the new "Check/Measure" button to the icon bar. It works the same way as the check button for "normal" drawings. The following additional options are available: "Check on 2 points", "Check on line", "Angle check" as well as "Component check". The check command can remain open while entering data in the Profile Assistant and be activated by simply clicking on it. The "Check" command is also available for the 3D screen image. Thus certain dimensions can already be checked while entering the data for the profile and the dimensions can be transferred with copy & paste to the input box. <Highlight Film New Features of the Profile Assistant>

Master Data Macros, Program

For wall members whose inscription has been deleted with "Multi edit" (editing several components together), the inscription is not restored anymore when copying the members. However, this only works for newly created members"(Jobega)
The replacement of inscribed sweep objects for timber members has been revised. (Jobega)
Even if the original master data pool is on CD, master data can be selected according to category.

Master Data: Macros; Contents & Revisions

The Roofing Tile master data have been revised and extended:
The data of tile manufacturer Braas has been split into 2 categories "Roof bricks" and "Roof tiles". The roof bricks (concrete pentiles) have been updated according to the current product range. The roof tiles (clay tiles) are completely new in the master data and they contain the products of the manufacturers Rupp and Heisterholz, i.e. so that Heisterholz is no longer listed separately in the master data.
To provide a better overview, the products of Nelskamp were also split into "Roof bricks" and "Roof tiles". Additionally, new tiles have been included (especially the new large-format tiles) and the current range was updated which means that now the entire range of Nelskamp products is available in the SEMA program.
Furthermore, the product range of tile manufacturer Erlus has been updated and the new large-format tiles included.
New in the master data are the entire product ranges of the manufacturers Bramac and Trost.
All tile master data in the SEMA program contain area tiles and the complete range of accessories, from ridge clamps to pitched roof wall bricks. By direct allocation of the roof structure under Profile or directly under Roof Design you can put together a complete order list for the tile manufacturer.
All tile master data are offered in the original stock and can then be selected by the user and copied into the working stock.
Additionally, the tiles haven been given textures so that in visualisation the roof looks very much like a real roof.
The partial roof master data have now a constantly updating screen image, thus you can already see in the master data what a roof e.g. with roof insulation will look like. The screen image for tiles is also available with texture which makes it much easier to select the required tiles.
Under "Joist System" there is a new element called "Closing board". You create a closing board either on a reference line or with 2 points and then it is automatically calculated to fit between the ceiling beams, and if you have set the end type on "Penetration" it also automatically creates a groove.
The MCAD macros of the Weinmann group have been revised. Milling, drilling and sawing depths are now transferred with the correct layer depth.
Under the master data for Auto Dimensioning, special master data with additional dimension lines for battens for the joining drawing of profiles and dormers are offered, i.e. when using the master data "Profile joining & battens", the battens of the profile will be dimensioned.
Stair posts and palings are now also available with the end types "Tenon" and "Dowel".
The division master data of Timber Framing has been extended and now also offers the "Wall fixed, center" option which enables you to space posts from the center of a wall to the left and right.
Particularly for the visualisation of horizontal weather boarding, a profiled board is now available under "Visualization/3D Objects" -> "other 3D objects" -> "Timber Construction" -> "Boarding"
For the templates of the summary calculation the necessary placeholders where included in the pre-texts.
For summary calculations two templates that include preview images of the building project have been created.
Furthermore, there is a new template (Timber Framing - interior/exterior wall) which separately lists the values for interior and exterior walls.
An additional partial list for closing boards has been added to the material lists/single member templates.
For better evaluation of the roofing tiles the material list templates of "Roof coverings" have been extended - there are now two more partial lists: one for "Roofing tiles" and one for "Roof coverings", i.e. all other components. However, they only work properly if "Type 1" under the ML tab of roofing tiles has been set to "Roofing tile" - which we have done. Furthermore, a new placeholder @RO_LAYNAME@ has been added to the comment field. This placeholder inserts the proper layer name of the material in the comment/annotation field - which enables you to fine-tune your sorting in the material list.

Rafter System

The placing of posts, especially under lowered ridge or valley rafters, has been improved and they are now cut correctly under the elements. (Italy)
The "Cut" and "Bevel" command have been revised - so that e.g. special double cuts at clipped purlins are now created correctly. (Italy, France)
When placing shed and trapezoidal dormers, the input option "from point -> to point" is now used by default. The alternative option "from rafter -> to rafter" can be selected in the input box. (Alois Hochecker)
For the end type "Tenon" there is now an additional input option: play. This is also the reason why the master data got a 2nd tab. For each side of the component you can enter a play for the tenon. The mortise in the counter component is then processed with play. (Chauvin)
You can also enter a play for dovetail tenons; in this case it is a lateral play for the tenon. The mortise is enlarged by the play dimension, however, here the entered value is divided and applied on both sides. (Chauvin)
In version 10.1 the Rafter System got a new command "Closing Board" which is a completely new component with its own master data. We supply a number of different designs of closing boards in the master data. There are three types of closing boards: vertical, horizontal and right-angled and they can be comfortably accessed and selected in the thumbnail window of the master data. These three types can either have purlin reference or be completely free components. Apart from the width, also the height of the closing board can either be entered manually or determined automatically. For the automatic height calculation, top and bottom levels of the reference rafter and the reference purlin are relevant. Furthermore, you can decide whether you want to clip the top and bottom side of the closing board and you can create closing boards with ventilation, i.e. the board becomes a little bit narrower. If you want to create a closing board with purlin reference, you can define the distance to the purlin already in the master data. Thus you can prepare different designs of closing boards in the master data.
Under the 2nd tab of the master data you find the familiar link to the end types for the component (for more details see below).
And the other tabs are for appearance settings and the information for the material list.
The closing boards are entered under the Rafter System. The input options in the input box are determined by the type of closing board.
Here the description on how to create a closing board with purlin reference: After clicking the reference purlin (e.g. eaves purlin), the first and the last rafter between which the closing board is to run have to be selected. Of course, you can also choose ridges, valleys or turned rafters as start or end components. If you want to create a continuous closing board, you can use the option in the bottom right of the input box: "Create closing board between members (Alt+1).
If you select master data with a "free" closing board, the input box looks the same as the normal component input box with fields for lengths, distance and position of the component. To enter the length, all normal input options such as "on 2 points" or "with angle" for example are available.
With these new possibilities it becomes very easy to create closing board on inclined purlins or other more complicated closing boards.
And, of course, you can post-edit the closing boards with all the usual editing commands: "Cut", "Change", "Copy", "Macro", "Abut", "Delete", "Texture 3D" and "End type".
You will also find the closing board under the colour settings so that you can individually determine the line colour, line width, line style and texture of the component.
To include length, component number etc. into the plan, the F7 settings have been extended accordingly.
In addition, and as for all other components, there is always the joining drawing available ("Single Member" view button).
It goes without saying that the closing boards are also transferred to the material list, where a special partial list for closing boards has been included. But the closing boards are also listed in the "overall" timber list. In which place the closing boards appear (after the purlin or at the end) can be determined under Alt+F7 "Evaluation" -> "Roof" -> "Sorting of rafters and purlins"".
Closing boards are transferred to Single Member as well, i.e. they can be processed on wood-working machines. <Highlight Film New Component: Closing Board and New End Type: Penetration>
The new end type "Penetration" has been created especially for closing boards. This master data also has a thumbnail window in which you can see all entries immediately. With "Penetration" you can design a closing board groove in normal rafters, for example, but also in ridge and valley rafters. The depth of the groove can either be entered at right angles to the counter component or in component direction. Furthermore, you can enter a play for every closing board. The processing on the counter component is then that much bigger. And instead of the play, you can create the necessary counter processing for the component. If you determine for example that the processing is on side 3, this means that the groove goes all the way up to the top side of the rafter even if the closing board has been created with ventilation and therefore does not reach to the top of the rafter. You can even define a play for the front side - the processing on the counter component is then by that much bigger. The end type "Penetration" is particularly useful for closing boards but it can also be used for all other components. <Highlight Film New Component: Closing Board and New End Type: Penetration>
The problem with the hatching of posts in the rafter system under the operating system Windows 2000 has been solved. (Vario)
Trapezoidal dormer jack rafters that have been created with a trapezoidal dormer from the old profiles program (Profile Basic) are now, once again, correctly cut to the valley blank.
A special intersection between rafter and purlin (tail on the ridge) has been corrected. (Thimmel)
Steel elements that have been inscribed into wall and ceiling members are now represented as such if the "End type" option has been activated in top view (F7 -> Wall Members -> Elements -> End connections -> Setting: 3D Editing).

Stairs

The rise calculation of straight components has been improved - now string boards are created with lower heights and straight string boards are now absolutely parallel if the string curve is set to "TOP -> BOT". And if the string curve is adopted for the handrail, the parapet height is correct.
An additional tail intersection has been introduced. You can now create a tail connection with only one visible front board: when intersection the boards, select the height connection "Overall equalization length". (Linker) <Highlight Film New Features in the Stairs Program>
Boards (strings, horses, booms, handrails) can now be abutted in plumb, the following options are available: "Abutting length", "Maximum length" and "Number of parts". (Simmat) <Highlight Film New Features in the Stairs Program>
When you abut boards, there is now a separate edge type (ID number) for the abutting edge available.
Furthermore, adaption options for parallel and individual adaption have been integrated, so you can now for example select the input option "Point snap on side line", which means you can create straight treads even though they are in the turning. (Special request from customers in France, Italy and Austria) <Highlight Film New Features in the Stairs Program>
For palings and posts end types are now available: in the data record of the component existing end types can be allocated. (Simmat) <Highlight Film End Types at Palings and Posts>
End types can also be selected under the automatic data record for the different components.
For palings and posts a cutting angle and a bevelling cut dimension can be activated under F7. (Delalande)
In the INI file the new "PROJ_STR_TEN" is available, which means you can now set a tread-riser projection if a tenon has been assigned to the beginning or end of a string. (Bermag)
For the transfer to Woodwop, some changes/extension have been introduced, e.g. drillings can be exported as cutouts etc. (Rogg)
The DXF export of boards with several holes has been improved.
The punching out of strings has been revised with respect to the DXF export. (Linker)
Drillings for palings in boards (i.e. strings, handrails, booms, horses) can now be displayed/printed out as form editings and thus they can also make up a separate layer.
The calculation of editings of stairs components in the background has been improved.
Strings are now represented correctly after their curve has been changed.
Inlays are now only represented in the developed view of components if they created a processing on the component.
DXF import for mortises has been revised.
After manual editing of boards, their end types are no longer abandoned.
S"metall palings are once again imported correctly.
The preview graphics of the stairs have been improved.
Timber fasteners/brackets on end types (dowels, top brackets etc.) are no longer abandoned when the storey height is changed.
Copying of stairs has been improved.
The machine transfer of drillings in spiral steps has been optimized.

3D Objects

The timber fasteners/brackets of Simpson have been revised and 3DS files of the manufacturer were embedded; thus these timber fasteners are now represented with much more detail (e.g. holes, hooks etc.).
Generally, all 3DS objects (also furniture etc.) can now be represented in wire-frame representation with much more details. For this purpose there are under the Display Options (F7) "3CAD" for "Timber Fasteners" and "Remaining Objects" the following settings available:
"External objects (3DS) with hidden line representation": If you activate this option, all 3DS objects included in the "3D view with hidden line representation" are also represented, which means you get a more detailed/accurate result but also need more calculation time.
"External objects (3DS)": If you activate this option, all included 3DS objects are generally displayed in the wire-frame views (top view, view, 3D). "Outline" means only the enveloping line of the 3DS objects are displayed, whereas "Details" means all individual surface areas and edges of the 3DS objects are displayed. (Please note: The quality of a wire-frame detail representation of an imported 3DS object depends on the 3D program used for creating it. Depending on the object and 3D program "unwanted" lines might be visible.)
In the Pre-Settings (Alt+F7): "General" "Look": "Detailed 3DS objects in CAD clipboard". If you activate this option, all detailed 3DS objects are copied with all their details into the CAD clipboard. With this more detailed representation there are, of course, also more CAD lines in these CAD clipboard macros.
F7 descriptions (designation, material list number, ....) of timber fasteners and 3D objects have been improved, especially the description of grouped timber fasteners (e.g. bearers) is now printed out in just one block.

3D Wall Ceiling

The layer menu for windows, doors and macros has been extended. With the option: "Optimisation: yes" even more settings for the design of the board projections of these openings are available. Additionally, you can now enter a play for these board projections. Board projections can be defined with reference to the left and right window edge in both directions. The projections on the left, right, top and bottom can have different settings. (Regnauer) <Highlight Film New Features of Walls>
With the new spacing options "WallFix center", walls can be defined in such a way that the automatic spacing starts in the centre of the wall. With this setting and "Zero point offset: 0" the first fixing stud is placed in the centre of the wall. However, if you enter half the board width as zero point offset, i.e. "-0,625" the board is placed in the middle of the wall. <Highlight Film New Features of Walls>
For wall macros there is a new setting under "Spacing" -> "opt" (optimal): this means that if there is a collision with a stud of the spacing, this stud is not deleted but it follows the collision logic. (Regnauer) <Highlight Film New Features of Walls>
The input of ceiling openings has been revised. (Wigo)
Wall names can now have up to 30 characters. (Chauvin)
Macros can now be punched out and linked MCAD macros are automatically calculated anew. This makes the creation of certain corner constructions in log construction much easier. <Highlight Film New Features in Log Construction>
When a wall that is connected to another wall via a T connection is shifted, the macros of the T connections are shifted as well. <Highlight Film New Features in Log Construction>
For log construction, a so-called automatic packaging has been programmed. Via "Extras" -> "Automatic Packaging for Log Constructions" you can call up the packaging menu. For more details take a look at our <Highlight Film New Features in Log Construction>
The top view symbols especially for attachment walls has been revised. (Regnauer)
For the automatic wall output and multi-wall, there are now descriptions of the placeholders which have also been translated into all program languages.
And the top view symbols that are on top of each other are now also represented next to each other in wall view. (Wigo)
Some details of laser export have been further improved. (Wigo)
CPU utilization particularly when working in the construction plane has been optimized. (Hammer Abbung)

DXF I3 Interface

When you change/edit DXF graphics (vector graphics), the aspect ratio remains unchanged.

Structural Analysis

The latest FriLo updates are now also offered on the SEMA website for download.
To have all functionalities of the structural transfer from SEMA to FirLo available, it is absolutely necessary to always install the latest Frilo version.
The roof loads (rafter transfer) have been extended to correspond with the loads in FriLo. For the load definition the following fields are now available: "Roof Covering", "Construction" and "Finishing".
For the roof loads and the live loads of ceiling beams there is now a DIN field in the load input box, i.e. you can decide whether you want to carry out your calculation under the old or the new DIN standard.
The load distribution for steel columns has been revised.
You can save steel columns now properly in FriLo - the existing problem was solved by FriLo.
The representation of the supports of continuous girders has been improved, e.g. supports at the end of a girder are represented as walls instead of an arrows.
In the live load dialog box of girders there is now a field for permanent loads. Thus you can individually (inside, outside left or outside right) assign permanent additional loads.
As of SEMA version 10.1, the FriLo program offers white as a background colour for graphics. You can make the setting under "Extras" "Options" "Structural Analysis Export" "FriLo details" (select either white or the normal background colour).
Transfer of ceiling beams to Friedrich & Lochner: The load allocation to ceiling beams with more than 2 supports has been improved. (Gump)